! IT

I

i -°

ru

^j)

0
0

r-q
m

/

1915

Commonwealth of Australia

Department of Trade and
Customs

FISHERIES

Zoological Results of the Fishing Experiments
carried on by the F.l.S. "Endeavour/' 1909-14.

H. C. Dannevig,
Commonwealth Director of Fisheries

VOL. III.

Published by Direction of the Minister for Trade
and Customs, Hon. Frank Gwynne Tudor

Sydney, 1915

I. Report on the Foraminifera and Ostracoda obtained by
the F.I.S. " Endeavour ' from the east coast of
Tasmania, and off Cape Wiles, South Australia.

BY

FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.R.M.S.
PALAEONTOLOGIST TO THE NATIONAL MUSEUM, MELBOURNE.

Plates i.-m.

FORAMINIFEBA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN.

REPORT ON THE FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA.

I. — INTRODUCTION.

IN 1912, I dealt1 with a sample of Globigerina ooze taken from
1122 fathoms off the eastern coast of Tasmania. In some
respects this was a preliminary report, and the results,
together with notes on the new and rare species, are included
here, in conjunction with descriptions of further samples from
the same trawling expeditions.

Three additional samples of soundings have been exam-
ined and their tabulated results are as follows : —

Date.— 13th July, 1909 ; station 35.

Position. — East of Tasmania Lat. 42° 17' S., Long. 148°
35' E.

Depth. — 377 fathoms (bottom sample).

Details. — Globigerina ooze. Colour a pale cream. Con-
sisting almost entirely of the tests of Globigerina and Pulvi-
nulina. In the finer washings numerous stellate, calcareous
spicules of Ascidians were noticed. The quantity of material
being small, the percentage of carbonate of lime was not
estimated, but would be very high. No Ostracoda were seen
in this sample.

Date.— 13th July, 1909. Station, 36.
Position. — East of Tasmania. Lat. 42° 17' S., Long. 148C
41' E.

Depth.— Ill fathoms.

Details. — Globigerina ooze. Colour a pale cream.

CARBONATE OF LIME.

Percentage.

Foraminifera.

Other Organisms.

76.7

Chiefly Globigerina and
Pulvinulina. Amongst
the more interesting
genera are Ophthalmi-
dium, Sigmo'ilina, Hy-
perammina, Brachysi-
phon, Rhabdogonium,
Spirillina and Patel-
lina.

Echinoid spines and test-
fragments abundant ;
Ostracoda abundant,
many new and interest-
ing species being pre-
sent ; fish otoliths fre-
quent ; also a few
Mollusca including
Pteropods (Ktyliola).

1. Chapman, Zool. Res. " Endeavour," I., pt. 3, 1912, p. 309.

" ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

RESIDUE.

Percentage.

Siliceous Organisms.

Fine Washings.

23.3

Sponge spicules ; also
arenaceous foramini-
fera.

Fine terrigenous par-
ticles ; fragments of
sponge spicules ; echi-
noid spines ; shell
fragments, and min-
ute foraminifera.

Date.— 9th August, 1909.

Position. — Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Aus-
tralia. Lat. 35° 35' S., Long. 135° 15' E.

Depth. — 100 fathoms.

Details. — Polyzoal and Foraminiferal sand. Colour a
pale yellow, with a brownish tinge.

CARBONATE OF LIME.

Percentage.

Foraminifera.

Other Organisms.

99.6

Chiefly Miliolines, Uvi-
gerines and Textularids.

Polyzoa abundant, chiefly
small and slender forms.
Ostracoda fairly com-
mon. Alcyonarian
joints and spicules
present.

RESIDUE.

Percentage.

Siliceous Organisms.

Fine Washings.

.4

Tetractinellid sponge
spicules ; arenaceous
foraminifera.

Fine white and sharp
quartz sand.

General Note on the above samples. — The present soundings
are taken from new ground so far as the microzoa are con-
cerned. That from off Cape Wiles is the only locality which
was approached by the " Challenger/' but even that (Station
160, 2600 fathoms) was situated much farther south and in
deeper water. It is not surprising, therefore, that so many
points of interest arise from an examination of the present
material dredged by the " Endeavour."

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 5

II. — LIST OF FORAMINIFERA WITH DESCRIPTIONS AND NOTES
OF NEW AND RARE SPECIES.

References to authors of species are here given only when
especially needed. Those omitted may be found in such
works as H. B. Brady's " Report on the Foraminifera of the
' Challenger/ ' 1884 ; in Dr. J. Flint, " Report United States
National Museum " for 1897 ; and in the report by the
present writer on the " Foraminifera of the Subantarctic
Islands of New Zealand," 1909.

FAMILY MILIOLID^.
SUB-FAMILY MILIOLININ.E.
Genus BILOCULINA, d'Orbigny.
BILOCULINA BRADII, Schlumberger.

Biloculina bradii, Schlumberger, Mem. Soc. Zool. France,
iv., 1891, p. 557, pi. x., figs. 63-71, woodcuts, 15-19.
B. bradii (Schlumberger) Chapman, Sub-antarctic
Islands of N.Z., Rep. on the Foram., ii., 1909, Art. xv.,
p. 314, pi. xiii., fig. 1.

This species has a wide distribution, occurring in the
Atlantic as well as in New Zealand waters. It is also an
Oligocene fossil at Balcombe Bay, in which series (Balcom-
bian) a strong component of our living foraminiferal fauna
had already been established.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles ; 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

BILOCULINA DEPRESSA, d'Orbigny.

A cosmopolitan species. Recorded by the writer from
shallow water at Shoreham, Victoria. Also occurring as a
fossil in Victoria, as old as the Balcombian Series (Altona Bay
bores and Grice's Creek).

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Small, but
common.

BILOCULINA DEPRESSA, d'Orb., VAR. MURRHYNA, Schwager.

This is an essentially deep-water form. It has been re-
corded by the writer from Funafuti in depths varying from
1050 to 2715 fathoms.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Rather minute,
frequent.

6 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

BILOCULINA ELONGATA, d'Orbigny.

This species in temperate seas frequents shallow water, and
deepens its habitat in more tropical areas. It has been
recorded fossil from the Victorian Balcombian Series, and
where found may indicate that deposit to be of moderately
deep-water origin, since the climatic condition was wanner
than at present.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

BILOCULINA IRREGULARIS, d'Orbigny.

B. irregularis is a fairly deep-water species, and is generally
distributed in the Southern Hemisphere. It has, however,
been recorded from the North Atlantic, off Palma, Canary
Islands.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent. Of
variable size.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

BILOCULINA LUCERNULA, Schwager.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.
Specimens small, but otherwise typical.

BILOCULINA SARSI, Schlumberger.

Biloculina sarsi, Schlumberger, Mem. Soc. Zool. France,
iv., 1891, p. 553, pi. ix., figs. 55-59 ; woodcuts, 10-12.
Chapman, Jour. Linn. Soc., Zool., 1907, xxx., p. 14,
pi. i., figs. 1, 2.

This species has been dredged from the North Sea and
from around the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand. As
a fossil it occurs in the Balcombian Series of Port Phillip.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

Genus SPIROLOCULINA, d'Orbigny.
SPIROLOCULINA ACUTIMARGO, Brady.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

SPIROLOCULINA CANALICULATA, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Abundant,
of medium size.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 7

SPIROLOCTJLINA DORSATA, Reuss, VAR. CIRCULARIS, var. nov.

(Plate I., fig. 1.)

Typical specimens of S. dorsata, Reuss1, are usually re-
stricted to shallow water. In the present variety, from deep
water, the distinguishing characters, due no doubt to the
difference in habitat, are the thin test, the prolonged apertural
neck, and the nearly circular outline. The largest specimen
has a diameter of .615mm., the smallest, .41mm.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Three
specimens.

SPIROLOCULINA GRATA, Terquem, VAR. RETICOSA, var. nov.

(Plate I., fig. 2.)

This variety agrees with Terquem's specific form2 in
general contour, having the same depressed type of shell ;
but the longitudinal and oblique ridges are perforated at
intervals in the interspaces.

Length of figured test, 1.44mm.

The species itself is common in coral seas of the Pacific,
both in shallow and deep water.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
examples.

Genus MILIOLINA, Williamson.
MILIOLINA AGGLUTINANS, d'Orbigny, sp.

This species is commonly found in shallow water, but
occasionally occurs at greater depths. M. agglutinans has
been recorded by the writer from shore-sand at Beaumaris,
Port Phillip. It is also known as a fossil in the Older Tertiary
(Balcombian) of Victoria.

Forth miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
moderate-sized specimen.

MILIOLINA ANGULATA, Williamson.

Miliolina bicornis, W. and J., sp., var. angulata, Williamson,
Rec. Foram. Gt. Brit., 1858, p. 88, pi. vii., fig. 196. M.
angulata (Will.), Chapman, Rep. Foram. Subant. Ids.
N.Z., 1909, Art. xv., p. 321, pi. xiii., fig. 5.

1. Spiroloculina dorsata, Reuss, Denkschr. k. Akacl. Wiss. Wien, XXV.,
1866, p. 123. S. limbata, Brady (non d'Orb.), Chall. Rep., Zool., IX., 1884,
p. 150, pi. ix., figs. 15-17. Spiroloculina dorsata (Reuss), Jones, Foram.
Crag, pt. II. (Pal. Soc. Mon.), 1895, p. 110, woodcuts, figs. 4, 8a, b.

2. Terquem, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 3, I., 1878, p. 55, pi. x., figg.
14-15. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., IX., 1884, p. 155, pi. x., figs. 16, 17, 22, 23.

8 ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

This species has been recorded by the writer from dredgings
off the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A few small
specimens.

MILIOLINA CIRCULARIS, Bomemann, sp.

This species has been recorded by the writer from shore-
sand at Altona Bay. Western Port, and Torquay, Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Small, very
abundant.

MILIOLINA CONTORTA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Quinqueloculina contorta, d'Orbigny, Foram. Tert. Vienne,.
1846, p. 298, pi. xx., figs. 4-6. Miliolina contorta (d'Orb.
sp.), Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxx., 1907,
p. 19, pi. ii., fig. 35.

This species is related to M. undosa, Karrer, sp., but is
not so strongly undulose in the ridges of the segments.

M . contorta has been recorded by the writer from shore-
sand at Altona Bay, Beaumaris, Western Port and Torquay,
Victoria. It occurs as a fossil in the Port Phillip Tertiaries.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two examples.

MILIOLINA CUVIERIANA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Small,
very abundant.

MILIOLINA INSIGNIS, Brady.

Miliolina insignis, Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., ix, 1884,
p. 165, pi. iv, figs. 8-10.

This handsome species has a wide distribution. The
nearest recorded locality to the present is off East Moncoeur
Island, Bass Strait, 38 fathoms. It has also been recorded
by the writer from off Great Barrier Island, New Zealand,
110 fathoms, and from the Subantarctic Islands of New
Zealand, 85 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two ex-
amples. Rather small.

MILIOLINA LINNEANA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Specimens
somewhat erratic in habit of growth. Not common.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 9

MILIOLINA POLYGONA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Quinqueloculina polygona, d'Orbigny, Foram. Cuba, 1839,
p. 198, pi. xii., figs. 21-23. Miliolina polygona
(d'Orbigny, sp.), Chapman, Subant. Ids. New Zeal.,
Art. XV., 1909, p. 321, pi. xiii., fig. 6.

This species has been recorded from several stations off
the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, at depths varying
from 60-85 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One typical
specimen.

MILIOLINA SUBROTUNDA, Montagu, sp.

This species has been recorded by Mr. Howchin from the
Port Adelaide River, South Australia.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Abundant;
small, probably due to exceptional depth.

MILIOLINA TRICARINATA, d'Orbigny, sp.

This species has been recorded by the writer from shore
sand at Beaumaris, Port Phillip, Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. East of
Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Rare and small from both
samples.

MILIOLINA TRIGONULA, Lamarck, sp.

This species has been recorded by the writer from Western
Port and Torquay, Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One rather
large example.

MILIOLINA UNDOSA, Karrer, sp.

Quinqueloculina undosa, Karrer, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, lv., 1867, p. 361, pi. iii., fig. 3. Miliolina undosa
(Karrer, sp.), Brady, Rep. Chall, Zool, ix., 1884, p.
176, pi. vi., figs. 6-8.

None of the present specimens show the elongated neck
of the variety figured by Dr. Brady (loc. supra cit., figs. 8a,b).
It is interesting to note Brady's remark that the finest

10 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

examples he has seen are from off East Moncoeur Island,
Bass Strait, 38 fathoms, a locality not far removed from
that now recorded.

M . undosa has been noted by the writer from shore-sand
at Torquay, Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common
and typical.

MILIOLINA VENUSTA, Karrer, sp.

This species has been recorded by the writer from shore-
sand at Altona Bay, Beaumaris and Western Port, Victoria ;
and by Mr. Howchin from the Port Adelaide River, South
Australia.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Very rare,
small.

»

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Rare,
small.

MILIOLINA VULGARIS, d'Orbigny, sp.

This species has been recorded by the writer from shore-
sand at Altona Bay, Beaumaris and Western Port,
Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Abundant,
rather small.

Genus SIGMOILINA, Schlumberger.

SlGMOILINA CELATA, Costa, Sp.

Spiroloculina celata, Costa, Atti Ace. Pontaniana, vii., 1856,
pt. la, pi. xxvi., fig. 5. Sigmottina celata (Costa, sp.),
Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxx., 1907, p. 21,
pi. ii., fig. 41.

This species was first described from the Italian Tertiary,
and has since been recorded from the Balcombian of Victoria.
As a recent species it has been noted from the Subantarctic
Islands of New Zealand at 60 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
.specimens.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 11

SlGMOILINA SCHLUMBERGERI, SUvBStri.

Planispirina celata (non Costa, sp.), Brady, Rep. Chall.,
Zool., ix., 1884, p. 197, pl.viii., figs. 1-4. Sigmottina,
schlumbergeri, A. Silvestri, Mem. dell. Pontif. Ace.
Rom ana d. Nuovi Lincei, xxii., 1904, p. 267.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two dwarfed specimens.

SIGMOILINA SIGMOIDEA, Brady, *p.

The occurrence of this species in the Southern Ocean is
of decided interest, since it had only been previously recorded
in the living condition in the Southern Hemisphere from
South America. It is found fossil, however, in the Tertiary
beds (Oligocene) of Port Phillip and Muddy Creek, in
Victoria, which area may have been the original point of
dispersion for this species. Dr. Egger recorded its occur-
rence off the West Australian coast at 82 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One typical
specimen.

SUB-FAMILY HAUERININ^.

Genus OPHTHALMIDIUM, Kubler.

OPHTHALMIDIUM INCONSTANS, Brady.

A fairly deep-water form, ranging " mostly between 350
and 1000 fathoms ' -Brady. The writer has previously
recorded the species from Funafuti at 1050 fathoms. Dr.
Egger obtained his " Gazelle " specimens from a sounding
off the coast of Western Australia at 1187 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Abundant ;
examples in good condition and well developed.

Genus PLANISPIRINA, Seguenza.
PLANISPIRINA EXIGUA, Brady.

The occurrence of this species at 777 fathoms constitutes
a record for deep water, 620 fathoms being apparently the
deepest habitat hitherto known. Egger obtained specimens
from off the coast of Western Australia at 359 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

12 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

SUB-FAMILY PENEROPLIDIN^.
Genus CORNUSPIRA, Schultze.

CORNUSPIRA CARINATA, Costa, Sp., VAR. EXPANSA, Var. UOV.

(Plate I., fig. 3.)

In this variety the tests partake of the characters of both
C. carinata, Costa, sp.1 and C. foliacea, Philippi, sp.2. The
test, although increasing rapidly in width, as in C. foliacea3,
is, however, depressed on the sides and even tends to
become concave, as in typical examples of C. carinata. The
larger specimen of the varietal form has a diameter of
1.23 mm.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
examples, identical in varietal form.

CORNUSPIRA CRASSISEPTA, Brady.

Cornuspira crassisepta, Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., ix., 1884,
p. 202, pi. cxiii., fig. 20. Egger, Abhandl. d. k.
Bayer. Akad. Wiss., Cl. ii., xviii., 1893, Abth. ii., p. 54,
pi. iii., fig. 22.

This species was first described by Dr. Brady from speci-
mens dredged in the Faroe Channel by the " Knight Errant."
ISince then it has been recorded living off the coast of
Australia by Dr. Egger. Latterly the species has occurred
fossil in the older Tertiary deposits of Victoria, where large
examples are found, usually twice the diameter of the living-
shells.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One small
example, 46 mm. in diameter.

CORNUSPIRA INVOLVENS, Reuss, sp.

This widely distributed species was also an inhabitant
of the early Tertiary seas around the Australian Continent,
being found in some abundance in the Victorian Oligocene

1. Operculina carinata, Costa, Atti dell' Accad. Pontan., vii., 1856, p. 209,
pi. xvii., figs. IOA, B.

2. Orbis foliaceus, Philippi, Enurn. Moll. Sicil., ii., 1844, p. 147, pi. xxiv.,
fig. 26.

3. An abnormal form of Cornuspira foliacea, with a concave and a convex
face, has been noted and figured by Heron-Allen and Garland, from shore-
sand at Selsey Bill, Sussex, England (See Journ. Roy. Micro. Soc., 1911,
p. 305, pi. ix., figs. 5, 6.).

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 13

at Port Phillip (Balcombe's Bay), and Muddy Creek, near
Hamilton.

Egger records C. involvens from off the coast of Western
Australia at 359 and 1187 metres. The writer has also re-
corded it from off the Snares, Subantarctic Islands of New
Zealand, at 60 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Both small
and large shells, frequent.

FAMILY ASTRORHIZID.E.

SUB-FAMILY PILULINIMl

Genus TECHNITELLA, Norman.

TECHNITELLA LEGUMEN, Norman.

The nearest previously recorded locality to the present
is off Sydney, 410 fathoms.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two specimens.

TECHNITELLA RAPHANUS, Brady.

This species has not been hitherto noticed from Australian
waters, in fact being confined to one other locality, Kandavu,
Fiji Islands, 210 fathoms.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms.

SUB-FAMILY RHABDAMMININ.E.

Genus HYPERAMMINA, Brady.
HYPERAMMINA ELONGATA, Brady.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A fragmentary
specimen, evidently belonging to this species.

HYPERAMMINA RAMOSA, Brady.

H. ramosa has not hitherto been recorded from this locality,
although Egger obtained it from off Western Australia, and
it has since occurred in the New Zealand area.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

Genus MARSIPELLA, Norman.

MARSIPELLA CYLINDRICA, Brady.

(Plate I., fig. 4.)

Marsipella cylindrica, Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., ix., 1884,
p. 265, pi. xxiv., figs. 20-22. Goddard and Jensen,
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxii., 1908, p. 301.

14 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The present specimens are more robust in build than
Brady's figured examples, the largest of which has a
diameter of only .266 mm. as compared with the Australian
specimens, which measure .35 mm. The previously recorded
localities in the North and South Atlantic and the South
Pacific occur in deep water. Messrs. Goddard and Jensen
have noted the species in Australian waters at twenty-seven
and a-half miles east of Port Jackson Heads, 300 fathoms.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two specimens.

Genus RHIZAMMINA, Norman.
RHIZAMMINA INDIVISA, Brady.

This species occurs in the Faroe Channel, off the Cape of
Good Hope, off Kandavu Island, off Cape Verde, and around
the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand.

The present record is the deepest sounding from which
this species has yet been taken.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Several typical
specimens.

Genus BRACHYSIPHON, Chapman.
BRACHYSIPHON CORBULIFORMIS, Chapman.

Brachysiphon corbuliformis, Chapman, Trans. N.Z. Inst.,
xxxviii., 1906, p. 84, pi. iii., figs. 2a,&, 3. Goddard and
Jensen, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxii., 1908, pp.
306, 307.

This species was formerly recorded from off Gt. Barrier
Island, New Zealand, at 110 fathoms. Goddard and Jensen
have found it in beach sand at Lyell Bay, New Zealand.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One example.

FAMILY LITUOLILXE.

SUB-FAMILY LITUOLIN^E.

Genus REOPHAX, Montfort.

REOPHAX DENTALINIFORMIS, Brady.

This species is generally confined to deep-sea dredgings.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One small
specimen.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One well-grown
example.

FOBAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 15

REOPHAX FUSIFORMIS, Williamson, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

REOPHAX SCORPIURUS, Montjort.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
erratically grown examples.

Genus HAPLOPHRAGMIUM, Reuss.

HAPLOPHRAGMIUM CANARIENSE, d'Orbigny, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One small specimen.

FAMILY TEXTULARIID.E.
SUB-FAMILY TEXTULARIIN^.

Genus TEXTULARIA, Defrance.
TEXTULARIA AGGLUTINANS, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One small
specimen.

TEXTULARIA CONCAVA, Karrer, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

TEXTULARIA FOLIUM, Parker and Jones.

Textularia folium, Parker and Jones, Phil. Trans., civ., 1865,
pp. 370, 420, pi. xviii., fig. 19. Chapman, Journ.
Quekett Micr. Club, (2), x., 1907, p. 127, pi. ix., fig. 4.

The present occurrence extends the bathymetrical range for
this beautiful little species. It is mainly found in the neigh-
bourhood of coral reefs in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, but
has also been taken from Bass Strait at 38 fathoms, and from
shore sand at Port Phillip and Wrestern Port.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One typical
example.

TEXTULARIA TROCHUS, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One small
example.

Genus VERNEUILINA, d'Orbigny.
VERNEUILINA SPINULOSA, Reuss.

Dr. Egger records this species from 359 and 1187 metres off
the Wrest Australian coast.

16 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Specimens
frequent.

Genus SPIROPLECTA, Ehrenberg.
SPIROPLECTA CARINATA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Textularia carinata, d'Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat., 1826, p. 263,
No. 13 ; Id., Foram. Foss. Vienne, 1846, p. 247, pi. xiv.,
figs. 32-34. Spiroplecta carinata (d'Orb. sp.), Chapman,
Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxx., 1907, p. 27, pi. iii., fig. 61.

This species is a common Tertiary fossil in Southern Aus-
tralia and New Zealand.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Abundant
and typical.

SPIROPLECTA GRAMEN, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.

SPIROPLECTA NUSSDORFENSIS, d'Orbigny, sp.

This species is usually confined to fossil deposits. It has
occurred both in the Vienna Miocene and the Victorian
Oligocene.

40 miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One specimen.

SPIROPLECTA SAGITTULA, Defrance, sp.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Not common.

SPIROPLECTA SAGITTULA, Defr., sp., var. FISTULOSA, Brady.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very rare.

Genus GAUDRYINA, d'Orbigny.
GAUDRYINA PUPOIDES, d'Orbigny.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

GAUDRYINA RUGOSA, d'Orbigny.

Dr. Brady records the finest examples from the " Chal-
lenger " dredgings from Raine Islet at 155 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Typical
examples fairly common.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 17

Genus CLAVULINA, d'Orbigny.
CLAVULINA ANGULARIS, d'Orbigny.

Clavulina angularis, d'Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat., vii., 1826,
p. 268, No. 2, pi. xii., fig. 7. Chapman, Journ. Linn.
Soc., Zool., xxx., 1907, p. 29, pi. iv., figs. 68-73.

The specimens here recorded are of the slender, blunt-edged
variety, which appears to belong to form A of the dimorphic
couples (see above reference to the Victorian fossil examples).

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
examples.

CLAVULINA CYLINDBICA, Hantken.

The present would have been the least depth amongst
recent soundings recorded for this species, but for the shallow
water sample of 2 fathoms from Van Diemen's Inlet, Gulf
of Carpentaria, recorded by Goddard and Jensen.

CLAVULINA PARISIENSIS, d'Orbigny.

This is a well-known fossil species in the Tertiary of the
Paris Basin and in the London Clay. It is curious to note
that the depth of the ancient sea-bed with C. parisiensis,
where Piccadilly now stands, was computed by Professors
Jones and Parker1 to indicate a similar depth to the present
sample, viz., 100 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. A common
species in the present sounding.

CLAVULINA TEXTULARIOIDEA, Goes.

Clavulina parisiensis, d'Orbigny, forma textularioidea, Goes,
Arctic and Scandinavian Rhizop. Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handl., xxv., 1892, No. 9, p. 42, pi. viii., figs. 387-399.

This also is a fossil species, occurring in the Victorian
Cainozoics at Port Phillip.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Examples
frequent.

1. Jones and Parker — •" On the Foraminifera of the London Clay."
The Geologist, vii., 1864, p. 89.

18 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

SUB-FAMILY BULIMININ.E.

Genus BULIMIN&, d'Orbigny.

BULIMINA ACULEATA, d'Orbigny.

This species was recorded by Goddard and Jensen from
twenty-seven and a-half miles east of Port Jackson Heads,
300 fathoms.

Egger obtained it in " Gazelle " clredgings off the coast
of Western Australia at 359 and 1187 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two very fine examples.

BULIMINA BUCHIANA, d'Orbigny.

Bulimina buchiana, d'Orbigny, Foram. Foss. Vienne, 1846,
p. 186, pi. xi., figs. 15-18. Chapman, Journ. Quekett
Micr. Club, (2), x., 1907, p. 127, pi. ix., fig. 6.

Egger records this species from a " Gazelle " sounding off
the Queensland coast at 951 metres. It occurs in shore-sand
on the Victorian coast at Western Port.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

BULIMINA ELEGANTISSIMA, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very
common.

BULIMINA ELEGANTISSIMA, d'Orb., VAR. APICULATA, Chapman.

Bulimina elegantissima, d'Orb., var. apiculata, Chapman,
Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxx., 1907, p. 31, pi. iv., fig. 77.

This variety was first described from the Oligocene beds
at Port Phillip (Balcombe Bay, etc.).

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

BULIMINA ELEGANTISSIMA, d'Orb., VAR. SEMINUDA, Terquem.

Among other localities, Dr. Brady recalls this little variety
from East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, at 38 fathoms.
Terquem 's specimens came from the Eocene of the Paris
Basin.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Rare.

BULIMINA INFLATA, Seguenza.

Brady remarks that this species is usually met with in
deeper water than the allied form, B. buchiana.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Frequent.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 19

Genus VIRGULINA, d'Orbigny.

VlRGULINA SCHREIBERSIANA, Czjzek.

Pleurostomella alternans, Chapman, Zool. Res. " Endea-
vour," I., pt. 3, 1912, p. 310 (not of Schwager).

The tests of this cosmopolitan species are, as a rule, thin
and of slender build when found in deep water. After a
careful examination 1 now refer the specimen formerly
recorded as ? Pleurostomella alternans, Schwager, to this
species.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

Genus BIFARINA, Parker and Jones.
BIFARINA LIMBATA, Brady, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

BIFARINA PORRECTA, Brady, sp.

Bolivina porrecta, Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., ix., 1884, p.
418, pi. lii., fig. 22. Bifarina porrecta (Brady, sp.),
Chapman, "The Foraminif era, " 1902, p. 173, pi. ix.,
fig. P.

A moderately deep water form.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

Genus BOLIVINA, d'Orbigny.
BOLIVINA BEYRICHI, Reuss.

This species was recorded by Dr. Brady, amongst other
localities, from off Sydney, 410 fathoms. Dr. Egger had
specimens from a Western Australian station at 359 metres.
As a fossil it dates from the Oligocene, but so far has not been
found in strata in the Southern Hemisphere.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Very
abundant.

East of Tasmania, 1182 fathoms. Rare.

BOLIVINA NOBILIS, Hantken.

A previous Australian record for this species, by Dr. Brady,
is Port Jackson, 6 fathoms. Egger found it off the west
coast of Africa, and Millett in the Malay Archipelago. Its

20 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

geological history dates from the Upper Chalk (Taplow), and
it is a common form in the Oligocene of Grice's Creek, Port
Phillip.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

BOLIVINA OBSOLETA, Eley .

The Textularia quadrilatera of Schwager and the " Chal-
lenger " Report is a synonym of the above species.

B. obsoleta frequents moderately deep water.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two fine
examples.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

BOLIVINA PUNCTATA, d'Orbigny.
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

BOLIVINA PYGM^EA, Brady.

Bolivina pygmcea, Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., ix., 1884, p.
421, pi. liii., figs. 5, 6.

This minute and presumably rare form has a very wide
geographical distribution, extending from the North Sea to
the Southern Ocean.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

BOLIVINA ROBUSTA, Brady.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

BOLIVINA TEXTILARIOIDES, Reuss.

A widely distributed form, and occurring in the Older
Tertiary of southern Australia.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Occasional.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. In fine washings.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

SUB-FAMILY CASSIDULININ^.
Genus CASSIDULINA, d'Orbigny.
CASSIDULINA NURRHYNA, Schwager, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 21

CASSIDULINA SUBGLOBOSA, Brady.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very
abundant.

Genus EHRENBBRGINA, Eeuss.
EHRENBERGINA SERRATA, Eeuss.

This species is generally found in moderately deep water,
although Goddard and Jensen1 have recorded it from the
extremely shallow depth of 15 fathoms off Palm Island, near
Townsville, Queensland.

It has recently been found in a raised beach above the
Drygalski Glacier in the Antarctic (Shackleton Expedition).

Other fossil occurrences are in the Oligocene beds of Grice's
Creek, Port Phillip, and of Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.

FAMILY LAGENLD^E.

SUB-FAMILY LAGENIN^E.

Genus LAGENA, Walker and Boys.

LAGENA GRACILIS, Williamson, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Occurs in the fine
washings.

LAGENA LACUNATA, Burrows and Holland.

Lagena lacunata, Burrows and Holland, in Jones, Foram.
Crag. (Pal. Soc. Mon., xlix.), 1895, p. 205, pi. vii., figs.
12a, b.

This species was described by Dr. Brady under Schwager's
name, L. castrensis, from which it differs in having surface
pits instead of exogenous beads. L. lacunata has occurred,
amongst other places, off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait,
at 38 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

LAGENA L^VIGATA, Eeuss, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

1. Goddard and Jensen — Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxii., 1908, p. 298

' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

LAGENA LAGENOIDES, Williamson, sp.

Egger records this species from off the west coast of Aus-
tralia at 1187 metres.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

LAGENA ORBIGNYANA, Seguenza, sp.

Dr. Egger records this species from off the coast of West
Australia at depths from 359-1188 meters.

The writer obtained it from soundings taken round the Sub-
antarctic Islands of New Zealand at 60-85 fathoms.

Eorty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
•specimens.

LAGENA QUADRICOSTULATA, Eeuss.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One example.

LAGENA SCHLICHTI, A. Silvestri, sp.

Fissurina schlichti, A. Silvestri, Mem. Pont. Ace. Rom.
Nuovi Lincei, xix., 1902, p. 14, woodcuts, figs. 9-11.
Lagena schlichti (Silv. sp.), Chapman, Rep. on Foram.
Subantarctic Ids. of N. Zealand, Art. xv., 1900,
p. 337, pi. xv., figs, la, b.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

LAGENA SQUAMOSA, Montagu, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

LAGENA STRIATA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

LAGENA SULCATA, Walker and Jacob, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two fine
examples.

SUB-FAMILY NODOSARIIN^E.
Genus NODOSARIA, Lamarck.
Sub-genus GLANDULINA, d'Orbigny.
NODOSARIA (GLANDULINA) L^EVIGATA, d'Orbigny.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One fine
example.

FOBAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 23

NODOSARIA (GLANDULINA) ROTUNDATA, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two mode-
rate-sized specimens.

Sub-genus DENTALINA, d'Orbigny.
NODOSARIA (DENTALINA) PYRULA, d'Orbigny.

It is unusual to find this species at so great a depth. The
" Challenger '' records were from shallow water to 600
fathoms. It occurs in the New Zealand area off Great Barrier
Island (110 fathoms) and off the Subantarctic Islands of New
Zealand at 60 and 85 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One typical
example.

NODOSARIA MUCRONATA, Neugeboren, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

NODOSARIA PERVERSA, Schwager.

Nodosaria perversa, Schwager, Egger, Abhandl. d. k. Bayer.
Ak. Wiss., 01. ii., xviii., Abth. ii., 1893, p. 152, pi.
xi., fig. 42.

Brady records this species from one locality only, namely
off the Ki Islands, south-west of Papua, at 129 fathoms.

Egger obtained it from a station off the west coast of Aus-
tralia at 359 metres.

This species was recorded in my previous report as "Nodo-
saria aff. proxima,. Silvestri."

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

NODOSARIA PROXIMA, Silvestri.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One small
specimen.

NODOSARIA SCALARIS, Batsch, sp., VAR. SEPARANS, Brady.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very
common.

Genus MARGINULINA, d'Orbigny.

MARGINULINA COSTATA, Batsch, sp.

(Plate I., fig. 5).

The present specimen is not so strongly costated as the
" Challenger " examples figured by Dr. Brady. There is a

24 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

marked difference in outline between the earlier portion of the
shell and the last chamber, which is suggestive of some forms
referred to the dimorphous genus Amphicoryne, Schlumberger.

In the southern hemisphere this species has been previously
found in the New Zealand area at 85 and 150 fathoms, and in
shore-sand at Torquay, Victoria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
example.

Genus CRISTELLARIA, Lamarck.
CRISTELLARIA ARTICULATA, Reuss.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.

CRISTELLARIA CULTRATA, Montfort, sp.
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

CRISTELLARIA ORBICULARIS, d'Orbigny, sp.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.

CRISTELLARIA ROTULATA, Lamarck, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
example.

CRISTELLARIA SCHLOENBACHI, Reuss.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

CRISTELLARIA TRICARINELLA, Reuss.

(Plate I., fig. 6).
(Vaginuline variety).

Cristellaria tricarinella, Reuss, Sitzungsb. k. Ak. Wiss.,.
xlvi., 1862, p. 68, pi. vii., fig. 9, pi. xii., figs. 2-4.
C. protospha.era, Reuss, ibid., 1862, p. 68, pi. vii., fig. 8,
pi. xii. fig. 10.

The present shell is nearest Reuss' figure of C. protosphaera,
and in fact approaches more closely to the type of Vaginulina,
which has no coiled commencement as in Cristellaria. Since
there are gradations between the two species mentioned, Dr.
Brady has rightly included them under one name.

C. tricarinella is a well-known Cretaceous and Eocene fossil.
Its occurrence in recent dredgings is rather sparing, being
acted from only the following localities : — Off the Philippine

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTBACODA. — CHAPMAN. 25

Islands at 95 fathoms ; off Raine Island, 155 fathoms ; off
the west coast of New Zealand, 150 fathoms ; off Great
Barrier Island, New Zealand, 110 fathoms ; north of Enderby
Island, N.Z., 85 fathoms ; from the Mauritius and off the
west coast of Australia.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

Sub-genus POLYMORPHININ^E.

Genus POLYMORPHINA, d'Orbigny.

POLYMORPHINA ANGUSTA, Egger.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

POLYMORPHINA COMMUNIS, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape \Viles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

POLYMORPHINA ELEGANTISSIMA, Parker and Jones.

This truly Australian species is found both in recent-
dredgings and in shore-sands off the Australian coast, as.
well as in strata of Cainozoic age in various horizons in southern
Australia.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.
Forms rather slender.

POLYMORPHINA OBLONGA, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

Genus UVIGERINA, d'Orbigny.
UVIGERINA ACULEATA, d'Orbigny.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two specimens.

UVIGERINA ANGULOSA, Williamson.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Abundant,
well-grown.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One minute specimen.

UVIGERINA ASPERULA, Czjzek, VAR. AMPULLACEA, Brady.

Dr. Brady remarks that the range of depth of nine recorded
localities for this species lies between 350 and 725 fathoms.

26 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The present sounding, therefore, extends its known bathyme-
trical limits.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.

UVIGERINA INTERRUPTA, Brady.
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two specimens.

UVIGERINA PYGMJEA, d'Orbigny.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Normal
examples very common ; elongate variety, frequent.

FAMILY GLOBIGERINID^.

Genus GLOBIGERINA, d'Orbigny.

GLOBIGERINA JEQUILATESALIS, Brady.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

GLOBIGERINA BULLOIDES, d'Orbigny.

Station 35, east of Tasmania. Bottom sample, 377
fathoms. Very abundant, and variable in size.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Abundant.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Occasional ; very small.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Rare.

GLOBIGERINA DUBIA, Egger.

Dr. Brady records this species as far south as Lat. 46° in
the Southern Ocean.

Amongst other localities, Dr. Egger has noted the species
from the west coast of Australia at 1187 and 4298 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One large
example.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Rare.

GLOBIGERINA DUTERTREI, d'Orbigny.

Station 35, east of Tasmania. Bottom sample, 377
fathoms. Frequent.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 27

GLOBIGERINA INFLATA, d'Orbigny.

Station 35, east of Tasmania. Bottom sample, 377
fathoms. Very common.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Very common.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Very common.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very
abundant.

GLOBIGERINA RUBRA, d'Orbigny.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Rare.

GLOBIGERINA TRILOBA, JReuss.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Rare.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Rare.

Genus ORBULINA, d'Orbigny.
ORBULINA UNIVERSA, d'Orbigny.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Common.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.
Small specimens.

Genus PULLENIA, Parker and Jones.

PULLENIA SPHJEROIDES, d'Orbigny, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One small specimen.

Genus SPHJEROIDINA, d'Orbigny.
SPH^ROIDINA BULLOIDES, d'Orbigny.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A large, well-
developed example.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

FAMILY ROTALIID^E.
SUB-FAMILY SPIRILLININ.E.
Genus SPIRILLINA, Ehrenberg.
SPIRILLINA DENTICULO-GRANULATA, Chapman.

Spirillina denticulo-granulata, Chapman, Journ. Quekett
Micr. Club, (2), x., 1907, p. 133, pi. x., figs. 6a-c. Id.,
Subantarctic Ids. of N. Zealand, Art. xv., 1909, p.
355, pi. xvii., figs. 3a, 6.

28 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The present occurrence considerably extends the bathy-
metrical range of this species, the previous records being
shore-sand, Torquay, near Geelong, and from off the Snares,
Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, 60 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One example.

SPIRILLINA INJEQUALIS, Brady.

Previously recorded, amongst other localities, off the coast
of Western Australia, and from the Subantarctic Islands of
New Zealand.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A typical
example.

SPIRILLINA LIMBATA, Brady.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One specimen.

SPIRILLINA VIVIPARA, Ehrenberg.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

SUB-FAMILY ROTALIIN^.
Genus PATELLINA, Williamson.
PATELLINA CORRUGATA, Williamson.

One of the deeper soundings in which the above species
occurs is here recorded, viz., 1122 fathoms. The deepest
record for the species, which usually inhabits shallow or
moderately shallow water, is that by the writer, from Funa-
futi, at the exceptional depth of 2298 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. In fine washings.

Genus DISCORBINA, Parker and Jones.
DISCORBINA ARAUCANA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 35, east of Tasmania, bottom sample, 377 fathoms.
Very rare and small.

DISCORBINA BERTHELOTI, var. BACONICA, Hantken.

Station 35, east of Tasmania, bottom sample, 377 fathoms.
One specimen.

DISCORBINA BICONCAVA, Parker and Jones.

This species, although found elsewhere, is particularly
Australian in its distribution, being known from Bass

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 29

Strait, Port Jackson, Torres Strait and the Gulf of Carpen-
taria.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two small
examples.

DISCORBINA ORBICULARIS, Terquem, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

DISCORBINA ROSACEA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

DISCORBINA RUGOSA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One small
example.

DISCORBINA TURBO, d'Orbigny, sp.

Amongst other localities, Brady records this species from
off Port Jackson, New South Wales, 2 to 10 fathoms. The
present examples are from an exceptionally deep sounding
for the species.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.

DISCORBINA VILARDEBOANA, d'Orbigny, sp.

This form is closely allied to the previously noted D.
araucana, but the earlier chambers on the inferior surface
are largely concealed.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One small
specimen.

Genus TRUNCATULINA, d'Orbigny.
TRUNCATULINA CULTER, Parker and Jones, sp.

This species inhabits fairly deep water.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two specimens.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One small specimen.

TRUNCATULINA HUMILIS, Brady.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two examples.

TRUNCATULINA LOBATULA, Walker and Jacob, sp.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Two small and rather
irregularly-grown specimens.

30 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two small
but typical specimens.

TRUNCATULINA PYGM^A, Hantken.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

TRUNCATULINA RETICULATA, Czjzek, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

TRUNCATULINA TENERA, Brady.

This form is of more usual occurrence in the Southern
Ocean, and appears to be sparingly found at any time.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two specimens.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

TRUNCATULINA TENUIMARGO, Brady.

This species appears to be more typically Australian,
although occasionally found in other areas.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common ;
unusually fine examples.

TRUNCATULINA UNGERIANA, d'Orbigny, sp.

A very common form in the Southern Ocean, and typical
of all Australian Cainozoic foraminiferal faunas.

Station 36, east of Tasmania. 777 fathoms. One specimen.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen ; a
minute example.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Very
common ; tests both small and large.

TRUNCATULINA VARIABILIS, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common ;
some extremely erratically grown forms present.

TRUNCATULINA WUELLERSTORFL Schwager, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.
Small specimens.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles. 100 fathoms. Frequent ;.
typical.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 31

Genus ANOMALINA, Parker and Jones.
ANOMALINA AMMONOIDES, Reuss, sp.

This species is exceedingly common in shallow and
moderately deep water dredgings around the Australian
coast, and is a well-known form in Australian Canozoic strata.

Station 35, east of Tasmania. Bottom sample, 377
fathoms. One small example.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common and
typical.

* Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common
and typical.

ANOMALINA CORONATA, Parker and Jones.

Anomalina coronata, Parker and Jones, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (2), xix., 1857, p. 294, pi. x., figs. 15, 16.
Chapman, Subantarctic Ids. of N. Zealand, Art. xv.,
1909, p. 360, pi. xvii., fig. 10.

Found in the Southern Ocean, off Prince Edward Island,
50-150 fathoms (Brady) ; off the Subantarctic Ids. of N.
Zealand (Chapman) ; Kerguelen Id., 366 metres (Egger).

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Three
typical specimens.

ANOMALINA GROSSERUGOSA, Gumbel, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two examples ;
one typical, the other minute.

ANOMALINA POLYMORPHA, Costa.

Anomalina polymorpha, Costa, Atti dell. Accad. Pontan.,
vii., 1856, p. 252, pi. xxi., figs. 7-9. Chapman, Journ.
Quekett Micr. Club, (2), x., 1907, p. 138.

This species has occurred off Sydney at 410 fathoms ; and
in shore-sand at Beaumaris, Port Phillip.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.

Genus PULVINULINA, Parker and Jones.
PULVINULINA AURICULA, FicMel and Moll, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

32 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PULVINULINA CANARIENSIS, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two specimens.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Frequent.

PULVINULINA CONCENTRICA, Parker and Jones.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common.
Variable in size.

PULVINULINA CRASSA, d'Orbig, •, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

PULVINULINA ELEGANS, d'Orbigny, sp.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.

PULVINULINA EXIGUA, Brady.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One minute example.

PULVINULINA PATAGONICA, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two specimens.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Frequent ; small.

PULVINULINA PROCERA, Brady.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

PULVINULINA REPANDA, Fichtel and Moll, sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
specimens.

PULVINULINA TRUNCATULINOIDES, d'Orbigny, sp.

Station 35, east of Tasmania ; bottom sample, 377 fathoms.
Two examples.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Very abundant.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Very common.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

Genus ROTALIA, Lamarck.

ROTALIA CLATHRATA, Brady.

This is a common form in Bass Strait, and has occurred in
the shore-sand of Torquay, Victoria. It occurs fossil in the
various Cainozoic beds of Victora.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two typical
specimens.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two well-
grown shells.

ROTALIA PAPILLOSA, d'Orbigny, var. COMPRESSIUSCULA,

Brady.

Occasionally found round the Australian coast. Also
from the Japane^ Sea and round Papua.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

ROTALIA SOLDANII, d'Orbigny, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One specimen.

SUB-FAMILY POLYSTOMELLIN^.
Genus NONIONINA, d'Orbigny.
NONIONINA POMPILIOIDES, Fichtel and Moll, sp.

This distinct little form is almost confined to deep water
soundings.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One small example.

NONIONINA UMBILICATULA, Montigue, sp.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One minute example.

Genus POLYSTOMELLA, Lamarck.

POLYSTOMELLA CRISPA, Limie, Sp.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent.

POLYSTOMELLA MACELLA, Fichtel and Moll, sp.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One minute
example.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
specimen.

SUB-FAMILY NUMMULITIN^E.

Genus HETEROSTEGINA, d'Orbigny.

HETEROSTEGINA DEPRESSA, d'Orbigny.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One small
specimen.

34 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

III. LIST OF OSTRACODA : WITH DESCRIPTIONS AND NOTES

OF NEW AND RARE SPECIES.

SECTION PODOCOPA.
FAMILY CYPRID.E.
Genus AGLAIA, G. 8. Brady.
? AGLAIA MERIDIONALIS, G. 8. Brady.

? Aglaia meridionalis, G. S. Brady, • Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 34, pi. xxx., figs. la-d. Aglaia
meridionalis (Brady), Egger, Abhandl. d. k. Bayer.
Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 418, pi. i., figs.
37-39.

Brady described this species from anchor-mud collected
in 6 fathoms at Stanley Harbour, Falkland Island.

Egger's " Gazelle " specimens came from Western Australia
at 357 metres ; West Africa at 677 metres ; and from near
Mauritius at 411 metres. The writer obtained this species
from dredgings round Funafuti at 1215 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Four
separate valves.

? AGLAIA OBTUSATA, G. S. Brady.

1 Aglaia obtusata, G. S. Brad}r, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 35, pi. xxx., figs. 8a-d. Chapman, Journ.
Linn. Soc., Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 426.

The previous records for this distinct little species are
Kerguelen Island, 20-50 fathoms, and round Funafuti at
1050 fathoms. It is interesting to find this rare form so well
represented in this Australian dredging.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Common
and typical.

Genus PONTOCYPRIS, G. 0. Sars.

PONTOCYPRIS ATTENUATA, G. 8. Brady.

(Plate ii, fig. 1.)

Pontocypris attenuate,, G. S. Brady, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
(4), ii., 1868, p. 179, pi. iv., figs. 11-14. Id., Chall.
Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 38, pi. xv., figs. 2a-d.
Id., Trans. R. Soc. Eclin., xxxv., 1890, p. ii., p. 491, pi.
i., figs. 3, 4. Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool.,
xxviii., 1902, p. 419.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 35

The present specimens more nearly resemble those from
the South Seas described by Dr. Brady in the later reference,
in being more pointed posteriorly and in some cases armed
with a short spine. The extreme form of this series now
figured closely approaches P. sicula, G. S. Brady1, which
was described by that author also from the South Seas.

The occurrence of this species at the exceptional depth of
777 fathoms is interesting. It has been previously recorded
from Hong Kong Harbour, 7 fathoms ; Humboldt Bay,
Papua, 37 fathoms ; Mauritius ; Noumea, New Caledonia ;
and shore gatherings, Upolu. I had it from Funafuti, South
Pacific, in varying depths, the deepest dredging being 200
fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Fairly
numerous.

PONTOCYPRIS SUBRENIFORMIS, G. S. Brady.

1 Pontycypris subreniformis, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool.,
i, pt. iii., 1880, p. 38, pi. vii., fig. 5 ; pi. xv., figs. 8a-d.
Pontocypris subreniformis (Brady), Egger, Abhandl.
d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 421,
pi. vii., figs. 50-52.

This ostracod was doubtfully placed in the genus Ponto-
cypris by Dr. G. S. Brady on account of its carapace being
anteriorly depressed. He considered this character argued
against its being a typical pontocyprid, and thought it might
equally well be Bythocypris. Some examples of Pontocypris
attenuata, however, often show quite as much depression in
front as the present species.

P. subreniformis was dredged by the " Challenger ' in
Simon's Bay, South Africa, 15-20 fathoms ; and from
Port Jackson, New South Wales, 2-10 fathoms. Dr. Egger 's
" Gazelle ' specimens came from the neighbourhood of
Mauritius at a depth of 411 metres.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.

PONTOCYPRIS TRIGONELLA, G. 0. Sars.

Pontocypris trigonella, G. O. Sars, Oversigt af Norges marine
Ostracoder, 1865, p. 16. G. S. Brady, Trans. Linn.
Soc. Lond., xxvi., 1868, p. 387, pi. xxv., figs. 31-34 ;

1. Brady, G. S. — Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xxxv., pt. ii., No. 14, 1890, p.
492, pi. 1, figs. 7, 8.

36 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

pi. xxviii., fig. 3. Brady, Oosskey and Robertson,
Mon. Post.-tert. Entom. Scotland, etc. (Pal. Soc. Mon.),
1874, p. 137, pi. xvi., figs. 26-28. G. S. Brady, Chall.
Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 36, pi. xv., figs. 4a-d.
Brady and Norman, Sci. Trans. Roy. Dubl. Soc.,
ser. ii., iv., No. ii., 1889, p. 109, pi. xxii., figs. 18-25 ;
pi. xxiii., fig. 6. Egger, Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad.
Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 422, pi. i., figs. 16, 17.
Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool., xxx., 1910,
p. 426.

This species occurs sparingly in the warmer waters of the
ocean, but is very abundant in the North Atlantic, and
especially round the British Islands. It generally affects
shallow water in cold and temperate seas, occurring in
deeper water in lower latitudes. At Funafuti it was found
at the great depth of 1485 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One
complete carapace of typical dimensions.

Genus ARGILLCECIA, G. 0. Sars.
ARGILL(ECIA AFFINIS, Chapman.

Argilloecia affinis, Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool.,
xxviii., 1902, p. 419, pi. xxxvii., figs. la-c. Id., ibid.,
xxx., 1910, p. 428.

This species was originally described from soundings made
by H.M.S. " Penguin," near Funafuti, at 1489 fathoms, and
has been since recorded by the writer from three soundings
from the same place, at 1050, 1417 and 2715 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.

ARGILLCECIA GRACILIOR, Chapman.

Argilloscia gracilior, Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 428, pi. Ivi., figs. I8a-b.

A. gracilior was first described from the soundings by the
" Penguin " from Funafuti, at 1050 and 1215 fathoms. The
present specimens are rather smaller than the type, measuring
.44mm. in length against that of .7mm. from the Funafuti
example.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two speci-
mens.

FORAMLNIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 37

Genus MACROCYPRIS, G. S. Brady.
MACROCYPRIS DECORA, G. S. Brady, sp.

Cytherideis decora, G. S. Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., v.,
1865, p. 366, pi. Ivii., figs. 13a-c. Macrocypris decora,
Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 44, pi. i.,
figs. 3a-d ; pi. vi., figs. 80-6. Id., Trans. Roy. Soc.
Edin., xxxv., pt. ii., No. 14, 1890, p. 492.

The carapaces found in the present dredgings are of typical
dimensions. The depth is rather exceptional, 390 fathoms
being the deepest hitherto recorded for this species.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.

MACROCYPRIS GRACILIS, sp. nov.
(Plate ii., figs. 2a-c.)

Description. — Carapace very slender ; siliquose ; highest
in the middle. Height less than one-fourth the length.
Dorsal margin evenly arcuate, ventral margin concave just
above the middle and curving out to meet the depressed
anterior margin. Posterior end tapering to a blunt point.
Edge view, elongate-ovate, compressed at the extremities.
Length, 1mm. ; greatest height, .23mm.

Relationships. — This species bears a general resemblance to
M. tenuicauda, Brady1 but is much more elongate, and the
dorsal border more evenly rounded. The specimen figured by
Dr. Egger from Station 90, off Western Australia, at 357
metres2 and referred to M. tenuicauda, Brady, is probably
referable to this new species.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A left valve.

Genus BYTHOCYPRIS, G. S. Brady.
BYTHOCYPRIS ELONGATA, G. S. Brady.

Bythocypris elongata, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 47, pi. vi., figs. la-c.

Separate valves of the above species occur in the under-
mentioned dredging. They agree in outline with Brady's

1. Brady— Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 41, pi. ii., figs. IA-F ;
pi. iii., figs. 2A-B.

2. Egger— Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth ii., 1901, p.
424, pi. i., figs. 23, 24.

38 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

figured examples, which came from Tristan d'Acunha at 1425
fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
valves.

Genus BAIRDIA, McCoy.
BAIRDIA AMYGDALOIDES, G. S. Brady.

Bairdia amygdaloides, G. S. Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc.
Lond., v., 1865, p. 364, pi. Ivii., figs. 6a-c. Id., Chall.
Hep., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 54, pi. ix., figs.
5a-f ; pi. x., figs. 2a-e.

B. amygdaloides appears to be almost peculiarly an Australian
form, but it also occurs in the South Pacific. It is also a
common fossil in Australian Tertiary beds, from at least
Miocene times upwards.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent ;
specimens small.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Frequent ;
specimens of normal size.

BAIRDIA ANGULATA, G. 8. Brady.
(Plate ii., fig. 3).

Bairdia angulata, G. S. Brady, Les Fonds de la Mer, i.,
1867, p. 199, pi. xxvii., figs. 11, 12. Id., Chall. Rep.,
Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 59, pi. xi., figs. 5a-d.

It is of great interest to meet with this widely distributed
but rare species in the Southern Ocean. Dr. Brady records
it from off the Azores, 450 fathoms ; Torres Strait, 155
fathoms ; and off the West Coast of South America, 160
fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two left and
one right valve.

BAIRDIA FUSCA, G. S. Brady.

Bairdia fusca, G. S. Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., v.,
1865, p. 364, pi. Ivii., figs. la-d. Id., Chall. Rep., Zool.,
i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 49, pi. vii., figs. 2a-d. Egger,
Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii.,
1901, p. 427, pi. vii., figs. 47-49.

This species is characteristically Australian, having been
originally described by Brady from Australian specimens and

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 39

afterwards obtained by the " Challenger " at Port Jackson,
New South Wales, 2-10 fathoms. It has been recorded and
figured by Dr. Egger from " Gazelle ' dredgings off the
West African coast at 677 metres. The figure given by Egger
shows the anterior extremity more than usually broad, so
that there may be some doubt as to whether his specimen
is correctly referred to B. fusca, Brady.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two single
valves.

BAIRDIA VILLOSA, G. S. Brady.

Bairdia villosa, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 50, pi. iii., figs. 3a-b ; pi. v., figs. 2a-g ; pi.
viii., figs. 4a-/.

This species appears to be restricted to the Southern Ocean,
having occurred in " Challenger " dredgings off Nightingale
Island, Tristan d'Acunha, 100 to 150 fathoms ; Balfour Bay,
Kergueleii Island, 20 to 50 fathoms ; off Christmas Harbour,
Kerguelen Island, 120 fathoms ; off Prince Edward Island, 50
to 150 fathoms ; and off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait,
38 to 40 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Separate
valves, abundant.

BAIRDIA WOODWARDIANA, G. S. Brady.

Bairdia woodwardiana, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 57, pi. xi., figs. la-e. Id., Trans. Roy.
Soc. Edin., xxxv., pt. ii., No. 14, 1890, p. 494.

This species was previously described by Dr. Brady from
off Nukualofa, Tongatabu, at 18 fathoms, and Vuna Point,
Taviuni, between tide-marks.

The present examples resemble B. crosskeiana in side view,
but, as Brady has pointed out, they are more equally ovate in
edge view. Our specimens have minute puncta scattered
over the valve surface.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two isolated
valves.

FAMILY CYTHERID.E.

Genus CYTHERE, Muller.

CYTHERE CANALICTJLATA, Reuss, sp.

Cypridina canaliculata, Reuss, in Haidinger's Abhandl.,
iii., 1850, p. 76, pi. ix., fig. 12.

40 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Cy there canaliculata (Reuss sp.), G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep.,
Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 73, pi. xiv., figs. la-d. Egger,
Abhandl.d.k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss.,xxi., Abth.,ii., 1901,
p. 432, pi. iv., figs. 15, 16.

This species dates back to Miocene times, in which formation
it occurs both in Europe (Bohemia, Austria, Galicia, Italy,
etc.), and in Australia (Victoria). Amongst the fossils from
the Miocene of the Mallee there occurs a papillate variety of the
species identical with the present living example.

The " Challenger " specimens came from Bass Strait, 38-40
fathoms ; and from Port Jackson, New South Wales, 2-10
fathoms. Dr. Egger records his " Gazelle ' specimens from
the West Coast of Australia.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.

CYTHERE CANCELLATA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere canceUata, G. S. Brady, Les fonds de la Mer, i.,
1868, p. 62, pi. vii., figs. 9-11. Id., Chall. Rep., Zool.,
i., pt. iii-., 1880, p. 73, pi. xiv., figs. 9 a-e. Chapman,
Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxvii., 1906, p. 108.

This species has been recorded by Brady from Tongatabu,
at 18 fathoms, and off Booby Island at 6-8 fathoms. The
writer obtained it from Great Barrier Island, New Zealand at
110 fathoms ; and from shore-sand on the seaward face of
Cocos Island.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two separate
valves.

CYTHERE CRISPATA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere crispata, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 72, pi. xiv., figs. 8a-d.

This species was previously known from Port Jackson, New
South Wales, 2-10 fathoms ; from Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms,
and from anchor mud in Hong-kong Harbour, 7 fathoms.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two
valves.

CYTHBRE CYTHEROPTEROIDES, G. S. Brady.
(Plate ii., figs. 4a-6).

Cythere cytheropteroides, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,.
pt. iii., 1880, p. 78, pi. xv., figs. 5a~d.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 41

A single valve of this rare species occurs in the present
soundings. It was originally described from " Challenger '
examples, from a dredging in 150 fathoms off the Cape of
Good Hope.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A left valve.

CYTHERE DICTYON, G. S. Brady.

Cythere dictyon, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 99, pi. xxiv., figs. la-y.

C. dictyon is a generally deep water species, but it occasion-
ally occurs at moderate depths. The specimens here found in
the sounding at 100 fathoms are most like those which I have
described as Miocene fossils in the polyzoal rock in the Mallee
Borings of Victoria.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Specimens-
typical, common.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Specimens
well grown and abundant ; ornament comparatively stronger
than in deep water forms.

CYTHERE FOVEOLATA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere foveolata, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 75, pi. xiii., figs. 5a-h.

The " Challenger " examples were obtained off Christmas
Harbour, Kerguelen Island, at 120 fathoms ; and off Heard
Island at 75 fathoms.

C. foveolata has been recently identified by the writer from
Raised Beaches in the Antarctic.

This species forms a central type with several varieties or
allied forms as C. moseleyi, G.S.B., and C. falklandi, G.S.B.

The present example has the surface reticulations less,
strongly developed than usual, otherwise it is typical.

Station, 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.

CYTHERE IMPLUTA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere impluta, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 76, pi. xvi., figs. 3a-d ; pi. xxvi., figs. 6 a-d..

The present specimens most nearly resemble the figures
on plate xxvi. of Dr. Brady's Report, which represent ex-
amples from both Tristan d'Acunha and the Falkland
Islands. The type of shell figured on plate xvi. of the same

42 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Report, from the Falkland Islands only, is less distinctly
areolate on the surface.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms. Two
.separate valves.

CYTHERE LEPRALIOIDES, G. S. Brady.

Cythere lepralioides, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 94, pi. xix., figs. 5a-d.

The " Challenger " specimens were obtained in Simon's Bay,
South Africa, 15-20 fathoms, and off the Cape of Good Hope,
150 fathoms.

The present example is very typical and well preserved.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One right valve.

CYTHERE PARALLELOGRAMMA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere parallelogramma, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 82, pi. xv., figs. la-e. Egger, Abhandl.
d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 442,
pi. vi., figs. 15-16.

The " Challenger " example came from Prince Edward
Island, 50-150 fathoms. Dr. Egger obtained it off the West
Coast of Africa. It has recently been identified in Raised
Beach deposits in the Antarctic by the writer.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. A right
valve.

CYTHERE PECTUNCULATA, Chapman.

Cythere pectunculata, Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xxviii., 1902, p. 425, pi. xxxvii., figs. 2a-b.

C. pectunculata is allied to C. lactea, G. S. Brady1 in the
tritubercular ornament, but is distinguished by the former
being triangular in lateral aspect instead of quadrangular as
in C. lactea.

The above species was first discovered in beach-sand at
Avalau Islet, Funafuti, where it is not uncommon.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.

1. Brady — Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., v., 1865, p. 377, pi. lx., figs. SA-C.
Rep. Chall., Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 91, pi. xxii., figs. IA-D.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 43

CYTHERE QUADRIACULEATA, G. 8. Brady.

Cythere quadriaculeata, G. 8. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 86, pi. xxii., figs. 2a-d ; pi. xxv., figs.
4a-d.

Originally described from specimens dredged by the
" Challenger " in the Inland Sea, Japan, 15 fathoms, and
off the reefs at Honolulu at 40 fathoms. At Funafuti it
occurred in deep soundings at 1050 and 1215 fathoms
respectively.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two separate
valves.

CYTHERE SCABROCUNEATA, G. S. Brady.

Cythere scabrocuneata G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 103, pi. xvii., figs. 5a-f ; pi. xxiii.,
figs. 2a-c. Egger, Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss.,
xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 441, pi. viii., figs. 1-3.

This species is very typical of the Bass Strait fauna, and
was also recorded from the Inland Sea, Japan, and from
Wellington Harbour, New Zealand, by Dr. Brady. The
" Gazelle " specimens of Dr. Egger came from the west
coast of Australia.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. Occasional.

CYTHERE SWEETI, Chapman.

Cythere sweeti, Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Loud., Zool.,
xxx., 1910, p. 432, pi. Ivii., figs. 23a-6.

This species was originally recorded from Funafuti, where
it occurred at depths of 1050 to 1485 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One typical
valve.

Genus EUCYTHERE, G. 8. Brady.

EUCYTHERE DECLivis, Norman, SP.

(Plate ii.5 fig. 5.)

Cythere declivis, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb.
and Durham, i., 1865, p. 16, pi. v., figs. 9-12.

Eucythere declivis (Norm, sp.), G. S. Brady, Trans. Linn.
Soc. Lond., xxvi., 1868, p. 430, pi. xxvii., figs. 22-26,
52-55. Egger, Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss.,
xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 449, pi. iv., figs. 65-67.

44 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

This generally-distributed Atlantic species was found in
" Gazelle " dredgings by Dr. Egger off the coast of West
Australia at a depth of 357 metres.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One valve.

Genus KRITHE, Brady, Crosskey & Robertson.

•

KRITHE PRODUCTA, G. S. Brady.

Krithe producta, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 114, pi. xxvii., figs. la-?. Egger, Abhandl.
d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901, p. 451,
pi. iv., figs. 17-18.

This species is widely distributed and almost confined to
deep-water conditions. Amongst other localities it has been
found off Sydney at 410 fathoms. Egger records it from
near Kerguelen Island and off the west coast of Australia.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.
East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. A left valve.

Genus LOXOCONCHA, G. 0. Sars.

LOXOCONCHA AUSTRALIS, G. 8. Brady1, var. TASMANICA,

var. nov.

(Plate ii., fig. 6.)

The specimens of the present series are thin-shelled and
ovoid, and the valves are less distinctly pitted than in the
typical form. The species, which usually occurs in shallow
water, has been recorded by Dr. Brady from Port Jackson,
N. S. Wales, 2-10 fathoms ; off Booby Island, Cape York,
6-8 fathoms ; and from the Port of Noumea, New Caledonia,
2-6 fathoms. The writer has also obtained L. australis from
the beach-sands and lagoon dredgings round Funafuti.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two separate
valves.

LOXOCONCHA VARIOLATA, G. S. Brady.

Loxoconcha variolata, G. S. Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc. Loud.,
x., 1878, p. 400, pi. Ixviii., figs. 4a-d. Id., Chall. Rep.,
Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 121, pi. xxix., figs. Qa-d.

\. Loxoconcha australis, G. S. Brady, Rep. Chall., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 119, pi. xxviii., figs. SA-F ; pi. xxix. figs. SA-D. Id., Trans. Roy.
Soc. Edin., xxxv., pt. ii., No. 14, 1890, p. 507. Chapman, Journ. Linn.
Soc. Lond., Zool., vol. xxviii., 1902, p. 427.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 45

This species has been recorded from recent dredgings off
Booby Island, 6-8 fathoms ; and as a fossil from the Lower
Pliocene of Belgium (Antwerp Crag). Curiously, the recent
example off Cape Wiles, South Australia, is nearest in general
characters to the fossil form, the specimens from Booby
Island being shorter and less compressed around the margins
of the valves.

Forty miles off Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. A left valve.

Genus XESTOLEBERIS, G. 0. Sars.
XESTOLEBERIS DAVIDIANA, sp. nov.

Xestoleberis, sp. nov. aff. setigera, Brady, Chapman, Zool.
Results, "Endeavour," i., pt. iii., 1912, p. 311.

The following description is based on a specimen from a
raised beach on the slopes of Mt. Erebus in the Antarctic
region. The publication of the paper in which it should
have appeared being unavoidably delayed, I am indebted
to Professor David for permission to include it here.

Carapace in side view, semiovate, bluntly pointed in front
and behind ; back rounded, slightly angulated at the summit ;
ventral border gently concave, edge rounded, ventral surface
excavate. Edge view, compressed ovate. End view, conical,
with rounded sides. Surface of shell more or less numerously
pitted, each pit or group of pits surrounded by a white spot ;
probably armed with fine bristles (as in X. setigera) in the
living state. A few valves of narrower build are present,
one of which is figured ; they are probably referable to male
specimens.

Measurements : Length of type specimen, .48mm. ; greatest
thickness of carapace, .3mm. ; height, .3mm.

It is extremely interesting to find this neat little species
still living in the Southern Ocean.

South of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One valve.

XESTOLEBERIS ? INTERMEDIA, G. S. Brady.

Xestoleberis ? intermedia, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool.,
i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 128, pi. xxxiii., figs. 2a-d.

The example found in the present series agrees in all
particulars with Dr. Brady's figured specimen from Torres
Strait, 155 fathoms. It differs from X. setigera, G. S. Brady,
in the rounded anterior extremity of the carapace.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. A left
valve.

46 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

XESTOLEBERIS NANA, G. S. Brady.

Xestoleberis nana, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., pt. iii.,
1880, p. 126, pi. xxxi., figs. 5a-c.

Our specimens from Cape Wiles are rather higher than
those figured by Dr. Brady, but there is little doubt that they
are referable to the above species.

X. nana was recorded from 18 fathoms off Tongatabu.

East of Tasmania, 1122 fathoms. One small valve.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two valves.

XESTOLEBERIS VARIEGATA, G. S. Brady.

Xestoleberis variegata, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 129, pi. xxxi., figs. Sa-g.

The previously recorded localities for this species are off
St. Vincent, Cape Verde, 1070 fathoms ; off Tongatabu, 18
fathoms ; Noumea, 2-6 fathoms ; and in the Fiji and Samoan
Islands, in shallow water. In dredgings taken at 1489
fathoms at Funafuti the writer found a single valve of this
species.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two valves.

Genus CYTHERURA, G. 0. Sars.
CYTHERURA CRYPTIFERA, G. /S'. Brady.

Cytherura cryptifera, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.r
pt. iii., 1880, p. 134, pi. xxxii., figs. 4a-c.

The " Challenger ' specimens were from a dredging in
Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms. Only one carapace of this species
has been previously found.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two separate
valves, of a normal and a narrow carapace.

CYTHERURA TENUICOSTA, Chapman.

Cytherura tenuicosta. Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 436, pi. Ivii., figs. 25a-b.

This is an interesting form of the genus, in which the
ornament consists of fine parallel costulse. It was originally
described from deep dredgings around Funafuti, at 1215 and
1417 fathoms. This second occurrence of the species in
deep water seems to indicate its persistent bathymetrical
habitat, even in areas of different latitudes.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two valves.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 47

Genus CYTHEROPTERON, G. 0. Sars.
CYTHEROPTERON ABYSSORUM, G. S. Brady.

Cytheropteron abyssorum, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool.,
i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 138, pi. xxxiv., figs. 3a-d. Chapman,
Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 437.

Brady's original specimens were dredged by the " Chal-
lenger " in the Southern Ocean, south-west of Tasmania, in
2600 fathoms. Since then the writer has met with it in
dredgings from round Funafuti at 1050 and 1417 fathoms.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.
East of Tasmania. 1122 fathoms. One valve.

CYTHEROPTERON ABYSSORUM, G. S. Brady ; VAR. WILESENSIS,

var. nov.

(Plate iii., figs, la-b.)

Description. — This variety differs from C. abyssorum in
having a longer carapace with more produced extremities, a
sharper and more prominent beak, and a more depressed
shell. Moreover, the areolated surface is finer, and relieved
by radial lines emanating from the beak. A typical valve
measures : length .54 mm., height .365 mm.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles. Two valves.

CYTHEROPTERON COCCOIDES, G. 8. Brady.

Cytheropteron coccoides, G. S. Brady, Trans. Roy. Soc.
Edin., xxxv., pt. ii., No. 14, 1890, p. 510, pi. iii., figs.
20-21.

This rare form is recorded for the first time in Australian
waters. It was originally described by Dr. Brady from a
fringing reef at Mango Island, Fiji.

It is somewhat anomalous to find this species in two such
totally distinct conditions as shallow reef waters in low
latitude and in deep water of considerably higher latitude.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One valve.

CYTHEROPTERON DANNEVIGI, sp. nov.
(Plate iii., figs. 2a-c.)

Description. — Valve in lateral aspect elongate and sub-
rectangular. Height less than half the length. Anterior

48 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

extremity broad, rounded below and truncately rounded to
the back. Dorsal line slightly sinuous, concave in the
middle. Ventral border straight. Posterior extremity
obliquely truncated below, bearing off to a blunt point at
the dorsal angle. Beak well developed over the median area,
with a broad, blunt termination. Surface of valve round the
anterior border depressed and flange-like, the posterior
extremity being similarly depressed. Surface smooth, except
for some faint pitting.s in the rostral area, and faint lineations
on the terminal part of the beak and on the dorsal area
parallel with the hinge margin.

Dimensions. — Length .8 mm., height .365mm.

Affinities. — So far as I am aware there appears to be no
species of the genus which closely approaches the above
form. The nearest that might be cited is C. wellingtoniense,
G. S. Brady1, but this differs in the suboval form of the valve
in side view, and in the absence of a marked depression
at the extremities. C. wellingtoniense, moreover, has a
narrow anterior extremity as compared with the broadly
expanded form of C. dannevigi.

Named in honour of Mr. H. C. Dannevig, Director of
Fisheries, under whose auspices these soundings were col-
lected.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. One left valve.

CYTHEROPTERON FIMBRIATUM, sp. nov.
(Plate iii.. figs. 3a-6.)

Description.- — Seen from the side, shell elongate ovate,
narrow at the anterior extremity, acuminate posteriorly.
The dorsal margin is evenly and strongly convex ; ventral
margin sinuous and concave. Beak prominent, somewhat
arched and produced into a sharp point, the margin beneath
bearing a short fringe of sharp spines. Surface of shell finely
punctate.

Dimensions. — Length .54 mm., height .327 mm.

Affinities. — This species is related both to C. antarcticum,
Chapman2, and to C. abyssorum, var. wilesensis. From
C. antarcticum it differs in the inflation of the median area
of the shell, in its punctate surface, and in the fimbriate

1. Brady— Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 136, pi. xxxiv.,

figS. 4A-D.

2. Chapman — Rep. on Ostracoda from a Raised Beach above the Dry-
galski Glacier, South-east of Mount Larsen. (Now in the press.)

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 49

margin of the beak. From the variety wilesensis it is dis-
tinguished by the latter character, and by the constantly
finer ornamentation of the surface. Another species closely
related to the above is C. alatum, G. 0. Sars1 ; this differs
principally in the greater expansion of the alee.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Frequent.

Genus BYTHOCYTHERE, G. 0. Sars.
BYTHOCYTHERE RETIOLATA, Chapman.

Bythocythere retiolata, Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 437, pi. Ivii., figs. 26a-6.

The occurrence of this species in the Southern Ocean is
interesting, since it was recently recorded from Funafuti
at a depth of 1050 fathoms.

The Australian specimens differ from that from Funafuti
in having a less prolonged extremity, but otherwise the
essential features agree.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A left valve.

BYTHOCYTHERE VELIFERA, G. S. Brady.
(Plate iii., fig. 4a-6.)

Bythocypris velifera, G. S. Brady, Chall. Rep., Zool., i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 143, pi. xxxii., figs. 5a-c. Egger,
Abhandl. d. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii.,
1901, p. 463, pi. v., figs. 32-34.

Brady records this species from Torres Strait at 155
fathoms, whilst Egger obtained it in dredgings from the
west coast of Australia at 357 metres.

The present specimens from Cape Wiles have the alse
regularly and boldly curved anteriorly. The examples from
Station 36, east of Tasmania, agree more closely with Dr.
Egger 's specimens. The arrangement of muscle-spots on
the valve is peculiarly interesting, and they are here figured
for the first time.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. A right valve.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. Two left
valves.

1. See Brady and Norman, Trans. R. Dubl. Soc., iv., pt. ii., 1889, p. 214,
pi. xx, figs. 8-10.

50 •' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Genus PSEUDOCYTHERE, G. 0. Sars.

PSEUDOCYTHERE CAUDATA, G. 0. SttTS.

Pseudocythere caudata, G. O. Sars, Oversigt Norges marine
Ostracoder, 1865, p. 88. G. S. Brady, Trans. Linn.
Soc. Lond., xxxi., pt. ii., 1868, p. 453, pi. xxxiv.,
figs. 49-52, pi. xli., fig. 6. Egger, Abhandl. d. k.
Bayer. Akad. Wiss., xxi., Abth. ii., 1901. p. 463, pi.
viii., figs. 33, 34. Chapman, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
Zool., xxx., 1910, p. 438.

This is a cosmopolitan species, being recorded by Dr. Brady
both as a Pleistocene fossil and a recent species from Great
Britain, as well as from Kerguelen Island and Prince Edward
Island in the Southern Ocean, and off the east coast of
South America. The writer obtained it from dredgings
round Funafuti at 1050 and 1215 fathoms. The '" Gazelle '
specimens recorded by Egger were found off the West
Australian coast.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Common.

Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 100 fathoms. One valve.

Genus SCLEROCHILUS, G. 0. Sars.
SCLEROCHILUS CONTORTUS, Norman, sp.

Cylhese conoorta, Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), ix.,
1862, p. 48, pi. ss., fig. 15. Id., Trans. Linn. Soc.
Lond., xxvii., 1868, p. 435, pi. xxxiv., figs. 5-10 ;
pi. xli., fig. 7. Sclerochilus contortus (Norman, sp.),
G. S. Brady, Rep. Chall, Zool., i., pt. iii., 1880, p.
147, pi. xxxv., figs. 8a-6.

This is a well-distributed genus and species, it being found
along the shores of the North Atlantic, while the " Challen-
ger " obtained it from Kerguelen Island, off Heard Island,
and from Wellington Harbour.

Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms. Two separate
valves and a complete carapace.

FORAMINIFERA AND OSTRACODA. — CHAPMAN. 51

APPENDIX ON THE OSTRACODA.

This group of minute Crustacea has hardly received the
attention it deserves in regard to the distribution of its
genera and species in the Southern Ocean. Practically all
the previous records for that area have been made by Dr.
G. Stewardson Brady, F.R.S., in connection with the
" Challenger " material, and in his " New and Imperfectly
Known Species of Marine Ostracoda,1" in which he describes
some shallow-water forms from Port Phillip, Victoria.

The genera represented in the present series comprise the
following : — -1 Aglaia, Pontocypris, Argilloecia, Macrocypris,
Bythocypris, Bairdia, Cythere, Eucythere, Krithe, Loxoconcha,
Xestoleberis, Cytherura, Cytheropteron, Bythocythere, Pseudo-
cythere, and Sclerochilus.

The forty-five species and two varieties of the present work
are nearly all new to the area of the Southern Ocean east of
Tasmania and off South Australia.

Several of the deep-water species, such as Argilloecia affi.nis,
A. gracilior, Cythere pectunculata, C. sweeti, Cytherura tenui-
costa, and Bythocythere retiolata, have hitherto been recorded
only from Funafuti in the South Pacific. The depths
from which these examples from lower latitudes came are
generally greater than those of the present soundings. This
is only to be expected, for as a rule a widely spread fauna
sinks to lower depths and cooler temperatures as it nears
the tropics.

Apart from the new species, several very rare forms are
likewise noted from these Southern Ocean dredgings. In
addition to those just enumerated, they are : ? Aglaia obtusata
(previous localities, Kerguelen Island and Funafuti), Pontocy-
pris gracilis (Levuka and Ram be Island), Bythocypris elongata
(Tristan d'Acunha), Bairdia angulata (Azores, Torres Strait
and South America), Cythere cytheropteroides (Cape of Good
Hope), Eucythere declivis (a North Atlantic species and only
once recorded from the southern hemisphere, viz., off West
Australia), Loxoconcha variolata (Booby Island and fossil in
the Antwerp Crag), Xestoleberis davidiana (Pleistocene in the
Antarctic), Cytherura cryptifera (a single carapace from off East
Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait), Cytheropteron coccoides (Mango
Island, Fiji), and Bythocythere velifera (Torres Strait and
West Australia).

For valued assistance in the sorting of the material examined,
thanks are due to my wife.

1. Brady— Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., v., 1866, pp. 359-393.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. — -Spiroloculma dorsata, Reuss, var. circularis, var.
nov. Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.
X 52.

Fig 2. — -Spiroloculina grata, Terquem, var. reticosa, var. nov.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms,
x 26.

Fig. 3. — Cornuspira carinata, Costa, sp., var. expansa, var. nov.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms.
X 26.

Fig. 4. — Marsipella cylindrica, H. B. Brady. East of Tas-
mania, 1122 fathoms, x 26.

Fig. 5. — Marginulina costata, Batsch, sp. Forty miles south
of Cape Wiles, 8. A., 100 fathoms, x 52.

Fig. 6. — Cristellaria tricarinella, Reuss. Vaginuline variety.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, 8. A., 100 fathoms.
X 52.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE I.

F. CHAPMAN, del. ad nat.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE II.

(All figures on this plate magnified 52 diameters.)

Fig. 1. — Pontocypris attenuata, G. S. Brady. Left valve.
Station 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

Fig. 2. — Macrocypris gracilis, sp. nov. a, left valve ; b, out-
line of edge view ; c, outline of end view. Station
36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

Fig. 3. — Bairdia angulata, G. S. Brady. Left valve. Station
36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

Fig. 4. — Cythere cytheropteroides, G. S. Brady, a, left valve ; b,
outline of edge view. Station 36, east of Tasmania,
777 fathoms.

Fig. 5. — -Eucythere declivis, Norman, sp. Left valve. Forty
miles south of Cape Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms.

Fig. 6. — Loxoconcha australis, G. S. Brady, var. tasmanica, var.
nov. Right valve. Station 36, east of Tasmania,
177 fathoms.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE II

2c

2b

F. CHAPMAN, del. ad nat.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

(All figures on this plate magnified 52 diameters.)

Fig. 1. — Cytheropteron abyssorum, G. S. Brady, var. ivilesensis,
var. nov. a, left valve ; b, outline of edge view.
Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms.

Fig. 2. — Cytheropteron dannevigi, sp. nov. a, left valve ; b,
outline of edge view ; c, outline of end view. Sta-
tion 36, east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms.

Fig. 3. — Cytheropteron fimbriatum, sp. nov. a, left valve ;
6, outline of edge view. Station 36, east of Tas-
mania, 777 fathoms.

Fig. 4. — Bythocythere velifera, G. S. Brady, a, left valve ; b,
outline of edge view. Forty miles south of Cape
Wiles, S.A., 100 fathoms.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE 111.

la

Ib

2a

4a

4b

F. CHAPMAN, del. ad nat.

II. Report on the Algae dredged by the F.I.S. " Endeavour
in Oyster Bay, Tasmania.

BY

A. H. S. LUCAS, M.A.
SYDNEY GRAMMAR SCHOOL.

ALGJE. — LUCAS. 55

REPORT ON ALG^E FROM OYSTER BAY, TASMANIA.

PHANEROGAMIA.

CYMODOCEA ANTARCTICA, Endl.

The only Phanerogam included is a rooting fragment of
this species, which is common on both sides of Bass Strait,
and extends to West Australia. The depth of the water
recorded was thirty-five fathoms, which is noteworthy ; as
the specimen was a rooting one, it seems probable that the
plant was actually growing at this depth.

ALG.E.
CHLOROPHYCE^].

CODIUM TOMENTOSUM (Huds.}, Stackh.

The only green alga in the collection is a well-grown plant
of this species, which is not in fruit.

It is of cosmopolitan range, occurring on both east and
west coasts of the Atlantic Ocean ; in the Mediterranean Sea ;
the Red Sea ; around Mauritius ; and the Philippine Islands.
There are other species of very similar appearance, which
are common on the south and east coasts of Australia. I
have received C. tomentosum, however, from Dunk Island,
north-eastern Queensland, and I think that it probably
occurs in fair abundance in Australian seas. The species of
Codium afford food and shelter to a large number of molluscs
and other invertebrate animals.

FUCOIDE.E— Brown Sea-weeds.

SARGASSUM VERRUCULOSUM (Mert.), Ag.
Sargassum raoulii, Hook. fil. and Harv.

One fragment, not bearing fruit.

This Sargassum is common on both sides of Bass Strait,
and extends to New Zealand.

SARGASSUM UNDULATUM, J. Ag. (?)

A small fragment having the wavy folia characteristic of
this species, but in the absence of fruit it is impossible to
distinguish it from some of its congeners. The floats are
mucronate, which is characteristic of the section Arthrophycus
to which 8. undukitum belongs.

Port Phillip, Victoria, and Tasmania.

56 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

CYSTOPHORA UVIFERA (Ag.), J. Ag.

Three fronds, not in fruit, bearing characteristic vesicles.

This species occurs all round the southern coast of Australia
from Fremantle, West Australia, to Eden, New South Wales,
where I have found it in plenty, and abovit Tasmania.

CYSTOPHORA GREVILLEI (Ag.), J. Ag.

One frond with typical fruit.

From Fremantle, West Australia, to Wilson's Promontory,
Victoria, and Tasmania.

SCABERIA AGARDHII, GreV.

A fine plant in excellent fruit.

From Fremantle, West Australia, to Port Phillip, Victoria ;
Tasmania ; Lord Howe Island ; the Auckland Islands and
New Zealand. After very heavy storms from the south, I
have found it cast up on Bondi beach, New South Wales.

LOBOSPIRA BICUSPIDATA, Aresch.

A small, just recognisable fragment, which is much worn.
From Busselton, West Australia, to Barwon Heads, Vic-
toria. Not previously recorded from Tasmania.

MACROCYSTIS PYRIFERA (Turn.), Ag.

A broken segment of a mid-frond.

This species occurs in the colder seas ; Cape of Good Hope ;
Cape Horn, and thence northward as far as Peru ; Victoria,
round to Eden, New South Wales ; Tasmania. It also
occurs on the west coast of North America, extending south
as far as California. It was present with Scaberia in some
southern drift which I collected at Bondi, New South Wales,
after a southerly gale.

FLORIDE^E— Red Sea-weeds.

CALLOPHYLLIS COCCINEA, Harv.

A small, but beautifully coloured fragment of this charac-
teristic Tasmanian species, which is without fruit.

PLOCAMIUM COSTATUM (J. Ag.), Hook. fil. & Harv.

Three fragments, not in fruit.

From West Australia to Wilson's Promontory, Victoria.
Common in Tasmania.

A.LGJE. — LUCAS. 57

PTILONIA AUSTRALASICA, Harv.

Three fragments bearing scattered cystocarps.
Victoria and Tasmania.

POLLEXFENIA LOBATA (Lamour.}, Folk.
Jeannerettia lobata, Hook. fil. & Harv.

Three small fragments.

Fremantle, West Australia, to Port Phillip, Victoria,
Tasmania, to Port Arthur.

METAGONIOLITHON STELLIGERUM (Lamarck), Weber de Basse.
Amphiroa stelligera, Lamarck.

Fragments showing fruit here and there, of a beautiful rosy
pink colour. In shore debris, the plants are almost always
bleached.

Fremantle, West Australia, to Port Phillip, Victoria ;
Tasmania.

CORALLINA PILIFERA, Lamour.

Small fronds two inches long, with cystocarps armed with
rather long cornua. C. pilifera is practically a form of the
widely distributed C. cuvieri, Lamour., which is found all
round the coasts of Australia, except perhaps the north, and
is common in Tasmania.

III. Report on the Alcyonarians obtained by the F.I.S.
"Endeavour" on the Eastern and Southern Coasts. of
Australia.

PART I.

BY

E. A. BRIGGS, B.Sc.,
ZOOLOGIST, AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY.

Plates iv.-xii.

ALCYONARfANS. — BRIGGS. 61

REPORT ON THE ALCYONARIANS.

Part I.
I. — Introduction.

Previous to the publication of Wright and Studer's Report1
on the Alcyonaria collected by the " Challenge*," our know-
ledge of the Alcyonarian Fauna of Australia was confined
mainly to forms from western and north-western localities,
and from the shallow waters of Queensland and Torres Strait.
This knowledge is based on collections obtained by the
" Herald "2 and "Fly,"3 the Antarctic Expedition under
Ross4, the German Circumnavigatory Expedition in the
" Gazelle,"5 and to the zoological collections made in the
Judo-Pacific Ocean during the voyage of the " Alert."6 The
" Challenger ' Expedition extended this field, and also
collected and recorded a number of forms from the southern
and south-eastern shores of Australia. Since then fresh
instalments of new species have been added by Prof. S. J.
Hickson7, who described the collection of Alcyonaria brought
together by Mr. J. B. Wilson during the biological survey
of Port Phillip, Victoria ; and by Prof. W. Kiikenthal8, who
has recorded a number of species from Western Australia.
Finally, Prof. J. A. Thomson and Miss D. L. Mackinnon9
published a detailed account of the Alcyonaria, which were
gathered together by the " Thetis ' Expedition during
trawling operations within the one hundred fathom line off
the coast of New South Wales.

The Alcyonarians described in the present Report were
trawled by the " Endeavour " on the eastern and southern
coasts of Australia in depths of from fifteen to three hundred
fathoms. The collection includes twenty-seven species, of
which twenty-four are referable to known species distributed
among fifteen genera ; the remainder have required the
establishment of three new species.

1. Wright and Studer — Chall. Rep., Zool., xxxi., 1889.

2, 3, 4. Gray— Proc. Zool. Soc., 1862 and 1872 ; Id., Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., (3), v., 1860 ; (4), ii., 1868 ; (4),iii., 1869 ; Id., Cat. Lithophytes in
Brit. Mus., 1870.

f>. Studer — Monatsber. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1878.

6. Ridley— Report Zool. Coll. H.M.S. " Alert," 1884.

7. Hickson— Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), ii., 1890, pp. 136-140.

8. Kiikenthal— Die Fauna Sudwest-Australiens, Hi., 1, 1910, pp. 3-108.

9. Thomson and Mackinnon — Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, pp.
661-695.

62

" ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The following table shows the general nature of the
collection : —

Total
number of

Total
number of

New

genera.

species.

species.

Order Alcyonacea

1

1

0

Order Pseudaxonia

2

3

0

Order Axifera

8

18

3

Order Stelechotokea

4

5

0

Totals

15

27

3

Of the new species, two belong to the genus Mopsea and
one to Plumarella.

LIST OF SPECIES.

Order ALCYONACEA, Verrill (pro parte).

Family ALCYONID^E.
Alcyonium (Erythropodium) membranaceum, Kiikenthal.

Order PSEUDAXONIA, G. von Koch.

Family MELITODIDyE.

Mopsella clavigera, Ridley.
Mopsella textiformis (Lamarck).
Acabaria gracillima (Ridley).

Order AXIFERA, G. von Koch

Family ISHXE.

I sis hippuris, Linnaeus.

Mopsea dichotoma (Linnaeus).

Mopsea encrinula (Lamarck).

Mopsea australis, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea flabellum, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea elegans, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea whiteleggei, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea plumacea, sp. nov.

Mopsea repens, sp. nov.

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 63

Family PRIMNOID^.

Stachyodes studeri, Versluys.

Amphilaphis plumacea, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Plumarella thetis, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Plumardla filicoides, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Plumarella australis, sp. nov.

Primnoella australasice, Gray.

Primnoella grandisquamis, Wright and Studer.

Caligorgia flabellum (Ehrenberg).

Family GORGONELLID^E.

Ctenocdla pectinata (Pallas).

Order STELECHOTOKEA, Bourne
Section I. ASIPHONACEA.

Family TELESTID^E.

Telesto arborea, Wright and Studer.
Telesto trichostemma (Dana).

Section II. PENNATULACEA
Family KOPHOBELEMNONID.£.
Kophobelemnon schmeltzii (Kolliker).

Family PTEROEIDID^.

Godeffroyia elegans, Kolliker.
Sarcophyllum grande (Gray).

II. — Description of the Genera and Species.

Order ALCYONACEA, Verrill (pro parte).

Family ALCYONID^.
Genus ALCYONIUM, Linnceus.

ALCYONIUM (ERYTHROPODIUM) MEMBRANACEUM, Kukenthal.

Alcyonium (Erythropodium) membranaceum, Kukenthal,
Alcyonacea Wiss. Ergeb. deutsch. Tiefsee Exped.,
xiii., 1, 1906, p. 52, pi. i., fig. 3, pi. ix., figs. 42-44. Id.,
Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13,
1911, p. 665.

There are in the collection two branched Gorgonid axes,
from which all trace of the original ccenenchyma has dis-

64 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

appeared. They are completely overgrown by a light brown
Sympodium-like Alcyonid, which agrees with Kukenthal's
account of Alcyonium (Ery thro podium) membranaceum.
Owing to the friable nature of the specimens in the dried
condition, very little of the internal structure can be dis-
tinguished.

There is considerable variet}7 in the spicules of the ccenen-
chyma. There are (1) approximately spherical bodies —
•087 x -080 mm. ; -120 x -105 mm. ; -122 x -105 mm. ; (2)
short, thick cylinders with about two bands of thorny warts —
•087 x -070 mm. ; -105 x -070 mm. ; -122 x -075 mm. ; and
(3) irregular bodies and a few crosses — -087 x -077 mm.; -105 x
•087 mm. ; -122 x -122 mm.

The polyp-spicules are spindles — -227 x -070 mm. ; -240 x
•070 mm. ; -245 x -077 mm.

Localities. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, 190-300 fathoms.

Distribution.— Francis Bay, 34°7'3" S. Lat., 24059'3" E.
Long., 100 metres (Kiikenthal). The " Thetis " specimens
were obtained at the following localities off the coast of New
South Wales : — Eleven miles east of Broken Bay ; Station 34,
off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ; Station 42, off Wata Mooli,
70-78 fathoms ; Station 43, off Botany Bay, 43-66 fathoms ;
Station 44, off Coogee, 49-50 fathoms ; Station 47, off Bulgo,
63-57 fathoms ; Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms
(Thomson and Mackinnon).

Order PSEUDAXONIA, G. von Koch.
Family MELITODID^.
Genus MOPSELLA, Gray.

MOPSELLA CLAVIGERA, Ridley.

Mopsella clavigera, Ridley, Report Zool. Coll. H.M.S.
" Alert," 1884, p. 360, pi. xxxvii., fig. B, pi. xxxviii.,
figs, a-ani. Id., Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 670, pi. Ixviii., fig. 9.
Id., Nutting, Gorgonacea Siboga Exped., viii., Scler-
axonia, 1911, p. 49.

Sixteen specimens agree with Ridley's description of
Mopsella clavigera, though there is no anastomosis. They

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 65

are all in the dried condition. The height of the largest
colony is 61 cm., with a width of 27 cm. across the expanded
portion. The branching is strictly in one plane, and is
generally dichotomous. The nodes are very swollen, and
in the largest specimens they have a diameter of 17 mm.
The branches are given off from the nodes.

The polyps are retracted into slightly projecting verrucse,
which are scattered over the surface of the stem and branches,
but are usually wanting on a median space on the posterior
aspect of the colony.

The spicules of the ccenenchyma agree well with those
described by Ridley : — (1) coarsely tuberculate, swollen,
orange-coloured, fusiform shapes — -175 x -035 mm. ; -140 x
•035 mm. ; (2) lemon-yellow coloured " Blattkeulen '
•070 x -035 mm. ; -052 x -035 mm. ; -047 x -026 mm. The
measurements agree fairly closely with Thomson and Mac-
kinnon's measurements of the " Thetis " specimens.

The colour is lemon-yellow to brick-red.

Locality. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Distribution. — Port Curtis, 5-11 fathoms, and Port Molle,
Queensland, 14 fathoms ; Thursday Island, Torres Straits,
4-6 fathoms (Ridley). Dirk Hartog Island, West Australia,
45 fathoms (Studer). The " Thetis " specimens were obtained
at the following localities off the coast of New South Wales :—
Eleven miles east of Broken Bay, 30-40 fathoms ; Station 34,
off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ; Station 40, off Wata Mooli,
52 fathoms ; Station 42, off Wata Mooli, 70-78 fathoms ;
Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms (Thomson and
Mackinnon). A fragmentary specimen was taken by the
Siboga Expedition in the Bay of Nangamessi, Sumba, 36
metres (Nutting).

MOPSELLA TEXTIFORMIS (Lamarck).

Melitcea textiformis, Lamarck, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., I.,
p. 412. Id., Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp, corall. flexibles,
1816, p. 464, pi. xix., fig. 1. Id., Gray, Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1857, p. 285.

Melithcea textiformis, Milne-Edwards et Haime, Hist. Nat.
Corall., I., 1857, p. 201.

Melitclla textiformis, Gray, Cat. Lithophytes in Brit. Mus.,
1870, p. 7.

66 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Mopsella textiformis, Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., I.,
1864, p. 38. Id., Ridley, Report Zool. Coll. H.M.S.
"Alert," 1884, p. 358. Id., Thomson and Mac-
kinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., IV., 13, 1911, p. 671, pi.
Ixiii., figs. 4, 5.

Several almost complete specimens in the collection agree
closely with the description of Mopsella textiformis (Lamarck),
given by Ridley. The largest specimen has a height of
34cm., with a width of 37cm. across the branched portion.
The diameter near the base is 2cm. The basal attachment
is lacking. The branching is strictly in one plane with abun-
dant anastomosis. The labyrinthine pattern, to which
Thomson and Mackinnon have directed attention, is clearly
shown on the weathered axis ; and there is a well-marked
tendency, as pointed out by Ridley, for the stem and main
branches to " break up almost immediately into a reticulum
of undulating thin branchlets, which almost all anastomose."
The internodes vary in length from 4 to 10 mm., and the
nodes from 4 to 6 mm.

The polyps are mainly confined to the anterior aspect of
the colony. They are disposed irregularly in slightly pro-
jecting verrucas.

The spicules are exactly like those described by Ridley —
(1) fusiform shapes sharply pointed at both ends, and
covered with irregularly scattered tubercles — -210 x -035mm. ;
•171 x-035 mm. ; -157 x-035 mm. ; (2) " Blattkeulen " with
orange shafts and lemon-yellow heads — -140 x -052 mm. ;
•122 x -052 mm. ; -087 x -043 mm. Very few of the " Blatt-
keulen " have the long shafts mentioned by Ridley. The
spicules of the verrucse are — (3) curved fusiform shapes
tapering to sharp points, with few tubercles — -245 x -035mm.;
•220 x-035 mm. ; -210 x -035 mm. ; (4) curved fusiform
shapes pointed rather bluntly and covered with closely set
blunt tubercles — -297 x -052 mm. ; -236 x -052 mm. ; -218 x
•070 mm.

Localities. — Off the coast of South Australia.

Fifteen miles south of St. Francis Island, Great Australian
Bight, 30 fathoms.

Distribution. — Australia (Lamouroux, Gray, Verrill). South
Seas (Gray). Port Curtis, 5-7 fathoms, and Port Molle,
Queensland, 12-20 fathoms ; Thursday Island and Prince
of Wales Channel, Torres Straits, 4-7 fathoms (Ridley). Lord
Howe Island (Thomson and Mackinnon).

ALCYONARIANS. BRIGGS. 67

Genus ACABARIA, Gray.

In his " Die Gorgonidenfamilie der Melitodidae," Kiiken-
thal1 includes the genus Psilacabaria Ridley in Acaban'a
Gray — " Zu dieser Gattung rechne ich auch die Gattimg
Psilacabaria Ridley, die keine durchgreifenden Merkmale
aufzmveisen hat. Insbesondere tritt das Abgehen der Zweige
in rechtem Winkel auch bei andern Arten ein. Hierhin gehort
auch Anicella Gray, nicht zu Melitodes, wie Ridley will."

ACABARIA GRACILLIMA (Ridley}.

Psilacabaria gracillima, Ridley, Report Zool. Coll. H.M.S.
" Alert," 1884, p. 364, 'pi. xxxvii., figs. D-D1, pi.
xxxviii., figs. f-f11. Id., Thomson and Mackinnon,
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 671.

A number of broken pieces in a dried condition are referred
to this species. The largest fragment is 90 mm. high.
Branching is dichotomous and approximately in one plane.
The branches are given off approximately at right angles,
although in several instances the angle of the dichotomy is
somewhat smaller. They have a diameter of about 1 mm.
There is no anastomosis. The axis is hard and white.

The polyps occur in spirals on the large branches, but,
on the twigs, they have an irregular bilateral arrangement.
The individual calyces are low, rounded, tubercular verrucas.

The spicules include the following types : — (1) large
cylinders, fusiform to subclavate, slightly tapering to round-
pointed ends and provided with tubercles arranged roughly
in whorls— -280 x -070 mm. ; -262 x -052 mm. ; -245 x -070
mm. ; (2) smaller spindles, more or less curved, with sharply
pointed ends, and tubercles— -262 x -070 mm. ; -245 x -052
mm. ; -210 x -052 mm. ; (3) small subclavate spicules,
tapering from a broad to a sharp-pointed end. with tubercles
-•210 x -053 mm. ; -201 x -043 mm. ; -192 x -035 mm.

The colour is cream to violet.

Locality. — Great Australian Bight, Long. 131°E., 62
fathoms.

Distribution. — Port Molle, Queensland, 12-20 fathoms ; Port
Darwin, North Australia, 8-12 fathoms ; East Australia, 42
fathoms (Ridley). The "Thetis" specimens were obtained
at the following localities off the coast of New South Wales :—
Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ; Station 36, off
Botany Bay, 23-20 fathoms ; Station 48, off Wollongong,
55-56 fathoms ; South coast of New South Wales (Thomson
and Mackinnon).

1. Kiikenthal — Zool. Anz., xxxiii., 1908, p. 194.

68 "ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Order AXIFERA, G. von Koch.

Family ISLD.E.

Genus Isis, Linnceus.

Isis HIPPURIS, Linnceus.

(Plate v., figs. 1-2 ; Plate xi., fig. 1.)

Isis hippuris, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., 10th eel., 1758, p. 799.
Id., Pallas, Eleuchus Zoophytorum, 1766, p. 233.
Id., Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zoophytes, 1786,
p. 105, pi. iii., figs. 1-5. Id., Esper, Die Pflanzenthiere,
i., 1791, p. 279, pi. i., figs. 1-4, pi. ii., pi. iii., figs. 1-3,
pi. iiiA., figs. 1-4. Id., Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp,
corall. flexibles, 1816, p. 476. Id., Lamarck, Hist.
Ani in. sans vert., ii., 1816, p. 302. Id., Lamouroux,
Exposition Methodique, 1821, p. 59, pi. iii., fig. 1.
Id., Blainville, Manuel Actinologie, 1834, p. 503, pi.
Ixxxvi., fig. 1. Id., Lamarck, Hist. anim. sans vert.,
2nd ed., 1836, p. 475. Id., Steenstrup, Om slaegter og
der under Isis hippuris Linn, sammenblendede Arten,
1848, p. 1. Id., Milne-Edwards et Haime, Hist. Nat.
Corall., i., 1857, p. 194. Id., Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1857, p. 283. Id., Kolliker, Icones Histologica?, ii.,
1865, p. 140, pi. xvi., fig. 4, pi. xix., figs. 1-3. Id.,
Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep., Zool., xxxi., 1889,
p. 280. Id., Simpson, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxix.,
1906, p. 421, pi. 43, figs. 1-4. Id., Thomson and
Simpson, Alcyonaria Indian Ocean, ii., 1909, p. 180,
pi. vi., figs. 1-3. Id., Nutting, Gorgonacea Siboga
Exped., v., Isidae, 1910, p. 6, pi. i., figs. 1, la, Ib,
pi. v., fig. 1.

Although a well-known and striking form, this species was
very imperfectly described until Simpson (1906) published
his results of an examination of a number of specimens from
the Andaman Sea. In the " Endeavour " collection there
is a solitary specimen from the coast of Queensland, and the
Australian Museum collection contains five others.

The largest specimen is an incomplete colony rising to a
height of 13-3 cm., with a breadth of 6-4 cm., and a thickness
of 3-5 cm. The main stem, flattened in section, is 9 mm.
in thickness. From this arise the main branches, lateral in
position, Avhich are compressed in the plane of ramification.
The secondary branches are thick and compressed, and give

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 69

rise to cylindrical branches, which may remain simple, but
usually bear terminal twigs with swollen and rounded ends.
The twigs have a diameter of 5 mm. near the tips.

A small specimen, evidently the terminal portion of a
large colony, agrees with the third of the specimens described
by Simpson in its robust and bushy appearance, the marked
upward growth, and the palmate terminations of the twigs.

The remaining four colonies, whose measurements in
centimetres are included in the following table, correspond
most closely with the largest specimen :—

Height. Breadth. Thickness.

I. 7 3 3

II. 10 6-2 1-5

III. 11-2 3-3 2

IV. 12-5 8-2 1-5

V. 12-6 6-4 3

VI. 13-3 6-4 3-5

The axis consists of white calcareous internodes with
longitudinal fluting, and short brown horny nodes. The
longitudinal ridges of the calcareous joints are dentate. Near
the base of the main stem the calcareous joints have lengths
of 5-6 mm., and the horny nodes 1-5-2 mm. In the branches
the internodes are 7 mm. in length, the nodes being reduced
to about 1 mm. The branches arise from the calcareous
joints.

The ccenenchyma is very thick and fleshy, in some parts
2 mm. It is very compact and smooth, and does not show
any indication of the presence of the jointed axis. The
polyps occur all over the surface ; they are numerous, and
about 0-5 mm. apart. There are no verrucse.

There is considerable variety in the spicules of the ccenen-
chyma : — (1) rods with warty knobs irregularly arranged —
•157 x-105 mm. ; -140 x -070 mm. ; -105 x-070 mm. ; (2)
spicules of similar form to (1) but with the warts arranged in
whorls — -157 x -080 mm. ; -150 x -080 mm. ; -140 x -070mm. ;
(3) tri- and quadri-radiate forms — -140 x-105 mm. ; -122x
•122 mm. ; -105 x-087 mm. ; (4) stellate and irregular forms
—087 x -087 mm. ; -087 x -052 mm. ; -079 x -052 mm.

The colour is light brown. Associated with the majority
of the colonies are specimens of the bivalve Pteria chinensis,
Leach.

Localities.— Off the coast of Queensland (" Endeavour ").
Murray Island, Torres Strait (Austr. Mus. Coll.).

70 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Distribution. — Indian Ocean (Ellis, Pallas). Mediterranean
Sea and America (Pallas). North Sea (Linnaeus). Iceland
(Olafsen and Polveseii, Lamouroux). Antilles and United
States (Lamouroux). Straits of Sunda and southern coast
of Sumatra (Ellis and Solander). East Indies (Dana). Am-
boina (Milne-Edwards et Haime). Pacific Ocean (Wright
and Studer). Andaman Sea, surf line and 20 fathoms
(Thomson and Simpson). The Siboga Expedition obtained
specimens at nine stations in the eastern part of the Indian
Archipelago at depths varying from 22-45 metres (Nutting).

Genus MOPSEA, Lamouroux.

MOPSEA DICHOTOMA (LinnCBUS).

Isis dichotoma, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., 10th ed., 1, 1758,
p. 799. Id., Lamarck, Hist. anim. sans vert., ii.,
1816, p. 302.

Mopsea dichotoma, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp, corall. flexibles,
1816, p. 467. Id., Milne-Edwards et Haime, Hist.
Nat. Corall., 1857, p. 197. Id., Wright and Studer,
Chall. Rep., Zool., xxxi.. 1889, p. 41, pi. ix., fig. 10.
Id., Hickson, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), ii., 1890,
p. 137. Id., Roule, Exped. Antarctique Frangaise,
1908, Alcyonaires, p. 5. Id., Thomson and Mac-
kinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 673, pi.
Ixvii., fig. 1.

A number of broken pieces showing dichotomous branching
are referred to this species. In the majority of the specimens
the polyps are arranged in close-wound spirals all over the
branches. On the most slender specimens, however, the
polyps occur in alternating rows on each side, here and there
encroaching on the free median spaces. The spicules are
as described by Thomson and Mackinnon.

Locality. — South east coast of Australia.

Distribution. — Indian Ocean (Lamarck, Lamouroux). Port
Jackson, New South Wales, 35 fathoms (Wright and Studer).
Port Phillip, Victoria (Hickson). Booth- Wandel Island,
Antarctica (Roule). The " Thetis ' specimens were ob-
tained at the following localities off the coast of New South
Wales : — Station 47, off Bulgo, 63-57 fathoms ; station 48,
off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms ; station 53, off Crookhaven
River, 23 fathoms (Thomson and Mackinnon).

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 71

MOPSEA ENCRINULA (Lamarck).

Isis encrinula, Lamarck, Hist. anim. sans vert., ii., 1816,
p. 302.

Mopsea roiicillata, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Corall.
flexibles, 1816, p. 467, pi. xviii., fig. 2.

Mopsea encrinula, Ehrenberg, Corallenth. d. rothen
Meeres, 1834, p. 131. Id., Milne-Edwards et Haime,
Hist. Nat. Corall., 1857, p. 198. Id., Gray, Proc.
Zool. Soc., 1857, p. 284 ; Id., Gray, Cat. Lithophytes
in Brit. Mus., 1870, p. 15. Id., Studer, Monatsber.
Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1878, p. 665. Id., Wright and
Studer, Chall. Rep., Zool.. xxxi., 1889, p. 43, pi. vii.,
figs. 1. la, Ib, pi. ix., fig. 11. Id., Thomson and
Mackinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 674.

Entangled with a mass of Hydrozoa were found a few
broken specimens, which agree with Wright and Studer 's
description of Mopsea encrimda (Lamarck). The salient
characters may be summarised thus : — Branching is plurpe-
like and in one plane ; the ccenenchyma is thick ; the polyps
club-shaped and arranged in close spirals, bending in towards
the stem. The axis is composed of calcareous internodes
with distinct longitudinal furrows, and horny nodes. The
branches arise from the calcareous joints.

The spicules include the following types : — (1) curved,
warty, somewhat flattened spindles, with the convex side
produced into a number of strong, prominent teeth — -192
x -087mm. ; -157 x -052mm. ; -140 x-C61mm. ; -122 x -052
mm. ; (2) scales with irregular margins and spiny warts —
•105 x -070mm. ; -087 x -052mm. ; -070 Y. -052mm. ; -052 x
•043mm. ; (3) small irregular bodies and lt capstans '
•087 x -070mm. ; -052 x -035mm. ; -035 x -035mm.

The colour is yellowish-white.

Locality. — Great Australian Bight, 80-100 fathoms.

Distribution.— ' Les mers de la Nouvelle — Hollande '
(Lamarck). Australia (Lamouroux, Milne-Edwards et
Haime, Gray). North-west coast of Australia, 50 fathoms
(Studer). " Challenger J; Station 162, off East Moncceur
Island, Bass Strait, 38 fathoms (Wright and Studer). The
' Thetis " specimens were obtained at the following localities
off the coast of Xew South Wales : — Eleven miles east of
Broken Bay ; Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ;
Station 44, off Coogee, 49-50 fathoms ; Station 47, off Bulgo,
63-57 fathoms (Thomson and Mackinnon).

72 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

MOPSEA AUSTRALIS, Thomson and Mackinnon.
(Plate vi.)

Mopsea australis, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 675, pi. Lxiv., figs. 1, 2, pi.
Ixvii., fig. 5.

A solitary but magnificent lyre-shaped colony represents
this species, which was described by Thomson and Mackinnon
from very fragmentary specimens.1 It is 37-5crn. high, and
consists of a main stem, 4 mm. in diameter, which arises
from an encrusting, disc-like, calcareous base. The colony
is expanded in one plane, and has a width of 20cm. in its
widest part. At 3-2cm. from the base the main stem divides
into two ecjual branches. These primary branches give off.
along the upper side alone, a series of parallel ascending
secondary branches, which soon attain to nearly the same
thickness as the main branches. In this manner there arises
the appearance of a continuous dichotomy. At the same
time the main branch tends to bend outwards after each
secondary branch is given off, so that its course describes a
series of shallow curves. The secondary branches either
divide dichotomously or remain simple throughout their
length. In general appearance and mode of branching the
colony is very similar to Mopsea dichotoma (Linnaeus).

The coenenchyma is thin, and where it has been worn off.
the axis shows the usual white calcareous internodes with
well marked longitudinal fluting, and the short brown-
coloured nodes.

The polyps are club-shaped, and occur in close spirals
round the branches, to which they are very closely pressed,
so that their mouths are hidden.

The spicules include the following forms : — (1) elongate
to oval scales, with large teeth round their edges, and a few
warts scattered over the surface — -192 x -087mm. ; -183 x
•105mm. ; -157 x •087mm. ; -122 x -070mm. ; (2) warty
spindles and clubs — -157 x -035mm. ; -122 x -017mm. ; -105
x -035mm. ; (3) Capstans, a few crosses, and small irregular
bodies— -070 x -035mm. ; -052 x -035mm.; -052 x -052mm. ;
•052 x -017mm.

1. I heave not been able to find, among the specimens returned to the
Australian Museum by Thomson and Mackinnon, any specimen labelled
as the type of Mopsea australis. I conclude, therefore, that it must have
broken up. The co-type, consisting of a number of " branching pieces of
various lengths " has been preserved.

ALCYONAKIANS. — BRIGGS. 73

The colour of the colony is cream.

Locality.— Fifteen miles N. 35° E. of Saddle Hill, New
South Wales, 34-35 fathoms.

Distribution. — Hitherto recorded only from eleven miles
east of Broken Bay, New South Wales (Thomson and Mac-
kinnon).

MOPSEA FLABELLUM, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea flabellum, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 676, pi. Ixiii., figs. 1-3, pi. Ixvii.,
fig. 6, pi. Ixxi.

The collection contains two incomplete branching speci-
mens, the characters of which agree in detail with Thomson
and Mackinn oil's description of Mopsea flabellum. The
larger of the two colonies is 24 cm. in height. The basal
attachment is lacking. The branching is dichotomous and
strictly confined to one plane. The branches, though
slender, maintain an almost uniform diameter of about
2 mm. throughout their length.

The lower portions of the stem and branches are devoid of
ccenenchyma, and the axis, which is about 3 mm. in diameter,
is composed of creamy -white calcareous internodes with well
marked longitudinal fluting, and brown-coloured horny nodes.
In the twigs, however, the colour of the calcareous joints is
deep orange.

The club-shaped polyps are arranged in close-wound
spirals all over the branches. Their armature consists of
about eight longitudinal rows of overlapping spicules. A
low operculum is formed of eight plates similar in appearance
to the scales with which the polyps are covered.

The superficial spicules are flat, yellow-coloured, circular,
8-shaped, irregular scales — -262 x-105 mm. ; -210 x-157 mm.;
•192 x-061 mm. ; -175 x-175 mm. Each scale is smooth or
bears a few simple warts ; the margin is deeply dentate or
serrate. The spicules of the ccenenchyma are (1) yellow-
coloured spindles with a few large warts — -175 x -052 mm. ;
•157 x -052 mm. ; -122 x -035 mm. ; and (2) small irregular
bodies— -087 x -052 mm. ; -070 x -035 mm.; -052 x -052 rnm.

The colour of the colonies is orange-brown ; the polyps
yellowish.

Locality.— Thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape Wickham,
King Island, Bass Strait, 72-80 fathoms.

74 '' ENDEAVOUS SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from " Thetis " speci-
mens taken off the coast of New South Wales at the fol-
lowing localities: — Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36
fathoms ; Station 44, off Coogee, 49-50 fathoms (Thomson
and Mackinnon).

MOPSEA ELEGANS, Thom.son and Mackinnon.

Mopsea elegans, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 677, pi. Ixiv., figs. 3, 4, pi.
Ixviii., fig. 5, pi. Ixxii.

A number of broken pieces showing dichotomous, sub-
parallel branching, agree with Thomson and Mackinnon's
type. The height of the largest fragment is 18 cm., with
a width of 1-3 cm. The branches vary from 1-5 mm. to
2 mm. in diameter.

The polyps are arranged in two alternating rows on each
side of the younger branches, leaving a median bare line on
•each surface. They tend, however, to encroach on these,
especially towards the lower portions of the colony, where
they are arranged in three or four rows. A comparison with
the polyps of the " Thetis " type shows that the " Endeavour"
specimens are more slender, a difference due probably to
drying.

The spicules of this species are :— (1) superficial ctenoid
scales, each with a nucleus from which radiate fine ridges —
•077 x -052 mm. ; -061 x -052 mm. ; -043 x -043 mm. ; (2)
tuberculate capstans with scarcely any waist — -057 x -043
mm. ; -049 x -035 mm. ; -038 x -035 mm.

The colour is golden-brown.

Localities.— Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Six miles S. 30° E. of Brush Island, New South Wales, 65
fa "horns.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from " Thetis " speci-
mens taken off the coast of New South Wales at the following
localities :— Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ;
Station 41, off Wata Mooli, 52-71 fathoms ; Station 42, off
Wata Mooli, 70-78 fathoms ; Station 47, off Bulgo, 63-57
fathoms ; Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms
(Thomson and Mackinnon).

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 75

MOPSEA WHITELEGGEI, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Mopsea whiteleggei, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 678, pi. Ixvi., figs. 2, 3,
pi. Ixxiii.

Two well-preserved specimens, referable to this species,
were obtained from the same locality. The larger of the two
rises from a slightly encrusting base to a height of 26 cm.,
with a width of 20 cm. across the expanded portion. Branch-
ing begins at a height of 2-5 cm. from the base, and is typically
plume-like ; the branches are confined almost entirely to
one plane. The stouter branches have an average diameter
of 2 mm., and the twigs of 1 mm. near their tips. The second
specimen is 21-5 cm. high, with a spread of 16-5 cm. across
the branched part.

The diameter of the axis near the base is 3 mm. The
-cceneiichyma has worn away from this portion of the stem,
and the axis shows the white calcareous internodes with fine
longitudinal ridges, and the amber-coloured nodes. The
twigs arise from the calcareous internodes.

The polyps are arranged alternately in a single row along
the twigs, here and there encroaching on the middle line and
becoming irregular in disposition. They are club-shaped,
with truncate mouths, and turn upwards towards the ex-
tremity of the twig. The average length of a polyp is about
•6 mm.

The spicules are (1) small, colourless, flattened spindles and
curved lancet-shaped plates, produced more strongly on one
side of the spicule than on the other into a number of tooth-
like warts— -262 x -052 mm. ; -245 x -052 mm. ; -175 x -070
mm.; -131 x -087 mm. ; (2) small spindles and club-like
forms — -131 x -026 mm. ; -122 x -035 mm. ; -096 x -035 mm. ;
-087 x -035 mm. ; -052 x -026 mm.

The colour of the colonies is creamy-white.

Locality. — Six miles S. 30° E. of Brush Island, New South
Wales, 65 fathoms.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from " Thetis " speci-
mens taken off the coast of New South Wales at the following
localities : — Eleven miles east of Broken Bay ; Station 10,
off Broken Head, 28 fathoms ; Station 40, off Wata Mooli,
52 fathoms ; Station 44, off Coogee, 49-50 fathoms ;
Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms (Thomson and
Mackinnon).

76 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESTILTS.

MOPSEA PLUMACEA, Sp. HOV.

(Plate iv., fig. 1 ; Plate vii.)

This new species is well represented by several complete
colonies, and a number of incomplete branching pieces.

One complete specimen is 22-5cm. in height, with a maxi-
mum breadth across the expanded portion of llcm. The
colonies are typically feather-like, the long frond-like
branches bearing on each side a row of alternating twigs.
These twigs usually remain simple, but occasionally branch
in the same pinnate manner. The colony is attached by a
well developed calcareous expansion, about 12mm. in thick-
ness. From this there rises a cylindrical stem, 2-5mm in
diameter. At a height of 5-7cm., the stem divides into two
main branches, which bear numerous twigs. The branches
have a diameter of 2mm. Branching is confined to one
plane.

The axis is composed of white calcareous internodes with
fine longitudinal fluting, and short amber-coloured nodes.
The longitudinal ridges of the calcareous joints are dentate.
Near the base of the stem, the horny nodes have lengths of
2-3mm., and the calcareous internodes of O5mm. In
some cases the internodes are entirely overlapped by the
horny joints. Higher up the calcareous joints are l-Sinm. in
length, the horny joints being reduced to 0-25mm. The
calcareous internodes give rise to one twig each in alternate
succession.

The ccenenchyma is thin, and on the twigs is almost en-
tirely hidden by the numerous polyps. These occur in
close-wound spirals over the whole surface of the twigs. In
the youngest twigs the spiral is wider, but nowhere is there
any trace of a bilateral arrangement. On the branches,
however, a few scattered polyps occupy a lateral position,
here and there encroaching on the middle line.

The polyps are small, O5-O75mm. in height, and club-
shaped, with truncate mouths, which turn upward toward
the extremity of the twig. In several instances inverted
polyps were observed with their mouths directed towards
the proximal end of the twig. The calyces are armoured
with longitudinal rows of transversely arranged, slightly
overlapping scales ; there are from ten to twrelve of these in
the abaxial rows. These spicules are arranged in an imbri-
cate manner ; the imbrication being clearly seen in a profile
view of the polyp.

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 77

The calyx spicules are colourless, flat scales, transversely
elongate, 8-shaped, and irregular. The following measure-
ments of the length and breadth in millimetres were taken : —
•192x-113; -175x-122; -157x-105; -140x-087; -105 x
•087. Their free edge is deeply dentate ; simple warts are
scattered over the surface, and the border round the exposed
portion of the scale bears fine radiating ridges. A low eight-
rayed operculum is formed by similar scales. There are
also somewhat flattened, curved spindles, with the convex
side produced into a number of sharp projecting warts —
•192 x -052mm. ; -175 x -043mm. ; -157 x -035mm. ; -149 x
•035mm.

The spicules of the coenenchyma are (1) stout spindles
with prominent warts — -113 x -070mm.; -122 x -070mm. ;
•105 x -052mm. ; -096 x -052mm. ; and (2) capstan-like
forms and small irregular bodies — -105 x -061mm. ; -087 x
•070mm. ; -070 x -052mm. ; -052 x -035mm.

The colour of the colonies is creamy- white.

Position. — This species agrees in many respects with
Mopsea whiteleggei, Thomson and Mackinnon1, but is dis-
tinguished from that species by (1) the invariable arrange-
ment of the polyps in close-wround spirals round the twigs,
(2) the smaller number of scales in the abaxial rows of the
polyp calyx, and (3) the quite different type of spicules.

Localities. — South Australian Coast.

Fifteen miles south of St. Francis Island, Nuyt Archi-
pelago, Great Australian Bight, 30 fathoms.

Thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape Wickham, King
Island, Bass Strait, 72-80 fathoms.

MOPSEA REPENS, sp. nov.
(Plate iv., fig. 2 ; Plate viii.)

This species is based on several branching specimens, of
which the largest is 13-5cm. in height, with a spread of
14-5cm. across the expanded portion. The branching is
strictly confined to one plane. The basal attachment of
the stem is missing. Branching begins at a height of T4cm.,
and is very luxuriant. The main stem is bent in a zigzag
manner, forming an angle wherever branches arise. The

1. Thomson and Mackinnon — Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 678,
pi. Ixvi., figs. 2 and 3, pi. Ixxiii.

78 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

branches ascend in the same zigzag manner, and are bent
at the point of departure of each twig. The stem has a
maximum diameter of 2 -5cm. ; the average diameter of the
larger branches is 2mm., and of the twigs 1mm.

The axis is made up of orange-coloured calcareous inter-
nodes with fine longitudinal fluting, and short brown-coloured
nodes. Near the base of the colony the major portion of the
stem is composed of horny nodes, which are l-5inm. long.
These entirely overlap the calcareous internodes. Higher
up the calcareous joints are 2mm. in length ; the horny
joints being reduced to Oomm. The branches arise from
the horny nodes.

The polyps are mainly confined to the twigs, along each
side of which they are arranged alternately in a single row.
A few occur here and there on the branches. The arrange-
ment of the polyps on the twigs shows great regularity and
evenness. There are about eleven polyps on one side in a
length of 1cm.

The polyps are 0-75- 1mm. in height, and club-shaped
with truncate mouths, which are incurved toward the cortex
of the twig. The calyces are armoured with eight rather
indefinite, longitudinal rows of transversely arranged, over-
lapping scales. The abaxial rows are composed of about
sixteen such spicules. The calyx spicules are elongate to
oval, ctenoid scales with their free edge crisply waved ; the
remainder of the margin bears more or less deep indentations.
Warts are scattered over the surface of the scale, and the
clear border round the exposed portion of the scale bears
strongly-marked radiating ridges. The following measure-
ments of the length and breadth in millimetres were taken :—
- 166 x -087; • 140 x -087; • 122 x -070; • 105 x -052. Alow
eight-rayed operculum is formed by similar scales.

The spicules of the coenenchyma are yellow spindles—
•140 x -052mm. ; -122 x -070mm. ; -105 x -052111111. ; -087 x
•035mm. They have relatively few, but large warts. There
are also a few crosses and small irregular bodies — -087 x -070
mm. ; -070 x -052mm. ; -052 x -052mm. The ccenenchyma
is thin and the spicules follow the longitudinal direction of
the stalk.

The colour of the colonies is reddish-brown.

Localities. — Thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape Wickham,
King Island, Bass Strait, 72-80 fathoms.

Fifteen miles south of St. Francis Island, South Australia,
.30 fathoms.

ALCYONARIANS. BRIGGS. 79

Family PRIMKOHXE.

Genus STACHYODES, Wright and Studer.

STACHYODES STUDERI, Versluys.

Stachyodes regularis, Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep., Zool.,
xxxi., 1889, p. 55, pi. xi., figs. 2, 2a, pi. xx., fig. 3.

Stachyodes studcri, Versluys, Gorgoniden Siboga Expecl.,
ii., Primnoidae, 1906. p. 94, figs. 112-117. Id., Thom-
son and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911,
p. 680.

A single specimen in the collection agrees with the descrip-
tion of Stachyodes studeri given by Versluys. The fragment
is 55 mm. in length, without a basal attachment. The
polyps occur in whorls of eight to ten. Whorls of new young
polyp buds are sometimes visible between the whorls of
adult polyps.

The colour of the specimen is creamy-white ; the axis is
greenish-bronze, with fine longitudinal striations.

Locality. — Off Long Reef, New South Wales, 50 fathoms.

Distribution. — " Challenger " Station 171, off the Kermadec
Islands, 600 fathoms (Wright and Studer). Celebes Sea,
1080 and 1165-1264 metres (Versluys). The "Thetis'
specimens were obtained off the coast of New South Wales
at the following localities : — Station 15, off Norah Head, 32-
48 fathoms ; Station 42, off Wata Mooli, 70-78 fathoms ;
Station 44, off Coogee, 49-50 fathoms (Thomson and Mac-
kinnon).

Nutting1 records the occurrence of Stachyodes regularis,
Wright and Studer, at " Albatross " Station 3879, south of
Lanai Island, 923-1081 fathoms. He states, moreover, that
" the original specimens were secured by the Challenger in the
South Atlantic, near Tristan da Cunha, 75-150 fathoms." I
can find no authority for this locality, since Wright and
Studer and Versluys state definitely that the type locality is
the Kermadec Islands.

1. Nutting — Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxiv., 1908, p. 577.

80 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Genus AMPHILAPHIS, Wright and Studer.

AMPHILAPHIS PLUMACEA, Thomson and Mackinnon.

(Plate iv., fig. 4).

Amphilaphis plumacea, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 680, pi. Ixv., fig. 3, pi.
Ixviii., fig. 3, pi. Ixxiv.

The occurrence of five colonies in this collection allows of
the addition of several details, especially as regards habit,
to the description given by Thomson and Mackinnon.

They are slightly smaller than the 18-5 cm. high colony
obtained by the " Thetis " Expedition off the coast of New
South Wales ; the largest is 17 -5 cni. in height, with a
diameter of 1-5 mm. at the base. One markedly flabellate
colony, 7-5 cm. high, has a width of as much as 13-7 cm., and
a diameter of 2 mm. at the base of the stem. The corres-
ponding dimensions of another flabellate colony are — height
9 cm. ; width 13-5 cm. ; diameter of stem 2 mm.

The following significant characters can be made out.
The colonies are expanded in one plane. From a slightly
swollen base arises a cylindrical stem, which soon branches.
Lateral branches, varying much in size, are given off from
either side of the plane, and from these spring other branches,
which again divide in a dichotomous manner.

In a few cases the ccenenchyma, which is very thin, is
intact ; generally it is more or less worn away. The axis is
dark bronze in colour, and marked by fine longitudinal furrows.

The polyps are densely crowded and arranged in a spiral.
They vary from 1-1 -5 mm. in length.

The dimensions of the ctenoid scales, with which the polyps
are armoured, are — -315 x -236 mm. ; -297 x -201 mm. ; -245 x
•192mm.

The opercular scales (in the form of isosceles triangles)
yielded the following measurements : — -420 x -227 mm. ; -400
x -210 mm. ; -358 x -218 mm.

The spicules of the ccenenchyma are circular to oval scales.
The following measurements were taken: — -175 x- 105 mm. ;
• 157 x -122 mm. ; -122 x-105 min.

The colour of the colonies is creamy-white.

Locality. — South-east coast of Australia.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from " Thetis " speci-
mens taken off the coast of New South Wales at the following
localities : — Eleven miles E. by N. of Barrenjoey, 30-40
fathoms ; Station 22, off Newcastle Bight, 40-26 fathoms ;
Station 40, off Wata Mooli, 52 fathoms ; Station 44, off
Coogee, 49-50 fathoms (Thomson and Mackinnon).

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 81

Genus PLUMARELLA, f »'/>///.

PLUMARELLA THETIS, Thomson and Mackinnon.

(Plate ix.).

Plumarella thctis, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 683, pi. Ixvi., fig. 5, pi. Ixviii.,
fig. 6, pi. Ixxvi.

Two frond-like branches correspond with Thomson and
Mackinnon's description of Plumarella thetis. They are re-
markably robust, the larger being 32-5 cm. long, with a
diameter of 4 mm. near the base. The branches give off
along each side a row of alternating twigs, which remain
simple. The twigs are 11 cm. long, with a diameter of 2 mm.
There are seven to eight twigs in each row in a length of 5 cm.

The second frond is 26 cm. long, and has a diameter of
3 mm. near the base. The twigs are 7-5 cm. in length, with
a diameter of 2 mm.

The polyps are arranged in close-wound spirals round the
twigs, but are scattered irregularly over the whole surface
of the branches. They are armed with longitudinal rows of
large overlapping scales, of which there are about six in the
abaxials ; they are broad, shield-like, and fan-like scales,
with a nucleus surrounded by numerous finely-tuberculate
warts, and with a clear border between the outer margin and
the warted portion bearing radiating ridges — -612 x -367mm. ;
•595 x -280 mm. ; -507 x -367 mm. ; -455 x -297 mm. The
opercular scales are isosceles triangles with a strong T-square
ridge — -472 x -210 mm. ; -455 x -192 mm. The scales of the
ccenenchyma are triangular, oval, and fan-shaped, with
tuberculate warts surrounding an excentric nucleus — -385 x
•350 mm. ; -367 x -236 mm. ; -280 x -227 mm.

The colour of the specimens is light-brown. The axis is
almost black and bears fine longitudinal striations.

Locality.— Fifteen miles X. 35° E. of Saddle Hill, New
South Wales, 34-35 fathoms.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from specimens ob-
tained by the " Thetis " off the coast of New South Wales at
the following localities : — Eleven miles E. by N. of Broken
Bay, 30-40 fathoms ; Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36
fathoms ; Station 40, off Wata Mooli, 52 fathoms ; Station
42, off Wata Mooli, 70-78 fathoms ; Station 47, off Bulgo,
63-57 fathoms ; Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms ;
Station 53, off Crookhaven "River, 23 fathoms (Thomson and
Mackinnon).

82 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PLUMARELLA FILICOIDES, Thomson and Mackinnon.

Plumarella filicoides, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 686, pi. Ixv., fig. 5, pi.
Ixviii., fig. 1, pi. Ixxviii.

Two specimens represent this species. ^One colony has
the basal portion intact. The larger of the two has a height
of 2O5cm., with a width of 17-ocm. across the expanded
portion. Its basal attachment consists of a slightly en-
crusting expansion from which rises a cylindrical stem, 3mm.
in diameter. Branching is typically feather-like, and is
confined to one plane. At 5-5cm. from the base, the stem
gives off two stout branches which bear on each side a row
of alternating twigs. The stem also bears twigs, alternating
in a single row along each side. The twigs remain simple,
and their average length is 4cm., with a diameter of 2mm.
There are ten to eleven twigs on each side of a branch in a
length of 5cm.

The polyps are arranged bilaterally on the stem and
branches ; a few, however, are scattered over the free median
.surfaces of the latter. They are arranged in close-wound
spirals on the twigs. The polyps are of two sizes : — (1)
small polyps partially sunken in the ccenenchyma and closely
pressed against the branch. They are armed with a few-
broad scales ; there are three or four of these in the abaxial
longitudinal rows. The operculum forms a sharp, well-
defined cone of eight isosceles triangles ; (2) large swollen
polyps armed with four scales in the abaxial rows, and two
or three in the adaxial-laterals. The operculum is low.

The calyx scales are broad, shield-like and fan-like with
a distinct nucleus surrounded by numerous tuberculate
warts, and a narrow clear border bearing strongly marked
ridges— -490 x -280mm. ; -367 x -350mm. ; -297 x -262mm. ;
•262 x -525mm. The opercular scales are high, sharp-
pointed isosceles triangles bearing a strong T-square ridge —
•455 x -210mm. ; -385 x -192mm. ; -350 x -175mm. The
spicules of the coenenchyma are large, oval and fan-shaped
scales, without the clear border. They are covered Avith
tuberculate warts, which surround a well-defined nucleus —
•332 x -210mm. ; -280 x -280mm. ; -192 x- 122mm. ; -122 x
•122mm.

The colour of the colonies is very light brown. The axis
is furrowed, and of a greenish-bronze colour.

ALCYONARIANS. BRIGGS. 83

Locality. — Six miles S. 30° E. of Brush Island, New South
Wales, 65 fathoms.

Distribution. — Hitherto known only from specimens ob-
tained by the " Thetis " off the coast of New South Wales at
the following localities : — Station 13, off Cape Three Points,
41-50 fathoms ; Station 17, off Broughton Island, 29-48
fathoms ; Station 34, off Port Jackson, 39-36 fathoms ;
Station 48, off Wollongong, 55-56 fathoms (Thomson and
Mackinnon).

PLUMARELLA AUSTRALIS, sp. nov.
(Plate iv., fig. 3 ; Plate x. ; Plate xi., fig. 2.)

This new species is represented by both dried specimens
and others in spirit.

The colonies are typically feather-like. In the largest
specimen there is a slightly flattened stem, 5mm. in thick-
ness. The colony has a height of 43cm., with a spread of
32-5cm. across the expanded portion. The basal attach-
ment is lacking. The branching is confined strictly to one
plane. The stem gives off strongly flattened branches at
rather wide intervals, which bear on each side a row of
alternating twigs. These twigs occasionally branch in the
same pinnate manner, but usually they remain simple. The
longest twigs are 8cm. in length, with a diameter of 2mm.
There are eight twigs in each row in a length of 5cm.

Some of the colonies show the basal portion, which con-
sists of a well-developed calcareous expansion about 20mm.
in thickness. From this there rises a cylindrical stem, 7mm.
in diameter, which soon becomes compressed with its long
axis lying in the same plane as that of the colony.

The polyps are arranged bilaterally on the stem and
branches ; on the twigs their arrangement is also lateral,
but there is a tendency, in some instances, to encroach on
the middle line. They are arranged in a double row along
each side on the twigs, those of one row alternating with
those of the other on the same side. The polyps have an
average length of -75 mm.

Scattered among the normal-sized polyps in some of the
colonies, there are a few large swollen polyps of about twice
the size of the others ; these contain reproductive bodies.

84 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The calyx scales are arranged in longitudinal rows, of
which the abaxials alone are complete. These consist of
three to four relatively large overlapping scales. The adaxials
are practically absent. The abaxial-laterals are reduced to
about one small scale. The operculum is a well defined
sharp cone formed of eight rather high isosceles triangles,
which bear on their inner surface a well marked keel or
ridge. The abaxial pair is the largest ; the adaxial pair
is very small and lies bent under the other opercular
scales.

The large swollen polyps differ from the normal ones not
only in size, but they have a much lower operculum, and
the polyp scales are more numerous. The armature consists
of overlapping scales of which there are about five in the
abaxial longitudinal rows, and two to three in the adaxial-
laterals.

The calyx scales are broad, shield-like and fan-like, with
finely toothed margins, and a well marked excentric nucleus
surrounded by tuberculate warts. The relatively clear
border of the scale is narrow, and bears strongly marked
radiating ridges. The following measurements of the length
and breadth of the calyx scales were taken in millimetres : —
•612 x -315 ; -577 x -315 ; -525 x -385 ; -455 x -332 ; -367 x
•350; -332 x -437. The eight opercular scales are of very
unequal size— -525 x -210mm. ; -490 x -192mm. ; -402 x
•192mm.; -350 x -210mm. ; -280 x -140mm. They are
sharply pointed isosceles triangles with a strong median
ridge. Numerous small warts are grouped along the sides
of the ridge. The border is relatively broad and bears a
number of jagged projections. The margins of the two
long sides of the scale are minutely dentate.

The spicules of the coenenchyma are rather large scales,
oval, fan-shaped and triangular, closely studded with tuber-
culate warts, and without a clear border. The following
measurements were taken : — -490 x -332mm. ; -437 x-341
mm. ; -420 x -350mm. ; -385 x -332mm. ; -315 x -297mm.
A few oval to spherical bodies covered with warts are also
present- — -192 x -175mm. ; -175 x -175mm. ; -122 x -122mm.

The colour of the colonies is creamy-white ; the axis is
greenish-bronze to black, and bears fine longitudinal
striations.

Locality. — Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Aus-
tralia, 75 fathoms.

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 85

Genus PRIMNOELLA. f'iraij.

PRIMNOELLA AUSTRALASIA, Gray.

Primnoa australasice, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1849, p. 146,
pi. ii., figs. 8, 9 ; Id., Gray, Ann. Mao-. Nat. Hist., (2),
v., 1850, p. 510.

Primnoella australasice, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1857, p.
286, and 1859, p. 483 ; Id., Gray, Cat. Lithophytes in
Brit. Mus., 1870, p. 50. Id., Verrill, Bull. U.S. Nat.
Mus., 1876, p. 76. Id., Wright and Stucler, Chall.
Rep., Zool., xxxi., 1889, p. 88, pi. xviii., figs. 1, la,
pi. xxi., fig. 15. Id., Versluys, Gorgoniden Siboga
Exped., ii., Primnoidse, 1906, p. 52, figs. 55-60. Id.,
Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13,
1911, p. 688, pi. Ixi., fig. 1.

This species is represented by a single colony, which is
imperfect at the tip, and has a length of 81 cm. The lower
portion of the stem is devoid of polyps and ccenenchyma,
which is first met with at a height of 55 mm. The thickness
of the axis at its base is 5 mm., but rapidly diminishes to
3 mm. in diameter. At the point of attachment of the
colony the axis is hard and calcareous, but soon becomes
horny and flexible. There are fifteen to nineteen calyces,
2 mm. in length, on each closely packed whorl.

Locality. — Fifteen and a-half miles S. 8° E. of Cape Everard,
Victoria, 66 fathoms.

Distribution. — P. australasice has been recorded frequently
from the eastern and southern coasts of Australia, from
Tasmania (Gray), and from Bluff Harbour, New Zealand
(Verrill). Gray also gives as a locality the " Australian
Seas." The " Challenger " Expedition obtained specimens
from Port Jackson, New South Wales, 30-35 fathoms, and
from off Twofold Bay, New South Wales, 150 fathoms.
Records by Thomson and Mackinnon tell of its presence at
nine stations on the coast of New South Wales.

Under the name Primnoella australasice (Gray), Hickson1
recorded a Primnoid from Port Phillip. Victoria, which he
now refers to Caligorgia flabellum, Ehrenberg. He writes2
" I ask therefore to correct my report by substituting the
name Caligorgia flabellum (Ehrenberg) for Primnoella austral-
asise (Gray), in the list of species obtained at Port Phillip."

1. Hickson— Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), ii.. iS'.in. ,.. l:iS.

2. Hickson— Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet,, (n.s.), xix., I'.iOT, ]>. 4<i.

86 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PRIMNOELLA GRANDISQUAMIS, Wright and Studer.

Primnoella grandisqiiamis, Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep.,
Zool., xxxi., 1889, p. 86. pi. xvii., fig. 4, pi. xxi., fig.
13. Id., Yer.sluys, Gorgoniden Siboga Exped., ii.,
Primnoidse, 1906, p. 55.

The collection contains a number of broken pieces of
Primnoella grandisquamis, Wright and Studer, which does
not appear to have been obtained since those authors pub-
lished their original description of a specimen 39 mm. in
length.

They were trawled from the type locality in 40 fathoms.
The largest has a height of 210 mm. ; the basal attachment
is lacking. The axis has an almost uniform diameter of
0-5 mm. The colony is a long, flexible, thread-like, un-
branched stem around which the polyps are arranged in
whorls. There are four to five polyps in a whorl. The
average length of a polyp is 1-5 mm., with a diameter of
0-9 mm. The whorls are about 1-5 mm. apart. Young
polyp buds, arranged in whorls, are visible in the internodes.

Tho calyx scales are large, transversely elongate, and
overlapping, and only two longitudinal rows are visible from
the dorsal side. Each scale shows a nucleus with fine lines
radiating from it. The surface is studded with small warts.
The free margin of the scale is entire ; the remainder is
strongly toothed. Their dimensions are — -385 x -262 mm. ;
•315 x -227 mm. ; -315 x -262 mm. ; -297 x -245 mm. The
opercular scales are short, flat structures — -227 x -070 mm.
The spicules of the coenenchyma are oval, four-cornered, and
polygonal plates, with a central nucleus and teeth round the
edges, and with warts over the surface- — -402 x -227 mm. ;
-385 x -262 mm. ; -350 x -297 mm. ; -192 x -113 mm.

The colour of the specimens is creamy-white.

Locality. — Off Eden, Twofold Bay, New South Wales, 40
fathoms.

Distribution. — Hitherto recorded only from " Challenger '
Station 163A, off Twofold Bay, New South Wales, 150
fathoms (Wright and Studer).

Genus CALIGORGIA, Gray (emend. Studer).
CALIGORGIA FLABELLUM (Ehre.ribe.rg).

Gorgonia verticlllaris, Esper, Fortsetz. der Pflanzenthiere,

x., 1797, p. 156, pi. 42.
Primnoa flabellum, Ehrenberg, Corallenthiere rothen Meeres,

1834, p. 134. Id., Kolliker, Icones Histiologies,

1865, p. 135, pi. xvii., fig. 11.

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. <c>7

Callogorgia /lobelia. Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1859, p. 484.

Calligorgia verticiUata, Gray, Cat. Lithophytes Brit. Mus.,
1870, p. 35.

XiphoceUa esperi, Gray, Cat. Lithophytes Brit. Mus., 1870,
p. 36.

Calligorgia flabelhtm, Studer, Monatsber. Akad. Wiss.
Berlin, 1878, p. 646, pi. ii., fig. 13, a, b.

CaUgorgia fiabeU'im, Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep.,
Zool., xxxi., 1889, p. 79, pi. xiv., fig. 2. Id., Studer,
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xxv., 1894, p. 65. Id., Ver-
sluys, Gorgoniden Siboga Exped., ii., Primnoidae,
1906, p. 69^ pi. v., fig. 13, pi. vi., fig. 14. Id., Thom-
son and Henderson, Alcyonaria Indian Ocean, i., 1906,
p. 43. Id., Kiikenthal, Zool. Anzeig., xxxi., 1907,
p. 209. Id.. Kinoshita, Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo, xxiii.,
12, IOCS, p. 35, pi. vi., fig. 45. Id., Nutting, Proc.
U.S. Xat. Mus., xliii., 1913, p. 60.

The collection contains a single incomplete specimen,
which I am unable to separate from the Japanese CaUgorgia
fiabdlum (Ehreiiberg). The polyps and spicules agree with
the description and figures given by Versluys, except that
the sculpture of the distal scales is not so pronounced as
figured. In my specimen the number of polyps in a whorl
is usually four, sometimes five, never so many as seven as
in those of Versluys. Nutting's specimen has eighteen polyps
to a whorl on the bases of the larger branches.

The colour of the colony is cream.

Locality.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 129° 6J', 200-300
fathoms.

Distribution. — Previously recorded from near Mauritius,
Japan, Formosa, and the western part of the Indian Ocean.
"Challenger' Station 232, Hyalonema-ground, south of
Japan, 345 fathoms (Wright and Studer). Port Phillip,
Victoria (Hickson1). The "Albatross" Expedition obtained
it at the following localities :— Station 3406, Lat. 0° 16' N.,
Long. 90° 21' 30" W., 551 fathoms ; Station 3424, Lat.
21° 15' N., Long. 106° 23' W., 676 fathoms ; Station 3353,
Lat. 7° 6' 15" N., Long. 80° 34' W., 695 fathoms (Studer).
" Siboga " Station 251, 5° 2S'-4 S., 132° 0'-2 E., Kei Island,
204 metres (Versluys). " Investigator " Station 333, 6° 37'
N., 79° 38J' E., 401 fathoms (Thomson and Henderson).
Indian Ocean, 752 metres (Kiikenthal). Sagami Sea, Japan
(Kinoshita). " Albatross " Station 4936, Sata Misaki Light,
N. 21° E., 103 fathoms (Nutting).

1. Under the name of Primnoella aiixtralu«i<i (Oray).

88 ' ENDEAVOUR ' ' SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family GORGONELLID.E.
Genus CTENOCELLA, Valenciennes.

Simpson1 and Nutting2 have both shown that the genus
Scirpearia, as understood by authors generally, is not iden-
tical with that of Cuvier, the latter being based on a Pen-
natulid. Simpson has retained the genus in its emended
form, which, however, cannot be admitted according to the
rules of zoological nomenclature. Nutting, on the other
hand, has distributed the various species which were in-
cluded in Scirpearia into other genera of the Gorgonellida?.

Simpson also argued that Ctenocella is not distinct from
his emended Scirpearia from which it only differs in the
mode of branching. If his opinion be accepted, the single
species of Ctenocella (C. pectinata) must be placed in one of
the several genera into which Nutting has distributed the
various species erroniously included in Scirpearia. Nutting,
however, has not recognised the identity of Ctenocella and
Scirpearia (emended), but maintains it as a good genus ;
under the circumstances I prefer to follow him.

CTENOCELLA PECTINATA (Pallas).
(Plate iv., fig. 5 ; Plate xii.)

Gorgonia pectinata, Pallas, Elenchus Zoophytorum, 1766,
p. 179. Id., Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zoophytes,
1786, p. 85. Id., Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp, corall.
flexibles, 1816, p. 416.

Gorgonella pectinata, Kolliker, Icones Histiologies, ii.,
1865, p. 140, pi. xviii., fig. 41.

Ctenocella pectinata. Valenciennes, Comptes Rendus, xli.,
1855, p. 14. Id., Milne-Edwards et Haime, Hist.
Nat. Corall., 1857, p. 185. Id., Gray, Cat. Litho-
phytes Brit. Mus., 1870, p. 26. Id., Studer, Monats-
ber. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1878, p. 657. Id., Ridley,
Zool. Coll. H.M.S. " Alert," 1884, p. 348. Id., Studer,
Versuch eines Systems der Alcyonarien, 1887, p. 68.
Id., Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep., Zool., xxxi.,
1889, p. Ixvi. Id., Studer, Alcyonarien Sammlung

1. Simpson — Proc. R. Irish Academy, xxviii., 1910, p. 307.

2. Nutting — Gorgonacea Siboga Expcd., vi., Gorgoncllidae, 1910, p. 5.

ALCYONAEIANS. — BRIGGS. 89

Naturhistorischen Museums Llibeck, 1894, p. 119.
Id., Nutting, Gorgonacea Siboga Exped., vi., Gor-
gonellidae, 1910, p. 15. Id., Thomson and Mac-
kinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 691, pi.
Ixxxi.

Scirpearia pectinata, Simpson, Proc. R. Irish Academy,
xxviii., 1910, p. 319, figs. 36-45.

The first detailed descriptions of this species are those of
Nutting (1910) and Simpson (1910), who gave a compre-
hensive review of its structure. The species is represented
in the collection by twenty-nine specimens, all of which are
preserved in the dry condition. Although showing a moder-
ate amount of variation in external form, the colonies may
be described as typically lyre-shaped. The description and
figure of a colony given by Thomson and Mackinnon (1911)
portray with exactitude their salient features. The largest
specimen is 62cm. in height, with a spread of 31cm. The
main stem, which arises from an encrusting base, is 3cm.
long and 8mm. in diameter. The main branches into which
the stem forks, diverge at an angle of about 45°, and from
their upper surface alone give off a series of erect, parallel
twigs. The main branches have a basal diameter of 7mm.,
and the longest is 52cm. in length. Some of the lesser
branches are more strongly developed than the rest, and
these either give off ascending twigs, or divide in a dichoto-
mous manner. The twigs, up to 23cm. in length, have a
uniform diameter of about 2-5mm. They are regularly
spaced, and average about llmm. apart.

The ccenenchyma is thin, compact and smooth. A
distinct median furrow can be made out both on the main
branches and on the twigs. Where the ccenenchyma is
worn away the axis of the colony is seen to be light brown
in colour and deeply furrowed.

The polyps are very numerous, 0-5- 1mm. apart, and are
retracted into low wart-like verrucae. They are scattered
all over the surface of the larger branches, but tend towards
a more or less bilateral arrangement on the twigs.

The spicules include (1) colourless warty double clubs—
•070 x -035mm. ; -066 x -035mm. ; (2) elongated forms ap-
proaching double spindles — -087 x -026mm. ; -070 x -026mm.;
and (3) a few crosses — -052 x -052mm. ; -035 x -035mm.

The colour of the colonies is creamy-white to yellowish.

90 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Localities. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Eight miles east of Sanclon Bluff, Queensland, 35-40
fathoms.

Distribution. — Indian Ocean (Lamouroux). Seas of the
Moluccas (Lamarck). India and China (Gray). Cuba (Ridley).
Elphinstone Island, Mergui Archipelago (Ridley)1. Aus-
tralia (Studer, Ridley, Thomson and Mackinnon). Rotti
and Aru Islands (Nutting). Burma and Andamans
(Simpson).

Order STELECHOTOKEA, Bourne.

Family TELESTID^.

Genus TELESTO, Lamouroux.

TELESTO ARBOREA, Wright and Studer.

Telesto arborea, Wright and Studer, Chall. Rep., Zool., xxxi.,
1889, p. 262, pi. xxxix., figs. 1, la. Id., Thomson and
Henderson, Proc. Zool. Soc., i., 1906, p. 434. Id.,
Thomson and Simpson, Alcyonaria of the Indian
Ocean, ii., 1909, p. 276. Id., Thomson and Mackinnon,
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 692, pi. Ixvii., fig. 2.

This species is represented by two fragments of a dark
brown colour. The lateral polyps are cylindrical, 4 to 5 mm.
in length and 2 mm. in diameter. The spicules agree with
the figure given by Thomson and Mackinnon. They are
transparent spindles with long, irregular, sharp spines.

Locality. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Distribution. — " Challenger " Station 190, in the Arafura
Sea, lat. 8° 56' S., long. 136° 5' E., 49 fathoms (Wright and
Studer). Kokotoni Harbour, 5 fathoms, and Wasin Channel,
10 fathoms, Zanzibar (Thomson and Henderson). Andamans,
270-45 fathoms ; southern portion of Malacca Strait ; Gaspar
Straits ; east coast of Sumatra ; Karachee (Thomson and
Simpson). " Thetis " Station 42, off Wata Mooli, New South
Wales, 70-78 fathoms (Thomson and Mackinnon).

1. Ridley— Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xxi., 1889, p. 243.

ALCYONARIANS. — BRIGGS. 91

TELESTO TRICHOSTEMMA (Dana).

Gorgonia trichostemma, Dana, Zooph., 1846, p. 665,
pi. lix., figs. 3, 3a, 3b.

Telesto trichostemma, Verrill, Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts,
xlv., 1868, p. 415. Id., Wright and Studer, Chall.
Rep., Zool., xxxi., 1889, p. 264. Id., Hickson, Fauna
Geography Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, ii.,
1, 1903, p. 481. Id., Thomson and Henderson, in
Herdman, Rep. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, Part
III., Suppl. Rep., xx., Alcyonaria, 1905, p. 319. Id.,
Thomson and Simpson, Alcyonaria of the Indian
Ocean, ii., 1909. p. 277. Id., Thomson and Mackinnon,
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.. 13, 1911, p. 692.

A solitary specimen is referred to this species. It is 13 cm.
in length, and of a yellowish-brown colour. It agrees with
the description given by Wright and Studer, and with speci-
mens in the Australian Museum collection. The basal attach-
ment is intact, and consists of a flattened expansion. The
spicules are exactly like those described in the " Challenger '
Report.

Locality. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Distribution. — Fiji Islands (Dana). Torres Strait, 3-11
fathoms (Wright and Studer). Mulaku Atoll, 25 fathoms,
and Miladumadulu Atoll, Maldive Archipelago, 24 fathoms
(Hickson). Patani, Si am (Thomson and Henderson).
" Thetis " Station 44, off Coogee, Xew South Wales, 49-50
fathoms (Thomson and Mackinnon).

Family KOPHOBELEMNONID.E.
Genus KOPHOBELEMNON, Kolliker.

KOPHOBELEMNON SCHMELTZII (Kolliker).

Sclerobelemnon schmeltzii, Kolliker, Anatom. Systemat.
Beschreib. Alcyonarien, Abth. i., Pennatuliden, 1872,
p. 312, pi. xx:., figs. 184a, 184b, 185.

Kophobelemnon schmeltzii, Thomson and Mackinnon, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 693.

A single specimen of a light brown colour represents this
species, which was originally described by Kolliker from
Formosa.

92 '' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The dimensions in centimetres are as follows :—

Length of entire colony . . . . . . 13-3

Length of polyp-bearing portion . . . . 9'2

Length of the stalk 6-1

Breadth of polyp-bearing portion .. .. 1-1

Breadth of the" stalk O5

Locality. — Between Port Stephens and Newcastle, New
South Wales, 22-60 fathoms.

Distribution. — Formosa (Kolliker). " Thetis " Station 25,
off Newcastle, New South Wales, 48-42 fathoms (Thomson
and Mackinnon).

Family PTEROELDLD^E.
Genus GODEFFROYIA, Kolliker.

GODEFFROYIA ELEGANS, Kolliker.

Godeffroyia elegans, Kolliker, Anatom. Systemat. Beschreib.
Alcyonarien, Abth. 1., Pennatuliden, 1872, p. 116,
pi. viii., figs. 63-65. Id., Thomson and Mackinnon,
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p. 693.

This species was founded on a single specimen, 134 mm.
in length, from the Gulf of Siam. There are three specimens
in the present collection which agree in detail with Kolliker's
description.

The dimensions in centimetres are as follows : —

Sp. I. Sp. II. Sp. III.

Length of entire colony . . . . . . 2O5 19'4 18

Length of rachis 11 10-4 10'7

Length of stalk 9 -5 9 7 "3

Breadth of rachis . . . . . . . . 5'5 4'S 4-5

Breadth of stalk 1-2 1-2 1-2

Breadth of keel in the middle . . . . 1 1 • 1 1 • 1

Length of pinnules on the ventral side . . 3 2-2 2'6

Maximum breadth of pinnules .. .. 1-1 1 1-1

Number of pinnules on each side . . 27 32 31

The colour is light brown.

Localities. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45
fathoms.

Between Port Stephens and Newcastle, New South Wales,
22-60 fathoms.

Distribution.— Gulf of Siam (Kolliker). The " Thetis '
obtained it at the following localities off the coast of New
South Wales :— Station 22, Newcastle Bight, 40-26 fathoms ;
Station 54, Jervis Bay, 10-11 fathoms (Thomson and Mac-
kinnon).

ALCYOXARIANS. — BRIGGS. 9o

Genus SARCOPHYLLUM, Kolliker.

SARCOPHYLLUM GRANDE (Gray}.

Sarcoptilus grandis, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., xvi., 1848, p.

45, pi. i. Id., Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., v., isiiu,

p. 23. Id., Gray, Cat, Sea-Pens Brit, Mus., 1870,

p. 25.
Sarcophi/Unm australe, Kolliker, Anatom. Systemat. Bes-

chreib. Alcvonarien, Abth. 1., Pennatuliden, 1872, pp.

120. 364, pi. viii., figs. 66, 67. Id., Hickson, Proc.

Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.)^ ii., 1890, p. 140. Id., Thomson

and Mackinnon, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 13, 1911, p.

694, pi. Ixxxii.
Sarcophylhnn grande, Kolliker, Chall. Rep., Zool., i., 18X0,

p. 2.

A number of specimens of a light brown colour agree on
the whole with Kolliker's description of Sarcophyllum aus-
tralis (=8. grande, Gray).

Gray's original description, which was based on a single
specimen from an unknown habitat, contains the following
passage : — " Pinnce placed in two crowded rows, one on
each side of one of the faces of the upper part of the shaft,
kidney-shaped, crumpled, with the polyps scattered on the
edge and upper surfaces, especially near the edge."

After an examination of specimens from Sydney, New
South Wales, he writes " When I first described this genus
I believed that the polypes Avere ' scattered over the upper
surface of the pinnae ' ; but that is a mistake which I was
led into by the imperfect state of the specimen ; the polyps
are only placed on the margin of the pinnae as in other Pen-
nat/ulidce."

In the present specimens there are numerous rows of auto-
zooids on the margin of the pinnules. The characteristic
.spicules of the species are situated in the base of the colony,
and consist of large white 8-shaped forms measuring up to
4mm. in length.

The dimension in centimetres of the largest specimen
are as follows :—

Length of entire colony . . . . . . 29

Length of the rachis . . . . . . . . 20'5

Length of the stalk . . . . . . . . 8'5

Breadth of the rarhis . . . . . . . . 8

Breadth of the stalk .T">

Maximum breadth of pinnules . . . . 4-0

Height of pinnules in the middle . . . . :5

Number of pinnules on each side .. .. 40

94 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Localities. — Between Port Stephens and Newcastle, New
South Wales, 22-60 fathoms.

East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait, 60 fathoms.

Fifteen miles south of St. Francis Island, South Australia,
30 fathoms.

Thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape Wickham, King Island,
Bass Strait, 72-80 fathoms.

Off Kangaroo Island, South Australia, 17 fathoms.

Distribution. — Sydney, New South Wales (Gray). Aus-
tralia (Kolliker). Port Jackson, 6-15 fathoms (Kolliker).
Port Phillip, Victoria (Hickson). The " Thetis " obtained
specimen'; from the following localities off the coast of New
South Wales : — Station 28, off Manning River, 22 fathoms ;
Station 31, off Cape Hawke, 28-25 fathoms, and 10-12
fathoms ; Station 54, Jervis Bay, 10-11 fathoms ; off Port
Stephens, 32-48 fathoms (Thomson and Mackhmon).

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Fig. 1. — Spicules of Mopsea plumacea, sp. nov. ; from the
specimen figured on Plate vii.

Fig. 2. — 8picules of Mopsea repens, sp. nov. ; from the
specimen figured on Plate viii.

Fig. 3. — Spicules of Plumarella australis, sp. nov. ; from the
specimen figured on Plate x.

Fig. 4. — AmphilapM* plumacea, Thomson and Mackinnon.
Photograph of a specimen 17-5cm. in height, from
the M>uth east coast of Australia.

Fig. 5.- — Ctenocella pectinata (Pallas). Branches showing
distinct median furrow. Photograph of a specimen
from eight miles east of Sandon Bluff, Queensland,
35-40 fathoms.

BTOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE IV.

X
fj>., ^

v\

^jr^C^

/*

f/4

H^

s ^^-^f^v^~Vl^-

^ c^xt^«-<>JU«^

;p*^

^N,

9P
1?

E. A. BRIGQS, del. ami photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

Fig. 1. — I sis hippuris, Linnaeus. Part of a colu.iy showing
the palmate terminations of the twins. Photo-
graph of a specimen 7cm. in height, from off the
coast of Queensland.

Fig. 2. — Isis hippuris, Linnaeus. Photograph of a specimen
!3-3cm. in height, from Murray Island. Torres
Strait.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE V

E. A. BRIGOS. photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

Mop.sca australis, Thomson and Mackinnon. Photograph
of a specimen 37'5cm. in height, from fifteen miles
N. 35° E. of Saddle Hill, New South Wales, 34-35
fathoms.

B10L. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. TTI.

PLATE VI.

E. A. BRIGGS, ])hoto.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Mopsea plumacea, sp. nov. Photograph of the type, 22-5cm.
in heiuht, from the South Australian Coast.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE VII.

^ A BRIGGS, photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.

Mopsea repens, sp. nov. Photograph of the type. 13-5cm.
in height, from thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape
Wickham, King Island, Bass Strait, 72-80 fathoms.

BTOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE VIII.

E. A. BRIOOS, photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.

Plumarella thetis, Thomson and Mackinnon. Photograph
of a specimen 26cm. in height, from fifteen miles
N. 35° E. of Saddle Hill, New .South Wales. 34-35
fathoms.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR." VOL. III.

I'l.VTR IX.

E. A. BRIGGS, photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Plumarella australis, sp. nov. Photograph of the type,
43cm. in height, from fifty miles south of Cape Wiles,
South Australia, 75 fathoms.

BTOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

Pi, ATT. X.

E. A. BRIQOS, photo.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.

Fig. 1.- — Axis of Isis hippitris, Linnaeus. Photograph of a
specimen 9 cm. in height, from Murray Island,
Torres Strait.

Fig. 2. — Basal portion of Plumardla australis, sp. nov.
Photograph of a specimen 24- 7cm. in height, from
fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
75 fathoms.

BTOL. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XI.

{3. A. BRIGGS, photo. \

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

Ctenocella pectinata (Pallas). Photograph of a specimen
42cm. in height, from eight miles east of Sandon
Bluff, Queensland, 35-40 fathoms.

EIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III. PLATE Xil.

E. A. BRIGQS, photo.

IV. Report on some Fishes obtained by the F.I.S. " En-
deavour " on the coasts of Queensland, New South
Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, South and South-
western Australia.

PART III.

BY

ALLAN R. McCULLOCH,

ZOOLOGIST, AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY.

Plates xm. — xxxvn. ; Text Figs. 1 — 3.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 97

REPORT ON THE FISHES.
PART 3.

BY the courtesy of the Comptroller General of Customs,
Mr. S. Mills, I was enabled to be on board the "Endeavour"
during one of her cruises between 12th March and 6th April,
1914. Investigations were carried out on the bank tying to
the eastward of Tasmania, and I saw the trawl worked at
various depths between sixty and two hundred fathoms, at
many localities between Babel Island on the north and Piedra
Blanca Island on the extreme south. Large catches of fish
and invertebrates of many kinds were made, and valuable
collections preserved, but a highly instructive item lies in
the fact that only two fishes were secured of which no speci-
mens had been previously sent to Sydney from the ' ' En-
deavour." This leads us to the belief that the Babel Island
bank has been very thoroughly investigated by the Director
of Fisheries, the late Mr. H. C. Dannevig, whose sharp eye
rarely overlooked anything unknown to him. Though a
great number of specimens still remain to be identified,
described and figured, we may perhaps be justified in sup-
posing that on completion of the work, we will have a very
fair idea of the fish-fauna of this area between the depths of
sixty and one hundred and fifty fathoms.

Family SQUALID^].
Genus CENTROPHORUS, Muller & Henle.

CENTROPHORUS SCALPRATUS, sp. nov.
(Plate xiii., fig. 2-7.)

Head depressed ; snout short and broad, somewhat
sharply rounded. Nostrils in the anterior two-fifths of the
snout, the space separating them a little less than their
distance from its tip. Anterior nasal flap with two lobes
near the outer edge, the inner one smaller than the other ;
posterior margin of each nostril with a narrow skinny border,
and a large rounded extero-internal prominence. Mouth
below the hinder half of the eye, its width much greater than
its distance from the nostrils ; it is very slightly arched,
with a deep groove and short labial folds at each angle. The
oblique lateral groove extends backwards to behind the level
of the spiracle, and its length is equal to about two-thirds
the width of the mouth.

98 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Teeth compressed, those of the upper jaw much smaller
than the lower ones. Upper symphyseal teeth triangular,
erect, with the edges entire ; the others become more oblique
towards the sides, the lateral oner, having the cutting edge
almost horizontal. Lower teeth with the cutting edge
nearly horizontal, and the margins of the cusps serrated.

Eye large, its diameter a little greater than the length of
the snout before the nostrils ; the orbit is produced anteriorly
and posteriorly, its length equal to the preorbital portion of
the snout, and 1.09 in its distance from the anterior gill-
opening. Spiracle large, sub-triangular, situated a little
behind the corner of the orbit, and one diameter above it.
C4ill-openings increasing in width and becoming closer to-
gether backwards ; the last is one-third wider than the first,
and placed directly in front of the pectoral.

Pectorals angular, the outer angles rather sharp, the inner
greatly produced, narrow, acute, and extending backward
to below the middle of the first dorsal. Dorsal spines strong,
compressed, the anterior exposed for less than half and the
posterior more than half its length ; the front edge of each
is sharp, with a narrow groove on each side of it, the pos-
terior margin broad and excavate. Origin of first dorsal far
behind the axils of the pectorals ; its base, exclusive of the
spine, equal to about two-sevenths of the interdorsal space.
Second dorsal rather less than two -thirds the size of the
first, its base half as long ; it originates behind the posterior
angles of the ventrals, and its hinder angle scarcely reaches
the level of the commencement of the sub-caudal. Ventral
small, the outer angle a little rounded, the posterior acute.
Caudal rather deep, about one-fifth of the total length ;
sub-caudal lobe well developed, separated from the terminal
lobe by a notch. Scales small, depressed, pointed posteriorly,
the upper surface rough with several keels which converge
towards the point.

Colour. — Grey above and on the sides, white beneath.
The posterior projections of the pectorals are white.

Described from a female example, 870 mm. long. A
second specimen, a male, 907 mm. long, differs in some
important details ; the mouth is placed below the middle
of the eye, which makes the preoral length much shorter
than in the female ; the posterior gill-opening is much wider
than the penultimate one. and is twice as wide as the first ;
the inner angle of the pectoral is shorter, not reaching to
below the middle of the dorsal fin ; the ventral and second
dorsal are considerably larger than in the female, and the
end of the former reaches to below the anterior portion of the

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 99

latter ; the lower teeth are similar to those of the female,
but the upper ones are all erect and triangular, with lateral
basal lobes. All these differences suggest that the two
specimens belong to different species, but taking into con-
sideration the fact that they were obtained at almost the
same locality, I prefer to regard them as sexual forms of the
one.

These specimens agree with C. granulosus, Schneider, in
having the cusps of the lower teeth serrated, and they are
possibly identical with that species.

Loc.— Victorian coast, Lat. 38° 50' S., Long. 148° 15' E.,
70-80 fathoms.

CENTROPHORUS HARRISSONI, sp. nov.
(Plate xiv., fig. 1-4.)

Head depressed, snout rather long and sharply rounded.
Nostrils a little nearer the end of the snout than the upper
lip ; the space separating them somewhat less than their
distance from the end of the snout. Anterior nasal flap
with a triangular lobe, which may have a secondary lobule ;
posterior margin of nostril with a narrow, skinny lobe.
Mouth below the posterior portion of the eye, its width a
little greater than its distance from the nostrils ; it is slightly
arched with a deep groove and short labial folds at each
angle ; the oblique lateral groove extends backward to
behind the verticle of the spiracle, its length equal to two-
thirds or three-fourths the width of the mouth. Eye large,
its diameter less than the length of the snout before the
nostrils ; orbit produced anteriorly and posteriorly, its
length equal to about three-fourths the snout and but little
less than its distance from the first gill-opening.

Spiracle large, sub-triangular, situated a little behind the
corner of the orbit and one diameter above it. Gill-openings
becoming closer together backwards, the first to fourth sub-
eqiial, the last abruptly wider than the others, and extending
around the base of the pectoral.

Upper teeth much smaller than the lower. Those near
the symphysis are a little oblique, the others becoming more
oblique and somewhat larger towards the sides ; the lateral
teeth have the cutting edge almost horizontal. Lower
teeth with the cutting edge nearly horizontal, and imper-
fectly serrated. Scales small, sessile, and pointed posteriorly,
the upper surface with several keels which converge towards
the point.

100 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Pectorals angular, the outer angle somewhat rounded,
the inner much produced and extending back to behind the
dorsal spine or almost to below the middle of that fin. Dor-
sal spines strong, compressed, with sharp anterior edges and
a groove on each side, and the hinder surface broad and
excavate ; one-fourth to one half of the anterior spine is
exposed, and half or more than half of the posterior. Dorsal
originating far behind the axil of the pectoral, the length
of its base more than two-fifths of the inter-dorsal space.
Second dorsal about three-fourths the size of the first and
similar to it in form. Veritrals small, the outer angle a little
rounded, the posterior acute. Caudal rather broad, about
one-fifth the total length ; sub-caudal lobe well developed,
separated from the terminal lobe by a notch.

Colour. — Grey above, lighter beneath, without darker
markings.

Described from three females and one male, 760-800 mm.
long. The example figured, a female, is selected as the
type.

I associate with this species the name of my friend, the
late Mr. Charles T. Harrisson, who was Biologist on the
" Endeavour/' and who was responsible for the collection
and preservation of many of the more interesting fishes
referred to in this Report.

Loc. — Near Gabo Island, Victoria.

Genus ACANTHIDIUM, Lowe.

ACANTHIDIUM QUADRISPINOSUM, Sp. nOV.

(Plate xiv., fig. 5-8.)

Head depressed ; snout very long, more than half the
length of the head, with sharp edges, and rounded in front.
Nostrils much nearer the end of the snout than the upper
lip, the space separating them equal to about two-thirds
their distance from the end of the snout ; their inner portions
with free skinny borders. Mouth below the hinder portion
of the eye, its width less than its distance from the nostrils.
It is slightly arched, and has a long upper and a short lower
labial fold at each angle ; the upper groove is continued
backward almost to below the end of the spiracle. Eye
large, nearly three in the length of the snout ; orbit equal
to its distance from the nostrils, and somewhat less than the

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 101

space between it and the first gill-opening. Spiracle large,
situated behind the end of the orbit, and about half a diameter
above it. Gill-openings sub-equal, uniformly spaced, their
width less than half the orbital length.

Upper teeth a little smaller than the lower, with pointed
cusps arising from broad bases ; they are nearly all upright,
becoming slightly oblique laterally. The lower teeth differ
in the two sexes : in the male they are very similar to those
of the upper jaw, though somewhat broader, and a little
more oblique laterally ; in the female their cutting edges
are almost horizontal with the tips turned slightly upwards.
Scales with four spines, one of which is broad and leaf -like ;
they stand on stellate bases and have slender peduncles.

Pectorals rounded, the inner angles not produced, and
not reaching the verticle of the origin of the dorsal. Dorsal
spines strong, anteriorly compressed, with broad shallow
grooves ; the position of the first varies from midway between
the end of the snout and the base of the tail to a point much
nearer the former. Soft portion of the first dorsal low, the
hinder angle produced backwards. Second dorsal much
higher than the first and but little shorter than it, the hinder
angle reaching beyond the commencement of the subcaudal
lobe ; the spine is long and curved in some specimens, short
in others. Outer angle of ventral rounded, the posterior
pointed and reaching beyond the verticle of the second
dorsal spine in females, and farther in males. Caudal broad,
the sub-caudal lobe well developed, and separated from the
terminal lobe by a notch.

Colour. — Grey above, somewhat lighter beneath. The
anterior portions of the dorsals and pectorals are somewhat
darker in the smallest specimen.

Described from two male and three female specimens,
683-1 138 mrn. long. They vary somewhat in their propor-
tions and the relative lengths and positions of their fins,
while the different form of the teeth in the two sexes is very
striking. There seems to be no reason, however, to suppose
that they represent more than one species. The figures are
prepared from the smallest specimen, which is a well pre-
served, young male, and which is selected as the type.

LOGS.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 128°- 129° E., 200-
300 fathoms.

Edge of bank between Gabo Island and Cape Everard,
Victoria, 150-250 fathoms.

102 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family DASYATIL\£.
Genus DASYATIS, Rafinesque.

DASYATIS BREVICAUDATUS, Hutton.
(Plate XV., fig. 1 ; Plate XVII., fig. 1.)

Trygon brevicaudata, Hutton, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), xvi.,
1875, p. 317, and Trans. N.Z. Inst., viii., 1876, p. 216.

Dasybatus brevicaudatus, Waite, Rec. Cantb. Mus., i., pt. 2,
1909, p. 151, pi. xxii.

Disc sub quadrangular, wider than long, the length from the
tip of the snout to the posterior angle of the pectorals 1-19 in
the breadth. Upper and lower surfaces perfectly smooth,
without traces of spines or tubercles. The snout is a little
prominent. Anterior margin indistinctly sinuous, at first a
little convex, then very slightly concave ; outer angle distinct
but rounded. Poster o -lateral borders of disc a little convex,
nearly straight, and forming an obtuse angle with the inner
margins. Margins of ventrals convex, the angles somewhat
rounded ; the inner border may be cut into one or two
angular lobes.

Tail depressed before, cylindrical behind, the spine, its
length 1-06 in that of the disc. The basal portion is smooth,
but a few small scattered spines are present on the sides at
about the level of the insertion of the spine, and they become
more numerous as they approach the tip ; the terminal part,
beyond the lower cutaneous lobe, is uniformly rough with
small spiniform tubercles. Spine depressed and grooved, the
margins coarsely serrated, 0-65 longer than the preoral length.
Lower cutaneous lobe commencing a little behind the inser-
tion of the spine, and ending a little beyond its tip ; its
greatest height is at the end of the anterior third of its length,
but it does not equal the depth of the tail above it.

Eyes very small, placed nearer together than the spiracles,
4-83 in the bony interorbital space, which is 1-53 in the preoral
length. Spiracles very large, longer than broad, their length
1-57 in the interorbital width ; the upper margin is straight,
the outer circular.

The anterior part of the lower surface is closely pitted with
minute pores. The space separating the nostrils is a little less
than their distance from the tip of the snout. Outer angles
of the intra-nasal lobe acute ; the hinder margin bears a
narrow papillose flap, which forms two small lobes near the
median line. Width of the mouth slightly less than two-
thirds of the preoral length. Lateral teeth tubercular, the

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 103

inner ones each developing an angular cusp, which is longest
on the median line. A broad fimbriated flap behind the
tipper jaw, and five papilla? inside the lowei one, of which the
outer pair is smaller than and remote from the other three.
Four anterior gill-openings sub-equal in size, the last a little
more than half as wide as the others.

Colour. — Uniform pale greyish-brown above, white below.

The above description and the accompanying figures are
based on an adult male specimen, 1080 mm. wide, which was
trawled off Babel Island. A second larger example in the
Australian Museum, from Port Jackson, differs only in having
the spin}r tubercles on the tail more numerous, and extending
a little farther forward ; it has also two enlarged tubercles
with upstanding spines on the median line of the back of the
tail between the ventral fins and the spine.

These specimens are evidently identical with I), brevi-
caudatus, Hutton, which has been recently figured by Waite,
though they differ from his diagnosis in having the snout a
little prominent instead of " scarcely distinct " ; in this
detail, however, they agree better with Hutton's original
description.

The Port Jackson specimen referred to above was labelled
D. pastinaca, Linna3us, but that species, according to Bay1,
has a different shape, and much larger eyes than the Austra-
lian ray. It is almost certain, also, that all the records of
D. pastinaca from New South Wales really refer to D. brevi-
caudatus. A second large species from Eastern Australia,
D. tketidis, Ogilby2, appears to differ mainly in having
numerous tubercles on the back.

Loc. — Twenty miles east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 60
fathoms ; March, 1914.

DASYATIS FLUVIORUM, Ogilby.
(Plate xvi., fig. 1 ; Plate xvii., fig. 2.)

Dasyatis fluviorum, Ogilby, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., xxi.,
1908, p. 6.

Mr. Ogilby has very kindly lent me an authentic example
of this species for examination, which I have figured here.
It is a little smaller than the typical specimen, and differs from
it somewhat in the proportion of the disc, and the detailed
arrangement of the scapular spines. The tail, also, has no
scattered prickles on the sides.

1. Day— Fish. Gt. Brit. Ireland, ii., 1880-1884, p. 350, pi. clxxv.

2. Ogilby in Waite— Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1899, p. 46.

104 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

A second larger, but very badly stuffed specimen, is in the
Australian Museum, from Port Jackson. It is a male, and
agrees better with Ogilby's description than the specimen
figured. The spines and tubercles on the scapular region are
much more numerous, and are arranged in the quinque-
radiate formation described in the type ; the anterior pro-
jection extends forward almost to the level of the hinder
margins of the spiracles. The large tubercles on the median
line between the scapular region and the caudal spine, are
also more numerous than in the female figured. At some
distance behind the end of the spine the upper surface of
the tail is rough with small spiniform tubercles.

The teeth of the male are triangular and acute, and the
outer surface of each is deeply grooved. In the female they
are tubercular with the surface broken up into numerous
small facets.

Width of the specimen figured 271 mm. Length from tip
of snout to hinder margin of ventral fins 271 mm. Tail, from
posterior base of ventral fins 520 mm.

Locs. — Brisbane River, Queensland ; Port Jackson, New
South Wales.

Key to the Australian species of Dasyatis.

a. Tail with cutaneous folds sub-genus DASYATIS.

b. Tail with a small fold above as well as below.

c. Scapular region smooth, or with spines on median line

only ; upper surface with blue spots kuhlii.

cc. Scapular region with a broad patch of tubercles ;

upper surface uniformly coloured ftuviorum.

bb. Tail with a fold below, none above.

d. Back smooth or with isolated tubercles

brevicaudatus.

dd. Back with numerous tubercles thetidis.

aa. Tail without cutaneous folds. . . .sub-genus HIMANTURA.
e. Back smooth in the young, tubercular in adults . uarnak.

Family MYCTOPHID^E.
Genus ELECTRONA, Goode & Bean.
ELECTRONA RISSOI, Cocco.

Scopelus rissoi, Cocco, Giorn. Sicil., fasc. 77, p. 144, fide
Gunther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., v., 1864, p. 405. Id.,
Collett, Res. Camp. Sci. Monaco, x., 1896, p. 113.

Myctophum rissoi, Chun, Wiss. Ergebn. " Valdivia," xv.,
1906, p. 170, fig. 83.

Electrona rissoi, Goode & Bean, Oceanic Ichth., 1895, p.
91, pi. xxviii., fig. 107.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 1U5

A large, somewhat battered specimen is 69 mm. long
from the snout to the hypural. It only differs from smaller
examples from Messina in having the body narrower, the
depth (23| mm.) being almost three in the length instead of
about 2-7 ; a similar variation in a large specimen is noted
by Collett. The arrangement of the photophores, relative
positions and composition of the fins, and the scales are
exactly as in the Messina specimens. The supra-caudal
phosphorescent organ may be present or absent ; it is wanting
in the Australian specimen.

Loc. — Between Gabo Island and Cape Everard, Victoria,
200-250 fathoms ; October, 1914.

Family CENTRISCID^.
Genus CENTRISCUS, Linnceus.

CENTRISCTJS CRISTATUS, de Vis.
(Plate xxxvi., fig. 1.)

Amphisile cristata, de Vis, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales,
ix., 1885, p. 872.

Centriscus cristatus, Ogilby, Ann. Qld. Mus., 10, 1911,
p. 41.

Amphisile scutata, Kent, " Great Barrier Reef," 1893,
p. 307, pi. xvi., fig. 3. Id., Weber, Zool. Forschr.
Austr., v., 1895, p. 268 (not C. scutatus, Linnaeus).

Centriscus scutatus, Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905,
p. 59 (not of Linnseus).

An excellent series of seventy-two specimens, 105-248 mm.
long, exhibits great variation with growth. The snout and
the posterior spine are very much longer in the young than
in adults, and the body becomes much deeper with age ; in
consequence of these changes, the shape of the several body-
scutes also varies greatly. The following are the proportions
of the largest and smallest specimen of the series. Head
2-8-3-4 in the total length. Depth at the ventral spine 2-7-
1-6 in the head. Snout 1.3, posterior spine, from the base
of the soft dorsal to the tip, 1-9-2 in the head.

A specimen in the Australian Museum, which agrees with
Bloch's figure of C. scutatus, differs from all the "Endeavour"
specimens in the form of its body scutes ; it is also narrower
than examples of C. cristatus of the same length. The
dorso-lateral carapace is also narrower, and its sutures extend
obliquely forwards and downwards as illustrated by Bloch.
In C. cristatus the sutures are more or less vertical.

106 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Locs. — Specimens of C. cristatus are in the Australian
Museum from Cooktown, Queensland, and Houtman Abrol-
hos, Western Australia ; they include one of the specimens
recorded by Waite as C. scutatus from the latter locality.
The " Endeavour " trawled numerous examples at the fol-
lowing stations : —

Platypus Bay, Queensland, 5-9 fathoms ; 20th July, 1910.

Three to seven miles off Hervey Bay, Queensland, 9-11
fathoms ; 27th July, 1910.

Fourteen miles S. 52° E. of Cape Capricorn, Queensland,
12-13 fathoms ; 29th July, 1910.

Seven miles N. 70° E. of Hummocky Island, Queensland,
14-16 fathoms ; 30th July, 1910.

Family PEGASID.E.
Genus ACANTHOPEGASUS, gen. nov.

Near Parapegasus, Dumeril, but differing in the structure
of the ventral fins. These are composed of one spine and
three rays, each of which is clearly divided into two halves
in its basal portion ; the spine overlies, and is in close con-
tact with the first ray. The body is more rugose and spiny
than Parapegasus, but similarly constructed.

Type. — Pegasus lancifer, Kaup.

ACANTHOPEGASUS LANCIFER, Kaup.

(Fig. 1.)

Pegasus natans, Kaup, Cat. Lophobr. Brit. Mus., 1856.
p. 4 (part), pi. i., fig. 2 (not P. natans, Linnaeus).

Pegasus lancifer, Kaup, Arch, fur Naturgesch., xxii. i.,
1861, pp. 116-117. Id., Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat.
Fish., viii., 1870, p. 149. Id., Castelnau, Proc. Zool.
Soc. Viet., ii., 1873, p. 57. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn.
Soc., N.S.Wales, vi., 1881, p. 286. Id., Johnston,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1882 (1883), p. 134, and 1890
(1891), p" 37. Id., Lucas, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet. (2),
ii., 1890, p. 38. Id., Zietz, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Anstr.,
xxxiii., 1909, p. 263.

Parapegasus lancifer, Dumeril, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ii., 1870,
p. 494.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 107

Kaup's type of Pegasus lancifer1 was said to have been
collected in Java by Leschenault, but this locality is evidently
incorrect. The species is not uncommon in Tasmania and
Victoria, and is apparently restricted to temperate waters2.
Bleeker had no knowledge of it when writing on the
fishes of Java, and no later writer has recognised it from the
East Indies. We may, therefore, conclude that it is confined
to southern Australia and Tasmania3.

Two specimens, 57-07 mm. long, have the following number
of fin-rays and osseus rings : — D. 5 ; A. 5 ; P. 18 ; V. i. 3 ;
C. 8. The first three rings are united and form the carapace ;
the seven following are movable, and the next five anchy-
losed and forming a flat tail-piece ; the last is minute and
movable with the tail. The figure represents the largest
specimen, which is from Tasmania.

Loc. — Entrance to Oyster Bay, Tasmania ; 29th July,
1909.

Distrib. — Tasmania (Gunther). Derwent Estuary, Tas-
mania ; common (Johnston). Hobson Bay, Victoria (Castel-
nau). Port Phillip, Victoria ; common (Lucas). Spencer
Gulf (Zietz).

Genus PARAPEGASUS, Dumeril.

Parapegasus, Dumeril, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ii., 1870, p. 492
(Pegasus natans, Linn<eus).

In this genus the ventrals are composed of two separate
rays, the first being composite and large, and the second
minute ; the first consists of a spine-like process and two
rays fused together.

1. — Both Kaup and Dumeril state that the original figure was prepared
from a specimen in the Paris Museum ; Gunther wrongly believed that it
was based on a British Museum specimen.

2. — Dumeril refers to a specimen which Kaup examined from Manila,
but this was really an example of P. natans, as is clearly stated by Kaup.

3. — -This conclusion is supported by a precisely similar error in the
locality of the mollusc, Fissurella javaniciensis, Lamarck (Hist. Anim. s.
vert., vi., 1822, p. 14). This was also said to have been collected in Java
by Leschenault, but, as noted by Pilsbry (Man. Conch., xii., 1890, p. 188)
" the species does not occur within a thousand miles of Java," while Mr.
Hedley recognises it as a common Tasmanian mollusc.

108

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Fig. 1. Acanthopegasus lancifer, Kaup.

FISHES. — MCCTJLLOCH.

109

Fig. 2. Parapegasus natans, Linnseus.

1.10 ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PARAPEGASUS NATANS, Linnceus.
(Fig. 2.)

Pegasus natans, Linnreus, Syst. Nat., Ed. 12, i., 1766, p.
418. Id., Richardson, Voy. "Sulphur," i., 1845, p.
118, pi. 1, fig. 5-10. Id.," Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat.
Fish., viii., 1870, p. 148.

Parapegasus natans, Dumeril, Hist. Nat. Poiss., ii., 1870,
p. 493.

Six specimens, 74-144 mm. long, vary in the relative
lengths of their rostrums. In three, the distance from the
eye to the tip of the snout is almost equal to, or shorter than
that from the eye to the ventral fins ; the others have the
rostrum longer, it being equal to, or a little less than the
length from the eye to the vent. A Western Australian
specimen is also much more rugose than the others, but does
not otherwise differ from them.

They also exhibit some variation in the development of
the lateral spines of the tail. In younger specimens the last
three segments are armed with spines directed backwards
and forwards ; these disappear with age, becoming involved
in the general anchylosis which occurs in the posterior rings.

The accompanying figure represents a specimen 114mm.
long from Queensland.

LOGS. — Thirteen miles south-east from Cape Capricorn,
Queensland.

Seven miles south of Double Island Point, Queensland.
Swan River, Western Australia.
Malay Archipelago.

Family MACROURID/E.

Genus MACRURONUS, Gunther.

MACRURONUS NOVJE-ZELANDLE, Hector.

Macruronus novce-zelandice (Hector), Waite, Rec. Cantb-
Mus., I., 1911, p. 180, pi. xxx., fig. 1. Id., McCulloch,
Rec. Austr. Mus., ix., pt. 3, 1913, p. 358.

Eight large specimens, 800-930 mm. long, from the edge
of the bank, on the Victorian coast, between Gabo Island
and Flinders Island, 150-250 fathoms.

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. Ill

Family BERYCID^.

Genus BERYX, Cuvier.

BERYX SPLENDENS, Lowe.

Beryx splendens, Lowe, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1833, p. 142, and
' Fish. Madeira, 1843-1860, p. 47, pi. viii. Id., Goode
and Bean, Oceanic Ichth., 1895, p.' 176, pi. liii., fig.
197 (references).

A young example, eight inches long from the tip of the
.snout to the end of the middle caudal rays, does not appear
to differ from the descriptions and figures quoted above.
The longer body and fewer dorsal rays readily separate it
from B. decadactylus, Lowe.

LOG. — Thirty miles south-west of Gabo Island, Victoria,
240 fathoms ; 12th September, 1914.

BERYX DECADACTYLUS, Lowe,.

Beryx decadactylns (Lowe), McCulloch, Biol. Res. " Endea-
vour," ii., pt, 3, 1914, p. 96.

Two examples, 253 and 295 mm. long to the end of the
middle caudal rays, are somewhat smaller than those pre-
viously recorded from Australian waters.

Locs. — South of Cape Everard, Victoria, 180-200 fathoms ;
7th June, 1914.

Thirty miles S.S.E. of Gabo Island, Victoria, 238 fathoms ;
2nd October, 1914.

Family ANTIGONIID^.

Genus ANTIGONIA, Lowe.

ANTIGONIA RHOMBOIDEA, sp. nov.

(Plate xviii., fig. 1.)

D. ix. 29 ; A. iii. 28 ; V. i. 5 ; P. 1 + 12 ; C. 12. Depth
from the first dorsal spine to that of the ventral 0-03 greater
than the length from the snout to the hypural ; head 2-6 in
the same length. Eye 2.7 in the head, longer than the snout,
which is 3-1 in the same. Interorbital space 3-9, caudal
peduncle 2-7 in the head. Pectoral 1-1, ventral spine 1-4,
and first anal spine 2-3 in the head.

112 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Body very compressed and elevated, forming a sharp angle
at the origin of the dorsal fin. The profile is straight from
the upper lip to above the middle of the eye, thence rising
rapidly and forming a hump on the nape. Lower profile
slightly convex from the lower jaw to the ventral spine ;
abdominal margin oblique, the origin of the anal being below
the level of that of the ventral.

Head closely covered with small ctenoid scales, which
extend onto the maxilla and lower jaw, leaving only the lips
bare. Sides of occiput with radiating, bony ridges, which
extend forward above the eye to before the nostrils. Occipital
crest with similar denticulated ridges extending up the
anterior margin of the hump. Preorbital with the anterior
margin denticulate, and a series of radiating ridges. Angle
of preoperculum broadly rounded, serrated, and bearing
curved bony ridges ; an inner preopercular margin forming
a right angle below and finely denticulated. Opercxilum un-
armed, with a shallow excavation on the upper posterior
margin. Maxilla small, but little oblique, not reaching back-
ward to the verticle of the anterior nostril. Nostrils placed
in front of the upper portion of the eye, the anterior in a low
tube, the posterior an open pore. Scales in about seven rows
on the cheeks.

Body closely covered with strongly ctenoid scales, which
are very coarse on the ventral surface. They extend up the
anterior margin of each spine of the fins, and also along the
lower surfaces of the ventral rays, where they are particitlarly
spiny. Small, but similar, scales cover the lower third of the
soft dorsal and anal fins. Lateral line forming a high arch
below the anterior dorsal spines, thence running obliquely
downward to the middle of the side and extending along the
caudal peduncle. About fifty-eight scales between the oper-
culum and the hypural.

Anterior spines of each fin coarsely striated. Third dorsal
spine longest and strongest, the remainder decreasing regu-
larly backwards ; the tips of all are broken off or damaged.
Anterior dorsal rays higher than the posterior spines, the
others becoming regularly lower backwards. Anal fins
similar in form to the dorsal. Pectoral pointed, the upper
rays longest. Ventral spine long and strong, reaching back-
wards to the first anal ray. Caudal slightly emarginate, the
upper rays a little longer than the lower ones.

Colour. — Generally pink in life, becoming pinkish-grey
below. The scaly base of the soft dorsal and the body imme-
diately below it with numerous, rather indefinite, yellow, sub-

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 113

vertical bars ; similar bars on the body around the pectoral
region. In formalin the whole fish is whitish, the abdominal
region being whiter than the rest.

Described and figured from a single specimen, 115mm.
long from the tip of the snout to the end of the middle caudal
rays. It differs from A. steindachneri, Jordan & Evermann,
A", eos, Gilbert, and A. capros, Lowe, in having fewer dorsal
and anal rays. A. malayanus, Weber, has only eight dorsal
spines, and is a narrower, rounder fish. It is near A. fowleri,
Franz, and A. rubescens, and may prove to be identical with
one of them, but the form of the body apparently distinguishes
it from both.

Loc. — Between Gabo Island and Cape Everard, Victoria,
200-250 fathoms ; October, 1914.

ANTIGONIA RUBICUNDA, Ogilby.
(Plate xviii., fig. 2.)

Antigonia rubicunda, Ogilby, New Fish. Queensland Coa.st,
1911, p. 103.

D. ix. 28-29; A. iii. 26-27; P. 1 + 12: V. i. 5; C. 12.
Depth from the first dorsal spine to that of the ventral equal
to the length from the snout to the hypural ; head 2-7 in the
same. Eye 2-2 in the head, much longer than the snout,
which is 3-6 in the same. Interorbital width 3, depth of
caudal peduncle 2-5 in the head. Third dorsal spine, 1-06,
ventral spine 1-2, pectoral 1-1 in the head.

A. rubicunda differs from A. rhomboidea in the general form
of the body and in having larger scales. The difference in
form is illustrated on plate xviii. ; it is rounder in A. rubicunda,
and the abdominal margin is less oblique, the insertion of
the anal spine being on a higher level than that of the ventral.
There are about forty-five scales between the operculum and
the hypural instead of fifty-eight as in A. rkomboidea. In all
other details the two species are very similar.

The two small specimens, 62-65 mm. long, on which Ogilby's
description was based, aie the only ones known. They were
described on board the " Endeavour," so that it is not
surprising to find several errors in the description. Ogilby
has wrongly counted the number of spines and raj^s of the
fins, while some of the proportions given by him are also
incorrect.

Loc. — Thirteen miles N. 50° E. of North Reef, Queensland,
70 fathoms ; 15th July, 1910.

114 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family PRIACANTHIB^E.
Genus PRIACANTHUS, Cuvier.

PRIACANTHUS VELABUNDUS, sp. nov.
(Plate xix.)

D. x., 12 ; A. iii., 12 ; P. 16-17 ; V. i., 5 ; C. 16. L. lat.
54-59+4-6. Head 2-8, height of body at origin of anal 2-1
in the length from the snout to the hypural. Snout 1-6, inter-
orbital width 1-3 in the eye, which is 2-6 in the head. First
dorsal spine 4-2 in the last, which is 1-2 in the head. Second
dorsal ray slightly longer, ventral fin 0-6 longer than the head.
Third anal spine 1-5, second anal ray 1-1, pectoral 1-6, and
depth of caudal peduncle 3-1 in the head.

Body compressed, elevated, somewhat oblong in shape.
The upper profile is straight on the snout, and gilbous above
the middle of the eye, whence it rises gradually to about the
eighth dorsal spine. Preorbital edge strongly spinate. Pre-
operculum denticulated on both margins, the lower teeth
being the strongest ; the angle is armed with a strong flat
spine which has some smaller ones near its base. Operculum
with two bony ridges terminating in very weak flat spines.
The hinder edge of the operculum is smooth, but the lower
portion of the interoperculum and the suboperculum are
finely serrated. Maxillary broadly expanded, truncate pos-
teriorly, and reaching to below the end of the first third of the
eye. Suprascapula with an elevated ridge, terminating in
a strong spine ; its upper edge serrated. Posterior nostril
very large, placed directly before the eye. Anterior nostril
small, valvular, and opening internally into the posterior one
by means of a complex tubular process. Lower jaw longer
than the upper one, the chin produced.

Teeth small, conical, depressible, in three or four rows in
each jaw anteriorly, and biserial laterally. Minute teeth are
present on the vomer and anterior portion of each palatine ;
tongue toothless.

Entire head and body closely covered with rather small,
strongly ctenoid scales, which extend forward to the end of
the snout and the chin, where they are coarsely spinate. On
the sides of the body they are somewhat trilobed, and larger
than elsewhere. Those at the bases of the dorsal and anal
fins are much enlarged and torm upstanding plates with
extremely spinate edges. There are fifty -four to fifty-nine
scales on the lateral line as far as the hypural, and four to six
more on the base of the tail ; there are sixty-seven to seventy-
six rows of scales along the middle of the body, including six
on the base of the tail.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 115

The spines and rays of the dorsal, anal, and ventral fins
are all more or less rough with minute spinules, while each
of the spines is also cut into numerous grooves. The dorsal
spines increase uniformly in length backwards ; the first is
placed a little behind the verticle of the hinder orbital margin.
The anterior rays are the highest, the others decreasing rapidly
backwards ; the base of the soft dorsal is little more than half as
long as that of the spinous portion. Anal originating below the
last two dorsal spines, and terminating behind the verticle of
the last ray ; its form is similar to that of the dorsal. Pectorals
short, the rays slightly roughened at their bases ; the upper
ones the longest. Ventrals greatly produced, reaching to the
base of the fifth anal ray ; their margins are rounded, and the
last rays are wholly connected with the body by membrane.
Caudal rays smooth, the margin of the fin slightly rounded.

Colour. — Brassy-coloured in formalin, clouded with some
grey blotches on the upper half of the body. Membrane of
spinous dorsal and anal dark, becoming black between the
ends of the anterior rays. Ventrals black, the rays lighter.
Margin of caudal dark grey.

Described and figured from a specimen 197 mm. long ; a
second example, 173 mm. long, does not differ from the type.

P. velabundus differs from all other species of the genus in
being not much less than half as high as long. In this and
other characters it resembles Pseudopriaca.nthus, Bleeker, but
differs from that genus in having the posterior dorsal spines
longer than the median ones, and a well-developed pre-
opercular spine.

Locs. — Off Burrewarra Point, near Bateman's Bay, New
South Wales, 60 fathoms ; 29th May, 1914.

Between Cape Naturaliste and Geraldton, Western Aus-
tralia, 20-100 fathoms.

Family APOGONICHTHYID.E.
Genus AMIA, Gronovius.

AMIA FASCIATA, Shaw.

The several colour forms of Amia fasciata named novem-
fasciata, compressa, aroubiensis, and robusta can only be
separated from each other with difficulty, and they are per-
haps best regarded as subspecies ; they cannot be regarded
as varieties of A. fasciata, as has been done by Giinther, be-
cause the typical form of that species varies in itself, arid its
variations do not overlap the characters of the supposed
subspecies. I have examined a representative series of some

116 ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

hundreds of specimens from several widely separated localities
and am convinced that several of the forms are either true
species or distinct sub-species ; the others are not so clearly
defined.

Radcliffe has drawn up a key in which structural differences
between the several forms are noted, but I find these unre-
liable and variable with growth. The following is a key to
the subspecies in the Australian Museum collection : — •

a. Body usually with three distinct longitudinal bands ;
another may be present on the back, and one along
the belly.

b. The three principal bands extend onto the caudal fin,
where the upper and lower converge abruptly ; no
secondary bands between the others ; the median
band generally thickened and darker below the
second dorsal, not or scarcely expanded at the

caudal base novemfasciata.

bb. The bands not or scarcely extending beyond the

caudal base.

c. The three principal bands very broad, ending
abruptly at the caudal base ; no secondary, inter-
mediate bands aroubiensis.

cc. Bands narrower, terminating less abruptly ; a

secondary band present or absent anteriorly.
d. A distinct secondary band anteriorly between the
median and dorso-lateral ones, which curves
upwards and joins the latter ; some irregular

spots at the caudal base compressa.

dd. Secondary band, if present, not joining the one

above it.
e. Median band forming a round black spot at

the caudal base fasciata.

ee. Median band not or but slightly expanded at
the caudal base stevensi.

AMIA FASCIATA, Shaw.
subsp. FASCIATA, Shaw.

Mullus fasciatus, Shaw, in White, Voy. N.S.Wales, 1790,
p. 268 and plate.

Apogon fasciatus, Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., i., 1859,
p. 241 (Australian specimens). Id., Steindachner,
Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, liii. i., 1866, p. 427. Id.,
Alleyne & Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, i.,
1877, p. 267. Id., Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, iii., 1879, p. 370. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.Wales, v., 1881, p. 343.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 117

Amia fasciata, Bleeker, Nederl. Tijdschr. Dierk., ii., 1865,
p. 71. Id., Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xli., 1911,
p. 249, pi. xxi.-xxii.

Apogon cooki, Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, v.,
1881, p. 344, and vii., 1882, p. 236.

Amia robusta, Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xli., 1911,
p. 254, fig. 2.

This species ranges from Tasmania northwards to the
Philippine Islands. Shaw's type was taken in or near
Port Jackson1 ; specimens from North Queensland were later
described by Macleay as Apogon cooki, while exactly the same
form has been recently described and figured as Amia robusta
by Radcliffe. But a most critical examination of specimens
of equal size from Torres Strait and Tasmania fails to reveal
any differences between them.

A. fasciata alters considerably with age, the depth changing
from 2.82 to 2.28 in specimens 60-135 mm. long. The bands
are also broader in the young ; the clorso-lateral one touches
the lateral line in small specimens, while it is well above it in
adults.

Locs. — Launceston, Tasmania ; Port Jackson, New South
Wales ; Moreton Bay ; Masthead Island, off Port Curtis ;
Dunk Island and Green Island, near Cairns ; Endeavour
River (types of A. cooki), Queensland ; Murray Island, Torres
Strait ; Mapoon, Gulf of Carpentaria.

AMIA FASCIATA, Shaw.
subsp. NOVEMFASCIATA, Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Amia novemfasciata (Cuvier & Valenciennes), Jordan &
Scale, Bull. U.S. Fish. Bur., xxv., 1906, p. 242, fig. 36.
Id., Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xli., 1911, p. 251.
pi. xxiii.

Apogon fasciatus, Giinther, Journ. Mus. Godeff., ii., 1873,
p. 19, pi. xx., fig. B.

A large series of specimens are in the Australian Museum
from the following localities : — Murray Island, Torres Strait ;
Samoa (coll. Jordan & Scale) ; New Hebrides, several locali-
ties ; Tongatabu, Friendly Islands ; Bougainville Island,
Solomon Group.

1. As is proved by the context of White's " Journal."

118 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

AMIA FASCIATA, 8haw.

subsp. AROUBIENSIS, Hombron & Jacquinot.

Apogon fasciatus, Giinther, Jouru. Mus. Godeff., ii., 1873,
p. 19, pi. xx., fig. A.

Amia aroubiensis (Hombron & Jacquinot), Jordan & Seale,
Bull. U.S. Fish. Bur., xxv., 1906, p. 241, fig. 35. Id..
Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xli., 1911, p. 250,
pi. xxii.

Three specimens are in the Australian Museum, two of which
are from Murray Island, Torres Strait ; the other was collected
in Suva, Fiji.

AMIA FASCIATA, Shaw.

subsp. COMPRESSA, Radcliffe.

Amia compressa, Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xli.. 1911,
p. 246, pi. xx., xxi.

Four specimens of this well-marked form are in the Austra-
lian Museum from the Malay Archipelago and Bougainville
Island, Solomon Group.

AMIA FASCIATA, Shaw.

subsp. STEVENSI, subsp. uov.
(Plate xvi., fig. 2.)

Amia novemfasciata var., Jordan & Seale, Bull. U.S. Fish.
Bur., xxv., 1906, fig. 37 (not A. novemfasciata, Cuv.
and Val.).

Amia robusta part, Radcliffe, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xli,
1911, p. 256.

This form was considered to be a variety of A. novemfasciata
by Jordan and Seale, and later identified with A. robusta by
Radcliffe. I have examined sixty-two specimens, 24- 100mm.
long, from various parts of the New Hebrides ; they are easily
separated from A. novemfasciata by the lack of the caudal
markings characteristic of that form, while they never have
the round black caudal spot of A. robusta (=A. fasciata).
Some specimens approach A. aroubiensis, but differ in having
the bands narrower and ending less abruptly at the base
of the tail.

The median band is often somewhat expanded and darker
at the base of the caudal. An indefinite secondary band
may be present or a,bsent anteriorly between the dorso-lateral
and the median bands. The black band on the dorsal may

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. 119

be either broad or narrow like that of the anal. The accom-
panying figure represents one extreme of variation, while
the other is illustrated by Jordan and Scale.

Locs. — Hew Hebrides, collected by Dr. A. D. C. Cummins
and Staff Paymaster P. B. Stevens, R.N.

Suva, Fiji.

AMIA NIGRIPES, Ogilby.
(Plate xv., fig. 2.)

Amia nigripes, Ogilby, Ann. Qld. Mus., x., 1911, p. 49,
pi. v., fig. 2.

The accompanying figure represents a specimen 69 mm.
long, in which the ventral fins are somewhat larger than those
of ten others 61-92 mm. long.

Locs. — Three to seven miles off Hervey Bay, Queensland,
9-11 fathoms; 27th July, 1910.

Twenty-five miles south-east of Double Island Point,
Queensland, 33 fathoms ; 28th June, 1910.

Two small specimens are in the Australian Museum from
the mouth of the Tweed River, northern New South

AMIA SEPTEMSTRIATA, Gunther.

Apogon septemstriatus, Gunther, " Challenger '; Kept.,
Zool, i., 1880, p. 38, pi. xvi., fig. A.

A single specimen, 85 mm. long, agrees perfectly with the
original description and figure of this species. It was trawled
near Bowen, Queensland, but the exact locality and depth
was not recorded.

AMIA ELLIOTT, Day.

Apogon ellioti, Day, Fish. India, pt. 1, 1875, p. 63, pi. xvii.,
fig. 1.

Apogon arafurce, Gunther, " Challenger ' Kept., Zool., i.,
1880, p. 38, pi. xvi., fig. c.

Four specimens, 89-99 mm. long, do not differ from one of
the types of .4. ellioti from Madras, which is in the Australian
Museum. They also agree very well with the description and
figure of A. arafurce..

Loc. — Twenty miles N. 62° E. of Gloucester Head, Queens-
land, 35 fathoms ; August 2nd, 1910.

120 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

A MI A QUADRIFASCIATA, Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Apogon quadrifasciatus, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist.

Nat. Poiss., ii., 1828, p. 153. Id., Gunther, Brit. Mus.

Cat. Fish., i., 1859, p. 239. Id., Kner, Reise "Novara,"

Fische, 1865, p. 43. Id., Weber, " Siboga " Exped.,

Ivii., 1913, p. 226.
Amia quadrifasciata, Bleeker, Atlas Ichth., vii., 1873-6, p.

88, pi. cccxxxv., fig. 1.
Apogon kiensis, Jordan & Snyder, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.,

xxiii., 1901, p. 905, fig. 9.
Apogon monogram-ma-, " Challenger " Rept., Zool., i., 1880,

p. 38, pi. xvi., fig. B.

An excellent series of sixty-six specimens, 47-115 mm. long,
shows that the colour marking of this species is very constant,
though the bands are broader and darker in the young ; there
is usually an indefinite secondary band between the two prin-
cipal ones anteriorly in smaller specimens. None have the
first dorsal partially black, as described by Gunther, though
the margin is grey in some.

The depth of the body increases considerably with age, it
being 3-2.5 in the length in specimens 55 and 115 mm. long.
The anterior dorsal spine is also wanting in the young, it
being first developed in specimens about 60 mm. long ;
occasionally an extra spine is present between the two dorsal
fins, so that the number varies from six to eight.

The " Endeavour " series is so complete that I am con-
vinced that these differences are only due to variation with
growth. Jordan and Snyder 's figure of A. kiensis represents
the younger stage, while that of Bleeker illustrates the adult.
A. monogramma, Gunther, is also evidently synonymous with
A. quadrifasciata ; only one lateral band is mentioned in its
description, but the figure shows two, and some specimens in
my series tally very well with the illustration.

Locs. — Off Moreton Island, Queensland, 8-15 fathoms ;
August 31st, 1910.

South-east of Double Island Point, Queensland, 33 fathoms ;
June 28th, 1910.

Off Frazer Island, Queensland, 14-16 fathoms ; 29th
July, 1910.

Platypus and Harvey Bays, Queensland, 7-10 fathoms ;
28th July, 1910.

Near Gloucester Head, Queensland, 19-35 fathoms ; August
2nd, 1910.

A single specimen is in the Australian Museum from
Mosman Bay, Port Jackson.

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. 121

Family CARANGID^.

Genus SERIOLA, Cuvier.

SERIOLA GRANDIS, Castelnau.

Kingfish : Yellow-Tail.
(Plate xxxv., fig. 1.)

Seriola grandis, Castelnau, Proc. Zool. Soc. Viet., i.,
1872, p. 114, and Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, iii.,
1879, pp. 352, 364. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S. Wales, v., 1881, p. 540. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy.
Soc. Tasm., 1882 (1883), p. 119, and 1890 (1891),
p. 32. Id., Ogilby, Cat. Fish. N.S. Wales, 1886, p. 26.

Seriola lalandi, Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, iii.,
1879, p. 352. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, v., 1881, p. 539. Id., Ogilby, Cat. Fish. N.S.
Wales, 1886, p. 26, and Ed. Fish. N.S. Wales, 1893,
p. 82. Id., McCoy, Prodr. Zool. Viet., Dec. xviii.,
1889, pi. clxxii. Id., WTaite, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1,
1899, p. 71. Id., Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S. Wales, 1908,
p. 89 (not of Cuvier & Valenciennes).

D. vi.-vii. i. 31-34 ; A. ii. i. 20-22 ; P. 1+20 ; V. i. 5 ;
C. 17. Depth 4-6 in the length from the premaxillary sym-
phy.sis to the end of the middle caudal rays ; head, to end of
opercular lobe, 3-9-4-2 in the same. Snout 2-8-3 in the
head. Eye 6-6-7 in the head, a little less than half the
interorbital width, which is about equal to the length of the
snout, and 3 in the head. Width of maxillary equal to the
eye-diameter. Fourth dorsal spine 1-1-2 in the eye. An-
terior dorsal ray 2-2-1, anterior anal ray 2-7-2-9, pectoral
about 2, ventral 1-7-1-9 in the head. Depth of caudal
peduncle almost equal to the eye diameter, 6-7-7 in the
head.

Body slender, compressed, the dorsal and ventral profiles
almost evenly arched. Jaws equal anteriorly ; maxillary
reaching to below anterior third of eye, broad and truncate
posteriorly with the angles rounded. Hinder margin of pre-
operculum subvertical, the angle broadly rounded. A few
scales on the temporal region and upper portion of operculum ;
cheeks and area behind the eyes also scaly, head otherwise
naked ; naked border of preoperculum as broad as the scaly
portion of the cheek. Nostrils close together, nearer the
eye than the end of the snout.

Minute villiform teeth form a band on each ramus of the
jaws ; the bands are wider on the mandible than on the

122 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

premaxillaries, and are expanded on each side of the
symphyses, but become rapidly narrower backwards. A
triangular patch of similar teeth on the vomer, with an
elongate posterior extension ; an elongate-ovate patch on
each palatine bone, and on the tongue. Gill-rakers elongate,
sixteen on the lower limb of the first arch ; the longest are
more than three-fourths the eye-diameter.

Body closely covered with small cycloid scales, which are
irregularly arranged ; they extend forward on the nape to
a point in advance of the preopercular margin. Dorsal and
anal fin each with an ensiform scaly sheath anteriorly ; a
broad, sub-quadrate patch of scales covers the base of the
caudal, and extends almost to the ends of the median rays.
Lateral line a little arched anteriorly, reaching the median
line of the body below the second fourth of the soft dorsal
fin, thence straight to the middle of the caudal peduncle ;
it is slightly keeled on the latter, the keel being more de-
veloped in the smaller than in the larger specimen. Upper
and lower surfaces of caudal peduncle with a slight pit at
the base of the fin.

Spinous dorsal commencing above the middle or hinder
half of the pectoral ; its median spines are the highest.
Anterior portions of dorsal and anal fins produced into
angular lobes ; median rays shortest, the posterior ones
increasing somewhat in length. Pectoral short, pointed
above, the margin rounded. Ventrals inserted a little
behind the pectorals, pointed, the hinder margin truncate.
Caudal deeply forked.

Colour. — Upper half of body dark, the lower silvery, the
junction of the two colours somewhat sharply defined ; in
life a yellow stripe commences behind the eye, and traverses
the median line of the body. Fins without definite markings.

Described from two specimens 433 and 725 mm. long from
the snout to the end of the median caudal rays ; the larger
example is figured.

This species has been confused with the Atlantic S. lalandi,
Guv. & Val., but it differs from Jordan and Evermann's
figure1 of that species in being more slender, and in having
the upper profile of the head less convex. It is possibly
identical with S. aureovittata, Schlegel, as suggested by McCoy,
but the illustrations2 of that species indicate that the
Japanese fish is somewhat deeper in form than the Australian
one.

1. Jordan & Evermann— Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 47, 1896, p. 903, pi.
cxl., fi?. 382.

2. Schlegel— Faun. Japon., Poiss., 1845, p. 115, pi. Ixii., fig. 1. Id.,
Tanaka, Cat. Fish. Japan, 1913, p. 126, fig. 90.

FISHES. — -MCCULLOCH. 123

Locs. — I am indebted to Dr. Mark C. Lidwill for the large
example here figured, which he captured on a rod and line
at Port Stephens, New South Wales. The smaller specimen
was caught on a hand-line from the " Endeavour " off North
Reef, Queensland, on 13th July, 1910.

SERIOLA SIMPLEX, Ramsay & Ogilby.
(Plate xxxvii., fig. 3.)

Seriola simplex, Ramsay & Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, x., 1886, p. 757.

The only known specimen of this species is the type, of
which the origin is unknown though it was supposed to have
been taken in Port Jackson. Though at first separated from
S. grandis, it was later united with that species by Ogilby1,
though he gave no reason for his action. The specimen is
197 mm. long, and differs considerably in form from my
smallest example of S. grandis, 433 mm. ; it is possible that
the difference is due to alteration with growth, but until a
series of intermediate examples can be examined it is better
to regard the two as distinct.

Genus TRACHURUS.
TRACHURUS NOWE-ZELANDI.E, Hutton.

Cowanyoung. Horse Mackerel.
(PI. xxxiv., fig. 3.)

Trachurus trachurus, Hutton, Fish. N. Zeal., 1872, p. 16,

pi. iii., fig. 23 (T. novae, zelandice, C. & V., in synonymy :

not T. trachurus, Linn.).
Trachurus trachurus, McCoy, Prodr. Zool. Viet., dec. ii.,

1878, pi. xviii. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,

1882, pp. 85, 119, and 1890, p. 32.
Decapterus leptosomus, Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S. Wales, 1908,

p. 87 (not D. leptosomus, Ogilby).
Trachurus declivis, Waite, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1899,

p. 72. Id., McCulloch, Zool. Res. "Endeavour," i.,

1911, p. 79 (not T. declivis, Jenyns).

The Cowanyoung of New South Wales fishermen is identical
with the Horse Mackerel of Tasmania and New Zealand. It
has been confused with the Yellow-tail, Trachurus declivis,
Jenyns, but differs from that species in its form, colouration

1, Ogilby— Ed. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1893, p. 82'.

124 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

and habits. It is evidently near T. trachurus, Linn., but
its relation to that species can only be determined by a
comparison of series of specimens from European and
Australian seas.

Hutton has included the name T. novae zelandice, among
others, in the synonymy of the New Zealand species, which
he identified as T. trachurus. He credited this name to
Cuvier and Valenciennes, but I have failed to find any
reference to it other than his own. The New Zealand fish, of
which I have examined a specimen, appears to be neither
T. trachurus nor T. declivis, and I therefore accept the name
T. novce-zelandice for it. I also identify the Cowanyoung and
the Horse Mackerel of Australia and Tasmania with Hutton's
species.

The accompanying figures illustrate the differences between
T. novce-zelandice and T. declivis. In the former the body is
elongate and cylindrical, the depth in adults being 4-7-5-2
in the length from the premaxillary symphysis to the end
of the middle caudal rays ; the lateral line scutes are broader
and more numerous than in T. declivis, while the colour is
dark-greenish blue on the back and silvery below. In
fifteen specimens I count the following :• — D. viii. 1/30-35 ;
A. ii. 1/28-30 ; L. lat. 29-35+6-8+39-42. Length to
eighteen inches.

T. novce-zelandice occurs in large shoals in the open sea of
southern Australia and Tasmania, which occasionally enter
harbours and estuaries. The young are found in the bays and
harbours of both New South Wales and Tasmania, and,
according to Johnston, they form the chief food of the
Tasmanian kingfish, Jordanidia solandri, Cuv. & Val.
Twenty-three specimens, 95-405 mm. long, are preserved from
the following localities :—

Between Gabo Island and Cape Everard, Victoria, about
forty miles from land, 150-250 fathoms.

Off the east coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Bay of Fires, Tasmania, 40 fathoms ; 30th June, 1914.

Circular Head, North-western Tasmania ; 5th September,
1911.

Off the mouth of the Murray River, South Australia, 20
fathoms ; 17th August, 1909.

Great Australian Bight, 100-120 fathoms and surface ;
March, 1912.

Between Cape Naturaliste and Geraldton, Western Aus-
tralia, 20-100 fathoms.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 125

This fish seems to be confined to the surface of the sea ;
the specimens occurring in the deeper hauls doubtless entered
the net as it was being hauled in.

I am indebted to Mr. T. F. Cheeseman, Director of the
Auckland Museum, for a New Zealand specimen of this
species, which he secured in the local fish market.

TRACHURUS DECLIVIS, Jenyns.
\

Yellow-Tail. Bung.
(PL xxxiv., fig. 2.)

Caranx declivis, Jenyns, A'OO!. " Beagle," iii., 1841, p. 68,.
pi. xiv.

This species differs from T. novce-zelandice in having the
body shorter, broader and more compressed ; the depth in
adults is 4-0-4-4 in the length from the premaxillary symphysis
to the middle caiidal rays. The scutes of the lateral line are
narrower and less numerous, and the colour is yellowish-green
on the back. Ten specimens have been counted as follows :—
D. viii., 1/30-34; A. ii. 1/26-31; L. lat. 26-28 + 7-9+35-38.
Length to thirteen inches.

The Yellow-tail is abundant in Port Jackson, and it occurs
all round the coasts of the southern half of Australia, from
south-western Australia to southern Queensland. Specimens
are in the Australian Museum from near Sydney and
Fremantle. A few were taken by the " Endeavour " when
the net was lowered in shallow water at the following
stations : —

Mouth of Wide Bay, Queensland.

Investigator Strait, South Australia, 12-20 fathoms ;
February, 1912.

Genus CARANX, Lacepede.

i

CARANX FERDAU, Forskal.

Caranx ferdau (Forskal), Giinther, Journ. Mus. Godeff., v...
1876, p. 134, pi. Ixxvii.-lxxviii.

Carangoides ferdau, Jordan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish.
Bur., xxiii. i., 1905, p. 198, fig. 77.

Four specimens are preserved in the Australian Museum,
208-363 mm. long from the premaxillary symphysis to the
end of the middle caudal rays. They agree very well with
the figures quoted above, though the body and vertical fins
are very dark in the two larger examples.

126 " ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

LOGS. — Norfolk Island, one specimen. Lord Howe Island,
two specimens. Manly, near Sydney, one specimen.

CARANX IGNOBILIS, Forskal.

Caranx ignobilis (Forskal), Klunzinger, Sitzb. Akad. Wiss.
Wien., Ixxx. i., 1879, p. 377.

Carangus ignobilis, Jordan & Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish.
Bur., xxiii. i., 1905, p. 188, fig. 72 (synonymy).

Caranx lessonii, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
ix., 1833, p. 113.

A fine specimen is in the Australian Museum from Port
Hedland, north-western Australia, and another from Cape
York. Klunzinger has recorded this species from Port
Darwin and Cleveland Bay, while it has been described as
C. lessonii from " New Holland " by Cuvier & Valenciennes.

CARANX BUCCULENTUS, Alleyne cfc Macleay.
Wide-mouthed Trevally.

Carangus bucculentus (Alleyne & Macleay), Ogilby, Mem.
Qld. Mus., iii., 1915, p. 73, pi. xxii.

Twenty specimens, 123-175 mm. long from the tip of the
upper jaw to the end of the middle caudal rays, do not exhibit
any variation.

Iocs.— Eleven to fourteen miles N. 59° W. of Pine Peak,
Queensland, 25 fathoms.

Four to twenty miles off Bustard Head, Queensland, 11-21
fathoms.

CARANX GEORGIANUS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Trevally.

(Plate xx.)

Caranx georgianus, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
ix., 1833, p. 85. Id., Jenyns, Zool. " Beagle," iii.,
1841, p. 71. Id., Richardson, Zool. " Erebus &
Terror," Fish., 1848, p. 135, pi. Iviii., fig. 1-3. Id.,
Gunther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., ii., 1860, p. 440. Id.,
Klunzinger, Arch. Nat., xxxviii. i., 1872, p. 31. and
Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien., Ixxx. i., 1879, p. 378. Id.,
Castelnau, Proc. Zool. Soc. Viet., i., 1872, p. 117, and

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 127

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, iii., 1879, pp. 352, 364.
Id., Alleyne & Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, i.,
1877. p. 327. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales,
v., 1881, p. 533, and viii., 1883, p. 204. Id., Johnston,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1882 (1883), pp. 85, 119.
Id., Ogilby, Ed. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1893, p. 80, pi. xxiv.
Id., Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1908, p. 87, pi. Ivii.

Caranx nobilis, Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, v.,
1881, p. 532.

D. viii. 1/27 ; A. ii. 1/22 ; P. 19 ; V.i.5 ; C. 17. Depth
before the second dorsal 3-04-3-07, head 3-1-3-4 in the length
from the tip of the snout to the end of the middle caudal
rays. Opening of adipose eyelid 5.3-5.6 in the head, and
2-2-1 in the snout, which is 2.5-2.8 in the head. Interorbital
width much less than twice as wide as the eye-opening, 1-4
in the snout. Length of pectoral a little greater than the
depth of the body, 2-9-3 in the length. Third dorsal spine
2-2, second dorsal ray 3-3-2 in the head.

Body elongate-ovate, the dorsal and anal profiles almost
evenly curved. Snout rather long, pointed. Maxillary not
reaching the anterior margin of the eye. Adipose eyelid well
developed, with a large opening. Scales are present on the
cheeks and operculum, and on an area above and behind the
eye which extends forward to above the middle of the pupil.
A series of short, stout, conical teeth in each jaw. Vomer
and palatines with patches of minute teeth ; the tongue is
also finely roughened.

Vent at or beyond the tips of the ventrals, a little in front
of the anal spines.

Body covered with small scales, which either extend over
the breast or leave a minute patch on the lower surface bare.
Lateral line broadly arched anteriorly, the curve being about
one-fourth longer than the straight portion. There are
eighteen to twenty-two keeled scales which are confined to
the posterior two-thirds of the straight portion ; they are
broadest on the caudal peduncle, their breadth being equal
to one-third the width of the eye opening.

A strong procumbent spine precedes the dorsal fin, which
is more or less hidden in the skin. Third dorsal spine longest,
not quite reaching the first ray. Anterior dorsal and anal
rays longer than the others, but not produced into lobes ;
the last rays of both fins are enlarged and somewhat separated
from the others, and their membrane is deeply excised.

128 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Anterior rays protected by a moderately high scaly sheath
which becomes lower, and finally disappears posteriorly.
Caudal deeply forked. Pectoral falcate, reaching nearly to
or a little beyond the anterior straight portion of the lateral
line.

Colour. — Silvery, darker above. Operculum with a well-
defined, round, black spot. Caudal lobes darker towards the
tips.

Described from two specimens 253 mm. long from the tip
of the snout to the end of the middle caudal rays. One is
from Port Jackson, New South Wales, and the other from
Fremantle, Western Australia ; the latter is figured.

I have examined a well-graduated series of thirty-one
young specimens, 60-170 mm. long, and find them to be
separable into two forms, which probably represent two
distinct species. In one, the depth is equal to or but little
longer than the head, and always less than one-third the
length from the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the
middle caudal rays ; the other form has a much deeper body,
its depth being much greater than the length of the head, and
considerably more than one-third the length. A critical
comparison of specimens of equal size, however, fails to reveal
any other structural differences.

A similar, but less striking dimorphism is exhibited by
ten larger examples, 230-440 mm. long, but my material is
not sufficiently well preserved to enable me to determine
whether they represent two species. The slender form
described and figured here is apparently the true C. georgianits,
though I have not seen any specimens with twenty-eight or
more dorsal rays as described by Cuvier & Valenciennes.
The deeper specimens are evidently C. platessa ; this form is
figured by Richardson as C. georgianus1.

Caranx nobilis was evidently founded on a large specimen
of C. georgianus. The typical specimen is apparently lost,
and no others bearing Macleay's name are now preserved in
his museum, but his description agrees very well with Cuvier
and Valenciennes' species.

Locs. — Specimens are in the Australian Museum from
Moretoii Bay, Queensland ; Lord Howe Island ; Port Jackson.
New South Wales ; Adelaide, South Australia ; Fremantle,

1. Richardson— Zool. "Erebus & Terror," Fishes, 1848, p. 135, pi
Iviii., fig. 1-3.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 129

Western Australia. Young examples were trawled off
Flinders Island, Investigator Group, South Australia, in
thirty-seven fathoms.

CARANX LEPTOLEPIS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
(Plate xxi.)

Caranx leptolepis, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
ix., 1833, p. 63. Id., Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish.,
ii., 1860, p. 440. Id., Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 225,
pi. li., fig. 4.

Caranx cheverti, Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, i.,
1877, p. 324, pi. x., fig. 1.

D. viii. 26-27 ; A. ii. 23 ; P. 19 ; V.i.5 ; C. 17. L.lat. 100.

Height before the second dorsal fin 3-1-3-3 in the length
from the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle
caudal rays ; head 3-7-3-8, pectoral 3-1-3-3 in the same.
Eye 3-4-3-7 in the head, equal to or shorter than the snout,
which is 3-3-4 in the head. Third dorsal spine 2-1-2-3, second
dorsal ray 2-1-2-6 in the head.

Body rather elongate, its dorsal and ventral profiles evenly
arched. Snout of moderate length, the lower jaw projecting
slightly when the mouth is closed ; maxillary not or just
reaching the verticle of the anterior margin of the eye.
Adipose eyelid well developed, its opening less than half the
width of the eye. Scales are present on the cheeks and
opercles, and they extend forward on the upper surface to
above the anterior fourth of the eye.

Teeth villiform and exceedingly minute according to
Macleay ; they are not visible in my specimens except on
the tongue.

Vent midway between the ventral fins and the anal spines,
or a little nearer the latter.

Body covered with small scales, which extend over the
breast, leaving only a minute patch on the lower surface bare.
Lateral line broadly arched, its curve being about one-fourth
longer than the straight portion. There are about twenty-two
keeled scales, which cover more than half the straight portion
of the lateral line ; they are broadest on the caudal peduncle,
their greatest breadth being equal to one-fourth the width
of the eye.

130 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

A well-developed procumbent spine precedes the dorsal fin,
which is more or less hidden in the flesh. Third dorsal spine
longest ; the fourth nearly reaches the first ray when
adpressed. Anterior rays longer than the others, but not
produced to form a lobe. Anal similar to the dorsal, and
both fins have a scaly sheath covering the bases of the rays
anteriorly. Caudal deeply forked. Pectorals falcate, not
reaching across the curve of the lateral line. Ventrals
reaching well beyond the vent, but not to the anal spines.

Colours. — Silvery blue above, silvery white below. A
large, rounded, black blotch covers the upper opercular
margin and extends onto the suprascapular region.

Described from two specimens, 145 and 195 mm. long from
the tip of the snout to the end of the middle caudal rays ; the
accompanying figure represents the larger example, which
was taken near Pine Peak, Queensland. I have compared
them with the typical specimen of Caranx cheverti in the
Macleay Museum, and find no difference between them, while
they also agree with Indian specimens of C. leptolepis in the
Australian Museum which were identified by Dr. Day.

LOGS. — The " Endeavour " collection includes thirty-eight
specimens from eleven to fourteen miles N. 59° W. of Pine
Peak, Queensland, 25 fathoms ; 1st August, 1910, on a
muddy bottom. Macleay 's type was obtained at Katow,
New Guinea. Giinther records a specimen from Australia
which was collected by Macgillivray ; it was probably
captured in Queensland waters.

CARANX AFFINIS, RuppdL

Caranx affinis, Riippell, Neue Wirbelth., Fisch., 1835, p. 49,
pi. xiv., fig. 1. Id., Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 219,
pi. xlix., fig. 4.

Carangus affinis, Jordan and Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish.
Comm., xxiii., pt. 1, 1905, p. 195, fig. 76.

Two examples from Broome, north-western Australia, do
not differ from an Indian specimen which was identified as
C. a/finis by Dr. Day. The species is beautifully figured by
Jordan and Evermann, though their illustration does not
show the last dorsal and anal rays partially detached from
the preceding ones, as they are in my specimens.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 131

CARANX MALAM, Bleeker.
(Plate xxii.)

Selar malam, Bleeker, Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind., i., 1851,
p. 362.

Caranx malam, Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., ii., 1860,
p. 434. Id., Kner, Reise "Novara," i., Fische, 1865,
p. 154.

Caranx nigripinnis, Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 225, pi. li.,
fig- 5.

D. viii. 25 ; A. ii. 21-22 ; P. 20-21 ; C. 17 ; V. i. 5. Scutes
on l.lat 59.

Height before the second dorsal fin 2-9-3 in the length from
the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle caudal
rays ; head 3-9-4, pectoral 3-3-3-4 in the same. Eye 5-1-5-2
in the head, equal to or slightly shorter than the snout, which
is 4-7-5-1 in the head. Interorbital width greater than the
eye and the snout, 3-9-4-1 in the head. Fourth dorsal spine
2-3-2-6, third dorsal ray 2-2-1 in the head.

Body elongate-ovate, the dorsal and ventral profiles evenly
curved. Snout rather short, obtuse. Maxillary reaching the
vertical of the anterior margin of the eye or to below its first
third. Adipose eyelid well developed, its opening about
half as wide as the eye. Scales are present on the upper
portion of the operculum, and a few are left on the cheeks ; a
small patch on the side of the nape above and behind the
eye. Teeth in a single row in each jaw ; they are elongate
and somewhat compressed, closely set, and united by a
cartilaginous substance which leaves only their tips free.
Two or three minute vomerine teeth can be detected in
some specimens but not in others ; true palatine teeth are
apparently wanting, but minute teeth are present on the
skin of the roof of the mouth. Tongue with distinct, minute
teeth.

Vent situated between the ends of the ventral fins.

Body covered writh minute scales, which extend over the
breast, leaving only a very small patch on the lower surface
bare. Lateral line strongly arched anteriorly, the curve
being less than half as long as the straight portion, and
ending below the first dorsal ray. There are about fifty-nine
keeled scales, which extend along the whole length of the
straight portion .; they are broadest below the hinder portion
of the dorsal fin, and are equal to about half the width of
the eye.

Procumbent dorsal spine deeply imbedded in the skin ;
fourth spine longest, almost reaching to the first ray when

132 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

adpressed. Anterior dorsal and anal rays a little longer
than the others, but not forming lobes. Pectoral reaching
far beyond the curve of the lateral line to above the anterior
portion of the anal. Ventrals extending a little beyond the
vent, not nearly reaching the anal spines. Caudal deeply
forked.

Colour. — Silvery, darker above. Two specimens have seven
to nine, broad, dark bars descending from the back to the
lateral line which are bilaterally symmetrical in one, and
differently disposed on each side in the other ; two other
specimens are without traces of these bands. A large,
rounded, dark, blotch on the upper part of the operculum.
First dorsal greyish, the other fins lighter, with microscopic
grey dots.

The above description is mainly based on two examples
165 and 234 mm. long from the premaxillary symphysis to
the end of the middle caudal rays. The figure represents
the smaller specimen.

I have compared these specimens with one of the types of
C. nigripinnis, Day, which is part of Day's collection in the
Australian Museum, and find no differences between them.
Day's specimen has several minute vomerine and palatine
teeth, though his description states that these are absent ;
his figure also illustrates the head as lower and the snout
more acute than it is. Another specimen in the same
collection is labelled as a co-type of C. malam, Bleeker, which
does not differ from the type of C. nigripinnis.

Locs. — Three to seven miles S. 42° E. of Double Island
Point, Queensland, 32 fathoms ; 16th July, 1910.

Eleven to fourteen miles N. 50° W. of Pine Peak, Queens-
land, 24-26 fathoms ; 1st August, 1910.

CARANX RADIATUS, Macleay.

Fringed Trevally.

(Plate xxiii.)

Caranx radiatus, Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, v.,
1881, p. 537. Id., Kent, Great Barrier Reef, 1893,
p. 289, pi. xvi., fig. 1, and Naturalist in Australia,
1897, p. 169.

Caranx compressus, Macleay, Loc. cit., viii., 1883, p. 204
(nee C. compressus, Day).

D. vii. i. 22 ; A. ii. i. 19-20 ; P. 20 ; V. i. 5 ; C. 17. L.lat.
38-45.

FISHES. — MCCTJLLOCH. 133

Height before the second dorsal 2-7 in the length from the
premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle caudal
rays ; head 3.8, pectoral 2-9, fifth dorsal ray 2-7, and fifth
anal ray 3-3 in the same. Eye about 4, third dorsal spine
almost 2, and ventral fin 1-4 in the head.

Body ovate, the dorsal and ventral profiles evenly curved.
Snout rather short, obtuse. Maxillary reaching to below the
end of the anterior third of the eye. Adipose eyelid well
developed, largely covering the eye. Scales are present on
the cheek and upper portion of the operculum, and there is
a small rounded patch above and behind the eye. A single
series of short, cardiform teeth in each jaw ; the premaxil-
laries have also a band of villiform teeth behind these, those
near the symphysis being somewhat enlarged. Microscopic
granular teeth are present on the vomer, palatines and
tongue.

Vent midway between the ventral spine and the second
anal spine.

Body covered with moderately large, adherent cycloid
scales, which also extend over the breast, leaving only a
minute patch on the lower surface bare. Lateral line strongly
arched anteriorly, the curve being about half as long as the
straight portion. There are thirty-eight to forty-five keeled
scales which extend along the whole length of the straight
portion of the lateral line ; they are broadest a little before
the end of the dorsal fin, their breadth being equal to a little
more than half the length of the eye.

No procumbent dorsal spine ; third spine longest, reaching
the first ray. All but the last dorsal and anal rays are greatly
elongate, and their greater portion is free from the membrane ;
they are divided to their tips, and can be concealed in a very
broad scaly sheath. Caudal forked. Pectoral falcate, ex-
tending to about the ninth plate of the lateral line. Second
and third ventral rays elongate, reaching the anal spines.

Colour. — Olive green above, silvery below, with or without
six or more dark vertical bands extending from the back to
the middle of the sides. A large black opercular blotch.
Tips of anterior dorsal rays blackish. End of upper caudal
lobe black.

Described and figured from a specimen 203 mm. long from
the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle caudal
rays. I have compared it with the type of the species in the
Macleay Museum and find the two to be quite similar.

134 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Two co-type", of Caranx compressus are in the Australian
Museum collection, but the types appear to have been lost.
They are quite similar to the specimen described above, but
they differ from Macleay's description in having fewer anal
rays, which, together with those of the dorsal, are elongate
in both examples ; the sharp ridge on the head referred to
by Macleay is only caused by the flesh drying upon the
cranial crest, and is not evident in the well-preserved Western
Australian specimen.

Loc. — Port Hedland, north-western Australia. The type
of C. radiatus was taken at Rockingham Bay, Queensland,
and Kent has recognised the species both in Queensland and
Western Australia. The specimens identified as C. com-
pressus were taken in the lower portion of the Burdekin
River, Queensland.

CARANX ALTISSIMUS, Jordan & Seale.
(Plate xxiv.)

Caranx altissimus, Jordon & Seale, Proc. Davenport Acad.
Sci., x., 1907, p. 7, pi. iii.

? Caranx cirrhosus, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
ix., 1833, p. 216 (part), pi. ccl.

D. viii., i./18-19 ; A. ii., i./18 ; P. 19 ; V. i. 5 ; C. 17.
Height before the second dorsal fin almost half the length
from the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle
caudal rays ; head 3-5 in the same. Eye almost three in
the head.

Body elevated, compressed, covered with minute scales
which extend forward below to a line from behind the ventrals
to the pectorals, leaving the breast naked. Lateral line
arched anteriorly, becoming straight below the middle of
the soft dorsal fin ; straight portion 1|-1J in the length of
the curve. There are thirty-four to thirty-eight scales on
the straight portion of the lateral line, of which about
twenty-five are more or less keeled and acute ; they are
broadest on the caudal peduncle, though their greatest
breadth is less than half its depth. Maxillary reaching to or
just beyond the anterior margin of the pupil ; it is dilated
distally, being almost half as wide as the eye. Preorbital
rather broad, about two-thirds the width of the eye. Lower
jaw longer than the upper, the chin prominent.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 135

Anterior dorsal and anal rays greatly produced, the former
reaching the end of the fin or beyond the tips of the middle
caudal rays, and the latter extending to or beyond the base
of the caudal. Pectoral reaching across the curve of the
lateral line.

Colour. — Silvery, with traces of four or five broad darker
cross-bars. A dark opercular spot. Anterior margins of
dorsal spines and the first ray black ; the remaining fins
colourless.

Two specimens 130-137 mm. long from the premaxillary
symphyses to the end of the middle caudal rays, only differ
in the relative lengths of the dorsal and anal rays ; the
anterior profile is also slightly more arched in one than in
the other.

These specimens do not quite agree with the description
of C. altissimus, but it must be noted that Jordan and Seale's
description and figure differ in several details. They count
twenty-one anal rays, but their figure only shows nineteen ;
the maxillary only reaches the anterior orbital margin
according to the description, but in the figure it extends to
below the pupil. The ventral fins are somewhat longer than
in my specimens, and the anterior dorsal and anal rays were
damaged in the types, so that it is not known whether they
were produced as in the specimens described above.1

The fish figured by Cuvier and Valenciennes as C. cirrhosus
was evidently very similar to the specimens referred to here ;
the figure shows the preorbital bone as somewhat narrower
and the anterior profile less rounded than in my specimens,
but in all other details it agrees very well with them. C.
altissimus differs from the closely allied C. aurochs, Ogilby,
in having the preorbital bone broader, and the straight
portion of the lateral line much shorter ; the anterior anal
ray is also more produced and filamentous.

Loc. — Southern Queensland ; the exact locality is un-
known.

1. C. altissimus has been recorded from Manila by Jordan and Richardson
(Check-list Fish. Philippine Is., 1910, p. 20). A local specimen is in the
collection of the Bureau of Science, Marila, which Dr. Alvin Scale has
examined for me. He counts ii. i. 19 rays in the anal fin; the longest
dorsal ray is less than a fifth of the total length of the fish, and that of the
anal is still shorter.

136 'ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

CARANX AUROCHS, Ogilby.
Black-crested Trevally.

Citula aurochs, Ogilby, Mem. Qld. Mus., iii., 1915, p. 79.
pi. xxv.

Five specimens, 131-150 mm. long to the end of the middle
caudal rays, do not differ from the type of this species with
which I have compared them. The elongate dorsal ray is
shorter in one than in the others, not reaching the end of
the fin ; in all other details they are quite similar.

LOCS. — Eleven to fourteen miles N.W. of Pine Creek.
Queensland, 24-26 fathoms.

Twelve miles N.E. of Bo wen, Queensland, 19-25 fathoms.

CARANX MALABARICUS, Bloch & Schneider.

Caranx malabaricus (Bloch & Schneider), Giinther, Brit.
Mus. Cat. Fish., ii., 1860, p. 436. Id., Macleay, Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, v., 1881, p. 533. Id., Day,
Fish. India, 1878, p. 221, pi. i., fig. 2.

Caranx cceruleopinnatus, Ruppell, Neue Wirbelth., Fische,
1835, p. 47, pi. xiii., fig. 2 (nee Cuvier & Valenciennes).

Thirty-one specimens, 153-180 mm. long from the pre-
maxillary symphysis to the end of the middle caudal rays, do
not differ from an Indian example in the Australian Museum
which was identified by Dr. Day ; they also agree with the
figures quoted above. They exhibit some little variation in
the depth of the body, length of the snout, size of the eye,
and development of the anterior dorsal and anal rays ; these
latter are always somewhat produced, but in a few speci-
mens they reach to or a little beyond the middle of the fins
when laid back.

Loc. — Eleven to fourteen miles N. 59° W. of Pine Peak,
Queensland, 24-26 fathoms ; 1st August, 1910.

CARANX CHRYSOPHRYS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
Long-nosed Trevally.

Citula chrysophrys (Cuvier & Valenciennes), Ogilby, Mem.
Qld. Mus., hi., 1915, p. 77, pi. xxiv.

Six specimens, 117-169 mm. long to the end of the middle
caudal rays, vary somewhat in depth ; measured before the

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. 137

second dorsal, it is 2-2-3 in the above length. The anterior
dorsal and anal rays are produced in all, but are considerably
longer in some than in others. All have 1/20 dorsal and 1/16
anal rays.

Locs. — Twenty miles off Bustard Head, Queensland, 20
fathoms.

Wide Bay, Queensland.

CARANX HUMEROSUS, sp. nov.
(Plate xxv.)

D. viii. i. 21 ; A. ii. i. 19 ; V. i. 5 ; P. 20 ; C. 17. Lat. line
scutes 27-31. Height before the second dorsal fin 2-7 in the
length from the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the
middle caudal rays ; head 3-7 in the same. Eye 3-6 in the
head, equal to the snout, and a little greater than the inter-
orbital width, which is 4 in the head. Pectoral 0-2 longer
than, first dorsal ray almost as long as the head. Fourth
dorsal spine 2-7, second anal ray 1-3 in the head.

Body rather deep, compressed. Dorsal profile consider-
ably arched, the lower oblique, almost straight from the
anal fin to the snout. Snout sharp. Maxillary broad,
reaching to below or beyond the middle of the eye ; the space
separating it from the lower orbital border is about half as
wide as the eye. Adipose eyelid little developed, largest
behind. Scales are present on the upper part of the oper-
culum and on the cheek ; a few are on the side of the head
above the operculum ; all the rest of the head bare. Teeth
villiform, in bands on the jaws ; minute teeth are present on
the vomer, palatines and tongue.

Vent situated between the posterior fourth of the ventral
fins or just beyond their tips.

Body covered with small scales, which extend forward to
a line from the pectorals to the middle of the ventrals, leaving
all the breast naked. Lateral line forming a low arch
anteriorly, its curve being about as long as the straight
portion, and ending below or a little in advance of the middle
of the second dorsal fin. The keeled scales extend along the
whole length of the straight portion ; they are broadest on
the caudal peduncle, their breadth being equal to about one-
third the length of the eye.

138 ;' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Third or fourth dorsal spine longest, not reaching the
anterior ray when adpressed. Anterior rays produced and
forming a lobe which is longer in small specimens than in
larger ones. Anal similar to the dorsal, though the anterior
lobe is shorter. Pectoral not quite reaching across the curve
of the lateral line in small specimens, slightly beyond it in
larger ones. Ventrals reaching to or beyond the vent, but
not to the anal spines. Caudal deeply forked.

Colour. — In the young the body is crossed by five very
broad dark bands, and there is a large and striking dark
blotch above the shoulder. A broad dark area on the upper
part of the operculum, and the dorsal profile above the eyes
is blackish. First dorsal fin black. Ventrals and anterior
portions of the dorsal and anal dusky. A small axillary spot.
In the larger specimens only a few of these markings are
retained, both the body and fins being lighter coloured.

A series of forty-eight specimens, 126-200 mm. long from
the premaxillary symphysis to the end of the middle caudal
rays, exhibits some variation in the depth of the body, it
being generally deeper in the young, and 2.6-2.9 in the
length ; the dorsal profile is somewhat more arched in some
than in others ; the anterior dorsal rays are longer in the
young, reaching back nearly to the end of the base cf the
fin, whereas they only attain the middle in larger specimens.
The .specimen figured is 148 mm. long and is selected as
the type.

This species is closely allied to C. oblongus, Cuvier and
Valenciennes, of which I have a specimen from the Philip-
pines. It differs in having a much larger maxillary, and the
lateral line scutes less numeroiis.

Locs. — Eleven to fourteen miles N. 59° W. of Pine Peak,
Queensland ; 24-26 fathoms. 1st August, 1910.

Bustard Bay, Queensland ; 11-21 fathoms. 8th July, 1910.
Near Bowen, Queensland.

CARANX BOOPS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Caranx boops, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
ix., 1833, p. 48. Id., Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 218,
pi. xlix., fig. 2. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.8.
Wales, viii., 1883, p. 266.

Carang gervaisi, Castelnau, Res. Fish. Australia (Viet.
Offic. Rec. Philad. Exhib.), 1875, p. 18.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 139

Castelnau's description of his C. gervaisi from Cape York
is very incomplete, but such proportions as are given and
the details of the lateral line agree very well with those of
C. boops. This latter species has not been recorded from
Australia, but it has been recognised from China Strait,
south-eastern New Guinea, by Macleay.

CARANX KALLA, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
Herring-Trevally.

Alepes kalla (Cuvier & Valenciennes), Ogilby, Mem. Qld.
Mus., iii., 1915, p. 62, pi. xx.

Forty-three specimens, 120-155 mm. long from the tip of
the upper jaw to the end of the middle caudal rays. They
do not differ from a specimen from Madras which was
identified as Caranx kalla by Dr. Day.

Loc. — Seven miles N.E. of Bo wen, Queensland, 16 fathoms.

Genus DECAPTERTJS, Bleeker.

DECAPTERTJS RUSSELLII, Ruppell.

Mackerel Scad.

Decapterus russellii (Riippell), Ogilby, Mem. Qld. Mus., iii.,
1915, p. 59, pi. xix.

A single specimen, 159 mm. long to the end of the middle
caudal rays.

Loc. — Bustard Bay, Queensland, 15-21 fathoms.

Genus MEGALASPIS, Bleeker.
MEGALASPIS CORDYLA, Linnaeus.

Scomber rottleri, Bloch, Ichth., pt. 10, 1797, pi. cccxlvi.

Caranx rottleri, Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 213 (references
and synonymy).

A young specimen, 155 mm. long, does not differ from a
larger example from Madras, identified as Caranx rottleri by
Dr. Day.

Loc. — Seven miles N.N.E. of Bowen, Queensland, 16
fathoms.

140 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Genus ULUA, Jordan & Snyder.
ULUA MANDIBULARIS, Macleay.

Caranx mandibularis, Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W^les,
viii., 1883, p. 356.

The t\vo typical specimens of this species are preserved
in the Macleay Museum, and a co-type is in the Australian
Museum. They are very similar to the figure of U. rich-
ardsonii1, but have the frontal profile a little more convex,
the eye larger, and a few more anal rays. Macleay has de-
scribed the head as being free from scales, but there are really
numerous small scales on the cheeks and upper parts of
the opercles.

Loc. — Port Moresby, British New Guinea.

Genus ALECTIS, Eafinesque.

ALECTIS INDICA, Ruppell.

Plumed Trevally : Diamond Fish : Silvery Moon- fish.

A lectisindica (Ruppell), Ogilby, Mem. Qld. Mus., iii., 1915,
p. 83, pi. xxvi.

Caranx gallus, Kent, Naturalist in Australia, 1897, p. 153,
figure.

Sixty-three young examples, 100-135 mm. long to the end
of the middle caudal rays, agree with an Indian specimen in
the Australian Museum from Dr. Day's collection ; they are
well illustrated by Kent's figure quoted above. They
exhibit very little variation, though some are slightly more
angular than others ; all have six, more or less distinct,
broad, vertical bars crossing the body and tail, and narrower
intermediate ones are also often present.

Locs. — Seven miles N.N.E. of Bowen, Queensland, 16
fathoms.

Four to twenty miles N.E. of Gloucester Head, Queens-
land, 19-35 fathoms.

1. Jordan & Snyder — Mem. Carnegie Mus., iv., pt. 2, 19, p. 39, pi. Hii.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 141

Family LUTIANID.E.
Genus LUTIANUS, Block.

LUTIANUS ERYTHROPTERUS (Block), Day.

Lutjanus erythropterus, Bloch, Ichtyologie, 1797, pi. ccxlix.

Lutianus erythropterus, Day, Fish. India, 1878, p. 32, pi. x.,
fig. 1-2.

A small example, 135 mm. long, lias the characteristic
marking of the young of L. erythropterus as described and
figured by Day. This author examined the types of the
species in the Berlin Museum, which do not agree with
Bloch's figure.

Loc. — Eleven miles N. 59° \V. of Pine Peak, Queensland.
24-26 fathoms ; 1st August, 1910.

LUTIANUS CHRYSOTJENIA, Sleeker.

Lutianus chrysotcenia, Bleeker, Atlas Ichth., viii., 1876, p. 50,
pi. cccii., fig. 4. Id., Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1905, p. 62.

Mesoprion chrysotcenia, Weber, Zool. Forschr. Austr., v.,
1895, p. 262.

Three specimens, about 325 mm. long, were taken on lines
at North Reef, and Masthead Island, in the Capricorn Group.
The species has been recognised from Houtman Abrolhos,
Western Australia, by Waite, and from Thursday Island by
Weber. Another specimen is in the Australian Museum from
Broome, North- Western Australia.

LUTIANUS FULVIFLAMMA, Forskal.

Lutianus fulviflamma (Forskal), Day, Fish. India, 1875,
p. 42, pi. xii., fig. 6. Id., Bleeker, Atlas Ichth., viii.,
1876, p. 65, pi. cccxliv., fig. 3. Id., Klunzinger, Sitzb.
Akad. Wiss. Wien, Ixxx. i., 1879, p. 342. Id., Ogilby,
Cat. Fish. N.S.\Vales, 1886, p. 10, and Ed. Fish. N.S.
Wales, 1893, p. 14. Id., Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S. Wales,
1908, p. 61.

Notes on the differences between this species and L. russelli
are given under the latter heading.

142 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Locs. — A large example was caught on a line at North Reef
in the Capricorn Group, Queensland. I have also examined
five others from Southern Queensland ; one from Port
Moresby, New Guinea ; one from the Philippine Islands ;
two from Madras, India, being identified by Dr. Francis Day.
The species has been recognised from Port Denison, Queens-
land, by Klunzinger, and from the northern portion of the
coast of New South Wales by Ogilby and Stead.

LUTIANUS RUSSELLI, Bleeker.

Lutianus russelli, Bleeker, Atlas Ichth., viii., 1876, p. 71,
pi. ccc., fig. 2. Id., Day, Fish. India, 1875, p. 41, pi.
xii., fig. 5. Id., Jordan & Thompson, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus., xxxix., 1911, p. 450, fig. 3.

Lutianus johnii, Ogilby. Cat. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1886, p. 9.
Id., Waite, Mem/ N.S.Wales Nat, Club, 1904, p. 29.
Id., Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1908, p. 61. (Not
L. johnii, Bloch).

The differences between this species and L. fidviflamma are
only apparent when a series of each is compared. I have
examined eleven specimens of each species 125-330 mm. long,
and find the distinguishing characters noted by Jordan and
Thompson to be constant. The greater part of the black
lateral blotch is above the lateral line in L. russelli, and all
my specimens have fourteen or fifteen dorsal rays. In
L, fulviflamma the greater part of the dark blotch is below
the lateral line, and there are only thirteen dorsal rays.
Further, the contour of the back is more arched in L. russelli,
and it has more scales between the lateral line and the back
and on the cheek.

I have examined the specimen recorded as L. johnii from
the Richmond River, New South Wales, by Ogilby, and find
it to be identical with L. russelli. It differs from L. johnii in
having the scales above the lateral line oblique instead of
horizontal.

Locs. — A large specimen was taken on a line at North Reef
in the Capricorn Group, Queensland. Other specimens are
in the Australian Museum from Moreton Bay, Queensland ;
Richmond River, New South Wales ; Akyab, India (Francis
Day Coll.).

FISHES.- — MCCULLOCH. 143

Genus APRION, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
APEION VIRESCENS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Aprion virescens, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,
vi., 1830, p. 544. pi. clxviii. Id., Bleeker, Atlas Ichth.,
viii., 1876, p. 77, pi. ccxciii., fig. 3.

A large specimen, nearly 600 mm. long, agrees very well
with Bleeker 's figure. It was taken on a line on Gardner
Bank, east of Frazer Island, Queensland. The species has
not hitherto been recognised from Australia.

Family ENOPLOSID.E.
Genus ENOPLOSUS, Lacepede.

ENOPLOSUS ARMATUS, Shaw.
Old Wife.

Chcetodon armatits, Shaw in White, Voy. N.S.Wales, 1790,

p. 254, fig. 1.
Enoplosiis ivhite. Lacepede, Hist. Nat. Poiss., iv., 1802,

p. 541.
Enoplosus serotimis, de Vis, Ann. Qld. Mus., No. 10, 1911,

p. 29.

Through the kindness of Dr. R. Hamlyn-Harris, Director
of the Queensland Museum, I have been permitted to
examine the type of Enoplosus serotinus, de Vis. It is in
very bad condition, but does not differ in any way from E.
arm&tus. It has eight spines in the first dorsal instead of
seven as described, while the length from the snout to the
base of the tail is 148mm. instead of 163. It was said to
have been collected at Cairns, North Queensland, but this
locality is almost certainly wrong, since the species is not
otherwise known farther north than Wide Bay.

Two very large examples are preserved in the " Endeavour"
collection measuring 262 mm. from the tip of the snout to
the end of the middle caudal rays. They only differ from
smaller examples in having the dorsal spines shorter and the
anterior dorsal and anal rays longer. In the young the fourth
spine is about 2-2 in the length of the head and body ; in the
larger specimens it is 3-8 in the same. The depth of the body
varies in different individuals from 2-2-17 in the length from
the snout to the hypural joint.

LOGS. — Wide Bay, Queensland.

Twenty-four miles S.S.E. of Eagle's Nest, Victoria, 45
fathoms ; 12th June, 1914.

144 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family HISTIOPTERID^E.
Genus QUINQUARIUS, Jordan.

Pentaceros, Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., iii.,

1829, p. 30 (P. capensis, Cuv. & Val.). Not Pentaceros,

Schultze, 1760.
Quinquarius, Jordan, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxii., 1907, pp.

236, 238 (Q. japonicus, Doderlein).
Quadrarius, Jordan, Loc. cit. (Pentaceros decaca.nthus,

Giinther).

The name Quinquarius was proposed by Jordan to replace
Pentaceros, which is preoccupied. He also established another
genus Quadrarius for Pentaceros decacanthus, Giinther, which
only differs from P. capensis in the number of its dorsal and
anal spines ; but the discovery of other allied species in which
the number of spines differs from both Quinquarius and
Quadrarius indicates that this character is not of generic
value.

Pseudopentaceros, Gill1 ( = Gilchristia, Jordan)2, with Pen-
taceros richardsoni, Smith,3 for its type, is possibly also
identical with Quinquarius, in which case Gill's name would
have to be used. Smith's figure of the species, however,
suggests that there are other characters besides the increased
number of dorsal spines to distinguish it.

QUINQUARIUS HENDECACANTHUS, sp. nov.
(Plate xxvi., figs. 1-3.)

D. xi./13-15 ; A. iv./10-ll ; V. i./5 ; P. 17 ; C. 17. Height
1-8 in the length from the snout to the base of the caudal
rays ; head 2-8 in the same. Eye 2-9 in the head, almost
equal to the interorbital width, and but little shorter than
the snout, which is 2-6 in the head. Fourth dorsal spine 1-2,
second dorsal ray 2-5, second anal ray 2-3 in the head.
Pectoral 1-08, ventral spine 1-9, and caudal peduncle 3 in
the head.

Body compressed, elevated, with the ventral surface some-
what flattened, the width in front of the ventral spines is
about half the length of the head. A few scales on the cheeks
are disposed in about five rows. All the rest of the head and
scapular regions are covered by strong rugose bones, which
are more or less radiately striated. Upper profile of head

1. GUI— Mem. Acad. Sci. Wash., vi., 1893, p. 116.

2. Jordan— Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxii., 1907, p. 236.

3. Smith— Illustr. Zool. S. Africa, Pisces, 1849, pi. xxi.

FISHES. — MCCTJLLOCH. 145

almost straight, the line being broken only by the obtusely
elevated supraocular margins ; interorbital space a little
concave. Snout pointed, margin of the preorbital bone
serrated. Maxillary small and weak, reaching to below the
posterior nostril. Lips thick, fleshy, and papillose. Posterior
margin of preoperculum nearly vertical, the angle rounded
and more or less produced backwards ; both margins finely
serrated. Operculum unarmed. Nostrils nearer the eye than
the end of the snout, the anterior tubular, the posterior a
simple opening.

Teeth in a band on each jaw, depressible, the outer ones
enlarged, cardiform, and curved. A broad patch of villiform
vomerine teeth ; palatines and tongue toothless.

Body scales differing in structure in different parts. On
the upper anterior portion of the back, breast and abdomen
they have the central portion thickened, and more or less
tubercular, with the surface rugose with ridges radiating
backwards. From these, they gradually change to thin, flat
scales on the sides which are microscopically rugose, and
have ctenoid margins. The bases of the dorsal and anal fins
are covered by low, scaly sheathes. The lateral line rises
rapidly towards the back anteriorly, and forms a high arch
to below the end of the soft dorsal, whence it runs along the
middle of the caudal peduncle. There are forty-five to forty-
seven rows of scales between the origin of the lateral line and
the hypural joint.

Dorsal spines very strong and coarsely carinate ; the fourth
is the highest, and the others decrease regularly backwards.
The second and longest ray is not much higher than the last
spine, and the margin of the soft dorsal is rounded. Anal
originating below the middle of the soft dorsal, its spines and
rays similar to those of that fin. Ventral spine very strong,
inserted below the sixth and seventh dorsal spines ; the rays
reach the vent. Upper pectoral rays longest, not quite
reaching the verticle of the vent. Caudal truncate.

Colour. — Yellowish olive, the scales with lighter centres.
Membrane of the ventral fins blackish.

Described from a specimen 246 mm. long, which is selected
as the type ; it is figured on PL xxvi., fig. 1.

A young example, 103mm. long, differs from the larger
specimen described above so greatly that, in the absence of
an intermediate series, one would hardly regard the two as
belonging to the same species. The bones covering the head
are separated from one another and more rugose, and some
bear spines and tubercles ; the supraorbital ridge supports

146 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

a large tubercle from which striae radiate over the frontal
bones, and there is also a group of small spinules in front of
it ; the median posterior scute on the nape also bears a central
tubercle, as does the post-temporal bone ; the lower margin
of the preoperculum is intensely spiny, the spines forming a
prominent group on the lowermost portion (PL xxvi.,
fig. 2). All the scales of the head and body are very thick,
tubercular, and coarsely sculptured ; those of the breast and
abdomen are greatly enlarged, and have deep grooves be-
tween them. The lower surface of the breast is flat and
triangular, its breadth being equal to its length (PL xxvi.,
fig. 3).

LOGS. — Eight specimens were preserved from the following
localities :—

Thirty-three miles S. by W. of Cape Everard, Victoria,
160-200* fathoms ; 19th September, 1914.

S.S.E. of Gabo Island, Victoria, 176-200 fathoms ; 15th
September, 1914.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 130°50' E., 230-300 fathoms;
6th May, 1913.

Family LATRIDID,£.
Genus LATRIDOPSIS, Gill.

Latridopsis, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1862, p. 115
(Latris ciliaris, Forster).

This genus differs from Latris in having no vomerine teeth.
The pectoral fin is also differently formed, the upper rays
being longest, instead of the median ones, as in Latris.

LATRIDOPSIS FORSTERI, Castelnaii .

Red, White, and Silver Bastard Trumpeter.
(Plate xxvii.)

Latris forsteri, Castelnau, Proc. Zool. .Soc. Viet., i., 1872,
p. 77. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1882
(1883), pp. 72-76, 113. Id., Stead, Eel. Fish. N.S.
Wales, 1908. p. 70.

Latris bilineata, Castelnau, Loc. tit., p. 79. Id.. Johnston,

Loc. cit.
Latris inornata, Castlenau, Loc. cit.. p. 79. Id., Johnston,

Loc. cit.
? Latris ramsayi, Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, x.,.

1885, p. 229, and Cat, Fish. N.S.Wales, 1886, p. 20.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 147

Latris ciliaris, Waite, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., i, 1899,

p. 85. Id., Stead, Ed. Fish. N.S.Wales, 1908, p. 70,

pi. xxxix. (Not of Forster.)
Latris ciliaris, Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, iii.,

1879, p. 351. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.

Wales, v., 1881, p. 426. Id., Ogilby, Cat. Fish. N.S.

Wales, 1886, p. 20. Id. Waite, Mem. N.S.Wales Nat.

Club, i., 1904, p. 32 (after Richardson, perhaps not

L. ciliaris, Forster).
? Latris ciliaris, Kent, Rept. Fish. Dept. Tasmania, 1886,

p. 14.
D. xvi.i.39; A.iii.31 ; P.10+8 ; V. i.5 ; C. 15. L. lat.

115.

Head, from snout to end of opercular flap, 3-5 in the length
to the hypural joint ; depth before the ventrals 2-6 in the
same. Eye 5-3, interorbital space 3-5, and preorbital 4-8 in
the head.

Body compressed. The dorsal profile rises rapidly from
the snout to the first dorsal spine, and is slightly convex
above the eye ; thence it ascends gradually to the origin of
the soft dorsal. The lower profile is almost similar to that
of the back ; it is obtusely keeled between the ventral fins
and the vent, and less so on the breast. Caudal peduncle
short and broad, its depth 3-4 in the length of the head.
Interorbital space very convex and scaly, the scales extending
forward to the level of the nostrils. Preorbital broad and
naked. Nostrils placed a little behind the middle of the
snout, close together, the anterior large and oval, the posterior
small. Maxillary reaching almost to the level of the posterior
nostril. All the opercles are closely covered with minute
scales, which become much larger on the cheeks. Operculum
unarmed. Margins of the preoperculum smooth, the angle
broadly rounded.

Strong conical teeth form a single row in each jaw ; a
secondary row of minute teeth is present on the anterior
part of the upper jaw. Voraer, palatines, and tongue tooth-
less.

Body covered with rather small, cycloid scales. There are
one hundred and fifteen rows on the lateral line between the
operculnm and the caudal rays, eleven between the lateral
line and the middle of the back, and twenty-five between it
and the abdominal edge. The bases of both dorsals and the
anal fin are covered by a sheath of minute scales. The scales
extend onto the base of the caudal and up between its rays ;
lower portion of pectoral also scaly.

148 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Spinous dorsal about as long as the soft portion. Its
margin is arched, the spines increasing in length to the fifth,
which is 3-09 in the head ; the following spines decrease
gradually to the sixteenth, the seventeenth being a little
longer than the preceding one. Anterior rays a little higher
than the longest spine, 2-6 in the head ; the margin of the
fin is straight, the rays decreasing regularly backwards to
the last, which is short. Anal spines small, the third the
longest, and about half as long as the first ray ; soft portion
of anal similar to that of the dorsal, the first ray 3-4 in the
head. Fifth pectoral ray longest, 1-3 in the head ; the hinder
margin of the fin is rounded, the simple rays not projecting
beyond it. Ventrals short, pointed, the first ray almost half
as long as the head. Caudal deeply forked.

Colour. — Olive green above the lateral line, silver on the
sides. On the upper half a narrow, yellowish olive band
extends along the body between each row of scales ; these
bands are traceable on the lower portion also, but they are
silver coloured. The fins are more or less dusky, the second
dorsal, caudal, and upper portion of the pectoral having deep
blackish margins. In a fresh state the anal has a very
narrow white border, and the lips are yellowish.

Described from an example 447 mm. long from the tip of
the snout to the end of the caudal fin.

Assuming that the descriptions1'2 and figure3 of Latridopsis
ciliaris are correct, L. forsteri differs from that species in
having the preopercular margin entire instead of ciliated,
and more than one hundred scales between the operculum
and the hypural joint. L. ciliaris was first obtained in New
Zealand, but Richardson3 described and figured a specimen
which was said to have been taken in Port Jackson. It
would appear that no other example having the characters
ascribed to his fish has since been taken in Australian waters,
all later records of L. ciliaris from here being based on
specimens which agree with Castelnau's description of L.
forsteri. The fish referred to by Waite in the " Thetis '
Report is identical with the one described above ; while I
consider Stead's figure also represents the same species. Two
local examples in the Macleay Museum labelled as L. ciliaris
are L. forsteri. The other records of L. ciliaris from New
South Wales are unreliable, and though it was identified from

1. Anthiii.-- ciliuris, Bloch and Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801, p. 310.

2. Scicena ciliaris, Forster, Descript. Anim., ed. Liechtenstein, 1844, p. 86.

3. Latris dl/nri*, Richardson., Voy. Erebus and Terror, Fishes, 1845,
p. 37, pi. xxxvi., fig. 6-7.

FISHES. MCCTJLLOCH. 149

Tasmania by Kent1 it may be noted that Johnston failed
to find it there.2

I follow Johnston (Loc. cit.) in uniting L. bilineata and
L. inornata, CasteLo.au, with L. forsteri, while L. ramsayi,
Ogilby, is probably only a variety of L. forsteri, as suggested
by its author in 1886.

The specimen described by Kent as Latris mortoni1 is
evidently related to, and possibly identical with, L. lineata,
Forster, rather than Latridopsis forsteri. Judging by the
description, it has most of the structural details of the
former, though it resembles both species in its colour-
marking. Kent noted that it was possibly a hybrid between
th.3 two, but the presence of vomerine teeth indicates its
affinity to Latris lineata.

Loc. — N.N.E. of Sisters Islands, Bass Strait, 70-80 fathoms ;
20th April, 1914.

Family CALLIONYMID.E.
Genus DACTYLOPUS, Gill.

DACTYLOPUS DACTYLOPUS, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
(Plate xxviii.)

Dactylopus dactylopus (Cuvier & Valenciennes), Ogilby,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., xxiii., 1910, p. 46.

The collection includes three specimens, 94-156 mm. long,
of which two are females, and one is a male. Another female
is in the Australian Museum.

The three females are very similar, and have the general
colour marking shown in the accompanying figure. The
male, which is the largest specimen, differs in having the
anterior dorsal spines much longer and largely free from the
membrane ; the first extends back almost to the end of the
last dorsal ray when both are adpressed. The caudal fin is
also longer and more angular, the median rays being 2£ in the
length to the hypural, instead of nearly 3. Both dorsal fins
and the caudal are more elaborately marked than in the
females, being ornamented with many irregular ocelli, while
the tail also bears numerous oblique bars on its upper half.

LOGS. — The specimen figured is a female, 107 mm. long,
from Shark Bay, Western Australia. The three " Endeavour "
specimens were trawled off Hervey Bay, Queensland, 9-11
fathoms ; 27th July, 1910.

1. Kent — Kept. Fish. Dept. Tasmania, 1886, p. 13 (see Journals and
Printed Papers of the Parliament of Tasmania, viii., 1886, No. 37).

2. Johnston— Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1882 (1883), p. 72.

150 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family GEMPYLID^S.
Genus JORDANIDIA, Snyder.

Jordanidia, Snyder, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xl., May 26, 1911,

p. 527 (J. raptoria, Snyder).
Rexea, Waite, Rec. Cantb. Mus., I., pt. 3, June 24, 1911,

p. 235 (R. furcifera, Waite).

According to Snyder, there were no ventrals in his specimen
of J. raptoria, while those of R. furcifera are composed of four
weak spines. They are present in seven of my specimens of
the latter species, 320-450 mm. long, though they vary some-
what in development ; in a larger example, 560 mm. long,
they are reduced to an indistinct scale-like structure which
scarcely projects from the skin. Snyder also detected small
scales on the hinder part of the body only, the rest of the head
and body being " apparently smooth " ; it is probable that
the anterior scales were rubbed off his specimen since they are
more or less distinct in R. furcifera. In all other details
Jordanidia and Rexea are very similar, and I have no hesitation
in uniting them.

JORDANIDIA SOLANDRI, Cuvier & Valenciennes.
Tasmanian King-fish ; King Barracouta.

Scomber macrophthalmus, Solander, M.S.

Gempylus solandri, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss.,

viii., 1831, p. 215.
Thyrsites solandri, Giinther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., ii, 1860,

p. 352. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1882

(1883), pp. 82, 117. Id., Kent, Nat. in Austr., 1897,

p. 172.
Thyrsites micropus, McCoy, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), xi.,

1873, p. 338.
Rexea furcifera, Waite, Rec. Cantb. Mus., i., pt. 3, 1911,

p. 236, pi. lii.

I am indebted to Mr. B. B. Woodward for a copy of
Solander's M.S. description of his Scomber macrophthalmus,
upon which Cuvier and Valenciennes based their Gempylus
solandri. The definition of the latter is very short, and the
species has been considered to be synonymous with Pro-
methichthys prometheus, Cuvier & Valenciennes. Solander's
description, however, is very complete, and gives details of all
the more important characters, including the remarkable
branched lateral line, dorsal and anal finlets, minute ventrals,
etc., and I have no hesitation in following Johnston in asso-
ciating it with the Tasmanian King-fish.

FISHES. — MCCTJLLOCH. 151

Solander's notes were based on a specimen captured on
December 9th, 1769, during his voyage to Australian waters
with Captain Cook. According to Cook's Journal edited by
Wharton1, the " Endeavour " lay off Doubtless Bay in the north
of New Zealand on that date, and he noted that " the natives

came off to the ship and sold us fish of different

sorts sufficient to give all hands a little."

Through the kindness of Mr. J. A. Kershaw, I have been
enabled to examine an authentic specimen of Thyrsites
micropus, McCoy, in the National Museum, Melbourne. It
is stuffed, and measures 785 mm. from the snout to the end of
the middle caudal rays. It was received from Tasmania in
January, 1873, and was identified by Professor McCoy ; no
other specimen bearing his label being known, it may be
regarded as the type of his species. It does not differ from
the specimen here identified as J. solandri, though the pos-
terior rays of the dorsal and anal fins have become more or
less separated from the others in drying, on account of which
McCoy counted six and four finlets in these fins.

Nine specimens, 295-560 mm. long, exhibit but little
variation in the construction of their fins. The posterior
spine of the first dorsal is sometimes very small, and the two
anterior rays of the second dorsal and anal are not always
easily detected. The posterior dorsal and anal rays are more
widely spaced than the others, their condition being better
shown by Siiyder in his figure of /. raptor iaz than by Waite's
illustration of Rexea furcifera. I count them as follows : —
D. xviii., 2/16-17+2 ; A. 2/14-15+2.

J. solandri is closely allied to the Japanese J. raptoria, but
differs in having a smaller eye and a broader interorbital
wridth. The ventrals are apparently better developed in the
younger stages, and the lateral line is sinuoiis posteriorly
instead of straight.

LOGS. — According to Johnston, this species was exceedingly
abundant in Tasmania, but it has since become so rare that
none are now brought into the markets at Hobart. The
' Endeavour " obtained it at the following localities :—

Edge of bank between Gabo Island and Cape Everard,
Victoria, 150-250 fathoms.

Eighteen miles east of Babel Island, Bass Strait ; August,
1911.

Eastern edge of Bass Strait, 100-220 fathoms ; December,
1912.

1. Wharton— Captain Cook's Journal, 1893, p. 170.

2. Snycler— Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xlii., 1912, pi. lii., fig. 2.

15- ' ENDEAVOUR ' SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family TRICHIURIDvE.

Genus LEPIDOPUS, Gouan.

LEPIDOPUS CAUDATUS, Euphrasen.

Frost Fish.

Lepidopus caudatus (Euphrasen), Day, Fish. Gt. Brit, and
Ireland, i., 1880-1884, p. 156, pi. li., fig. 2 (synonymy).
Lepidopus argyreus, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat.
Poiss., viii., 1831, p. 223, pi. ccxxiii.

Thirteen specimens, 480-1580 mm. long, only differ from
Day's description in having the first dorsal spine placed over
the hinder part, of the preoperculum instead of the posterior
half of the opercle. When fresh they are uniformly silver in
colour, and darker on top of the head ; the dorsal fin is
largely colourless, but has a narrow black margin, and two
black blotches anteriorly between the rays. After long
preservation in formalin the silver colour is entirely destroyed,
and eight longitudinal yellow bands appear, one of which is
broader than the others, and extends along the whole length
of the lateral line ; a precisely similar marking is illustrated
in Goode & Bean's figure of Evoxymetopon tceniatus.1

LOGS. — -Thirty -two miles S.E. of Genoa Peak, Victoria, 200
fathoms ; 2nd October, 1914.

Seventeen miles S.W. of Gabo Island, Victoria, 240
fathoms ; 14th September, 1914.

Sub-genus BENTHODESMUS, Goode & Bean.

Benthodesrmis, Goode & Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., iv.,
1881, p. 380, and Oceanic Ichth., 1895, p. 204
(Lepidopus elongatus, Clarke).

The genus Benthodesmus appears to me to be hardly worthy
of recognition. Goode & Bean have enumerated several
characters to distinguish it from Lepidopus, but some of them,
such as the rudimentary occipital crest, more slender head,
and more numerous rays are merely due to its more slender
form ; others such as the simple anal scales and forward
position of the ventrals are not maintained in my specimen
of B. elongatus. I have compared a young Lepidopus ca.udatus
with B. elongatus, and find the structures essentially identical,
though the largely developed mental prominence, lack of
gill-rakers on the third and fourth arches, and the forward
position of the vent may perhaps maintain Benthodesmus as
a sub -genus.

1. Goode & Bean— Oceanic Ichth., 1895, p. 204, pi. Iviii., fig. 214.

FISHES; MCCULLOCH. 153

LEPIDOPUS (BENTHODESMUS) ELONGATUS, Clarke.

Lepidopus elongatus, Clarke, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., xi., 1879,
p. 294, pi. xiv. Id., Giintlu'r, "Challenger" Ri-pt.,
Zool., xxii., 1887, p. 3S.

A beautifully preserved example, 767 mm. long, agrees
perfectly with Clarke's description and figure of this species.

Loc. — South of Gabo Island, Victoria, 200 fathoms.

Family SCORP^NID^E.

Genus NEOSEBASTES, Guichenot.

Neosebastes, Guichenot, Mem. Soc. Nat. Sci. Cherbourg,
xiii., 1868, p. 83 (Sebastes panda, Richardson). Id.,
Jordan and Starks, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxvii., 1904,
p. 120.

Jordan and Starks have noted that their N. entaxis differs
from Guichenot's definition of Neosebastes in having the lower
pectoral rays simple instead of branched, and suggest that it
may represent a distinct genus. This character is variable,
however, young specimens of N. panda having the lower
rays simple, while they are branched in adults ; other species
also exhibit the same variation with growth.

The following is a key to the Australian species of the
genus :—

a. A deep, naked, nuchal groove. Pectoral margin evenly
rounded panda.

aa. No deep, naked, nuchal groove.

b. More than forty pores in the lateral line. Depth, one-
third the length without caudal. Pectoral margin
evenly rounded scorpcenoides.

bb. Less than forty pores in the lateral line. Depth more
than one-third the length.

c. Pectoral margin evenly rounded. Supraorbital
spines large, overhanging the eye thetidis.

cc. Some of the lower pectoral rays longer than those
above them. Supraorbital spines smaller, not
overhanging the eye.

d. Soft dorsal with a large black spot . . incisipinnis.
dd. Soft dorsal without a black spot . . nigropunctatus.

154- ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

NEOSEBASTES PANDA, Richardson.

Sebastes pandus, Richardson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ix.,
1842, p. 216, and Zool. " Erebus & Terror," Fishes,
1846, p. 70, pi. xli., fig. 3-4.

Richardson's figure of this species was prepared from a
dried specimen, and some of the proportions are consequently
incorrect. The caudal peduncle is drawn much too long, and
the curve of the back is too rounded ; the upper profile of
the head is also much less steep than in specimens preserved
in liquid.

Young specimens, 127 mm. long, differ from adults 310mm.
in length, in having the dark markings on the body and fins
more pronounced, and in having longer dorsal spines ; in
the small examples the third spine equals the height of the
body, whereas it is proportionally shorter in the larger ones.

LOGS. — Doubtful Island Bay, south-western Australia, 20-
25 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, west of the meridian of Eucla, 70-
120 fathoms.

NEOSEBASTES THETIDIS, Waite.
Rough Perch. Thetis-fish.

Sebastes thetidis, Waite, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., I., 1899,

p. 100, pi. xx.
Sebastodes thetidis, Waite, Mem. Nat. Club N.S. Wales, 2,

1904, p. 47.

This species has been placed in Sebastodes by Waite, but it
differs from that genus in having a well-developed cephalic
armature, and in particular in having strong recurved spines
on the suborbital stay. It evidently belongs to Neosebastes,
having all the generic characters of N. panda.

This fish is very abundant in waters of 60-100 fathoms deep
off the eastern coast of Tasmania. It is known as the Rough
Perch by the fishermen on the " Endeavour," but is always
cast back into the sea as being of no value for food. When
brought to the surface its abdomen becomes greatly distended
by the internal gases, and it floats upside-down upon the
water.

Colour. — In life, reddish brown above, pink below, with two
darker cross-bars and some spots on the upper half of the
sides. Dorsals, anal, pectoral and caudal fins more or less
yellow, with dark greenish cross-bands. Pectoral pink. Iris
golden.

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. 155

LOGS. — Nine specimens, 155-330 mm. long, were preserved
from the following localities :—

East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 65-75 fathoms.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, west of the meridian of Eucla,
70-120 fathoms.

NEOSEBASTES INCISIPINNIS, Ogilby.
(Plate xxix.)

Neosebastes incisipinnis, Ogilby, New Fish. Q'ld. Coast,
1911, p. 104.

D. xii. i. 8 ; A. iii. 5 ; P. 20-21 ; V. i. 5 ; C. 15. L.lat. 33.
Length of head from premaxillary symphysis to end of oper-
cular lobe, 2-2 in the length to the hypural ; depth 2-8 in the
same. Eye 2-8 in the head. Interorbital space about half
as wide as the eye, and less than the length of the snout, which
is 1-4 in the eye. Least depth of caudal peduncle a little less
than the length of the snout. Third dorsal spine 1-9, second
dorsal ray 2-4, and longest pectoral ray 1-7 in the head.
Second anal spine 2-7, second anal ray 2-05, and second ventral
ray 1-7 in the head.

Interorbital space deeply concave, with two more or less
distinct ridges which diverge backwards. No occipital
groove. Maxillary reaching to below the middle of the eye
or not quite so far backward. Preorbital armed with nume-
rous strong spines on its margin, and one or two smaller ones
on its upper surface. Sub-orbital stay with two groups of
spines. Preopercular margin broadly rounded, with one long,
carinate spine directed backward, and three others on the
lower border. Operculum with two strong flat spines, the
lower carinate. A small spine above the anterior nostril.
Upper anterior margin of the eye with a stout spinule, the
posterior portion with a ridge which is divided into five or six
spines. A low nuchal ridge ending in a spine on either side,
and several other spines are present above the suspension of
the opercles. All the upper portions and sides of the head
covered with rough scales, leaving only the lips and lower jaw
naked. Jaws of equal length, the lower with a symphyseal
knob, on either side of which is a pore ; three other pores are
present on each ramus of the mandible. Anterior nostril with
a small tentacle.

Teeth villiform, forming bands in the jaws which are
broader on the premaxillaries than on the mandible. A
V-shaped band on the vomer, and an elongate one on each
palatine bone.

Back but little elevated, almost straight. Caudal peduncle
slender. Body covered with rather large, ctenoid scales,

156 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

which increase in size backwards ; they do not extend onto
the bases of any of the fins. Lateral line curved in its extreme
anterior portion, thence running obliquely to the middle of
the caudal peduncle. There are forty-two to forty-three, or
thirty rows of scales below the lateral line, according to the
direction in which they are counted.

Dorsal fin commencing on the neck a little behind the
verticle of the posterior orbital margin ; the third and fourth
spines are the longest, the others decreasing in length to the
twelfth ; the thirteenth is nearly twice as long as the pre-
ceding one, and about half as long as the second ray. Margin
of the soft dorsal rounded. Second anal spine longest, very
strong and sulcate, and more than three-fourths as long as the
rays. Pectoral almost reaching the verticle of the vent ; six
or seven of its lower rays are thickened, and either simple or
more or less branched according to the age of the specimen ;
the fourteenth to sixteenth rays are longer than those above
them, and their tips project beyond the margin of the fin.
Ventrals rather elongated, the second ray reaching almost to,
or a little beyond die vent. Caudal rounded, though the
lower rays are longer than the upper ones.

Colour. — Light, brown above in formalin, whitish below.
The body is crossed by two irregular darker bars, and bears
many smaller spots and lines. Head similar to the body.
Upper surface of eye with rounded whitish spots on a darker
ground colour. Dorsal blotched with lighter and darker
markings, the tips of the membrane behind the spines white.
Second dorsal with a large black ocellus covering the basal
portions of the posterior rays ; upper half of the fin grey, with
a narrow white margin. Basal half of anal whitish, the outer
portion dark grey. Pectoral light-coloured, with fine grey
lines crossing the rays. Distal portion of ventrals greyish.
Caudal with a dusky band crossing its distal half, with or
without dark spots on the basal portion.

Eighteen specimens, 180-255 mm. long, are preserved,
which are referred to by Ogilby. His description was based
on three specimens trawled off Cape Moreton, where many
others were obtained, but none from that locality were for-
warded to the Australian Museum. The foregoing description
chiefly refers to a specimen 232 mm. long from three miles
south-east of Double Island Lighthouse, which is the example
figured.

Locs. — Twenty-five miles south-east of Double Island Point,
Queensland, 33 fathoms ; 28th June, 1910.

Three miles south-east of Double Island Lighthouse,
Queensland, 32 fathoms ; 16th July, 1910.
Wide Bay, Queensland.

FISHES. MCCULLOCH. 157

NEOSEBASTES NIGROPUNCTATUS, sp. nov.
(Plate xxx.)

Br. 7 ; D. xii. i. 8 ; A. iii. 6 (5) ; V. i. 5 ; P. 14+7 ; C. 15.
L. lat. 35. Head, from premaxillary symphysis to end of
opercular lobe, 2-3 in the length to the hypural joint ; depth
2-6 in the same. Eye equal to the length of the snout, 3-5 in
the head, and nearly twice as Avide as the interorbital space,
which is 6-1 in the head. Least depth of caudal peduncle 3-7
in the head. Third dorsal spine 1-7, second dorsal ray 2-4,
second anal spine 2-6, and second anal ray 2-3 in the head.
Longest pectoral ray, second ventral ray, and median caudal
rays almost equal in length, about 1-5 in the head.

A very small nasal spine above the anterior nostril. Antero-
superior orbital spine wanting, represented by a knob on the
orbital margin ; upper posterior border with two low spines,
and a few more are present near the hinder margin of the
orbit. A small nuchal spine, and several others on the
exposed suprascapular margin. A small spine above the
suspension of the preoperculum. Preorbital with two groups
of comparatively small marginal spines, and one on its upper
surface. Suborbital stay armed with two spines, one below
the eye, and the other below the posterior orbital margin.
Preoperculum broadly rounded, with a strong posterior spine
which is carinate and bears a secondary spine on its upper
surface ; three other spines on the inferior border. Operculum
with two spines, the lower the largest and carinate.

Head covered with rough scales which extend well forward,
leaving only the end of the snout and the mandible bare ;
they are largest on the middle of the operculum and on the
cheeks. Interorbital space deeply concave, partly naked,
with two ill-defined bony ridges diverging backwards. No
nuchal groove. Nostrils close together, the anterior with a
tentacle. Mandible with three large pores on each ramus,
and a smaller one on either side of the symphysis. Teeth
villiform, in bands in the jaws, the upper series broader than the
lower ones. A narrow A-shaped patch on the vomer, and an
elongate band on each palatine ; in the largest specimen the
vomerine teeth are wanting and the palatine bands are reduced.

Back but little elevated, arched anteriorly, then falling in
an almost straight line to the end of the dorsal fin. Caudal
peduncle rather slender. Body covered with moderately
large, ciliated scales, which do not extend onto the fins ; they
are smaller on the base of the pectoral and on the breast than
elsewhere. There are about forty-five transverse rows im-
mediately below the lateral line between the end of the
operculum and the base of the tail ; only thirty-five are pierced
by the lateral line.

158 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Dorsal fin commencing on the neck, a little behind the
verticle of the eye ; third spine longest, the others decreasing
in length to the twelfth ; thirteenth half as long as the rays.
Margin of soft dorsal somewhat rounded ; the posterior ray
deeply cleft, almost forming two rays. All the spines of the
fins deeply grooved. Anal below the soft dorsal, terminating
slightly in advance of it ; second spine longest, very strong,
more than three-fourths as long as the second ray ; soft
portion rounded, the posterior ray deeply cleft or divided
into two. Pectoral not reaching the verticle of the vent ;
the hinder margin of the upper half is rounded, but the
fifteenth to seventeenth rays project beyond the others ; the
seven lower rays are thickened and more or less branched.
Ventrals elongate, reaching almost to or a little beyond the
vent. Caudal subtruncate with the angles rounded, or
slightly rounded ; the lower rays may be longer than the
upper ones.

Colour. — Light yellow in formalin, probably red in life,
with irregular darker spots on the scales which tend to form
the marking characteristic of other species of the genus ;
more or less numerous small, blackish dots at the bases of
the scales are scattered over the upper half of the sides and
head. Spinous dorsal with cloudy darker areas on the
membrane, the tips behind the spine whitish. Outer half of
membrane of soft dorsal and ventrals greyish. Pectorals,
anal, and caudal with more or less distinct darker spots on
the rays, which tend to form bands ; the caudal has a median
dusky area in the smallest specimen.

Described from three specimens 240-360 mm. long. Apart
from the variations noted they are very similar, though the
dorsal spines are much higher in the young than in the older
specimen ; the third spine is 1.3 in the height of the body in
the smallest example, and 1.8 in the largest. The specimen
figured is 327 mm. long, and is selected as the type.

Locs. — Great Australian Bight, west of the meridian of
Eucla, 70-120 fathoms ; March, 1912.

South of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

Genus HELICOLENUS, Goode & Bean.

HELICOLENUS PERCOIDES, Richardson.

Red Perch, Red Gurnet Perch, Gurnet, Sea Perch.

Sebastes percoides, Richardson. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ix.,
1842, p. 384, and Zool. "Erebus & Terror," Fishes,
1845, p. 23, pi. xv. Id., McCoy, Prodr. Zool. Viet.,
Dec. iv., 1879, pi. xxxiii.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 159

Scorpcena (Helicolenus) percoides, McCulloch, Rec. Austr.
Mus., vi., 1907, p. 350.

A series of forty specimens, 110-320 mm. long, is preserved
which exhibits great variation in the colour-marking. Some
examples, particularly those of larger size, have large dark
blotches and smaller dots on the back, which are arranged
as shown in Richardson's figure. In others the markings are
less distinct, while in the smaller specimens the whole head
and body is almost uniformly light coloured, only a few dots
and lines being present to indicate the position of the dark
blotches of the adult.

I have already noted (loc. cit.) variation in the length of the
dorsal spines, they being either shorter or much longer than
the dorsal rays ; they are generally longest in young speci-
mens, but they may be either short or long in examples of
the same size from the same locality.

Locs. — This species is abundant in moderately deep water
off the Victorian and Tasmanian coasts.

Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45 fathoms.

East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 65-75 fathoms.

North coast of Tasmania, 25 fathoms.

Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 40-60 fathoms.

North-west of Greenly Island, South Australia, 44 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 126°45i'E., 130-320 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 129° 28' E.. 35C-450 fathoms.

Sub-family APISTIN.E.

The closely allied genera Apistus, Cuvier, and Apistops,
Ogilby, may be distinguished as follows :—

Scales with three or more pointed marginal lobes. Antero-
supraorbital bone coarsely carinate. Three mandibular
barbies. Pectoral longer, reaching beyond the anal
rays Apistus.

Scales cycloid, with rounded margins. Aiitero-supraorbital
bone nearly smooth. Five mandibular barbies. Pectoral
shorter, not reaching the anal rays Apistops.

Genus APISTOPS, Ogilby.

Apistops, Ogilby, Ann. Qld. Mus., 10, 1911, p. 54 (Apistus
caloundra, de Vis).

Ogilby has described the lateral line as incomplete in
Apistops, but it is continued onto the base of the caudal fin
in the typical specimen of A. caloundra, though its tubules
are weaker and more widely spaced posteriorly than anteriorly.

160 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

APISTOPS CALOUNDRA, de Vis.
(Plate xxxv., fig. 2.)

Apistus caloundra, de Vis, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., ii., 1886,
p. 145. Id., Ogilby, Ann. Qld. Mus., 10, 1911, p. 54.

Through the kindness of Dr. R. Hamlyn-Harris, Director
of the Queensland Museum, I have been able to examine and
figure the typical specimen of this species, which is the only
one known. Ogilby counted fifty-two rows of scales along
the body ; I find only forty-seven immediately below the
lateral line, which is composed of twenty-five tubules.

LOG. — Caloundra, Queensland.

Genus APISTUS, Cuvier.

APISTUS CARINATUS, Bloch & Schneider.

(Plate xxxi.)

? Scorpcena carinata, Bloch & Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 1801,
p. 193 (fide Day).

Apistus carinatus, Day, Fish. India, 1875, p. 155, pi. xxxvii.,
fig. 4 (synonymy).

Apistus macrolepidotus, Ogilby, New Fish. Qld. Coast, 1911,
p. 108.

Forty-one specimens, 11 1-165 mm. long, are included in
the collection which Ogilby has referred to his A. macrolepi-
dotus. I have carefully compared them with two examples
of A. carinatus from Dr. Day's collection from Madras, and
find that they agree in every detail. Their colour marking
varies in intensity, some being very pale and others dark,
and the dorsal spot may extend over from three to six spines.
There are usually fifteen dorsal spines, but some have sixteen ;
Day counted fourteen to sixteen. Ogilby described 10+1
pectoral rays and Day 12+1 ; I find 11 + 1 in both Indian
and Australian specimens. There are forty to forty-two rows
of scales according to Ogilby, and seventy according to Day ;
the number varies greatly according to their position above
or below the lateral line, and also in which direction they are
counted, but I find no differences in the scales of the Indian
and Australian specimens.

LOGS. — The specimen figured is a large example 165 mm. long,
from east of Frazer Island, Queensland, 25 fathoms. Forty
others are preserved from various localities between Low
Bluff and Cape Gloucester, Queensland, 15-33 fathoms.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 161

Genus PENTAROGE, Gunther.

PENTAROGE MARMORATA, Cuvier <£ Valenciennes.

(Plate xxxvi., fig. 2.)

Apistus marmoratiis, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. Nat.
Poiss., iv., 1829, p. 416. Id., Valenciennes, Reg. Anim.
111. Poiss., 1843 ?, pi. xxiv., fig. 3. Id., Richardson,
Trans. Zool. Soc., iii.. 1849, p". 99.

Pentaroge marmorata. Gunther, Brit. Mus. Cat. Fish., ii.,
I860, p. 132. Id., Steindachner, Sitzb. Akad. Wiss.
Wien, Ivii., 1868, p. 984. Id.. Klunzinger, Arch. Nat,,
xxxviii. i., 1872, p. 28. Id.. Castelnau, Proc. Zool.
Soc. Viet., i., 1872, p. 82, and ii., 1873, p. 132. Id.,
Klunzinger, Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Ixxx. i., 1879,
p. 366. Id., Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, v.,

1881, p. 439. Id., Woods, Fish. & Fisher. N.S. Wales,

1882, p. 49. Id.. Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
1882 (1883), p. 115, and 1890 (1891), p. 31. Id., Waite,
Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 3, 1906, p. 201.

The lengths of the spines of both the fins and the head vary
greatly in this species, and there may be either twelve or
thirteen in the dorsal. The markings also differ very much
in several specimens from various localities, both in form and
in intensity, though their disposition is much the same in
all ; in some the larger dark blotches are brown, and sur-
rounded by more or less abundant marbling, while in others
they are deep black on a plain white ground.

This species is known from Tasmania. Victoria, and south-
western Australia, Macleay and Tenison Woods have re-
corded it from Port Jackson, but their records need verifica-
tion, since they confused it with the common Fortescue,
Centropogon australis, Shaw ; as noted by Ogilby1 nobody
has since collected Pentaroge in New South Wales. The type
specimen was said to have been taken at Timor, which record
is also doubted by Ogilby, while Klunzinger had examples
from Port Darwin as well as King George Sound and Port
Phillip. The specimen figured here was taken in the Swan
River, Western Australia, and is 137 mm. long.

Loc. — Eleven specimens, 100-162 mm. long, are in the
" Endeavour " collection from off Port Albert, Victoria, 9
fathoms.

1. Ogilby— Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., xviii., 1903, p. 13.

1(32 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Genus MINOUS, Cuvier <L- Valenciennes.

M INDUS VERSICOLOR, OgilblJ.

(Plate xxxii.)
Mi no-us versicolor, Ogilby, New Fish. Qld. Coast, 1911, p. 111.

D. viii-ix.i 12-13; A. 10-11; P. 11 + 1; V. i.5 ; C. 12.
Head, from tip of lower jaw to end of opercular lobe 2-2 in
the length from the premaxillary symphysis to the hypural
joint ; height 2-6 in the same. Orbit 3-8. shorter than the
snout, which is 3-1 in the head. Interorbital space 4-9 in
the head. Pectoral 1-3, first dorsal spine 3, last dorsal spine
2-6 in the head. Fifth dorsal ray 2-3, and ninth anal ray 2-6
in the head.

Head with granular bony processes ; the intermediate
skinny areas covered with minute tubercles. Snout with two
diverging ridges on each side, which unite posteriorly and
form the anterior boundary of an antero-orbital groove.
Preorbital with a star-shaped cluster of ridges on its upper
surface, and two marginal spines of which the posterior is
much the largest. Bony stay of cheek with a median tubercle
from which ridges radiate backwards and forwards. Anterior
portion of supraorbital bone carinate and granular ; supero-
posterior orbital margin with two granular tubercles. A deep
interorbital groove defined by longitudinal, granular ridges.
A broad, shallow occipital groove. A prominent nuchal
granular ridge on each side, which forms an obtuse spine
posteriorly. A granular tubercle above the suspension of the
preoperculum, another above the operculum, and one on the
suprascapular. A strong carinate preopercular spine, above
which is an angular projection on the margin of the pre-
operculum ; five others are present on the inferior border, of
which the two lower ones are more or less quadrate. Oper-
culum with two ridges which do not terminate in spines.

Lips covered with rounded papillae ; the mandible with a
number of short tentacles near the symphysis and a longer
barbel near the middle of each ramus. Eye with three
branched cirri on its upper portion. Teeth villiform, in bands
on the jaws, and forming two groups on the vomer.

Body naked, smooth except on the breast and anterior
portion of the back, where it is tubercular like the head.

1. Ogilby Counted nine and ten dorsal spines, but of five specimens four
have nine and one has eight.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 1(33

Lateral line marked by simple pores, which extend in a line
from the suprascapular to the upper portion of the caudal
peduncle.

Dorsal fin commencing on the nape above the margin of
the preoperculum ; the first two spines are more widely
separated than the others, and their membrane is deeply
notched ; the first is longer than the second and third, the
others increase in length backward. Base of soft dorsal a
little shorter than that of the spinous portion ; all the rays
are simple, the median ones the longest. Anal coterminal
with the dorsal and of similar form to the soft portion.
Pectoral rays simple, the lower ones somewhat thickened ;
the fifth is the longest and reaches to about the middle of
the anal ; lower free ray large and thick, reaching the vent
or the origin of the anal. Ventral rounded, with a broad
li.i^e, reaching the origin of the anal. Caudal rounded, its
rays simple.

Colour. — Whitish in formalin, with plum-coloured stripes
and oblique bars. Two rather irregular stripes extend along
the body, the upper one following the lateral line. Several
more or less regular oblique bands cross the dorsal fin, which
may or may not join the upper body-stripe ; margin of dorsal
fin blackish. Pectoral dark with lighter cross-bars. Ventral
and anal dusky, the outer portions blackish. Caudal with
two or three cross-bars.

The above description is largely based on a specimen 103
mm. long, which is one of the two used by Ogilby in drawing
up his description ; it is the specimen figured. Four others
of about the same length are preserved. I have compared
them with an Indian example of M . monodactylus, Bl. Schn.,
from Dr. Day's collection, and four others from Japan which
Prof. Jordan identified as M. adamsi, Richardson. They are
all very similar, and probably represent only local races of
one species : the Indian specimen is rather more elongate
than the others, and has a narrower interorbital space ; the
cephalic structures, though similarly arranged, differ slightly
in the three forms, while the Japanese and Australian speci-
mens have more or less characteristic features in their colour-
marking. All these details are subject to considerable varia-
tion, however, and a large series of specimens from various
localities may show that they are not of specific importance.

Locs. — Seven miles N.N.E. of Gloucester Head, Queensland,
19-35 fathoms.

Platypus Bay, Queensland, 7-9 fathoms.

164

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family PLATYCEPHALID^.
Genus PLATYCEPHALUS, Block & Schneider.

PLATYCEPHALUS ARENARIUS, Ramsay & Ogilby.

Sand Flathead.
(Plate xiii., fig. 1 ; fig. 3.)

Platycephalus arenarius, Ramsay and Ogilby, Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.Wales, x., 1886, p. 577. Id., Stead, Ed.
Fish. N.S.Wales, 1908, p. 113.

D. viii. 13 ; A. 13 ; P. 20 ; V. i. 5 ; C. 13. L. lat. 74.
Head, to end of opercular lobe, 3-1 in the length to the
hypural joint. Snout 3-4 in the head. Eye 1-6 in the snout,
and 5-7 in the head. Interorbital width 1-8 in the eye.
Third dorsal spine 2-2, second dorsal ray 2-5, longest pectoral
ray 2-1, and fourth ventral ray 1-5 in the head.

Ridges of the head low, smooth, not ending in spines. A
minute anterior orbital spine. Interorbital space flat. Two
ridges extend backward from the orbits, which join a broken
series of smaller ridges on either side of the small median one.
A low series extends from the eye to the suprascapular.

\

,'

\ /

Fig. 3.

Anterior nostril tubular. Two strong preopercular spines,
the lower the longest, the other directed obliquely upwards.
Maxillary extending to below the anterior third of the eye.
Teeth well developed : they are canine-like on either side of
the premaxillary symphysis, but rapidly change to villiform
ones which form a band on either side ; mandibular teeth
conical, uniserial ; vomerine teeth in a single series, forming
an arch, the outer ones large and canine-like ; palatine teeth
uniserial, conical.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 165

Body covered with small ctenoid scales, which extend
forward to the front margin of the eyes. Lateral line scales
not differentiated from the others, unarmed. There are about
eighty or one hundred and ten rows above the lateral line,
according to the direction in which they are counted.

Origin of the first dorsal behind the end of the operculum :
first spine minute, third longest ; second ray longest, the
others decreasing gradiially in length. Anal commencing a
little behind, and terminating well behind the second dorsal ;
its rays shorter than those of the dorsal, the third the highest,
the others decreasing slightly in length backwards. Ventrals
reaching to, or a little beyond the origin of the anal. Caudal
rounded.

Colour. — Grey above in formalin, closely speckled with
rounded, darker grey spots. Spines and rays of dorsal fins
with grey spots. Anal whitish, the membrane between the
posterior rays blackish. Pectorals and ventrals spotted.
Caudal white, with five striking black stripes, which increase
in width below ; the upper ones are oblique, the lower hori-
zontal.

Described and figured from a specimen 271 mm. long.
Twenty-fovir others, 225-340 mm. long, exhibit but little
variation ; the eye is somewhat larger in some than in others,
and the interorbital space is from half to two-thirds as wide
as the orbital diameter.

Locs. — Northern New South Wales.

Twenty-two miles S.W. of Double Island Point, Queensland,
29 fathoms.

Five miles S.E. of Boomerang Hill, Fraser Island, Queens-
land, 15 fathoms.

Wide Bay and Platypus Bay, Queensland.

Family CHAUNACTD.E.
Genus CHAUNAX, Lowe.

CHAUNAX FIMBRIATUS, Hilgendorf.
(Plate xxxiii., fig. 1-la.)

Chaunax fimbriatus, Hilgendorf, Gessellsch. Natuif.Freunde,

1879, p. 80.

D. i.i., 12 ; A. 7 ; P. 13 ; V. 4 ; C. 8. Depth slightly more
than one-third the length from the tip of the upper jaw to the
hypural joint ; breadth about half the same length. Head,
measured from the symphysis of the upper jaw to the gill open-
ing, 1-6 in the length to the hypural. Eye shorter than its dis-
tance from the tip of the snout, and less than half the interocular
space. Sixth dorsal ray and third anal ray subequal in

166 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

length, and slightly shorter than the fifth pectoral ray.
Depth of caudal pedtincle rather greater than the length of
the eye.

The general form varies in different specimens according to
their condition, but in a well-preserved example it is de-
pressed as shown in the accompanying figure ; the ventral
siirface is almost flat. Maxillary not reaching backwards to
the verticle of the anterior margin of the eye. Nostrils placed
a little above the level of the middle of the eye ; the anterior
is tubular, the posterior a simple opening. Gill-opening
situated beneath the fifth or sixth dorsal ray. Each jaw with
a band of villiform teeth. There are also two patches on the
vomer, and one on each palatine of still smaller teeth.

Head and body covered with soft, loose skin, which i^
thickly beset with upstanding spinules ; their bases are
usually enveloped in the skin, and they are much more minute
on the ventral surface than elsewhere. The lateral line
system is as usual in the genus, consisting of deep, smooth
channels, partially bridged at regular intervals by overlapping
spinular scales ; the latter almost meet from either side, and
protect minute pores beneath them. A channel commences
on either side of the snout and extends backwards to behind
the eye, whence it bends downwards, and continuing back-
wards .sweeps down behind the gill opening to the latero-
inferior surface of the tail ; it is lost on the base of the third
lower caudal ray. Another groove joins the first on the upper
surface of the snout and descends first onto the maxillary
and then backwards along the middle of the cheek ; it gives
off two incomplete branches below and one above, which
connects with, the corresponding one of the other side across
the back, by means of several widely -spaced pores. A third
series commences below the chin and runs downwards to the
latero-inferior edge of the body ; it is lost above the base of
the pectoral fin. The margins of the grooves on the lower
parts of the body and tail are more or less thickly beset with
white dermal filaments. Others may be present on the lower
lip, chin, and sides of the tail.

First dorsal spine short and thick, with a more or less
fimbriate apex ; it can be depressed into a smooth, somewhat
circular hollow between the anterior margins of the eyes.
Second dorsal spine entirely hidden beneath the skin ; its
position is indicated by a swelling on the middle of the back.
Anterior dorsal ray very small and almost hidden in the skin ;
the others increase in length to the sixth and then gradually
decrease again. They are mostly simple, but the posterior
ones may be divided ; the two last are placed very close

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH. 167

together. Anal situated below the end of the dorsal ; its
third ray is the longest, and some of the posterior ones are
divided. Pectoral small, with simple rays, of which the fifth
is the longest. Ventrals each composed of four simple rays,
the ends of which are curled upwards ; they can be entirely
withdrawn into the skin at will. Caudal rounded ; its rays
are thick, spinulose, and more or less divided.

Colour. — Yellowish in formalin, probably pink in life ; the
back and sides are closely mottled with round greyish spots.
Eye opalescent. Fimbriae of first dorsal spine blackish in
la rger specimens .

Described from four specimens, 120-215 mm. long ; the
figure is prepared from a well-preserved example, 132 mm.
long. I have compared these specimens with a Japanese
example of C. fimbriatus, which Dr. C. H. Gilbert very kindly
forwarded to this museum, and have found them identical
in all details. Giinther regarded C. fimbriatus as synonymous
with C. pictus, Lowe, but my specimens differ from his figure
of that species1 in the relative lengths of the body and tail,
as well as in the positions of the gill-opening, dorsal and
pectoral fins.

Locs. — East of Flinders Island, Bass Strait, 70-100 fathoms ;
4th December, 1913.

South of Gabo Island, Victoria, 100-150 fathoms ; 16th
December, 1912.

South of Cape Everard, Victoria, 90-150 fathoms ; 9th
April, 1914.

CHAUNAX PENICILLATTJS, sp. nov.
(Plate xxxiii., fig. 2.)

Two specimens, 74 and 112mm. long, only differ from C.
fimbriatus, as described above, in the structure of their ro itral
tentacles. These have short thick peduncles, which are
densely fimbriated, and they almost completely fill the cavity
into which they are received. The upper surface of the
tentacles and the hinder margin of the cavity are black ; the
under surfaces of the fimbrise are white. The differei ces in
the tentacles of the two species are illustrated on plate xxxiii.
Both specimens of the new species have fewer dermal filaments
than the examples of C. fimbriatus, they being developed 01 ly
on the anterior portion of the head, but this character appears
to be variable in the other species. D. 12; A. 6-7; P. 13;
C. 8+1; V. 4.

1. Giinther — "Challenger" Kept., Zool., xxii., 1887, p. 58, pi. x., fig. a.

168 ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The smaller specimen had swallowed an Apogonops, which
was about 63 mm. long ; it was rolled up into a large ball
in the stomach. According to a note received from Mr. C. T.
Harrison, the rostral tentacle of the larger specimen appeared
to be faintly luminous when it was first taken out of the
trawl, although it was then nearly dead.

LOCS. — South from Gabo Island, Victoria, 100-150 fathoms;
16th December, 1912.

Thirty-three miles 8. by W. of Cape Everard, Victoria,
160-200' fathoms ; 19th September. 1914.

Family TETRAODONTID^.

Genus TETRAODON, Linncens.

TETRAODON FIRMAMENTUM, Schlegel.

Tetrodon firmamentum, Schlegel, Fauna Japonica, 1847, p.

280, pi. cxxvi., fig. 2. Id., Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc.

X.S. Wales, iii., 1879, p. 357. Id., Macleay, Proc.

Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, vi., 1881, p. 341.

Tetrodon gillbanksii, Clarke, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., xxix.,

1897, p. 245, pi. xiv.

Three examples, 223-400 mm. long, only differ from
Schlegel's figure in having the white spots rather more
numerous ; they are also more numerous and proportion-
ately larger in the younger specimens than in the large
one," being equal to or slightly broader than the interspaces
between them, instead of narrower, as described by Giinther.
I am indebted to the Director of the Wellington Museum,
Dr. J. Allan Thomson, for an excellent photograph of the
specimen of Tetrodon gillbanksii, which is referred to by
Clarke as having been sent to that institution. This leaves
no doubt in my mind that that species is identical with T.
firmamentum. with which it appears to agree in every detail.
Locs. — This species was first made known from Australian
waters by its inclusion in a list of Sydney fishes by Castelnau.
Macleay later obtained an example from Port Jackson, while
I have seen one which was stranded on Bondi Beach, near
Sydney, after a storm. The " Endeavour " specimens were
trawled off Twofold Bay. New South Wales, in 45 fathoms.

Genus SPHEROIDES, Dumeril.
SPHEROIDES TUBERCULIFERUS, Ogilby.

(Plate xxxiv., fig. 1.)

Spheroides tuber culij ems, Ogilby, Mem. Qld. Mus., i., 1912.
p. 61, pi. xiv., fig. 1.

FISHES. — MCCULLOCH.

D. 9 : A.7 ; P. 14-15 ; 0. 8. Head, from the upper lip to
the iipjx-i end of the gill-opening, 3-3-1 in the length from the
upper lip to the base of the caudal. Eye 4-2-4-5 in the head.
Snout, from middle of upper lip to anterior margin of eye,
2-3 in the head, and not quite twice as long as the eye.
Longest dorsal ray 1-8-1-9. longest anal ray 2-3 in the
head. Longest pectoral ray 2- 1 , and median caudal ray 1-4-1-6
in the head. Least depth of caudal peduncle a little less
than the length of the eye, 4-5-4-9 in the head.

Chin prominent, square-cut, sometimes projecting beyond
the jaws ; its depth almost equal to the length of the eye.
Nostrils opening on either side of a rounded papilla, which is
placed in a depression. Eye nearer the gill-opening than
the end of the snout, its upper margin slightly raised above
the cephalic profile ; lower lid free, the upper adnate to the
ocular membrane. Gill-opening margined with a number of
small, overhanging papilla? ; the inner flap concealed Di-
visible only as a small angular projection.

Skin of the head and body more or less coarsely plicated,
as is the back of the tail behind the dorsal fin ; sides and
lower surface of tail, and sometimes the cheeks also, smooth.
Dorsal surface, from behind the nostrils to a little before the
dorsal fin, armed with coarse spinules ; a band of similar
spinules behind the pectoral fin, and a few scattered ones in
front of the gill-opening ; abdomen spiny from behind the
chin to just before the vent. A well-developed fold extends
from the chin to the base of the caudal.

Dorsal and anal pointed, the origin of the former a little
before the verticle of that of the latter. Median caudal rays
a little longer than those on either side of them, the outer
ones also slightly produced. LTpper pectoral rays longest,
the margin rounded.

Colour. — Somewhat variable : either grey or blackish on
the back, and closely speckled with small dark dots which
increase in size laterally, becoming rounded spots on the
sides ; some specimens have irregular whitish spots inter-
mingled with the darker ones. Lower sin face white. Dorsal,
anal, and pectoral fins without markings ; caudal dusky
towards the margin, the tips of the lower rays darker than
the rest. Young with four darker cross-bars ; the first
behind the eyes, the second curving backwards between the
pectorals, the third less curved and including Hie base of
the dorsal, the fourth crossing the caudal peduncle.

I have examined ten specimens of this species, 79-220 mm.
long, including a co-type received from Mr. Ogilby. They
indicate that the original description is not quite accurate in

170 ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

several details, so I have redescribed them here ; the
accompanying figure represents the largest specimen, which
was trawled in Western Australian waters by the "Endeavour."

LOGS. — Between Cape Naturaliste and Geraldton, Western
Australia.

Nine to twenty miles off Bustard Head, Queensland, 14-20
fathoms.

Twenty-two miles S.W. of Double Island Point, Queens-
land, 29 fathoms.

Specimens are in the Australian Museum collection from
Cottesloe Beach, Swan River, and Shark Bay, West Australia ;
and Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Family MONACANTHID.E.

Genus CANTHERINES, Swainson.

CANTHERINES MOSAICUS, Ramsay <fc Ogilby.

(Plate xxx vii., figs. 1, 2.)

Monacanthus mosaicus (Ramsay & Ogilby), Waite, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1, 1899, p. 93, pi. xvii., fig. 1.

Seven specimens, 87-413 mm. long, show that this species
alters considerably in form with growth. The body is
orbicular in the young, but becomes more elongate with age ;
the depth is 1-2 and 1-8 in the length to the hypural in the
smallest and largest specimens. A ventral expansion of the
abdomen is present in some of the youngest examples, but
is reduced in specimens 110mm. long, and is almost lost in
the larger ones. The forehead is swollen in some of the
small specimens, making the snout more or less concave
above, but this character is variable. Finally the armature
of the dorsal spine is much stronger in the young than in
the adult, the four rows of spinules being minute in the
largest specimen. The figures on Plate xxxvii represent the
largest and smallest of the " Endeavour " specimens.

Locs. — Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 16-45
fathoms.

Twofold Bay, New South Wales, 20 fathoms.

Twenty miles south of Cape Everard. Victoria, 69 fathoms.

East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Marsden Point, Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

South-east of Flinders Island, South Australia, 37 fathoms.

I have also seen a young specimen from Albany, South-
western Australia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.

Fig. 1. — Platycephalus arenarius, Ramsay and Ogilby. A
specimen 271 mm. long, from twenty-two miles 8.W.
of Double Island Point, Queensland.

Fig. 2. — Centrophorus scalpratus, sp. nov. Type, 870 mm.
long, from the Victorian coast.

Fig. 3. — Lower view of head of same specimen as Fig. 2.
Fig. 4. — Anterior dorsal spine of same specimen as Fig. 2.
Fig. 5. — Upper teeth of same specimen as Fig. 2.
Fig. 6. — Lower teeth of same specimen as Fig. 2.

Fig. 7. — Scales from upper portion of side of same specimen
as Fig. 2.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR." VOL. III.

PLATE XIII.

H
ft

A. R. McCuLLOCH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. — Centrophorus harrissoni, sp. nov. Type, 760 mm.
long, from near Gabo Island, Victoria.

Fig. 2. — Lower view of head of same specimen as Fig. 1.
Fig. 3. — Upper and lower teeth of same specimen as Fig. 1.

Fig. 4. — Scales from upper portion of side of same specimen
as Fig. 1.

Fig. 5. — •Acanthidium quadrispinosiim, sp. nov. Type, 683
mm. long, from south of Gabo Island, Victoria.

Fig. 6. — Lower view of head of same specimen as Fig. 5.
Fig. 7. — Upper and lower teeth of same specimen as Fig. 5.

Fig. 8. — Scales from upper portion of side of same specimen
as Fig. 5.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOITR," VOL. Ill

PLATE XIV.

lT>

A. R. McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

Fig. 1- — Dasyatis brevicaudatus, Hutton. A specimen 1080

mm. wide, from off Babel Island, Bass Strait.
. 2.— Amia nigripes, Ogilby. A specimen 69 mm. long,
from twenty-five miles south-east of Double Island
Point, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XV

A. R. McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.

Fig. 1. — Dasyatis ftuviorum, Ogilby. A specimen 271 mm.
wide, from the Brisbane River, Queensland.

Fig. 2. — Amia fasciata, Shaw, subsp. stevensi, subsp. nov.
Type of the subspecies, 79 mm. long, from the New
Hebrides.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XVI.

A. R. ]\[rCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Fig. 1. — Dasyatis brevicaudatus, Hutton. Under surface of
same specimen as figured on PI. xv., fig. 1.

Fig. 2. — Dasyatis fluviorum, Ogilby. Under surface of same
specimen as figured on PI. xvi., fig. 1.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

i

PLATE XVII.

A. R. McCuLLOcH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVIII.

Fig. 1. — Antigonia rhomboidea, sp. nov. Type, 115 mm.
long, from between Gabo Island and Cape Everard,
Victoria.

Fig. 2. — Antigonia rubicunda, Ogilby. Type, 65 mm. long,
from north-east of North Reef, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XVI II.

A. R. ^[C'CULLOCH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.

Priacanthus velabundus, sp. nov. Type, 197 mm. long, from
off Burrawarra Point, New South Wales.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XIX.

PHYLLIS CLARKE, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX.

Caranx georgianus, Cuvier and Valenciennes. A specimen,
253 mm. long, from Fremantle, Western Australia.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XX

A. R. McCuLLOCH del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXI.

Caranx leptolepis, Cuvier and Valenciennes. A specimen 195
mm. long, from north-west of Pine Peak, Queens-
land.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXI.

A. R. McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXII.

Caranx malam, Bleeker. A specimen 165 mm. long, from
south-east of Double Island Point, Queensland.

EIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXII.

A. R. MrCuLLOCH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIII.

Caranx radiatus, Macleay. A specimen 203 mm. long, from
Port Hedland, north-western Australia.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXIII.

I

A R. McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV.

Caranx altissimus, Jordan and Seale. A specimen 130 mm.
long, from southern Queensland.

B10L. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR,' VOL. III.

PLATE XXIV

A H. McCuLLOC'H, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXV.

Caranx humerosus, sp. nov. Type, 148 mm. long, from
Bustard Bay, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXV.

A. R. McCuLLOCH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVI.

Fig. 1. — Quinquarius hendecacanthus, sp. nov. Type, 24G
mm. long, from south-west of Cape Everard,
Victoria.

Fig. 2. — Head of a young specimen, 103 mm. long, from the
Great Australian Bight.

Fig. 3. — Breast of the same specimen as Fig. 2.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXVI.

A. II. MrCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII.

Latridopsis forsteri, Castelnau. A specimen 447 mm. long,
from north-north-east of Sisters Islands, Bass Strait.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR,' VOL. II J.

PLATE XXVII.

A. II MC-CULLOCH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVIII.

Dactylopus dactylopus, Cuvier and Valenciennes. A specimen
107 mm. long, from Shark Bay, Western Australia.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR,3 VOL. III.

PLATE XXVI II.

A. R. McCuixocH. del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIX.

Neosebastes incisipinnis, Ogilby. A specimen 232 mm. long,
from south-east of Double Island Lighthouse,
Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXIX.

r ;i

A. R. McGuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXX.

Neosebastes nigropunctatus, sp. nov. Type, 327 ram. long,
from South of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXX.

A R McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXI.

A pistus carinfitttN, Bloch and Schneider. A specimen 105
luni. long, from east of Fraser Island, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXXI.

PHYLLIS CLARKE, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXII.

Minous versicolor, Ogilby. Type, 103 mm. long, from north-
north-east of Gloucester Head, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR,' VOL. ITT.

PLATE XXXII.

A. R. McCuLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIII.

Fig. 1. — CltatiiHi.1- fitnbrifttHtt, Hilgendorf. A specimen 132
mm. long, from east of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Fig. la. — -Rostral tentacle of same specimen as Fig. 1.

Fig. 2. — Chaunax penicillatus, sp. nov. Rostral tentacle of
type, 112 mm. long, from south- west of Cape
Everard, Victoria.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXX II I,

A. R. McCuLLOcH del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIV.

Fig. 1. — tfpheroides tuberculiferus, Ogilby. A .specimen 220
mm. long, from between Cape Naturaliste and
Geraldton, Western Australia.

Fig. 2. — -Trachurus declivis, Jenyns. A .specimen 215 mm.
long, from Bondi, near Sydney.

Fig. 3. — Trachurus novce-zelandice, Button. A specimen 222
mm. long, from Port Jackson.

BIOL. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXXIV

PHYLLIS CLARKE and A. R. McCuLLOcH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXV.

.Fig. l.—Seriola grandis, Castelnau. A specimen 725 mm.
long, from Port Stephens, New South \VuJes.

Fig. 2. — Ayistops caloundra, tie Vis. Type, 104 mm. long,
from Caloundra, Queensland.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXXV.

A. R. McCtTLLOCH, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVI.

Fig. l.—CeHtriscus cristatus, de Vis. A specimen 224mm.
long, from south-east of Cape Capricorn, Queens-
hind.

Fig. 2. — Pentarocje inarmorata, Cuvier and Valenciennes. A
specimen 137 mm. long, from the Swan River,
Western Australia.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR,' VOL. III. PLATE XXXVI.

':! -^jB-^ESZSite'lf • »,^': r

A. R. McCuLLOCH, dci.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVII.

i. — Cantherines mosaicus, Ramsay and Ogilby. An
adult specimen 413 mm. long, from Twofold Bay,
New South Wales.

l.—Cantherines mosaicus, Ramsay and Ogilby. A young
specimen 87 mm. long, from Marsden Point, Kan-
garoo Island, South Australia.

3.—8eriola simplex, Ramsay and Ogilby. Type, 197
mm. long, supposed to have been obtained in Port
Jackson, New South Wales.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. Ml. PLATE XX XVI 1.

A. R. McCcLLOCH, del.

V. Report on the Polycheeta obtained by the F.I.S.
" Endeavour " 011 the coasts of New South Wales,
Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia.

PART I.

BY

WILLIAM B. BENHAM, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.,

Professor of Biology at the University of Otago, New Zealand ; Mutton
Medallist. New Zealand Institute.

Plates XXXVIII.-XLV.

POLYCHJETA. BENHAM. 173

REPORT ON THE POLYCH^TA.

PART I.
I. — INTRODUCTION.

AT the request of the Curator of the Australian Museum,
Mr. R. Etheridge (acting for the Hon. the Minister for Trade
and Customs), I undertook the examination of the series
of Polychseta which were dredged by the Federal Investi-
gation Ship " Endeavour," chiefly off the east coast of Tas-
mania and the southern and eastern coasts of Australia.
Owing to my University duties, I have only a few months
in the summer available for research work of a continuous
character, so that it has only been possible to work through
about two-thirds of the material. Hence any general sum-
mary of the results must stand over till the publication of
the second part.

Our knowledge of the Polychseta of the Australian seas
is very meagre. We know something of those occurring in
Port Jackson from the work of Professor W. A. Has well,1
published a good many years ago in a series of papers in the
" Proceedings of the Liimean Society of New South Wales."
He includes an account of several of the species which had
been previously described by Schmarda2, who collected in
this region and elsewhere, and by other early zoologists as
Baird. Kinberg and de Quatrefages, each of whom had
described one or more species which had been incidentally
and occasionally collected by early voyagers or collectors.

As to the worms from deeper water, our knowledge is
confined to what is recorded in that monumental volume in
the series of " Challenger ' Reports by Professor W. C.
M'Intosh.3

It may be well to give this list of worms obtained during
that voyage.

Station 158, considerably south of Australia, Lat. 50°
1' S., Long. 123° 4' E., 1800 fathoms ; Globigerina ooze.

Hyalinoecia bentkaliana, M'Intosh.
Grubianella antarctica, M'Intosh.

1. Haswell— Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, iii., 1879 ; Id., Ibid., vii., 1883 '•
Id., Ibid., ix.. 1885; Id., Ibid., x., 18815; Id., Ibid., (2), vi., 1892.

2. Schmarda — Neue Wirbellose Thiere, 1861.

3. M'Intosh— Chall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885.

174 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Station 160, south of Australia, Lat, 42° 42' S., Long. 134°
10' E., 2600 fathoms ; red clay.

Eunoa abyssorum, M'Intosh.
Polynoe ascidioides, M'Intosh.

Station 162, Bass Strait, Lat. 39° 10' S., Long. 146° 37'
E., 38 fathoms ; sand and shells.

Polynoe platycirrus,1 M'Intosh.
Thala.nessa oculata, M'Intosh.
Staurocephalus australiensis, M'Intosh.
Eunice vittata, D. C'liiaje.
Eunice pycnobranchiata, M'Intosh.
Eunice bassensis, M'lntosh.

Station 163A, Twofold Bay, Australia, 150 fathoms ;
green mud.

Piiyllodoce duplex, M'Intosh.
Sabellaria (Pallasia) giardi, M'Intosh.
Terebella grubei, M'Intosh.

Station 163B, off Port Jackson, 35 fathoms ; hard ground.

Aphrodita ausiralis, Baird.
Thalanessa fimbriata, M'tntosh.
Eunice a/ihroditois, Pallas.
Sabella fusca, Grube.

Station 186, Torres Strait, Lat. 10° 30' S., Long. 142° 18'
E., 8 fathoms ; coral mud.

Lepidonotits cristatus, Grube.
Eupompe australiensis, M'Intosh.
Eunice torresiensis, M'Intosh.
Eunice tribranc/iiala, M'Intosh.

Hyalinoecia tubiccla, Muller, var. papuensis, M'In-
tosh.
Thelepus, sp.

With the first and the last stations we have here no con-
cern, as they lie outside the limits of the cruise of the
" Endeavour/'

But we may consider the remaining stations, for they
were approximately covered by this vessel.

Out of the fifteen species obtained at these four stations by
the " Challenger " at depths from 35-2600 fathoms, all but
four were new to science.

1. So written in the text, but in this list and in that of bathymetrical
distribution it is written " platydrrata."

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 175

Of the twelve new species then found, so far as the present
material has been examined, the " i^ndeavoxir " collection
contains four, namely, Stauronereis (Staurocephalus) austra-
liensis, Polynoe plalycirnis, Eunice pycnobranchiata, and E.
bassensis, the last, having been founded for a small fragment,
it is now fully described for the first time.

Two world-wide species, Eunice siciliensis and Hyalinoecia
tubicola, are also represented, while Hesione splendida and
Nephthys macrura are known from other parts of the world.

Xew species of the interesting and rare Lumbriconereid
genera, Oenone and Lysarete are here established. But
perhaps the most interesting feature of the collection is the
abundance of the polynoid genus Physalidonotus, originally
discovered in New Zealand, and later on in Japanese waters.
I find it necessary to make four new species, and it will
probably be found to be widely distributed through the
Pacific Ocean.

From the subjoined list it will be seen that I have found
it necessary to establish eleven new species, while two others
are possibly new to science.

Under each species here recorded I have added the geo-
graphical distribution so far as the literature at rny disposal
enables me to do so.

LIST OF SPECIES.

Family HESIONIDJ5.

Hesione splendida, Savigny.

Family APHRODITID^.

Sub-family POLYNOIN^.

Polynoe pJalycirrus, M'Intosh.
Lepidonotas hedleyi, sp. nov.
Lepidonotus willeyi, sp. nov.
Physalidonotus rugosus, sp. nov.
Physalidonotus laevis, sp. nov.
Physalidonotus turritus, sp. nov.
Physalidonotus paucibranchiatus, sp. nov.
Harmothoe etheridgei, sp. nov.
Scalisetosus australiensis, sp. nov.

176 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family SIGALIONID.E.
Sub-family SIGALIONIN^.

Thalanessa oculata, M'Intosh.
Sigalion, sp. incert.

Sub-family ACOETIN^.
Eupompe australiensis, M'Intosh.

Family ALCIOPID^.
Halodora, sp. ?

Family NEPHTHYDID^.
Nephthys macrura, Schmarda.

Family AMPHINOMID^.

Chloeia inermis, Qua tref ages.
Notopygos labiatus, M'Intosh.

Family STAURONEREID^.
Stauronereis australiensis, M'Intosh.

Family
Sub-family EUNICIN^E.

Eunice siciliensis, Grube.
Eunice bassensis, M'Intosh.
Eunice pycnobranchiata, M'Intosh.

Sub-family ONUPHIDIN^E.
Hyalinoecia tubicola, Muller.

Family LUMBRICONEREIDiE.

Lumbriconereis sphaerocephala, Schmarda.
Lumbriconereis guliclmi, sp. nov.
Oenone haswelli, sp. nov.
Lajsareie australiensis, sp. nov.

POLYCH^BTA. — BENHAM. 177

II. — DESCRIPTION OF THE GENERA AND SPECIES.

Family HESIONID.E.

Genus HESIONE, Savigny.
HESIONE SPLENDIDA, Savigny.

Hesione splendida, Savigny, System, des Annelides, 1820,
p. 40, pi. iii., fig. 3.

Hesione ceylonica, Grube, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1874, p. 327.

Hesione pacifica, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885,
p. 184.

Hesione ehlersi, Gravier, Nouvelles Archives de Museum
Paris, 1900, p. 175.

A comparison of the descriptions of the above species
inclines me very strongly to the opinion that they are
synonymous. I can find no definite characters that serve to
distinguish the one from the other. True, one author gives
some detail that is not mentioned by another. In the case of
Savigny's account, for example, an inspection of the figures
alone has led some authors to regard that species as blind
and as being without prostomial tentacles ; but, as Grube
has pointed out, these organs are mentioned in the diagnosis
of the genus Hesione on the previous page of the work, and
as this species is the type, eyes and tentacles must have been
present, though overlooked by the artist. Grube has also,
on more than one occasion, made it clear from a careful
perusal of the diagnosis and of the figures, that the species
has four pairs of peristomial cirri. I note that in the drawing,
too, the preanal cirri are not included, though reference is
made in the text to them.

M'Intosh notes that his species is nearly allied to Savigny's,
though the ' ' body is more elongate and the shape of the
head is different."

Grube1 writes of H. ceylonica'.--" Species cum Hesione
splendida, Sav., maxime congruens, sed dorso fuscius lineato,
haud transverse sulcatc, cirrisque tentacularibus longioribus
differens/'and Willey2has that it "is probably a geographical
form of H. splendida."

1. Grube — Proc. Zool. Soc., 1874, p. 327.

2. Willey — Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, pt. iv., Suppl. Rep., xxx.,
— Polychseta, 1905, p. 266.

178 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

It is curious that Gravier in referring to Savigny's species
on p. 179, repeats the error about the. tentacles which had
been pointed out previously by Ehlers and Grube.

So far as I can see the only differences are in reference to
these errors and the dimensions of the various forms. They
all agree in being uniformly coloured without pattern, such
as occurs in most of the other species typified by H. pan-
therina, Risso.

A re-examination of the species is desirable.

The following is a description of the single specimen
obtained by the " Endeavour " :—

Length, 47 mm. ; widest at mid-body, 8 mm., or including
the parapodia 19mm. From this point it tapers towards
each end, the first segment measuring 4 mm. and the last
3 mm.

The anus is situated at the end of a funnel turned dorsally,
and this funnel is preceded by a preanal segment, which is
dark brown, the rest of the body being a pale yellowish tint.
The worm is, perhaps, like Savigny's type, " margaritaceous 5;
or " pearly " in life.

The usual division -lines are noticeable, separating a median
dorsal area from lateral areas, and the sides are swollen at
the points to which the parapodia are attached.

On the under surface the median area is dotted with brown
pigment. This is not mentioned by other authors, but it
does not seem to me a specific character ; this dotted area
is interrupted by pale circular spots at each intersegmental
line (possibly over the ganglia).

The head is a good deal compressed owing to pressure
against the bottom of the tube ; the prostomium is broader
than its length, and its width is about one-third that of the
peristomium, which is intimately fused with its anterior
end. It is bilobed, with two pairs of eyes, and anteriorly a
pair of minute tentacles which are easily overlooked, but
can be detected 011 using a Leitz dissecting microscope,
No. 16. Each is a transparent somewhat elongated conical
organ. The peristomium, composed of four segments fused,
is as wide as the first chsetigerous segment. It carries eight
couples of long peristomial cirri on each side, the dorsal cirri
being about twice as long as the ventral, and the longest
reaching as far back as the fourth chsetigerous. The first
ventral cirrus is shorter than the others.

POLYCHJETA. — BENHAM. 179'

Thc.se cirri have enlarged cirn>pln>res, and the tiagelluin
is minutely annulated.

The 16 parapodia have the usual form, and each carrie,; a
long dorsal cirrus, springing from an enlarged cirrophore ;
the filament being about three times the length of the para-
podium, that is, as long as the width of the body. The four
anterior parapodia are smaller, the first much shorter, than
the rest.

The chsetophoral sac has at its antero -dorsal margin a short
filamentous " ligule " into which the black aciculum projects.
This is easily overlooked unle.-s the foot is mounted with the
anterior surface upwards. It is not shown in M'Intosh's
figure of the foot.

The cha'tiv are pale yellow, and of the usual form.

The ventral cirrus reaches beyond the end of the para-
podium almost to the tips of the chaetse.

The preanal segment carries dorsal and ventral cirri but
no distinct parapodium. The subanal cirri, borne by the
anal funnel, are as long as the dorsal cirri anteriorly.

LOG. — Off Babel Island, Bass Strait. 50-80 fathoms.

Distribution. — Red Sea, Indian Ocean, Pacific Ocean
(Tongatabu).

Family APHRODITID^E.
Sub-Family POLYNOIN.E.
Genus POLYNOE (sensu latu),1 Savign//.

POLYNOE PLATYCIRRUS, M'lntOS,!.

Polynoc platycirrus, M'lntosh, ('hall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885,.
p. Ill, pi. iii., fig. 4, pi. xvi., tig. "2, pi. xix., fig. 3, pi.
viii.v., figs. 14, 15, pi. ixA., fig. 1. Id.. Potts, Trans.
Linn. Soc., Zool. xiii., 1010. p. 336.

The material consists of two entire individuals and the
greater part (anterior end included) of a third.

A complete specimen measures 7"> mm. in length by 1) mm.
across the elytra and 12 mm. over the ventral cha-t;r.

1. The whole subject of the delimitation of the genera of the Polyn<>in.>'
seems almost in as much confusion as at the time Grube wrote his classic
paper " Bermerkungen Fam. Aphr >'liten I'.ilyn'iina," in 1875.

180 "ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

These differ from the type in the colour of the elytra, which
are uniform pale pinkish brown. They lack the " four
darker longitudinal belts " which, being continuous with
those of the other elytra, give the striping which M'Intosh
regarded as characteristic of the species.

I find also that there are 24 pairs of elytra in both the
entire individuals, instead of " about 23 pairs " recorded by
M'Intosh. They are on the parapodial segments 1, 3, 4, 6,
8, etc., up to 42, 44 and on 45. This last scale, then, is in an
unusual position, being on a consecutive instead of on an
alternate segment.

There are seven postelytral cirriferous segments, giving in
all 52. M'Intosh's largest specimen measured only 45 mm.
in length by 10 mm. " total breadth," and his drawing shows
48 parapodia on each side.

It is possible, then, that they were not fully grown. It is
not unlikely, it seems to me, that in these species with
longish bodies the number of segments and even of the elytra
may increase with age. Thus Potts records that specimens
measuring 30 and 33 mm. had 19 or 22 pairs of elytra
respectively.

In all other respects my specimens agree with M'Intosh's,
especially in the unique structure of the dorsal cirrus, which
is flattened from side to side, so as to be band-like. This is
of more weight than any trifling difference in size or colour.

I may add one or two notes in extension of the former
accounts. The parapodium is practically uniramous, for the
notopodium is represented by a very small lobe on the
anterior of the upper surface containing an aciculum and
some two or three very small chaetse such as M'Intosh figures
and which recall those of L. simplicipes, Haswell.

The neuropodial lobe carries a large number of stout
chsetiB in two groups — a supra- and a sub-acicular group—
which are distinctly separate when seen from the side of the
animal. But all are alike in structure, the supra-acicular
group consists of 4-5 horizontal rows, with 2-3 in a row,
giving a total of about 14-15 chsetse in a middle foot.

The sub-acicular group are in 8-9 tiers, of three in the upper
and lower tiers and five in the middle ones, a total of 38-40.
These chaetae are bifid, with 20 pectinated frills, and agree
precisely with M'Intosh's figure.

Iocs.— Off Babel hland, Bass Strait, 50-80 fathoms.
Off Gabo Island, Victoria, 200 fathoms.

POLYCHvETA. BENHAM. 181

Distribution. — The " Challenger " specimens came from off
East Moncceur Island, Bass Strait, 38 fathoms, and off
Twofold Bay, New South Wales, in 120-150 fathoms. An-
other is recorded from 2,200 fathoms from Station 163, quite
close to this latter locality.

These three " Challenger " stations, then, are practically
the same as the two stations from which the " Endeavour "
obtained the above material.

Indian Ocean (Potts).

Genus LEriDONOTU.s, Leach (sensu stricto), Kinbery.

LEPIDOSOTUS HEDLEYI, Sp. HOV.

(Plate xxxviii., figs. 1-7.)

It is with some little hesitation that I make a new species
for the single individual, which bears some resemblances to
L. lissolepis, Haswell, and to L. purpureus, Potts, to which
I refer below.

The specimen is ill preserved, and superficially resembles
Harmothoe etheridgei in its grey colour.

It measures 20mm. by 9nim. over the chsetse, as measured
on the ventral surface, for the animal is flattened, somewhat
distorted, and the elytra displaced so that dorsal measure-
ment.:; are uncertain. The elytra are uniformly pale gray,
translucent, oval, thin and a good deal crumpled ; they
overlap but slightly fore and aft, and do not entirely cover
the back. The dorsal surface of the body is marked by
transverse bands of dark pigment ; each band is composed
of a series of very narrow lines close together, crossing the
body in the alternate annuli (for as in other Polynoids each
segment is biannulate as in many Earthworms) ; and each
band is of the same width as the intervening imcoloured
band.

The elytra (PI. xxxviii., fig. 1) appear to be smooth under
a lens, but are really sparsely covered with uniformly
arranged low conical tubercles which have an oval base, so
that they present under a low magnification a characteristic
appearance of elongated refringent dots with a slit along its
middle (PI. xxxviii., fig. 3\

Each elytron (PI. xxxviii., fig. 1) is oval with a slight
anterior emargination, and is rather broader externally ; the
circular white areola is nearly central. The anterior regie 11

182 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

of each is pigmentless and transparent, the pigment is rather
darker round the areola especially in the posterior region.
The pigment occurs as minute black granules in certain
round cells rather widely scattered amongst clear empty
cells (PL xxxviii., fig. 2). There is no fringe.

The notopodium (PL xxxviii., fig. 4) is small, and contains
about 12 pale almost colourless chsetaj, all alike, with
incomplete spiral frills : for in some aspects the serrulations
appear to be limited to one side.

The neuropodium is bluntly pointed, with yellow-golden
chsetse, thicker than the notopodials, about 24 or 25 in
number ; these have a subapical tooth, and from 1) to 15
pectinated frills, according to their position in the bundle ;
the most distal frill having large teeth (PL xxxviii., figs. G, 7).

The dorsal cirrus is pale brown for about half way along
its length, then white, with a dark band a little below the
tip, giving the appearance of a subterminal swelling.

The prostomium is typically lepidonotan ; it is as long
as its breadth. The anterior eyes are at its widest point ;
the posterior pair are far back, close to the nuchal fold.

The tentacles are smooth ; the median is lacking. The
laterals are long slender, and colourless, except for a pale .
grey ring below the subterminal swelling.

Remarks. — In L. lissohpis, Haswell, from Port Stephens,
the elytra are described as '" smooth, rather delicate, dark
slatey-brown. the pigment being arranged in minute dense
lobed corpuscles instead of in separate granules." This
appears to be quite different from the arrangement above
described, and his figure of the chaetae is too poor to be sure
that it agrees, except in a rough way, with those of the
present species.

L. purpureus, Potts,1 is also only briefly described. Its
colour, however, is said to be " purple brown," and the pig-
ment is " concentrated in little masses " between clear cells,
giving a honeycomb appearance.

The surface of the elytron is " strewn with little chitinous
tubercles showing a slight median depression."

His figure is not very clear, though if the dark circular
things are meant for the tubercles they do not agree with
those before me.

But both these seem from other features to be nearly
allied to one another and to the present.

1 . Potts — Loc. cit., p. 33k

POLYCHJETA. — BENHAM. 183

Loc. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

LEPIDONOTUS WILLEYI, sp. nov.
(Plate xxxviii., figs. 8-15.)

? Lepidonotus carinulatus, Willey, Ceylon Pearl Oyster
Fisheries, part iv., Suppl. Rep., xxx., — Polychteta,
1905, p. 248. Id., Potts, Trans. Linn. 8oc., Zool., (2),
xiii., 1910, p. 331.

A single imperfect specimen which measures 9mm. by
4mm. over the chsetse, and only '2-5 across the body veiitrally.
It is imperfect posteriorly, as it contains only 19 pah's of
parapodia, and 10 elytrophores. The elytra are, with the
exception of 3 or 4 pairs, lacking.

The specimen is a poorly preserved male.

Under a lens the colourless elytra are covered in their
exposed regions by pale brown roundish tubercles of re-
latively large size on the lateral area, and 011 the areola,
which is somewhat raised. A patch of pale reddish brown
pigment occurs above the scar.

The anterior concealed region is covered with much smaller
hemispherical tubercles (PI. xxxviii., fig. 8). The large
tubercles, which appear to be round under a lens, are on
focussing seen to be polygonal at the base, and to be produced
into a variable number, and variably arranged short blunt
processes.

Perhaps these correspond to Willey 's " echinulate '
tubercles, though the spines shown by him are sharper at
the point.

Towards the external margin there occur a few rows of
" spinulate " tubercles, short columns of various sizes, ter-
minating in a variable number of sharp spines (PI. xxxviii.,
figs. 9, 11).

The elytra are fringed only on the external margin with
coarse, relatively long cylindrical processes.

All these outgrowths of the elytra are covered by abun-
dance of very fine particles, which masks their details to a
great extent.

The prostomium is relatively long, narrowed posteriorly,
with the anterior eye laterally at the greatest width, which
is about midway along the side ; the posterior eye is about
midway between this and the hinder end of the prostomiium

184 '' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The median tentacle is broken, the laterals are relatively
short, and, excluding the base, each is equal to the length of the
prostomium ; there is apparently no sub-terminal swelling,
though as the animal is soft, it may be present in life ; they
are smooth and colourless. The palps are pale brown with
a white tip.

The dorsal cirri have a subterminal swelling, though
feebly developed, and the pigmented ring below it no doubt
adds to the effect. The parapodium (PI. xxxviii., fig. 12)
consists of a small notopodium only slightly prominent, and
a large neuropodium whose lower margin slopes upwards to
meet the upper at a blunt point, at which is the short acicular
ligule. The notopodial chsetse are of two kinds, which differ
only slightly from one another. The upper (a) are about 12
in number, shorter than the second kind, but of unequal
lengths ; they are arranged in a semicircle above the bases
of these. Each terminates in a blunt smooth apex, at a
little distance from which the usual frills commence (PI.
xxxviii., fig. 13). The second kind (b) are about 7 in number,
longer, but of the same diameter ; the tip, however, is
extremely fine, and appears to be flexible ; the frills are
continued to the apex (PL xxxviii., fig. 14).

The neuropodial chsetae are 24 in number, with a sub-
apical tooth, and about five frills, of which the uppermost
has stouter denticulations than the rest (PI. xxxviii., figs.
15, 15a)

Remarks. — Willey described a species from Ceylon under
the name L. carinulatus, Grube, and Potts identifies one
from the Indian Ocean under the same name. And at first
I supposed that I had a specimen of Grube's species before
me, as it agrees very closely with the account given by these
two zoologists.

The chief reason for disagreeing with Willey s determination
of his species is the presence of a sub-apical tooth on the
chsetse, for Grube makes no mention of it, either in his
original diagnosis of the species, to which neither of the above
authors refer, nor in his second account of specimens from
the Philippines.

Indeed, the original account1 contains the following
description of the chsetse — " inferiores fere 24-nae, apice
graciliori simplici — sub eo vix dilatatse, dentibus 4 serratse,
extreme majore."

1. Grube— -Annelid en des rothen Meeres (Ehrenberg gesammelt).
Monatsber. Kgl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1869, p. 7.

POLYCHJETA. BENHAM. 185

He here speaks of a " simple apex." Had he meant to
imply that there was a tooth below the apex, he would
surely have used the words " apice bidente " as in his diag-
nosis of P. (Harmothoe) grisea, on p. 9.

Grube's account of the elytron in his second memoir1,
however, seems certainly to apply to that of the specimen
before me, and to those which Willey and Potts describe.
He says that they appear, under a feeble magnification
(" schwach bewaffnet Augen "), as presenting a network of
closely arranged tubercles, which appear rounded, but are
in reality polygonal, and each is crossed by a small low
"keel" or light stripe. But are we justified in identifying a
worm as L. carinulatus, because it has elytra of apparently
the same pattern, when the more important chaetse are so
different ?

I think, therefore, that Willey and Potts had before them
specimens of this new species, L. wilhyi, and not Grube's
species. It is true that Willey describes on the elytra of his
worm some large rounded tubercles as " echinulate," but
Potts does not find any such marked echinulations, nor are
they present in this individual. Probably the short rounded
outgrowths above described represent these spines. Potts'
account agrees precisely with what I have seen.

Loc. — Off Maria Island, Tasmania, 78 fathoms (with
Eunice pycnobranchiata, Physalidonotus rugosus, and Glycera,
sp.).

Genus PHYSALIDONOTUS, Ehlers.

The genus was established by Ehlers2 for the reception of
a worm described in detail by W. M. Thomson3 in 1900
under the name of ' Lepidonotus giganteus, Kirk," which
had been previously named by Quatrefages " Aphrodita
sqwimosa." The leading peculiarity to which the Ehlers'
term refers is the possession of branchial " papulse " on the
sides of the parapodia, such as occur in the Acoetan
genus, Eupolyodontes, and the existence of a definite
dorsal channel below the elytra for the pass-age of the respi-
ratory current backwards to its exit between the last pair of
elytra ; the mesial portion of the elytra being supported by
certain low tubercles or pads of (? mu.-cular) tissue along the
back.

1. Grube- — Annulata Semperiana, 1878, p. l!(i.

2. Ehlers — -Neuseeland. Annelid., 1904, p. 9.

3. Thomson — Proc. Zool. Soc., 1900. p. 974.

186 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

A translation of Ehlers' diagnosis is: — "Polynoinae with 20
pairs of leathery, rugged elytra covering the back; three
tentacles with large basal joints at the anterior margin of the
prostomium ; a niu-hal caruncle ; chaetae between the peri-
stomial cirri ; finely denticulated dorsal capillary chaete on
a short dorsal foot-lobe, and stout chaste with serrate frills
in the ventral lobe ; with bladder-like evaginations around
the base of the cirro- and elytro-phores."

Previous to Ehlers' memoir, Moore1, in 1903, had described
two species of Lcpidonotus from the coastal slope of Japan,
viz., L. cititonijormis (p. 405) and L. branchiferus (p. 409),
which clearly belong to this same genus. He pointed out
their " evident relationship to L. giganteus, Kirk, from New
Zealand," and suggested that the three species " might very
properly be segregated as a distinct generic group."2

Amongst the material from the " Endeavour " dredgings
I find four new species of this remarkable branchiate genus,
and am therefore able to add one or two characters to the
diagnosis of Ehlers and to delete two.

In the first place he includes the presence of chaete on the
peristomium ; but these Bourne3 long ago showed to occur
in the genus Le-pidonotus, and other early authors have
recorded them.

The " Nackencarunkel " is also attributed to the genus ;
but in this I fancy Ehlers was misled by Thomson's figure of
the head (PI. 51, fig. 4) where he shows the first of the series
of dorsal tubercles or elytron supports, labelled "d.t.l," and
which he explains as " the first dorsal tubercle in the
respiratory channel/' It overlaps the base of the prostomium,
but is not analogous with the " caruncle " of Amphinomids.

Additional characters are as follows : —

(1.) All the species agree in having the elytra attached by
a long, narrow oval cartilagiiioid tissue in the elytrophore,
which is set transversely to the body axis in line with the
foot, and leaves a very distinct, long oval scar on the elytron ;
whereas in all other species of Polynomae and Aphroditinae,
so far as the figures inform me, the elytrophore and its scar
is a more or less circular thing ; but in I-phiojie muricata,
Savigny shows (PI. iii., fig. 1) them as oval.

1. lLouiv 1'roc. Aciid. .Nat. iSci. Philadelphia,, 19U3, p. 401.

2. He notes, too, that " L. branchiata, Tread well (Bull. U.S. Fish.
Comm., xx., 1903, p. 18(i), from Porto Rico, possesses similar branchiae,
but the seta> and elytra are different."

3. Bourne- — Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool., ii., 1883, p. 347.

POLYCILETA. — BENHAM. 187

(2.) In all the species so far examined the elytron is fringed
with long filamentous processes, usually termed " cilia," over
the posterior, the lateral and part of the anterior margin.

(3.) The ventral chaetae are not as figured by Thomson,
but are bearded, as correctly shown by Moore for his species ;
and a re-examination of several individuals of P. squamosus
shows that the short " frills," so characteristic of the Poly-
noids, are in reality formed by the bases of these long hairs.
It may be mentioned that Thomson, in his description of the
chaetae (p. 981), writes : — " Rows of minute filiform spines,
but bearing no comb-like plates," and his figure shows short
hair-like processes. All the specimens at my disposal are of
rather large size, and these hairs have been worn away,
leaving short frills composed of very minute and very thin
and numerous processes, of unequal lengths. It is clear that
Thomson had this in view, and recognised that the chaetae
differed from the usual type.

Such bearded chaetse occur also in Iphione spinosa as
figured by M'Intosh in the " Challenger " Report.

(4.) It appears to be characteristic to possess on the upper
surface of the cirriferous segments and encroaching on the
feet large transversely oval cushions (the dorsal " tubercles '
of Grube), similar to, but smaller than, the elytrophoral
cushions. In the figures of Polynoids, of which the naked
dorsal surface is carefully drawn, these, though present, are
much less conspicuous. Their great development here seems
to be related to the improved respiratory system, evidently
serving to direct the incurrent water between the feet on its
way to the respiratory channel on the back, and so ensuring
that it passes over the gills which are set along the faces and
upper surfaces of the feet.

(5.) In all the species the elytra are supported mesially by
a series of small " pads " along the back1 — two pairs or two
single ones in each segment, which, as in other Polynoids,
are biannulate.

The first two pads are median and belong to the first para-
podial segment ; then follows a double series, median in
position and close together, which extends till the tenth,
thirteenth, or even, in one species, to the fifteenth segment,
after which comes a median series, which ceases in the nine-
teenth segment. The channel thus formed along each side
of this row of pads continues till the last elytron on the

1. Similiar pads are shown in a few other Polynoids, e.g., Harmclhoe
tubtrosa, Ehler*.

188 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

twenty -second segment, above which is the " excurrent
aperture " noted by Thomson as being formed by excava-
tions on the mesial margins of the last pair of elytra, which
margins are slightly upturned to limit a definite aperture.

(6.) The large tufts of very fine dorsal chsetse are so arranged
as to meet the neighbouring tufts, before and behind,
and these chaetae are covered with numerous fine hairs or
long denticulations in which the fine particles become en-
tangled as they are being carried inwards by the current.
They serve, in fact, as a filtering apparatus.

(7.) Again, around the base of the dorsal cirrus, in all the
species, is a large gland from which the cylindrical cirrophore
arises, and thus divides the gland into two portions.1 This
gland is separated from the dorsal cushion by a distinct space
on which in some species are the dorsal gill*. May it be that
this gland secretes a mucous material which also entangles
fine particles which have escaped the filtering action of the
cheetse? One finds delicate strands of stuff, with entangled
particles, in between the feet and between the cushions.

The genus is in one respect at least more nearly related to
the Aphroditinse than to the Polynoinse, namely in the form
of the intestinal caeca, which are long and branched, and the
ends reflexed, and lying below the " cushion " and elytro-
phores, whereas in the Polynoinse these organs are shorter,
simpler, and apparently not bent backwards.

The genus is, then, a specialised Polynoid in which certain
modifications have occurred in the feet as well as in other
parts of the body in the direction of perfecting the respiratory
functions ; and it presents an interesting instance of adap-
tation to its mode of life.

All the species come from some depth. The New Zealand
forms are usually found in from 20-40 fathoms of water, with
a bottom of ooze or fine sand. Lt is true that we sometimes
find the animal on shore, but it may be that it has been
carried there aiter a storm, for they are only occasionally
found when shore-collecting. f have found them inside
fishes.

The two Japanese species were obtained from 30-63
fathoms ; and the new species occur in deep water, down to
200 fathoms.

1 . A similar gland occurs in other Polynoid genera.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 189

PHYSALIDONOTUS RUGOSUS, sp. nov.

(Plate xxxviii., figs. 16-22 ; Plate xxxix., figs. 23-25.)

A stout oval Polynoid, measuring 48 mm. in length by
22 mm. across the elytra, and 27 mm. over the ventral
chaetae. The diameter of the body alone measured over the
ventral surface is 10 mm. The height at about the middle
is 9 mm.

The 12 pairs of elytra completely cover the back and
overlap considerably in the fore and aft direction. They
are attached firmly, are of a cartilagiiioid consistency, shiny
white below. The region of each which is covered by its
predecessor is smooth and nearly white ; the rest of the
exposed surface is extremely rough, with smaller and larger
tubercles and papillae of various shades of brown ; but a
small area just in front of the 1L areola" is rather conspicuous,
owing to the pale ground colour, with small, pale tubercles.
The external or lateral region is thinner than the rest, and
where it covers the parapodium may be folded upwards
owing apparently to the contraction of the body wall and
elytrophore.

The wt areola," or scar as it is sometimes called — that is, the
area by which it is attached to the elytrophore, is an elon-
gated oval, transverse to the long axis of the body. At the
mesial or upper end of this areola is a small group of 4-6
long sub-cylindrical spinose papillse, terminating in an
enlargement covered with conical spines (PL xxxviii., fig. 19).
These " areolar papillae' measure from 1.0 to 1.5mm. in
length.

In addition, there may be one or two isolated similar
papilla1 near the external end of the areola.

The entire free edge, i.e., the lateral and posterior margins,
is fringed with similar papilla?, shorter on the posterior but
longer on the lateral edge, where they measure from 1 .5 to
1.75 mm. Moreover, they are not confined to the latter
edge, but some 2-3 rows of rather smaller papilla? occur on
the surface of this region close to the edge (PI. xxxviii fi^
18).

These long laterally placed papillse form a very conspicuous
fringe overlying the notopodial chaetae. They are pale,
transparent, and probably colourless in life.

The shape of the elytron in the mid-body is roughly a
rectangle with rounded corners, and with a slight excavation
on the anterior margin ; its long axis is transverse to that of
the body.

190 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The first elytron is sub-circular and bears the long papillae
on its anterior edge as well as in the usual position.

The second is reniform, having a very deep concave exca-
vation of its anterior margin, which fits round the first
elytrophore.

So much can be observed with the naked eye ; microscopic
examination reveals the fact that amongst the large tubercles
and long papillae are smaller tubercles, stellate in form, of
various sizes and of various shades of brown and stages of
development. Many have a radiate base, or with spines close
to the base, from which springs a column, terminating
in radiating spines 3-5 in number (PI. xxxviii., figs. 20, 21).

The long marginal papillae are in reality long inverted cones
with a narrow base of attachment and slightly expanded end,
which is produced into two or three or more long spines, and
the sides also bear spines. In the type they are more
numerous and blunt, and resemble the pictures in children's
books of an ogre's club.

The actual margin of the elytron is fringed with delicate
hair-like " cilia " around the lateral, posterior, and the outer
portion of the anterior margin.

The gills. — The branchial organs are thin- walled, finger-
shaped hollow outgrowths of the body-wall, and may be
termed " papulae " (a word in common use for similar organs
in the Asteroidea). These papulae commence on the third
parapodium, where there is a single one on the anterior and
on the posterior face, but they soon become more numerous ;
then for a few segments before ceasing they decrease in
number, and die out after the 23rd segment, which carries
the last pair of elytra.

The arrangement, which may be regarded as normal for
this species, as seen at about the middle of the body (PI.
xxxix., fig. 25), is as follows : —

On the anterior face of the parapodium there is a row of
four papulae, commencing at the "cushion" and sloping
downwards along the anterior limit of the upper surface of
the foot, the most distal of the row lying close to the base of
the notopodium. There is a second row at a lower level,
consisting of two (or occasionally three) papulae, of which
the distal is the larger and lies below the upper distal papula ;
the proximal is removed by some little space from the axilla.

On the posterior face the arrangement is somewhat
different ; there is a row of three commencing at the cushion,
and the distal papula is close to the base of the cirrus (in the

POLYCH^ETA.— BENHAM. 191

cirriferous segments). There may also be a couple of small
papulae springing from the posterior face of the cushion. A
lower row of two, the proximal near the axilla, the distal
about half-way down the side of the foot. This row is nearly
vertical, running down the axillary angle between the two
feet (PI. xxxviii., fig. 22).

The arrangement on the elytriferous segments is nearly
the same, though there are usually three papulae in the lower
row on the posterior face, the proximal or uppermost being
close to the axilla.

The parapodium has the form represented by Thomson's
figure and illustrated here on PI. xxxix., fig. 38 — it possesses
two bundles of chaetse ; the notopodial bundle consists of a
very large number of closely set, very fine, almost silky and
very flexible bristles, which project as a pencil or brush,
spreading outwards in all directions, and touching those of
the neighbouring feet (PL xxxix., fig. 25). Under the micro-
scope they are seen to bear a double series of very fine and
rather long " cilia " or short hairs, which are covered with
fine particles of mud, and evidently act as a sieve.

The neuropoclial chaetae are stout and brown, about 30 in
number, arranged in 10-12 tiers of 2-3 in a tier. They differ
remarkably from the normal Polynoid chaetae, and resemble
those figured by Moore for P. chitoniformis.

The usual " pectinated frills " (of A. G. Bourne) are re-
placed by transverse rows of very long, very fine hairs, which
spread out on each side. It is impossible, I find, to count
the rows, as they successively overlap, but there are at least
12-15 or perhaps more (PI. xxxix., figs. 23, 24).

The aciculum of the neuropodium pierces the foot near its
upper margin, and there is here above it a short tongue-
shaped lip. There are only about five or six chaetae abcve the
aciculum.

The dorsal cirrus arises from a swollen base, which appears
to be a gland ; it is more largely developed behind than in
front of the base. The usual cirrophore and style are
distinguishable in the cirrus, which presents no structural
characteristic.

The cirrus is slender in proportion to the size of the animal.
The head agrees in general with that figured by Thomson
for P. squamosus.

The prostomium (PI. xxxviii., fig. 16) is about as broad
as its length, widest behind the middle, and limited anteriorly

192 ' BNDEAVOUH " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

by a slightly impressed line across the bases of the lateral
tentacles ; it is notched for the insertion of the median
tentacle.

Both pairs of eyes are far back ; the anterior eye on each
side is at the widest part of the prostomium, and forms a
distinct protuberance ; the posterior is just behind it.

The tentacles are pale brown, for about half their length
from the base, followed by a colourless region, with a narrow
band of darker pigment below the swelling. The palp is
ciliated in seven rows, as figured by Thomson. The relative
proportions of the parts are shown in the figure.

The "elytra! pads" on the dorsum are double over the
2nd to 13th parapodial segments.

Other specimens measured have the following dimensions :—

(1) 20mm. by llmm. over the elytra, and 15mm over
the chsetse.

(2) 25mm. by 14mm. over the elytra, and 17mm. over
the cha?ta>.

(3) 40 mm. by 16 mm., with a height of 8 mm.

Remarks. — The species resembles P. squamosus in size and
general appearance of the elytra, but that species lacks the
supra-areolar papilla?, for in all my material of different sizes
and from various localities around the New Zealand coasts,
this region of the elytron is comparatively smooth, though
there are a few rather large papilla? just posterior to this
areola. But in the present species they form a very con-
spicuous tuft.

At the same time there is a fair range of variability as to
the rugositv of the elytra, seen in the material from Tas-
mania.

In a specimen measuring 40 mm. by 16 mm., with a height
of 8 mm., they are less strongly marked than in the type, as
they are smaller, and to the naked eye not so distinctly
marked off from the more posterior papillae. One can
easily trace a gradation in this individual between the pos-
terior stellate tubercles and the longer papilla? which carry
the spines.

The long papilla? which in the type cover the external
portion of the surface of the lateral region, are here fewer
and even absent on some elytra. But 1 find no feature that
marks this individual off definitely from the type, such as
any difference in the arrangement of the branchial papula?.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 193

In the smaller individuals the spines 011 the marginal
papillae are sharper and fewer than in the larger type.

The colour varies somewhat in tone ; some are paler, others
darker ; in some the smaller tubercles are almost black, in
others brown. But colour is not a thing of importance in
these worms, and in an individual, the successive elytra
present differences in these respects.

Locs. — Off Maria Island, Tasmania. 78 fathoms. A single
specimen, which has been selected as the type.

East of Maria Island, Tasmania, 78 fathoms.
East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, about 70 fathoms.
South of Mt. Cann, Victoria, 75 fathoms.
East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

PHYSALIDONOTUS LAEVIS, sp. nov.
(Plate xxxix., figs. 26-32.)

Two specimens were obtained, the larger of which has the
following dimensions: — Length, 32mm. by 13mm. across the
elytra and 15 mm. over the chaetae, with a height near the
middle of the body of 6 mm.

The second individua.1 is darker in colour, and measures
only 20 mm. by 10 mm. across the elytra.

The elytra are pale brown, and appear to the naked eye
relatively smooth as compared with P. rugosus and others.
The exposed surface is covered with small colourless stellate
tubercles, which are quite minute anteriorly (PI. xxxix., fig.
28) ; they increase in size towards the areola and the posterior
border, but none attain the same large proportions found in
P. squamosus or P. rugosus. Even those on the external
margin are short.

Over the upper end of the areola these stellate tubercles
are more densely aggregated, are slightly larger and taller
than those in the posterior region, but not greatly so (PI.
xxxix., fig. 31).

The marginal papillae are somewhat different from those
in P. rugosus ; they are cylindrical rather than obconical,
with a few large spines at the free end (PL xxxix., fig. 29) ;
the largest of the spines is usually a continuation of the axis
of the papilla, the others radiating more or less at right
angles from it. But on the posterior margin many of the
papillae have five nearly equal spines radiating horizontally,
one of which is larger than the rest.

194 '' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

As in other species, the ground colour of the elytron is
white, and the sxirface covered with variously coloured
stellate tubercles of a regular form, some of which may con-
tain black pigment ; these stars may be carried by short
cylindrical bases. Near the external, anterior margin are a
few soft, uncoloured, simple conical papillae (PI. xxxix.,
fig^SO).

Tn the larger individual the elytra are a good deal paler
than in the shorter one, owing, of course, to the less amount of
the black pigment in the tubercles, or rather to the fewer
black stars.

The gills. — On the anterior face of the parapodia, there is
a row of 3 or 4 papulae in a line, starting from one at the
outward corner of the cushion, the distal one of the row being
near the notopod. There may also be, on the cirriferous
segments, an additional papula at a lower level on the face
of the foot about half way along. On the posterior face
there is a large papula close to the cushion, larger than any
of the others, which in cirriferous segments is clavate rather
than finger-shaped (PI. xxxix., fig. 32).

At a lower level is a row of smaller papulae, commencing
at the axilla, and inclined downwards ; in the cirriferous
there are two, and the elytriferous three, in this row.

The prostomium is as broad as its length, broadest almost
at its hinder border. The two parrs of eyes are even further
back than in P. rugosus, very close together, the anterior at
rather a higher level than the posterior ; they are oval in
outline, with the longer axis vertical, and is best seen in
side view (PI. xxxix., figs. 26, 27).

The tentacles are broken off in the larger specimen (the
type), and in the smaller only one lateral tentacle remains.
This is reddish brown right up to the swelling, which is white ;
the tentaculophore is vandyke-brown.

The tentacle is proportionately as long as that of P.
rugosus.

As in other species, the hinder margin of the prostomium
is overlapped by the first " pad " for the elytra.

The double " pads " occur on segments 2-13 inclusive.

Locs. — Twenty-five miles south-west of Cape Everard,
Victoria. This specimen has been selected as the type.

Off Gabo Island, Victoria, 200 fathoms, with P. pauci-
branchiatus.

POLYCH.-ETA. — BENHAM. 195

PHYSALIDONOTUS TURRITUSX, sp. nov.
(Plate xxxix., figs. 33-35.)

Four specimens of this small species, one of which measures
12 mm. in length by 6 mm. across the elytra.

The characteristic marginal obconical papillae are relatively
large for the size of the worm ; they are shorter and wider
than those in the preceding species.

There is a row of 3-4 large cylindrical papillae over the
areola ; each springs from a distinctly stellate base, and
terminates in a crown of rounded lobes, rather than spines.
The width of these papillae is less than half the height (PI.
xxxix., fig. 33).

Along the posterior margin there is a row of very irregular
spinose papillae, and at the external margin a few large
papillae, some of which, towards the anterior edge, are nearly
cylindrical, others towards the posterior side are inverted
cones, with a very narrow base of attachment, widening out
terminally. All these bear blunt spines.

The general surface of the elytron is covered by closely
arranged low stellate tubercles, small in the anterior region,
larger towards the areola, and still larger on the posterior
region, where they are also of more irregular form and size.
In colour they are varied, some being nearly black.

On the covered portion the tubercles are very small and
rounded.

The margin, as usual in the genus, is fringed with relatively
long " cilia," longer on the external than on the posterior
margin.

The gills. — On the anterior face there are two papulae
close together, about midway along the foot, and one shorter
one on the cushion. On the posterior face there is only one
papula, that a long one springing from the base of the cushion,
but in a cirriferous segment there is, in addition, a second
one close to the base of the cirrus (PI. xxxix., fig. 35).

The prostomium is broader than long, widest at its middle,
where the anterior pair of eyes is situated, the other pair
lies immediately behind them (PI. xxxix., fig. 34).

The tentacles are uniformly pale brown, the median more
than twice the length of the laterals. (In these measurements
the basal " tentaculophore " is not included).

1. "Furnished with towers," so named from the castle-like form of
the large papillae on the elytra.

196 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The elytral " pads " on the dorsum are double in seg-
ments, 2-13.

Loc. — Twenty miles east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 65
fathoms.

PHYSALIDONOTUS PAUCiBRANCHiATUS1, sp. nov.
(Plate xxxix., figs. 36-38 ; Plate xl., figs. 39-42.)

A single individual measuring 23 mm. in length by 9 mm.
over the elytra, and 11 mm. over the chaetae.

The shape is similar to that of the other species, a broad
oval. The elytra are pale, almost white, with a pinkish tint,
or even a faint purplish tint in some of the anterior elytra.

In the pre-areolar region the tubercles are small and
dark, many nearly black, stellate, and very sparsely dis-
tributed, as, indeed, they are all over the elytron.

There are no special areolar papillae, but just behind this
region is a row of 5-6 much larger multiradiate papillae, most
of which are dark greenish, nearly black to the naked eye,
which show up conspicuously on the pale background.

These large papilla? are close together in a line running
along the length of the elytron, reaching nearly from the
mesial and to the external border.

The posterior region is almost free from tubercles, as they
are few and scattered, stellate in form, much smaller than
those in the post-areolar row ; but close to the posterior
margin is a single row of large papillae about half the size
of the post-areolar row, the number and distribution of which
naturally varies. In some of the elytra this posterior series
extends nearly to the mesial border, but usually ceases at
the upper end of the level of the areola.

The mesial surface above the areola is sparsely covered
with small dark spiny tubercles.

Further, the lateral region, especially towards the anterior
border, has very few tubercles, but is sparsely covered by
long filamentous processes similar to those constituting the
marginal fringe, but of greater length (PI. xl., fig. 42) ; a few
of shorter length are found also in the external portion of
the posterior region.

The papillae are much shorter than in the previous species,
even the largest are short, low cylindrical columns of con-
siderable width, terminating in a nearly flat top, wider than
the base, the margin of which is produced into a variable
number of short rays. In those of slightly less size, these

1. In reference to the fewness of the branchial papulae.

POLYCH.ETA. — BENHAM. 197

rays are more sharply pointed, suggesting that those of the
larger are worn down. The low tubercles behind the areola
have a rounded attachment, and are terminally dilated and
produced into three or more, rarely four, sharp spines.

The impression conveyed by a close study of the series is
that the larger are derived from the smaller by increase in
number of rays or spines.

The branchial papulae are much less developed than in the
other species (PI. xxxix., fig. 37). On all the feet, within the
branchial region of the body, there is a couple of short
papulae close together on the anterior face, the distal being
somewhat the larger.

On the posterior face of the cirriferous feet there is a single
short papula springing from the cushion, but this is absent
in the elytriferous feet.

The chaeta has a construction just below the " frilled '
region, Avhich does not occur in the other species (PI. xxxix.,
fig. 36).

The head. — The prostomium is as broad as its length,
perhaps rather broader ; the tentacles are broken.

But a characteristic feature about the eyes is their ap-
proximation (PI. xl., figs. 39, 40). The two on each side
are in contact, near the hinder part of the side. When seen
from above only one pair appears to exist, but from the
side an anterior eye is seen lower down the side, and rather
smaller than the posterior. It may be that it is the anterior
eye that has travelled backwards, if one may judge from
the relative size of the eyes.

The double elytral " pads " extend on to the 15th segment.

Loc. — Off Gabo Island, Victoria, 200 fathoms, with Polynoe
l>la,tycirrus and Physalidonotus laevis.

Genus HARMOTHOE (senxu latu), Kinberg.1
HARMOTHOE (EUNOA) ETHERIDGEI, sp. nov.

(Plate xl., figs. 43-51.)

A single individual whose body is of the usual shape, the
sides almost parallel, and nearly equally tapering at each

1. Malmgren's genera, as has been pointed out by others, are founded
on such points as the relative size of the notopodium, the presence or
absence of a tooth on the neuropodial chaeta, and the presence or absence
of a fringe to the elytra. It is well known that these features all occur in
various species of Lepidonotus, yet no one, 1 think, has attempted to sub-
divide that genus on these minute differences. Hence I follow Willey
("Southern Cross" Polychseta, 1902, p. 263) among others, in using
Harmothoe, rather in Kinberg's sense, though it is not easy to distinguish
that from his Antinoe.

198 ' ENTDEAVOUK " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

end, though the posterior is slightly narrower than the
anterior.

The worm measures 25 mm. by 8 mm. over the elytra,
and 9 mm. over the neuropodial chaetae.

It has 38 parapodial segments, and 15 pairs of elytra.

The elytra are on the usual segments 1, 3, 4, 6 20, 22, 25,

28, 30, the last elytron is followed by 5 parapodial segments.

Most of the dorsal cirri, as well as the subanal cirri are
absent.

The body wall is unpigmented ; the chaetae are pale yellow.

The elytra are grey, overlap fore and aft, as well as right
and left, covering the back, and hiding even the bases of the
notopodial chaetae.

They are rather soft to the touch, and are fringed. The
first one is grey all over, rather darker near the dorsal region.

The rest have the anterior region white, the exposed
region pale grey, becoming darker towards the dorsal region,
and posteriorly, but paler again in the lateral region.

This exposed portion is covered sparsely with small dark
rounded conical tubercles (PI. xl., fig. 47). Near the
posterior margin there is a row of widely separated white.
i.e., unpigmented, and probably transparent in life, long,
finger-shaped papillae. These are absent on the first
elytron. On the anterior elytra there may be as many
as eight of these soft papillae ; on the majority I note
some 4-6, while on the posterior ones only three are present.
When viewed under a microscope the tip of each is seen
to be formed by a short conical cap of highly refringent
chitin ; at the base, too, is a ring of chitin, the greater part
of which is thin and evidently pliable, for many of them
are bent (PI. xl., fig. 48). There are also now seen a number
of short filamentous processes, on the surface near the
posterior margin, similar to the fringe, but of less length.
The fringe extends on to the hinder margin, but the filaments
are shorter and less crowded than on the external margin.

The areola is white, circular and subcentral. The elytra
are subcircular, with the usual anterior emargination.

The parapodia. — The neuropodiurn is produced into a
long rounded point, which bears at its apex a small digitiform
supra-acicular " ligule ' (PI. xl., fig. 51). On its upper
surface the neuropoclium carries the sessile no to podium.
The chaetse in both lobes are very numerous.

POLYCHJETA. — BENHAM. 199

The iiotopodial chaeta?., about 50 in number, are stouter
than the neuropodial, and are radiately arranged ; the
upper and anterior are shorter than the rest, but of the same
form ; they have a blunt point below which is a large number
of rows of minutely pectinated frills (PI. xl., fig. 49).

The neuropodial chaeta?, about 70 in number, are in 7 or
8 tiers, with 3-6 (or even 7) in each tier (PI. xl., fig. 50) ; the
smaller number in the upper and lower, the larger number
in the middle tiers. There are some 23-25 frills in the longer
upper chaetae. The lower chaetae have, as is usual, fewer
frills than the upper, and are altogether shorter.

There is no evidence of a subapical tooth (therefore
it would be placed in Malmgren's genus, Eunoa). Nor are
there any stout pectinations in the distal frill.

The dorsal cirri are covered with short cylindrical papillae.

The head is typically Harmothoid, but the peaks are
rather widely separated (PI. xl., fig. 46). The prostomium
is longer than broad, the anterior eyes are lateral at about
the middle of the side, and the posterior are far back, close
to the hinder margin.

The tentacles are finely ciliated, the subterminal swelling
feebly marked. The median tentacle is much stouter than
the laterals, and about twice their length.

The palps are longer than the median, as also are the
peristomial cirri. The tentacles, like the cirri, are trans-
parent.

Yellow chaeta?. are visible on the upper side of the base of
the peristomial cirri.

Remarks. — JVTIntosh described in the " Challenger " Report
a species, Eunoa abyssorutn, from the south of Australia, in
2000 fathoms, which in some respects seems to resemble the
present species. But as that individual had no elytra, and
as the chaeta? differ in some details, and the form was eyeless,
it seemed desirable to establish a new species for it.

In Eunoa opalina, from the Strait of Magellan, M'Intosh
describes and figures " soft papillae " on the elytra, but they
are short and broad. He refers also to the ' pellucid "
tentacles, and the widely separated peaks of the prostomium.

But his figures of the chaeta? show differences in that the
apex of the neuropodial is much more hooked and sharper
at the tip, and that of the notopodial is longer and sharper
than in the present.

200 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Loc. — Off Gabo Island, Victoria, 200 fathoms, with Polynoe
platycirrus, Physalidonotus laevis, and P. paucibranckiatus.

Genus SCALISETOSUS, M'Intosh.

SCALISETOSUS AUSTRALIENSIS, Sp. )WV.

(Plate xliv., figs. 114-117.)

A very poorly preserved fragment, deprived of its elytra,
most of the prostomial outgrowths, all its dorsal cirri, while
many of the parapodia are injured. It is pale in colour,
without any pigment. The 28 segments measure 10 mm.
in length, with a diameter of 2 mm. across the body, and
3-25 mm. over the parapodia.

The prostomium (PI. xliv., fig. 114) consists of a pair of
oval lobes separated by a wide deep groove ; the anterior
margin is well marked, and the tentacles spring from below
it. Only the bases of these remain, the median rises at a
rather higher level than the laterals, and the tentaculophores
appear to be very short. The two pairs of eyes have a pale
brown colour.

The elytrophores occur on the chsetigerous segments
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, etc. I cannot say where the change, if any,
occurs, owing to the damage in the hinder segments of the
fragment.

Both the elytrophores and cirrophores overhang the
parapodia much more than is usual in the family, indeed,
they overhang the notopodia, which is a small lobe (PI. xliv.,
fig. 115). The neuropodium has a long anterior pointed lip.
The ventral cirri are narrow filaments.

The chgetae are colourless ; they are alike in form in both
lobes, but those in the dorsal lobe are much shorter. These
chsetse are quite characteristic of the genus (PL xliv., fig. 116) ;
at the point where the shaft commences to bear the pectinated
frills, it is distinctly enlarged, and bears a conspicuous single
large frill, which under a low power looks like a tooth, but
fine grains of mud are present in the cup formed by it. The
remaining frills have the appearance of a series of small
teeth. The apex is free, and in the dorsals simple, but in
many of the ventral chsetse there is a minute subapical tooth.

The frills (PI. xliv., fig. 117) are very short and delicate, and
each has but little height, is very indistinct, and slopes down-
wards more abruptly than is usual in the family.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 201

The genus was formed by M'Intosh for a single specimen,
S. ceramensis,1 and Moore has found it off the coast
of Japan, his species, S. formosus* is, like mine and the
type species, very imperfect, and we know nothing of the
elytra in the genus. But the chsetae are so characteristic
that there is no mistaking it.

Loc, — Southern coast of Australia.

Family SIGALIONHhE.
Genus THALANESSA, Baird.
THALANESSA OCULATA, M'Intosh.
(Plate xlv., figs. 118-123.)

Thalanessa oculata, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885,
p. 142. Id., Treaclwell, Bull. U.S. Pish. Comm., xxiii.,
3, 1906, p. 1157.

A single individual was obtained which is smaller than the
type. It measures 30 mm. in length by 1 mm. across the
body, and 3 mm. over the parapodia. It is a good deal
shrunken, as if it had been placed in very strong spirit.
There are 61 segments, but it is apparently imperfect.

The account in the " Challenger " is so full that I need
not add any further data, but I have given figures in addition
to those already published, namely of a typical foot (PI. xlv.,
figs. 119, 120), and of the peculiar anterior feet, in which the
membranous expansion of the neuropod and digitate noto-
podial processes are so well developed. The parapodia are
remarkably long ; their appearance will be gathered from the
figures herewith (PL xlv., figs. 121-123).

M'Intosh's figure of the elytron is not quite typical ; it
represents an anterior one, while those in the greater part of
the body are not exactly " reniform," as he describes them.
Each has a deep excavation on the anterior margin, but the
outer or ventral boundary is much .longer than the upper, and
the scale covers almost four segments as shown (PI. xlv.,
fig. 118). It is attached to the elytrophore near its anterior
dorsal margin.

I find that the body-wall is splashed with pale nut-brown
markings on each side of the anterior segments, which are
visible through the transparent elytra, which themselves

1. M'Intosh— Chall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885, p. 103.

2. Moore— Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1903, p. 403.

202 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

have a patch of paler brown at the anterior lobe and along
the posterior margin ; otherwise they are colourless and
transparent.

M'Intosh states that the number of processes to the elytral
papillae are five or six ; I find that in the mid-body elytra
there may be as many as eight or nine in those papillae in the
middle of the series.

Remarks. — Haswell's T. microceras differs in a number of
features.

Loc. — South of St. Francis Island, South Australia, 35
fathoms.

Distribution. — Off East Moncceur Island, Bass Strait, 38
fathoms ; Tongatabu, 18 fathoms ; off Hawaii, 20-142
fathoms.

Genus SIGALION, Milne -Eduxirds.
SIG ALIGN, sp. incert.

A fragment without head or tail, consisting of about 50
segments of a diameter of 1.5 mm. across the body and 3 mm.
over the parapodia. Its length it is difficult to estimate, as
it is much curved. I am unwilling to name the present
fragment, but it does not agree precisely with any hitherto
recorded.

Loc. — Forty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
100 fathoms."

Sub-Family ACOETIX.E.
Genus EUPOMPE, Kinberg.

EUPOMPE AUSTRALIENSIS, M'lntosli.

Eupompe australiensis, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep.. Zool., xii.,
1885, p. 135.

A single specimen, imperfect posteriorly, was in an extra-
ordinary condition. It consists of the anterior end with 30
segments, but only the last five were visible, as the worm
was completely turned inside out, with the head forwards
and inwards. It was only on slitting open the mass of
apparent muscle, which I supposed to be the partly digested
body-wall, that I discovered the head and all its outgrowths
well preserved inside.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 203

The pharynx was attached to this mass by a long ligamen-
tous cord, formed apparently by the buccal cuticle drawn
out into a filament.

Loc. — Twenty miles east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 65
fathoms.

Distribution. — JVTIntosh records it from " Station 168 (appa-
ently off Cape York, Australia, and probably in Endeavour
Strait)."

Family NEPHTHYDID^E.i

Genus NEPHTHYS, Cuvier.

NEPHTHYS MACRURA, tichmarda.

(Plate xl., fig. 57.)

Nephthys macrura, Schmarda, Neue Wirbellose Thiere, i.»
2, 1861, p. 1)1. Id., Ehlers, Neuseeland. Annelid.,
1904, p. 14.

Nephthys virigini, Kinberg, Annulata nova, 1865, p. 239.

Nephthys trissophyllus, Grube, Monatsber. Akad. Wiss.
Berlin, 1877, p. 533. Id., M'Intosh, Chall. Rep.,
Zool., xii., 1885, p. 159.

Ehlers has been able by comparison with the types of the
three authors to establish the synonymy as above.

In spite of certain differences between the fragment
described below and the accounts of the authors above cited,
I identify it with this species, with which it agrees, hi the
characters of the foot especially, more closely than it does
with any other species in the literature available to me.

A cephalic fragment containing 30 chaetigerous segments
measures 15 mm. in length by 2.75 mm. across the body and
3.5 mm. over the parapodia.

The colour is a uniform pale pinkish brown.

The prostomium, which is without eyes, is shield shaped,
truncated in front, pointed behind ; its length is to its
breadth rather more than as 3 : 2 (PL xl., fig. 57). On
each side near the hinder end is a rounded " nuchal organ."
The anterior angles are produced into a pair of short tri-
angular tentacles, and from the under surface two others
arise of slightly greater size, directed outwards.

1. As the word " Nephthyidae," sometimes used for this family, is em-
ployed for a family of Alcyonarians, the above form seems desirable.

204 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The first segment carries a parapodium as usual, and the
ventral cirrus is rather larger than that on the following.

The anterior eight feet differ from the rest in lacking the
gill, which makes its appearance on the ninth.

The base of the foot is not quite so high as that of the body.

The pharynx was wholly withdrawn. On opening the body
it is seen to reach to the eighteenth segment. The organ was
slit open and mounted. The entrance to the pharynx is sur-
rounded by a circle of 20 rather long, closely set, bifurcated,
filamentous papillae, with a single shorter one in the dorsal
and ventral mid-line.

The buccal region presents 20-22 longitudinal rows of
similar but shorter papillae, which decrease in size towards
the mouth. These rows commence at alternating levels
(cf. M'Intosh, PI. xxvi., fig. 4), and those on the dorsal surface
commence immediately behind the pharyngeal papillae ; those
on the ventral a good deal further back. These rows
diminish in number towards the mouth, where only 14 can
be counted.

I cannot detect in the mounted preparation any evidence
of the bifurcation of these rows of papillae, as the mouth is
approached, such as are figured by M'liitosh and by Ehlers ;
though otherwise there is a considerable degree of agree-
ment. May it be that as the animal grows the length of
the buccal rows increase and then bifurcate ? It is difficult
in this retracted state to compare their arrangement with
that figured by M'Intosh of the everted organ.

About midway along the pharynx is the usual dorsal and
ventral brown conical denticle.

I have stated that there are differences between this form
and the accounts of the species. Not only so, but the figures
given by M'Intosh are not altogether in accord with those
of Ehlers.

In the first place the shape of the prostomium is longer in
the fragment before me than in most of the figures. In
M'Intosh's figures the proportion of length to breadth differs
according to the state of eversioii of the pharynx — explicable
perhaps by the fact that when fully averted the prostomium
is stretched laterally (cf. PI. xxvi., figs. 1, 3, 5).

In fig. 3 the length to breadth is about as 3 : 2 ; but in others
the two approximate, and in Ehlers' (PI. 1., fig. 10) the
breadth is the greater. Moreover, he does not show an angle
at the posterior end, which is distinct enough in MMntosh's

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 205

drawings ; and Grube in his diagnosis of AT. trissophyllus
writes : — " Lobus cephalicus. parvus, quadratus, segmento
buccali penitus impressus," which I read to mean that it
impinges " deeply " into the buccal segment.

Again, there are details about the lobes of the notopodium
in which exact agreement is lacking ; for instance, Ehlers
shows two smaller lobes below the large one ; only one is
figured in M'Intosh ; nor did I find a second in this indi-
vidual. At the same time Ehlers notes that in the abundant
material that he had the variations in details are so great
that if they had been found separately different species
might have been established.

The colour of the larger individuals is, according to Ehlers
and Grube, somewhat variegated, darker brown, either in
lines or spots or over the dorsum generally, on a paler ground.
But M'Intosh notes that amongst his material " the smaller
examples are pale," and presumably of uniform tint.

Ehlers was able to compare his specimens with Kinberg's
type, and to assure himself of the identification of Grube's
with Kinberg's species (1897) and later with Schmarda's
(1904).

If I am correct in this identification, the species is an
interesting example of an Australio-subantarctic distribution,
analogous with what Ehlers noted amongst the Polychaetes
of New Zealand and as I found amongst the Auckland
Islands worms.1

Loc. — Forty miles east-north-east of Babel Island, Bass
Strait, 1200 fathoms.

Distribution. — Kerguelen ; Fiiegia ; Magellan Strait ; New
Zealand.

Family AMPHINOMID^E.
Genus NOTOPYGOS, Grube.

NOTOPYGOS LABIATUS, M'Intosh.

Notopygos labiatus, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep., Zool., xii.,
1885, p. 19. Id., Treadwell, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm.,
xxiii., 3, 1906, p. 1164.

Of two individuals of a worm which I refer to this species,
one, well preserved, measures 39 mm. in length, so that it
is larger than the type ; it is widest about the middle, where

1. Benham — Report on Polychseta, Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand,
1909, p. 236.

206 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

it is 9 mm. across the ventral surface, whence it tapers fore
and aft. The width of the 4th chaetigerous is 4 mm., and
at the hinder end is 3 mm. It is pale in colour, with little
sign of pigmentation ; the caruncle is yellowish, and along
the line of union of the crest with the basal lamella is a line
of dark purple ; the same colour is present on the cirro-
phores of the dorsal cirri and at the base of the branchial
cirri.

The cha?ta% which are said to be pale green in the type,
are here colourless, glassy, though in a less well preserved
specimen they are pale yellow.

This suggested that perhaps I had Haswell's N. flavus1
before me, and the almost total absence of serrations on the
chaetse inclined me to that view, but he states that amongst
the dorsal bristles some are simple, while in the genus
typically all are forked. I find no simple ones.

Potts2 has recently tabulated the species according to the
presence or absence of serrations. In the present case I can
only find serrations on the ventral chsetse of the anterior
segments, and then they are so ill-defined that under a low
power (Leitz, Oc. 3, Obj. 3) they are not recognisable.
Under a higher combination, however, there are seen, as
M'lntosh figures them, as minute step-like interruptions in
the margin of the larger prong.

Except for this small difference, my specimens agree with
M'Intosh's so closely that I do not feel justified in making
a new one.

Locs. — Southern coast of South Australia.

North of Cape Borda, Kangaroo Island, 40 fathoms.

Distribution. — South of the Philippine Islands ; Hawaii.

Genus CHLOEIA, Savigny.
CHLOEIA INERMIS, Quatrefages.

Chloeia inermis, Quatrefages, Hist. Nat. des Annelides,
i., 1865, p. 389.

This worm I have taken on several occasions on the coasts
of New Zealand, though I do not think that it has been
recorded since Quatrefages wrote his brief account of it.
Its leading feature is the absence of bifurcation and of ser-
rations on the chaeta?.

1. Haswell— Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, III., 1879. ]». 343.

2. Potts — Trans. Linn. Soc.. Zool.. xii.. 1909. p. 358.

POLYCHyETA. — BENHAM. 207

The present specimen measures 42 mm., with a diameter
of 10 mm. at its broadest, which extends from about the
15th to 20th segments. It contains 29 segments.

The dorsal and ventral chaetae are alike, though the ventrals
are much finer, straight, thick-walled, hollow, with a simple
point. A few of the ventrals have a minute subapical tooth ;
or this may be represented by a '" step " where the tooth
has been woni away.

Loc. — Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

Distribution. — New Zealand.

Family ALCIOPID.E.
Genus HALODORA, Greeff.

HALODORA, SP. ?
(Plate xl., figs. 52-55 ; Plate xli., fig. 56.)

I have no recent literature on this group, so that I am un-
able to compare the present worm with those previously
described. I attribute them to the genus Halodora, Greeff,
as the head does not project beyond the eyes ; the introvert
is without denticles, and there is no " cirriform lip " to the
parapodia, while the chaetae are compound. It differs from
H. reynaudii, Audouin & Milne-Edwards, in various respects.

The material consists of two cephalic fragments, two tails
and an intermediate region of the body, belonging to one of
the two individuals ; the portions are much coiled, and mea-
surements are difficult to make with accuracy.1 But the
worm seems to be about 40 mm. in length, with a diameter
of 1 mm. or 2 mm. over the parapodia. It is widest an-
teriorly where the width is 2 mm. over the eyes, and tapers
slowly posteriorly.

The worm then is long and narrow, with large brown spots
on each segment laterally, just behind the base of the para-
podia ; the cephalic eye is of enormous size, and rich brown
in colour, the pupil faces downwards and outwards.

Each of the anterior segments is crossed by a narrow band
of brown pigment, of a width about equal to the antero-
postericr width of a parapodium, and on the first seven or
eight segments it is continued from side to side, linking the
lateral spots; but in the following segments it is broken in

1. One cephalic fragment has twenty-three segments and measures
12 mm. in length ; one head-less fragment has fifty segments followed by
twenty -four very small regenerated segments.

208 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

the middle, and further back the length of each moiety of
the band gets less and less, though they persist till nearly
the hinder end, and at the same time the depth of the brown
diminishes.

Neither caudal portion shows any anal cirri.

The whole worm shows evidence of much shrinkage due
to the strong alcohol in which it is preserved.

The head. — The prostomium is depressed between the
eyes, and is traversed by a convex ridge at its anterior end,
which appears to represent a median tentacle, for I can see
no definite appendage in the middle line (PI. xl., fig. 55).
The paired tentacles lie on the underside of the sloping
prostomium ; the upper pair is almost in line with the upper
surface of it ; each is very short, rounded, and nearly as
broad as it is long. The lower pair are directed downwards ;
each is cylindrical and about 3-4 times as long as the upper
one.

The peristomium. — The lower lip is a thin transverse fold
notched in its middle, and somewhat produced on either side.

There are three pairs of " peristomial " (or better, " meta-
stomial ") cirri. Behind the peristomium is a segment, which
bears on e'ach side an oval thickened whitish pad, whence arise
two cylindrical processes, one external and ventral, lying
against the under surface of the eye ; the other is much smaller,
and directed outwards. Behind these again is a faintly
marked segment, which bears a pair of larger and stouter
cirri, directed backwards.

The next segment bears the first distinct parapodium, but
I can detect no chaeta?. The dorsal lobe is produced into a
foliaceous process or dorsal cirrus, resting against the hind
wall of the eye ; the small ventral cirrus resembles the
following. This segment is banded with brown dorsally, and
has but a small lateral brown spot on each side.

The parapodium of the following segments is uniramous,
with pointed lips (PI. xl., figs. 52, 53) ; it bears dorsally and
ventrally a large foliaceous cirrus, the former the larger.
The aciculum is colourless, with a slightly curved tip ; the
chsetae are likewise colourless, of the usual delicacy : they are
jointed, with a long simple appendix (PI. xli., fig. 56).

Loc. — East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 209

Family STAURONEREID^.
Genus STAURONEREIS,! Verrill.
STAURONEREIS AUSTRALIEKSIS, M'Intosh.
(Plate xli., figs. 58-66.)

Staurocephalus australiensis, M'lntosh, Chall. Rep., Zool.,
xii., 1885, p. 232. Id., Treadwell, Bull. U.S. Fish.
Comm., xxiii., 3, 1906, p. 1173.

A single entire individual, which 1 believe belongs to this
species, which M'Intosh founded on a posterior fragment.

The worm is nearly white, and is probably pink in life.
It measures 75 mm. in length, with a diameter of 5 mm.
over the bocty, and 10 mm. over the parapodia. It con-
sists of a head with 145 chsetigerous segments, whose length
is about one-eighth the width of the body in the anterior hah*,
and one-fifth posteriorly. The body is slightly wider anter-
iorly, tapering slowly backwards. The dorsal surface is
convex ; the ventral flat with a median furrow.

The semicircular prostomium is of small size, its base
being about a quarter the width of the peristomium (PI.
xli., fig. 58).

The tentacles are moniliform, with 9 rings, terminally
rounded, the last ring being longer than the others. They
are relatively thick and short, scarcely reaching beyond the
lateral margin of the body ; or when pressed back, to the
posterior margin of the first chaetigerous.

There is a pair of downwardly directed palps, not monili-
form, but the apex is constricted from the rest ; the rest is
smooth, but a good deal contracted so that irregular furrows
cross it. It is only a little longer than the tentacle, but a
good deal stouter (PI. xli., fig. 60).

There are two pairs of eyes, the anterior pair, the larger, lie
at the side of the prostomium, in front of the base of the
tentacles ; the hinder pair behind the tentacles, nearer to
the midline. They lie below the edge of the peristomial
margin, which overlaps the prostomium (PI. xli., fig. 59).
When this hood is lifted backwards the transverse slit-
like openings to the nuchal organs are displayed, and in the
middle line is seen the small rounded connection between
the prostomium and peristomium.

1. Ehlers points out why this name must take the place of Grube'a
Staurocephalus and Anisoceras (Die Polychseten d. magellan u. chilen.
Strandes, 1901, p. 146).

' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The mouth is partially blocked up by a pair of large oral
convex oral pads, separated by a deep groove in the middle
line, as is figured by Ehlers in S. cerasina.

The peristomium is longer than the nuchal segment,
dorsally and laterally, but on the ventral surface it is shorter,
where it forms the lower lip, which, like the lateral lip, is
longitudinally furrowed.

The parapodia are long, nearly half the width of the body,
the dorsal cirri are longer, and as wide at the base as the
length of the segment (PI. xli., fig. 61) ; each is semi-
cylindrical, being flattened on the under and convex on the
upper surface, so as to appear " flattened " ; it is con-
stricted near its end into a knob-like appendix, which in
posterior segments is wider than the main stem, so that
the cirrus has the appearance of a penis.

The first parapodium is small, and is borne, of course, by
the segment following the nuchal. It has no dorsal cirrus ;
the second foot has a relatively short cirrus, but on following
segments the cirri are of practically uniform length, are
directed nearly horizontally outwards, lying alongside the
body like a fringe. The ventral cirrus is short, stumpy, and
as wide as the segment is long.

The body carries at its hinder end two pairs of subanal
cirri ; the upper is annulated with 9 rings, and is as long as
the dorsal cirrus of the penultimate segment ; the lower
cirri are short, smooth, and rather longer than the neigh-
bouring ventral cirri.

The parapodia, seen under a lens, present three rounded
lips, a larger posterior and two rather shorter anterior lips
(PI. xli.; fig. 62).

A figure is given of the tenth foot. Studied under a micro-
scope, the posterior lip is seen to be slightly notched. The
parapodium is supported by a single golden aciculum, and
a couple of very slender bristles enter the dorsal cirrus, and
reach almost to the subterminal constriction.

The chaetse are in two bundles ; the supra-acicular bundle
contains about 6 long curved capilliform bristles, with fine
serrations along its upper convex margin.

In the sub-acicular bundle there are about 30 chaetaa,
which are jointed, i.e., " gomphotrichs " ; the long appendix
has a subapical tooth of nearly the same size as the terminal
hook ; the wing is finely denticulated along the greater part
of its length (PI. xli., fig. 64).

POLYCH.-ETA. — BENHAM. 211

In the second foot the appendix of the gomphotrich is
narrower and nearly twice as long as that on the tenth foot.

The jaws. — The lower jaws have a curved anterior edge,
which is without denticulations. The pair are only feebly
connected together. The upper series consists of the usual
small black paragnaths, which are in three rows on each
side (PI. xli., fig. 65) :—(a) The dorsal-most or internal row
consists of about 30 relatively stout, prominent, curved
denticles, the anterior few of which have lateral serrations
on each side (PI. xli., figs. 66a, 66b) ; the shape of these
will be understood from the figures, (b) The outer row
contains about twice as many denticles of much smaller
size ; they are straight, denticulated along both edges,
and overlie the bases of the internal row ; each is supported
by a minute rectangular plate, the series of which are set
close together, and form the ventral or innermost limit of
the series (PI. xli., fig. 66a). (c) A third row is made up of
about 30 two-rooted pieces, with the divergent roots directed
outwards, which seem to lie over the second row (PI. xli.,
fig. 66d).

Remarks. — M'Intosh describes the species from a posterior
fragment measuring 11 mm. in length by 5mm. across its
anterior truncated end. He figures the foot (PI. xxxvi.,
fig. 6), which differs from the hinder foot of the present
specimen, only in the apparently smaller size of the terminal
knob of the dorsal cirrus. But he says that the cirri are
" flattened," and as the chaetae agree, and the worm was
obtained in the neighbourhood of East Moncoeur Island, the
probability is that we have the same worm before us.

It may be noted that Haswell1 described a species under
the name Staurocephalus australis, from Port Jackson, which,
amongst other features, differs from 8. australiensis in the
proportions of the head, for the prostomium has a base
nearly as wide as the peristomium, and narrowing forwards
between the tentacles. But, as no doubt the drawing is
made from a freshly killed specimen, while mine is from a
much contracted one, the difference may be discounted to
some extent. However, the neuropodial chaetae are stated
to have an appendix which is only " obscurely notched " at
its apex. As the species is littoral, I hesitate to identify it
with M'Intosh's.

Haswell notes that S. loveni, Kinberg, was also obtained
at Port Jackson in 12 fathoms, but it differs from S. australis
in that the palps are twice the length of the tentacles.

1. Haswell— Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, x., 1886, p. 747.

212 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

How far such proportions are useful systematic features
apart from other more permanent characters is doubtful.

Ehlers1 gives a fully illustrated account of S. cerasina,
which in regard to the head, at any rate, resembles this
species from Tasmania.

Loc. — -Storm Bay, Tasmania.
Distribution. — Hawaii (Treadwell) .

Family
Sub-Family EUNICIN^E.

Genus EUNICE, Cuvier.
EUNICE SICILIENSIS, Grube.

Eunice siciliensis, Grube, Actinien, Echinodermen, u.
Wurmer, 1840, p. 83. Id., Ehlers, Die Borsten-
wiirmer, 1864-68, p. 353.

Eunice adriatica, Schmarda, Neue Wirbellose Thiere, i., 2,
1861, p. 124.

Eunice tcenia, Claparede, Glan. Zool. parmi les Annelides,
1864, p. 120.

Eunice valida, Gravier, Nouv. Arch. Museum Paris,
1900, p. 264 (fide Grassland, Proc. Zool. Soc., i., 1904,
p. 323).

This widely distributed species is represented by three
fragments, one of which bears a head with 173 chsetigerous
segments, measuring 120 mm. by 8 mm. ; the segments are
very short, being about one-ninth of the diameter of the
body.

The second fragment has neither head nor anus ; consists
of 180 segments measuring 90 mm. ; the segments are still
shorter, only about l-18th of the diameter.

The third fragment contains 57 segments wifeh a length of
50 mm.

In all details these agree with the accounts of the species,
though it is larger than those that I have studied from the
Kermadec Islands.

1. Ehlers — Die Polychseten d. magellan. u. chilen. Strandes, 1901,
p. 147.

POLYCII^TA. — BENHAM. 213

From a second locality comes a dark green, ill-preserved
female worm in eight fragments, the total length of which
amounts to 1160 mm. without a head or tail, and the breadth
is from 3.5 to 5 mm.

Locs. — Off Gabo Island, 200 fathoms.
South-west of Gabo Island, 75 fathoms.

Distribution. — Mediterranean ; Red Sea ; Indian Ocean ;
Pacific Ocean.

EUNICE PYCNOBRANCHIATA, M'Intosh.
(Plate xlii., figs. 79, 80.)

Eunice pycnobranchiata, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep., Zool., xii.,
1885, p. 294.

The twelve specimens obtained from various stations show,
as M'Intosh indicated, a certain amount of variation in those
features which are used for specific characterisation, and it
may be as well to give a general account of the species, filling
up a few of the lacunae in the original description.

The colour of the preserved specimens is either a rich
reddish or coppery brown with iridescence, or a paler flesh
tint or even grey. In three individuals the pale ground
colour is marked by irregular and irregularly distributed
splotches of red, usually transversely disposed anteriorly, but
becoming smaller and more numerous and more scattered in
the mid-body and posterior segments.

In some cases the fourth chaetigerous and in others the
second is quite pale, probably white in life ; while in the
majority this pale segment is not present.

The size varies from 200 mm. by 8 mm. in a very soft
specimen to 110mm. by 5.5mm. in hardened specimens for
the same approximate number of segments, 146-150 ; while,
of course, smaller specimens occur with fewer segments.

Taking for description a deep coppery brown individual,
rather soft, measuring 190 mm. by 8 mm. across the body,
the peristomium is 6 mm. and the breadth over the parapodia
is 10 mm. There are 147 segments. The widest region is a
short distance behind the peristoraium, thence it tapers very
slowly to the hinder end.

The fourth chaetigerous is pale.

The tentacles are moniliform, rather deeply notched, and
the furrows indicated by a pale brown line; even in those
specimens in which, owing to preservation, the moniliform

214 * ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

character is not evident, the brown rings exist. The median
tentacle has, in this case, 18 swellings, the admedian 16, and
the lateral 8, and the length of the three has the same pro-
portion ; but in one other I noted 13, 10, and 8 respectively.
It is likely that the tips are fragile, so that this detail and
the relative lengths in regard to the number of segments,
such as it is sometimes the custom to give for species of
Eunice, has little importance, as Grassland has already re-
marked.

The palp is divided horizontally into a smaller upper lobe
and a larger lower lobe.

The peristomium is as long as the nuchal and the first two
chsetigerous segments together ; its diameter is 6 mm. and
is much more than its length. The upper lateral edge of the
lower lip is, as M'Intosh stated and figured, prominent and
visible from above as it is separated from the side of the
peristomium by a deeper notch than is visual in the genus
(PI. xlii., fig. 80).

The nuchal cirri are indistinctly moniliform, having about
eight rings ; generally they do not quite reach the anterior
margin of the peristomium.

There is a pair of smooth subanal cirri equalling in length
the last 10 segments.

The dorsal cirri are not annulated, but are irregularly
constricted, especially in the anterior feet, in which they
are of larger size than further back. Under a lens they have
the appearance of annulation, but microscopic study shows
that this is merely a result of muscular constriction ; while
it may be noted, by a comparison of successive cirri or of
cirri on opposite sides of the body in the same segment, that
these constrictions are quite irregular in their spacing and
in their number. In the figure illustrating M'Intosh's
account (PI. xxxix., fig. 13) the cirri are shown annulated, but
in that of the foot (figs. 14, 15) these annuli are not repre-
sented.

The gills in this individual commence on the fifth chsDti-
gerous segment.1

In the fifth there is but one filament, that is the axis of the
future gill ; on the seventh, there are four filaments ; the
maximum number is reached on the 10th, with six filaments ;
the lowest being here longer than the dorsal cirrus. This

1. I use the word "segment" always as meaning a "chsetigerous
segment," and exclude from the enumeration of segments the two first
segments, the peritftomial and nuchal.

POLYCH.-ETA. — BENHAM. 215

niaxiinuin is retained till the 26th segment ; for the next 12
segments present five filaments ; the number then sinks to
4 (segments 39-70), to 3 (in segments 71-95), after which the
number decreases rapidly, and only the last three or four
segments are without gills.

The gill as a whole has a very characteristic appearance,
indicated by the specific name — " thick-gilled " (PI. xlii.,
fig. 79) ; the gill filaments, whether few or many, are coarse,
arise from the axis close together, and even in some cases
touching one another, and under a low-powered dissecting
lens the gill has some resemblance to a folded or wrinkled
membrane.

There is a considerable range of variation in detail, to
which I refer later, but the above is generally typical, though
the maximum number of filaments may reach 8 or even 10 in
some individuals.

The gill may be described as " small," whether the number
of filaments be few or many ; they only reach a short
distance up the much arched side of the body even when
placed upright against it. Usually they are not so directed
in these specimens ; they are ranged alongside the body,
usually with the free ends forwards.

The parapodia do not present any special features ; they
are supported by two, or sometimes three, black acicula, and
on the 30th segment or thereabouts (for this point varies) an
inferior black bidentate acicular chaeta appears, which is of
course continued to the end of the body. Under the micro-
scope this is seen to be a dark brown with golden margins,
though under a dissecting lens it is black and very con-
spicuous. The chaetse are illustrated by M'Intosh, and need
no further description.

The jaws are white below, the lower always, the upper
jawlets sometimes, but the denticulations are always white
tipped. On the right side the large dental plate (II) has six
teeth, of which the proximal and the distal are smaller than
their neighbours. Plate IV is hoodlike, with nine or ten
rounded denticulations ; plate V has a singled tooth. On the
left side, II has five teeth, IV is curved, has five, V has one,
and the unpaired plate (III) has seven teeth.

The jaws, as is now well known, vary within limits as to
the precise number of denticulations of the plates, and
M'Intosh gives instances.

216 'ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Remarks. — I have specimens from the coast arid seas round
New Zealand which belong to this species, though those which
I sent to Ehlers for identification were named by him as E.
antennata, Savigny. Those, however, which I have as
duplicates agree precisely with these Australian forms, and
if Grassland's analysis of Savigny's species be accurate,
Ehlers' identification must be incorrect. In the first place
Crossland1 states that the acicula and tridentate acicular
chsetse are not black but yellow, that the gills are " large,"
and that they are figured as nearly meeting across the
back ; that in the posterior segments, after a decrease in
the number of gill filaments, which are quite slender, there is
an increase before dying out at or near the hinder end.
Ehlers2 gives an account of a worm under the name E.
antennata from Chilian shores (p. 126) which does not agree
wholly with Grassland's account, for the acicula are black,
and Ehlers says nothing about the increase in the posterior
gills. Moreover, in E. antennata, Savigny, not only are the
tentacles moniliform, but the dorsal cirr also, anteriorly
multiannulate, posteriorly triannulate. At the same time
the Australian species has the same lower lip as Crossland
figures for E. antennata, and it appears that the two are
pretty nearly allied.

Locs. — East of Maria Island, Tasmania, 78 fathoms.

Near Storm Bay, Tasmania.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Off Babel Island, Bass Strait, 50-80 fathoms.

North-east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 100-170 fathoms.

Fifteen miles north-west of Cape Jervis, South Australia,
17 fathoms.

Between Port Stephens and Newcastle, New South Wales.

Distribution. — New Zealand (Foveaux Strait ; Massacre
Bay, on west coast) ; Pegasus Bay, on east coast.

Variations. — The gills vary (a) as to the point of com-
mencement, and (b) as to the maximum number of filaments.
Out of the twelve anterior ends I find that in six they com-
mence on the sixth chaetigerous segment, in four on the fifth,
while in two they do not begin till the seventh, and then as
quite small stout filaments. The largest number of filaments
usually occurs on about the eighth to the thirtieth segments ;
and it is only to the last two individuals in the list that this

1. Crossland— Proc. Zool. Soc,, i., 1904, p. 316.

2. Ehlers — Die Polychceten des Magell. u. Chilen. Strandes, 1901, p. 126.

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 217

area of maximum development is more extensive, reaching
to the seventieth. It may be noted that both these individuals
are " spotted " with red, and are from the same locality ;
but No. 12 occurs with another more normal in colouration,
and normal so far as the gills are concerned (No. 6). The
maximum number of filaments in the fore body is usually
five or six, but in one, otherwise normal (No. 3), it rises to
seven, and even here and there to nine, while in another
instance (No. 4) it is ten or occasionally eleven. On the other
hand, in No. 5 the number of filaments is as low as two.

In all but one specimen, and that one of the " abnormals,"
the number of filaments decreases slowly and fairly regularly
towards the hinder end, and the gill is continued to the
extremity or is only absent on the last half-dozen segments,
which are, of course, very small. In the abnormal individual
(No. 11) the gill after decreasing, increases near the hinder
end to seven filaments, and further back to eight before
undergoing the usual terminal decrease.

The two " abnormals " differ then not only in the colour-
ation but also in some matters concerning the gill ; yet an
examination of one of them (No. 12) the jaws are precisely
like that which I studied in detail (No. 1), and in all other
respects these two agree with the rest. It appears to be
merely a local variation.

The form of the gill in all these twelve is very uniform :
the filaments broad, closely set, nearly or quite touching one
another, or in some case overlapping. When fully developed
the lower filaments are longer than the dorsal cirrus ; one
or more of them may bifurcate ; not infrequently the axis
projects but slightly beyond the uppermost filament, as if
it were capable of budding off additional filaments at this
point. In one individual the gill is much smaller than usual
(No. 10) and the filaments more delicate and further apart.

Other variations, such as length, depend on the state of
preservation. The colour in some is copper. The white
" collar," too, is remarkably sporadic ; it might at first sight
seem rather a characteristic feature, but such a " collar '
appears as a variation in other species such as E. aphroditois.
M'Intosh notes that in his specimens a " collar " exists on
segment II in those from Twofold Bay, while it is absent
in the Bass Strait specimens.

The segment in which the acicular chseta first occurs is
also subject to variation, though usually somewhere about
the thirtieth, it may occur either before or after that segment.
These variations are tabulated below.

218

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

VARIATION IN GILLS IN E. pycnobranchiata.

Num-
ber of
worm.

Commence
in
segment.

Maximum
No. of
filaments
fore body.

Extent of maximum
No. of filaments.

No. of

filaments
at about 80th
segment.

Total
number of
segments.

1

V.

6

VIII. to XXVI.

3

140

2

V.

4

VII. to XXIII.

2

147

3

V.

7 (8.9)

VIII. to XXVI.

4 (on last)

68 (imp.)

4

V.

5 (6)

VIII. to XXV.

2 (on last)

70 (imp.)

5

VI.

2

VI. to XXXVI.

1 (on LXX)

78

fi

VI.

9(10.11)

XII. to XXVIII.

4

115

7

VI.

5

VIII. to XXX.

3 (on last)

71 (imp.)

8

VI.

4

VIII. to XXVII.

1

115 (imp.)

9

VI.

5

VIII. to XXI.

45 (imp.)

10

VI.

4

VII. to XXX.

2(3)

100

11

VII.

6

XVI. to LXX. l

5

150 2

12

VII.

4

X. to LXX.

3

145

Numbers in brackets indicate that in their area of maximum develop-
ment these numbers occur on occasional segments irregularly : (imp.)
indicates that the worm is incomplete posteriorly.

VARIATIONS IN OTHER ORGANS IN E. pycnobranchiata.

Num-
ber of

Dimensions
in mm.

State of
preser-

Number
of

Colour.

White

seg-

Segment at which
acic. ch.

worm.

vation.

segments.

ment.

appears.

1

190x8

s

14(i

reddish brown

IV.

3
XXX. & XXXII.

2

110x5.5

h

147

^ ^

IV.

XXIX. 3

3

80x8

h

68 (imp.)

,,

IV.

XXXII. & XXXIV.

4

75x5

s

70 (imp.)

,,

IV.

XXX.

5

38x3

s

78

pale r. br.

II.

XXII.

6

180x8

s

115

»»

0

XXIX.

7

60x5

h

71 (imp.)

»9

II.

XXIX.

8

110x6

h

115 (imp.)

pale grey

0

XXXI.

9

30x4

h

45 (imp.)

pale r. br.

0

XXVII.

10

70x4

h

100

nearly white

0

XXVII.

11

190x9

s

150

v. pale with

0

XXX.

red splotches

12

200x8

s

145

9V

0

XXXIV.

h = hard, well preserved. s = soft, ill preserved.

imp. = incomplete posteriorly.

Nos. 1-5, Maria Island ; 6, 12, Babel Island ; 7, Cape Jervis ; 8, Stores
Bay; 9, Circular Head; 10, New South Wales coast; 11, north-east
Babel Island.

1. The number of gill filaments is occasionally only five.

2. The number of gill filaments rises to seven on segment xc., it is eight
at c ; and then decreases to five at cxxx, and gradually dies out.

3. On the two sides.

POLYCH.ETA. BENHAM. 219

EUNICE BASSENSIS, M'lnlosli.
(Plate xli., figs. 67-74 ; Plate xlii., figs. 75-78.)

Eunice bassensis, iVTIntosh, Chall. Rep., Zool, xii., 1885,
p. 298.

It is with some hesitation that I attribute the material to
this species, for JVTIntosh's account is necessarily brief and
imperfect, as he had only a single fragment of the posterior
end of a worm upon which to found the characters of the
species, which are thus drawn only from the structure of the
foot and chsetse. But as that fragment was obtained from
near the localities in which the " Endeavour " material was
collected, and as these agree well with the few features men-
tioned by him, it seems probable that we are dealing with
his species.

My material consists of one entire individual, eight cephalic
fragments of less or greater length, two anal fragments, and
three pieces from somewhere near the middle of the worm.

The entire individual was studied.

It is a fairly well preserved, though somewhat contracted,
female, filled with eggs ; it measures 140 mm. in length, with
a diameter of 5 mm. over the body, and a height of 5 mm.
It contains 112 segments in addition to the "head."

Its colour is dark brown, highly iridescent, but the majority
of the specimens are quite a pale grey.1

The prostomium has the usual ventral median furrow, and
each lobe is traversed by an obliquely horizontal furrow
separating a smaller upper from a larger lower lobe.

The tentacles are very definitely annulated, with deeply
pigmented grooves between the swellings (PL xli., fig. 68).
The proximal swellings are shorter and less rounded than
the distal, due, perhaps, to differences of contraction. The
median tentacle has 17+n swellings ; it is iincomplete here,
the admedians 21 and the laterals 14, in addition, in each
case, to the cylindrical cirrophore.

In another individual the numbers are 27, 21, and 12, and
in a third 25, 20, and 15.

1. The dark tint ot this individual may he due to it having been pre-
served in the same tube as some other organism from which the pigment
has been dissolved and stained the worm ; for I have had specimens of
pale Echinids, which have been preserved with Comatulas, and have be-
come stained dark brown.

220 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The peristomium and nuchal segment together are broader
than their length, which is about equal to 2^ chsetigerous
segments.

The peristomium is slightly excavated on the dorsal sur-
face ; the lower lip is not so deeply notched as it is in E.
pycnobranchiata, and its upper margin is not visible from
above (PI. xli., fig. 67).

The nuchal cirri present 8 annulations ; they fail to reach
the anterior margin of the peristomium by a space about
equal to the length of the nuchal segment.

The dorsal cirri are also distinctly moniliform, and re-
latively stout. Anteriorly, there are four dilations, the
terminal being elongated, and under a dissecting lens may
appear to be constricted, but in a preparation this is seen
to be only a, " bend," not really a constriction.

As in the tentacles, the furrows are pigmented.

After about the 6th segment, and throughout the rest
of the body, only three dilations exist, but there appears
to be some variation in this, for in some individuals, the feet
of which were mounted, four appear (PI. xli., fig. 70). The
anterior dorsal cirri are particularly stout.

The ventral cirri of about the first half dozen feet are
short, rounded sub-spherical lobes ; further back this lobe
bears a short stout bluntly rounded conical appendage,
while over the greater part of the body the latter elongates
and the basal lobe decreases.

The anal cirri, also moniliform, have a length equal to
the last 10-12 segments.

The gills commence on the 6th chsetigerous segment (in
this and all the anterior ends available), and are continuoxis
to the posterior end of the animal. In this individual the
first gill has 4 filaments — the maximum is 10 — and this
number occurs over the segments 8-9, after which there is
a gradual and fairly regular decrease, with here and there
an occasional addition of one filament. Thus on segments
40-60 there are 4 filaments ; on 61 only 3 ; on 90 the number
is again 4, but on segment 100 the number once more scales to
3, and then to 2, and to 1 at the last few segments.

This cannot be regarded as a " posterior enlargement '
of gills, such as occurs in one or two other species (see below).

As to the relation between the size of the gill, even at its
maximum stage of development, one cannot regard them as

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 221

" large " ; they only reach about half way up the side of the
body towards the middle line, even when held vertically
up by forceps (PI. xli., fig. 69).

The filaments are rather thick, springing close together in
this and other individuals, but in others they are relatively
more delicate (cf PI. xli., fig. 70 ; PI. xlii., fig. 78).

The gill seems to be much contracted, and the lower fila-
ments do not reach to the end of the dorsal cirrus, but in
other specimens in which they are better preserved, the
lower gill filaments are longer than the dorsal cirrus.

The chaetse present no special peculiarities. I find the
following numbers, in addition to the 4 or 5 minute "combs"
in the uppermost part of the bundle, there are 6 or 7 capilii-
forms without a flange, somewhat flattened and sword-
shaped ; then two golden acicula, with occasionally a third
one, below which are 12 " gomphotrichs "' (i.e., jointed or
compound chaetse), which decrease in number in the pos-
terior feet (PI. xli., fig. 71). After about the thirty-sixth
foot a subchsetal spine or acicular-chsetae appears.

The subchsetal spine is golden, bidentate in the early
segments, but tridentate in most of the feet (PL xli., figs.

72-74).

Owing to the golden colour of the spine it is difficult to
detect on the worm under a dissecting lens, and thus difficult
to state quite definitely the segment on Avhich it occurs (but
as this may vary, see above for E. pycnobrancliiata] . In this
specimen it is not present on the thirty-sixth, but is on the
fortieth segment ; in another individual I find it in the
thirty-sixth ; in a trird in the thirty-eighth.

The jaws. — The lower jaws have large thick white plates
at the distal end, which are irregularly undulating at the
free edge, so as to form three projections of irregular size
(PI. xlii., fig. 77).

The upper jaws are dark brown, but in smaller specimens
a paler brown ; the tip of the "forceps," and of the various
denticulations of the other sclerites, are white and calcified.

The forceps (zange) are slender, with the tip curved
upwards (PI. xlii., fig. 76). The artknilatioii between forceps
and its carrier is marked by a dark brown band, which is
very conspicuous when the jaws are of the paler tint.

The left dental plate (jawlets of the second parr) (II.), has
4 teeth, the distal largets, the others decreasing proximally
(PI. xlii., fig. 75).

222

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The left unpaired (III.) has 6 teeth, the two proximal are
quite small and less pointed than the rest. This plate lies
alongside the large dental plate, as in some other species.

The fourth left is hoodlike, with 5 teeth ; the base of the
hood is dark brown.

The fifth is triangular, with a single recurved white tooth.

On the right side, the dental plate (II.) has 5 teeth, de-
creasing in size from the most anterior ; the hoodlike fourth
has 8 or 9 teeth, of which the one at each end of the series
is very little developed; the fifth plate is like that on the
left side. All the teeth are tipped with white.

In four individuals examined I find that these numbers are
constant.

SOME COMPARATIVE MEASUREMENTS OF E. ba^ensis.
(Cephalic fragments.)

Number of Dimensions

Maximum No.

segments. in nun.

of gill filaments.

1

84

60x5

4

2

66

21x2

4

3

65

70x5

10

4

46

40x4

6

5

110

90x4

12

6

70 60 X 4

8(9)

7

45

7(8)

Nos. 1-4, 6, 7. — East coast Flinders Island ; 5, Entrance to Oyster Bay.

Remarks. — Certain differences exist between my specimens
and the fragmentary type. The foot figured by M'Intosh
(PI. xxxix., fig. 16), shows no prominent chsetophoral sac. the
cheetse seem to spring from the general contour of the body.
Surely this must be an error of the artist, as it is totally unlike
the general character of an Eunicid parapodium. .But the
most noticeable difference is in the size of the gill, which has
nine filaments. Unfortunately M'Intosh gives us no idea
of the size of the worm, nor does he say whether the foot
figured came from the anterior end of the fragment or not.
His fragment was two inches in length, and if one examines
the present material at this distance from the anus, the gill
has but six filaments. We must then presume that his
specimen was portion of a larger worm.

At any rate, none of the other species obtained from this
neighbourhood or elsewhere agrees so closely with ours.

JPOLYCHJETA. BENHAM. 223

In a recent article Grassland (1904) has tentatively sug-
gested that E. bassensis is a synonym of E. antennata, Savigny
(1820). But if my identification be correct, E. bassensis
differs from that species as described and figured by the
authors, Savigny, Gravier (1900), and Grassland, in the fol-
lowing features :—

(1) E. antennata appears to be a small species. Savigny1
gives its length as 3 inches. Grassland states that those
from Zanzibar are 100 by 5 mm. (including the feet), those
from the Maldives are 80 x 4 mm., and less.

E. jlaccida, Grube,2 which Grassland identifies with this,
was fragmentary ; the 67 segments measure 35 x 2 mm ;
while Grube's variety gracilis measured 78 x 2.5 mm. for a
worm with 85 segments. Compare this with our first indi-
vidual, where the 84 segments measure 60 by 5 mm. In
other words, this Tasmanian species is evidently a larger
worm .

(2) Grassland3, in his drawing of the head (PL xxii., fig. 1)
from above, shows that the upper edge of the lower lip is
prominent, and is visible from above, as in E. pycnobranchiata,
while there is no excavation of the anterior margin of the
peristomium.

(3) The gills are shown as nearly meeting dorsally, whicn
is far from being the case in any of our individuals.

(4) The form of the ventral cirrus, as given by him, is
represented (text fig. 60, p. 317) in the 10th segment as long
and narrow, without the swollen base which is so evident in
ours, and it projects further beyond the lip of the chsetophoral
sac than in ours.

(5) The dorsal cirrus is apparently much more slender.

(6) The nuchal cirrus is shorter.

(7) According to Grassland's figure of the acicular chseta
the main tooth forms nearly a right angle with the axis, and
it may be noted that Gravier's4 figure of E. flaccida (p. 256)
is less than a right angle, whereas in the present species this
angle is much more open.

(8) The jaws of E. antennata show a considerable range of
variation ; and if I understand Grassland's formulae on p. 316
"6 — 7 : 10 + 9 — 8" to mean "left dental plato (FT.) h;is six

1. Savigny — System. Annelides, 1820, p. 50, pi. v., fig. 1.

2. Grube — Annel. cl. rothen Meeres, Monatsber. k. preuss. Akacl. Berlin,
1889, p. 491 (separate copy, p. 11).

3. Crossland— Proc. Zool. Soc., 1904, I., p. 312.

4. Glravier — Nouv. Arch. MUR. Paris, 1900, p. 255.

224 ' ENDEAVOUR '" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

teeth, the right seven, the unpaired (III) has ten, the left anterior
(IV) nine, and the right eight — then none of his variations of
the dental plate have so few teeth as 4-5, which appears to
be constant in the present species, and though the anterior
plate (IV) varies, none of them agree with ours, which show
no variation amongst themselves.

Some of these differences may be due to age or to the
mode of preservation, but others, such as the chaeta and the
jaws, seem diagnostic, and the accumulation of the .small
differences as well as the geographical distribution justifies
one in making a new species. At the same time it is clearly
allied closely to Savigny's species from the Red Sea and the
Indian Ocean.

E. antennata is a Red Sea and Indian Ocean species, and
though Ehlers1 records a worm under this name from the
Chilian coast, he states that it has black acicular
chsetse instead of the golden that characterises E. antennata,
as Savigny noted in his account ; and it presents one or two
other differences, as in the jaws. The same author2 has also
recorded this species from the New Zealand coasts (1907,
p. 12), but my material from which I sent him the specimen
belongs to E. pycnobranchiata.

Grassland's ground for including Australia in the distri-
bution of E. antennata rests on his examination of the
specimen labelled by Grube himself as " E. ^aitcibranchiata,"
which was obtained from this region. He gives no reference
to the paper in which Grube describes a species under this
name. Grube3 himself named a species ' paucibranchis ':
but in a later article4 identifies this with E. australis, Quatre-
fages6 (which belongs to a different group of the genus in
which the gills are limited to a few segments in the anterior
region of the body).

Now one of the characters of Savigny's species is said by
Crossland to be the increase in size of the gill and in the
number of its filaments behind the middle of the body imme-
diately previous to the ultimate gradual decrease6. As I
have stated, I find no evidence in my material for this

1. Ehlers — Die Polvchaeten d. Magel!. u. chilen. Strandes, 1901, p. 126.

2. Ehlers — Neuseelaml. Annel., 1907, p. 12.

3. Grube— Sohless. gesellsch., 1866, p. 64.

4. Grube — Mittheil. ub. d. Tarn. d. Euniceen — Schless. gesellsch., 1877,
p. 20.

5. Quatrefages- — Hist. Nat. d. Annel., p. 321.

6. Savigny does not show this phenomenon in his figure, nor mention
it in the text, though he says that the gills may l>e absent in 20-30 last
segments.

POLYCH^ETA. — BBNHAM. 225

increase in size. It is true that there may be an increase in
number of filaments by one over a variable and inconstant
region of the body, but such increase seems to me to be
a mere variation, and one knows it to occur in several species
in which the gills extend over a long portion of the worm.

Locs — East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Entrance to Oyster Bay, Tasmania.

Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 20-40 fathoms.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

Breaksea Island, Port Davy, Tasmania.

North of Cape Borda, Kangaroo Island, 40 fathoms.

Sub-Family ONUPHIDIN.E.
Genus HYALINOECIA, Malmgren.
HYALINOECIA TUBICOLA, Muller.
Nereis tubicola, Muller, Prodromus Zool. Dan., 1766, p. 217.

Onuphis tubicola, Audouin & Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sci.
Nat., xxviii., 1833, p. 225. Id., Ehlers, Die Borsten-
wiirmer, 1864-68, p. 297 (with synonymy).

Northia tubicola, Johnston, Cat. Brit. Mus., 1865, p. 136.

Hyalinoecia tubicola, M'Intosh, Chall. Rep., Zool., xii.,
1885, p. 335.

Three individuals in their transparent tubes, two of which
measure 108 mm. by 5 mm. at the broader end and 4 mm.
at the other : the third is rather shorter.

The worm removed from the tube is 50 mm. in length ; it
consists of a head with 64 cheetigerous segments ; another
is 75 mm. in length ; the third is 55 mm. In this last the
tentacles were stretched to the fullest, so were easily
measured.

I suspected that the worm would be H. benthaliana,
M'Intosh1, and although his account is not very full and is in
some respects unsatisfactory — for instance, he gives no
measurements — after comparing the worms with the various
accounts of the European species, I have no doubt that it is

1. M'Intosh— Chall. Rep., Zool., xii., 1885, p. 339.

226 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

the same. It is already known to be very widely distributed,
and the details given for H. beiU/ialiana seem to me scarcely
sufficient to distinguish it from Muller's species.

It appears from the various accounts that the relative
lengths of the three middle tentacles is subject to variation.
By some authors they are described or shown as approximately
equal, while others give a greater length for the median, as,
for example, Ehlers1. Again, the size of the worm, the
position of the first gill, the number of denticulations on the
jaw plates, show a fair range of variability.

In the present case it may be as well to record the facts.
The filamentous gill commences on the 2?nd chsotigemus
segment. The jaw plates of the second pair (II) on the right
side bear 11, on the left 12 denticulations ; IV have 8 and 9
or 10 respectively ; the unpaired one has 13.

The present worms agree more closely with the typical
form as described by M'Intosh and St. Joseph2 than with
any of the " varieties ' described by the former author ;
especially in the denticulations of the jaw plates as well as in
the segment on which the gills commence.

Loc. — Off Babel Island, Bass Strait, 50-80 fathoms.

Distribution. — The typical form and its " varieties " have
been obtained in the European seas ; in the Atlantic ; from
the Pacific ; on the coast of Japan (Moore)3 and of California
(Moore)4 ; from New Zealand (Ehlers)5 ; from Torres Strait
(M'Intosh). I have no literature dealing in detail with other
regions.

It has already been suggested by \\ illey6 that H. cami-
guina, Grube7, from the i'hilippines, Ceylon and the Indian
Ocean (Crossland)8 is merely " a local form " of the European
species, and it seems not unlikely that H. brevicirris, Grube,9
from Moreton Bay on the east coast of Australia is al;-o a
variety of this species, for the account only differs in one
or two features of proportions of parts. If these two be
included, then the species may be said to be distributed
everywhere outside the Arctic and Antarctic seas.

1. Ehler.-- — Die Borstemviirmer. ISfH-Of-', p. 29 T.

•2. St. Joseph— Am. Sci. Nat., (8), v., 1898, p. 241.

3. Mooru — Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1903, p. 444.

4. Moore— Loc. cit., 1911, p. 280.

5. Elilf-rs — Neusecland. Annelid., 190,. p. IT).

6. Willey — Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, pt. iv., Suppl. Rep., xxx.,
Polychseta, 1905', p. 274.

7. Grube — Anmilata Seinpeiiana, 1878, p. 42.

8. Crossland— Proc. Zool. Soc., 1904, p. 281.

9. Grube — Monatsber. Akad. Wiss. IVilin, 1877, p. 528.

POLYCHJETA. BENHAM. 227

Family LUMBRICONEREID.K.
Genus LUMBRICONEREIS, Blainvillt .

LUMBRICONEREIS SPHAEROCEI'HALA, Sckmarda.

Notocirrus sphaerocephala, Sehmarda, Xeue \Yirbellose
Thiere, I., 2, 1861, p. 11(5.

Lumljriconereis sphaerocephala, Ehlers. Abhancll. Gesell.
Wiss. Gottingen. Neuseel. Annal.. 1904, p. 33.

A single imperfect specimen of small size and. dark coppery
brown in colour, with a high iridescence, appears to belong
to this species. The prostomium is, however, rather longer
than broad, and, therefore, less nearly spherical than in
Ehler's description ; this may be a matter of preservation.
I have preparations of this species, which is common on
New Zealand coasts, and it agrees well with them.

Loc. — East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, about 70 fathoms.
Distribution. — New Zealand ; Chatham Islands.

LUMBRICONEREIS GULiELMi,1 sp. nov.
(Plate xlii., figs. 81-88; Plate xliii., figs. 89-1)4.)

Two imperfect individuals of laige size, one consisting of
the head and 58 chaetigerous segments, measures 70 mm. in
length, with a diameter of 7 mm. It is narrower anteriorly
where it is only 3 mm. across the peristomium The other
specimen consists of 133 :-egments and the head, and has a
length of !)9 mm. There is little evidence of a posterior
taperivg, for at its truncated end it still measures 6mm. in
width.

The worm is nearly cylindrical, its height being 6-7 mm.
The segments are short as usual, being about l-6th to l-7th
of the diameter of the body.

The colour is coppery brown, with a bright green iridescence
and the chaetse are glistening brown.

The prostomium (PI. xlii., figs. 81, 82) is a rounded cone
as broad as its length, with no conspicuous eyes, but in
their place a curved transverse row of 6-8 small black spots
close together on each side of the base, and extending
laterally so as to be visible from the side. In the second
individual, which is in a better state of preservation, these
pigment spots are less distinct ; they form a row right across
the base of the prostomium, and are not confined to the sides.

1. 1 have taken the liberty of naming this line speck's alter the veteran
zoologist. Professor William C. M'lntosh.

228 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

On the underside the prostomium presents a pair of rounded
lobes (? palps) immediately in front of the mouth (PI. xlii.,
fig. 82).

The p3ristomiumand nuchal segment are separated don-ally
and laterally by a furrow, but merge into one another ventrally,
as the furrow bends forwards on each side nearly at right
angles, and thus delimits a ventral lip which is marked by
longitudinal furrows.

The peristomium is about twice the length of the nuchal
segment, whose length is equal to that of the first chsetigerous.
The parapodia of a few anterior segments have a representa-
tive of a dorsal cirrus in the form of a small rounded lobe
into which a small bundle of fine bristles enter. The feet as
been from above under a dissecting lens have from the first
a long posterior lip, which is antero-posteriorly compressed
so as to be lamelliform ; it is quite narrow in a well preserved
specimen, but rather thicker in the other (PI. xliii., fig. 8!t).
In the latter this lip is bent upwards in many of the feet, but
in the other specimen its bluntly rounded apex is directed
outwards (PL xlii., figs. 86, 87) ; its upward bend is, I
think, due to pressure against the wall of the containing
tube. The upper margin is nearly horizontal, though it is
slightly concave, while its lower margin slopes upwards
from "below. The feet in the first half-dozen segments
are smaller than the following. The posterior lip is curved
backwards in the greater part of the body. While the lip in
the anterior segments is much compressed and very thin, it
becomes, somewhere about the fortieth, shorter and thicker,
and this proceeds till it is in the posterior segments short
and quite thick (PI. xliii., fig. 89). The anterior lip likewise
changes somewhat in its form. Both lips are very vascular,
but the vessels in the posterior lip are more numerous and
more clearly seen owing to its thinness.

The capillary cheetse, many of which are brown and
iridescent, project a good way beyond the larger lip, and
this especially in the case of the upper cheetse. In the
anterior 40-50 feet all the chsetse are flanged capilliforms,
bent upwards from a point just below the commencement
of the flange (PL xlii., fig. 86).

But at or about the 50th foot most of the lower capilliforms
are replaced by hooks, with a long hood formed by a pair
of wings (PL xlii., fig. 84) ; and by about the 60th the upper-
most capilliforms are similarly replaced by one or usually
bv two hooded hooks (PL xlii., fig. 85).

POLYCH^ETA. — BENHAM. 229

Some of the capilliforms in the anterior feet have a flange
on both sides, of which one is shorter than the other. in
the hinder feet, however, the choeta itself is shorter and the
flange less extensive (PI. xliii., figs. 90, 91) The hooks have
one large terminal rounded tooth which does not form a
marked angle with the shaft ; on its back are some 5-6 very
small closely set denticulations separated by parallel linear
gaps, so as to resemble a comb (PI xliii., figs. 92, 93). The
shaft enlarges for a considerable distance before the end, it
is then suddenly narrowed below the hook so as to form a
deep bay. The wings are of still more considerable extent,
arising below the enlarged region of the shaft, and projecting
from the back as well as in front of the hook.

Further details as to the feet show that the 10th foot has
about 20 long, upwardly curved flanged bristles terminating
in a fine point beyond the flange. All are alike, but those
above the acicula are longer (PI. xliii., fig. 94), projecting
beyond the tip of the posterior lip, while the lower ones do
little more than reach this tip. The upper ones are golden
brown, glistening in reflected light ; the lower are golden
yellow. Between the two groups are 4-5 golden acicula
whose points do not project beyond the skin.

In the 55th foot the uppermost chsetae are six in number,
not so long as those in the anterior i'eet ; in the sub-acicular
bundle are five hooks and one flanged capilliform (PL xlii.,
fig. 84).

The acicula now have brown tips.

In the 125th foot the supra-acicular part of the bundle
contains only two large upwardly directed winged hooks
(PI. xlii., fig. 85), below which are three flanged capilliforms.
differing somewhat from those anteriorly. In the sub-acicular
bundle are 5-6 winged hooks, of the same structure as the
upper ones, but slenderer. The acicula are now reduced to
two, which are stouter than in the anterior feet ; one is
golden, the other black.

The pharynx reaches to the 10th chretigerous segment.
The lower jaws are brown, covered anteriorly with the usual
thin white transparent plate of lime, which is marked on its
upper surface with fine longitudinal lines, and on the under
surface with a number of concentric; lines ; the anterior edge
is white, and obliquely curved ; the pair are united for
nearly their whole length. The upper jawlets are black, each
denticle being tipped with white. The forceps, that is the
first pair, are relatively slender (PI. xlii., fig. 88). The right

230 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

dental plate (II) has six teeth, the most distal of which is
the smallest, the next is the largest, and, with the exception
of the third, which is also small, they decrease regularly in
size proximally. All are bluntly rounded. The left plate
has five teeth. The third pair has two large rounded teeth ;
the fourth pair has one indistinct tooth.

Remarks. — The species is considerably larger than the
majority, and although both individuals are imperfect the
diameter indicates that the species is one of the largest. Jt
has some resemblance to L. heteropoda, Mareiizeller,1 which
is a Pacific species, especially in the character of the feet, from
which, however, it differs most conspicuously in the fact
that the jaws of Marenzeller's species have but four clenticu-
lations on each of the large dental plate*.2 The form, too,
of the ventral hooks seems from the rather divergent figures
of Marenzeller and of MTntosL3 to have a less extensive
enlargement and less extensive wing ; while the details of
the apex are also unlike. It is also noteworthy that Maren-
zeller states that his species is eyeless, while M'Intosh finds
a pair of eyes obliquely set but hidden by the anterior margin
of the peristomium. The colour, according to the former
author, is tk yellowish grey, with a feeble bronze iridescence
in the middle of the back," which is in marked contrast to
the colouration of this species. But how far is colour im-
portant by itself ? From a comparison of the feet I supposed
that the present worms belonged to this species, but there is
some discrepancy between the accounts and figures given by
the two authors referred to, .so that I have given a somewhat
detailed account of the species. It may quite probably be
synonymous.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 26 fathoms.

Twenty miles east of Babel Island, Bass Strait,

Genus OENONE, tiavigny.

OENONE HASWELLI, sp. nov.

(Plate xliii., figs. 95-102 ; Plate xliv., fig. 113.)

Four individuals, two of them are complete, two are
anterior fragments. A complete specimen measures 140 mm.

1. Mareiize.ller— Denksch. Math. Naturwiss. Akad. Wien, x!i.. isT'.i,

p. 30.

2. Moore (Proc. Acacl. Nat. Sei. Philadelphia, 1908, p. 340) notes that
the jaws vary somewhat in tin- number of denticulations, but gives no
details.

3. M'Intosh— Chall. Rep.. /<>(>!., xii.. 1SS.1, p. 2.35.

POLYCH^ETA.- — BENHAM. 231

in length, with a diameter of 6 mm. at its widest ; across the
feet it measures 9 mm., and the height is 6mm. The body
is convex dorsally and flat ventrally.

The segments are very short, being about one-tenth of
the diameter of the body, and separated by deep furrows.

The worm contains 247 segments, tapering forward, from
the 25th to a diameter at the peristomium of only 2-5 mm.,
and posteriorly where the last segment is 1 mm. in diameter.
Its colour is brown, without any iridescence.

A second complete specimen measures 120 by 5 mm. ;
the jaws are partly protruded, and the appearance of the
head from above recalls the drawing given by Savigny of
0. litcida.

A third, fragmentary, is 50 by 5 mm. ; the head is much
retracted ; and a fourth consists of head and 70 segments
measuring 80 by 5 mm.

The prostomium is a bluntly rounded cone ; its length is
equal to its breadth ; it carries three minute conical ten-
tacles, hidden under the overhanging anterior margin of the
peristomium (PI. xliii., figs. 95, 96).

There are two pairs of eyes, the anterior larger, rather
lateral in position and oval in shape ; the posterior small,
admedian and round, lying in front of the bases of the two
admedian tentacles, and, like them, hidden.

It was not until 1 had slit open the dorsum, in order to
study the jaws, that I detected the tentacles, but having
discovered them, I found it possible to see their tips in other
specimens, on forcing back the peristomial margin.

The under surface of the prostomium has a very deep
median groove, which widens outwards posteriorly. There
are no "palps " (PI. xliii., fig. 97).

The peristomium (the only footless segment) is, on its
dorsal surface, but little longer than the first cha^tigerous
segment, but on the ventral surface it lengthens out pos-
teriorly, so that in the mid-line it is about twice the length
it has laterally. The median region, forming the lower lip, is
marked out from the lateral by a pair of longitudinal furrows,
starting from the anterior margin, and then curving outwards
to die out. There is a. slight median notch, which, however, is
better seen in a specimen in which the prostomium is re-
tracted, and therewith the peristomium stretched.

The sides of the peristomium are somewhat grooved, and
these also are obliterated when the prostomium is retracted.

232 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The parapodia are prominent ; the dorsal cirri are re-
latively large from the first, are vertically extended and
flattened antero -posteriorly, leaf-shaped in outline ; con-
stricted at the attachment, with rounded apex ; the cirrus
increases in size further back, so that by the 29th it is as long
as the posterior lip of the chsetophoral sac, and later comes
to exceed this in length (PI. xliii., fig. 99).

Seen under a dissecting lens the dorsal cirrus has the
appearance of being folded along its length, as Savigny's
drawing suggests ; this appearance is due to the large size
of the blood vessel which traverses it, and of the lateral
vessels which spring in numbers from it. The internal
margin, directed towards the body, rises nearly straight
upwards, but the outer margin has a gentle convex curve,
which suddenly turns inwards at the base, where it connects
with the foot.

The chsetophore has two fleshy lips, the posterior of which
is at least twice as long as the anterior, and much higher ;
it is produced outwards as a somewhat conical lobe. There
is no ventral cirrus.

The parapodium is supported by (usually) two yellow
acicula ; the chsetse are few. In the anterior feet they are
all capilliform, but in the posterior feet two or three golden
acicular chsetse replace some of the ventral capilliforms.

The capilliforms in the upper part of the bundle are longer
than those below, decreasing gradually in length from above
downwards. Those in the upper part are almost straight
or with a gentle curve (which may be artifact), and have only
a feebly developed, obliquely striated flange, but in the
sub-acicular bundle the capilliforms are bent upwards near
their end, and have a wider flange (PL xliii., fig. 100).

Somewhere about the 50th segment the acicular chsetse
appear (most of the chsetse in the lower part of the feet are
broken short so that it is difficult to be certain as to the
exact segment). These are usually two in number, some-
times three, and the two are not alike ; the upper one has the
notch separating the two teeth, nearly in line with the axis,
that it is almost terminal ; but in the lower chsetse it is
more lateral, and the teeth larger (PI. xliii., figs. 101, 102).

From the 13th foot to the 25th, all the chsetse are capilli-
forms, arranged in supra-acicular and sub-acicular bundles ;
in the 25th the supra-acicular bundle consists of (a) an upper
group of long bristles, 4-5, and (b) a lower of 4 rather shorter
ones. The sub-acicular bristles arc still shorter.

POLYCH^ETA. BENHAM. 233

In the 53rd foot, the supra-acicular chsetse are — (a) 2 very
long, and (b) 4 medium capilliforms. Sub-acicular — 5 short
capilliforms and 2 acicular chsetse.

53rd supra-acicular — (a) 2 very long, and (b) 4 medium
capill. Sub-acic. — 5 short capill. and two acicular chsetse.

The pharynx is long, narrow, cylindrical, extending to the
19th segment.

The lower jaw pieces are short and broad, with a large
biting region, which in its outer h?lf is transverse, and on
its inner half obliquely inclined backwards. The area of
union of the right and left pieces is about one-third of the
total length.

The jaws are dead black, the supports are very slender
rods, longer than the whole series of upper jawlets.

The upper series (PI. xliv., fig. 113) consists of five pieces
on each side : the basal pair (I.) are unlike ; the left one
has an anterior long claw-like fang, the internal margin of
the base is straight, and bears 12-13 short sharp denticulations.

The right piece (I.) has no claw ; it is a transversely dis-
posed plate, with its internal margin produced fore and aft.
; o as to be nearly twice the length of the plate itself, and
this edge bears 13 denticulations.

The next piece (II.) on the right side, extends alongside
the basal piece, and under a dissecting lens might readily
be overlooked. It is a broad clawed plate, the internal
straight margin is produced into 12-13 teeth, the distal ones,
small, commence close to the claw, the proximal larger.
This internal toothed margin is bent upward, and thus is
not readily seen till the plates are moved about.

The corresponding left plate (II.) has a long stout claw,
with 9 denticulations, of which the proximal and the distal
are small, and those in the middle stout.

On the left side, the next (III.) has a large claw with six
teeth, the largest in the middle.

The fourth (IV.) similar, but rather smaller, with six teeth.
The fifth (V.) has a single terminal claw, and no subsidiary
denticulations.

On the right side the plates III., IV., and V. are similar, but
the third (III.) has seven teeth.

Remarks. — The existence of three tentacles would indicate
that the worm belongs to the genus Aglaurides, but the

234 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

asymmetry of the jaws, especially the presence of the clawless
plate on the right side, agrees with what occurs in the species
of Oenone.

There appear to be only three species of this genus hitherto
described, 0. lucida, Savigny1. 0. diphyllidia, Schmarda2,
and 0. pacifica, Fischli3. The worm described by Willey*
from Ceylon as Aglaurides fulgida, Savigny, is not a
a member of that genus according to the view of most zoo-
logist^, for it has the Oenonian arrangement of jaw plates,
which in Aglaurides are more nearly symmetrical.

Willey seems to have overlooked the difference in the
character of the jaws as diagnostic of Oenone, for he supposes
that the only point of difference between the two genera lies
in the presence or absence of the tentacles ; and it is note-
worthy that in order to see these, he had to cut the peris-
tomium, as I have had to do. I suggest that it belongs
to the genus Oenone.

Savigny, in his diagnosis of the genus Oenone, uses (p. 55),
as Ehlers has already noted, the phrase " Anteniies point
saillantes et comme nulle." I understand this to mean
that Savigny had recognised the existence of tentacles, and
wished to emphasise their small size — so small are they that
*' they do not project ; there appear to be none."

With the four species the present one cannot be confused,
owing to the details of the teeth.

Aglaurides, too, has two distinct footless segments.
Oenone has but one, which, however, is double ventrally,
and the formation of the lower lip appears, from Ehlers'
account, to differ.

From 0. diphyllidia, as described by Ehlers5, the present
species differs in the form of the prostomium, in the shorter
and thicker feet (compare his PI. xxxiv., fig. 4), in the wider
dorsal cirrus, and in details as to the number of denticu-
lations on the various jaw plates.

Locs. — East coast of Flinders Island, Bass Strait.

Between Port Stephens and Newcastle, New South Wales,
20-60 fathoms.

1. !Sa vigii V' — System. Annelides, 1820, p. 55.

2. Schmarda— Neue Wirbellose Thiere, I., 2, 1861, p. 120.

3. Fischli — Abhandl. Senckenberg. Naturforseh. gcsellsch.. xxv.. 1900,
p. 108.

4. Willey. — Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, pt. IV., Suppl. Rep., xxx., —
Polychseta. 1905', p. 284.

5.' Ehlers— Mom. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xxxi., 1887, p. 109.

POLYCH.ETA. — BENHAM. 235

Genus LYSARETE, Kinberg.

LYSARETE AUSTRALIENSIS, sp. nov.

(Plate xliii., figs. 103-109 ; Plate xliv., figs. 110-112.)

An anterior fragment, consisting of the head and 70 chseti-
gerous segments of what is evidently a veiy large worm. It
measures 110mm. in length, with a breadth of 10mm. over
the body, and 14 over the parapodia ; the height is !> mm.
The peristomium is 6 mm. across, and the diameter thence
increases, till at the 10th segment it has attained its full
measure, which is retained for the remainder of the fragment.
The segments are l-5th the diameter of the body.

The colour of the worm is a rich dark copper brown, with a
well marked green iridescence.

The prostomium is a short rounded cone, slightly broader
than long ; its length is equal to that of the peristomium,
nuchal and first chsetigerous segments (PI. xliii., fig. 103). It
bears three short cylindrical tentacles, which arise in a curve ;
the median, which is inserted behind the others, is longer than
the admedian and is nearly as long as the peristomium and
nuchal segment. These tentacles lie backwards in a deep groove
excavated in the upper surface of the peristomium, nuchal
and first chyetigerous segments. It is broad in front, where
the overhanging margin of the peristomium is interrupted,
while the posterior region of this segment is excavated, and
this excavation is successively narrower in the two following
segments (PI. xliii., fig. 104).

There are two pairs of eyes, both of very small size ; the
anterior are difficult to see owing to the deep pigmentation
of the skin of the prostomium ; they lie outside the bases of
the admedian tentacles. The second pair lie between the
median and admedian tentacles, anil can only be seen when
these are turned forwards.

The surface of the first three segments is marked by
numerous short irregular longitudinal furrows.

The under surface of the prostomium presents no groove,
but at the base, on each side, is a large prominent convex
lobe, triangular at its origin (PI. xliii., fig. 105). One apex is
directed backwards, the opposite side is forwards, a second
side faces inwards ; the third, backwards and outwards.
Between these palps and behind them are several transverse
folds, probably due to the partial eversion of the pharynx.

236 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The peristomium is slightly longer than the nuchal
segment, from which it is separated by a definite furrow
dorsally and laterally ; but on the ventral surface the inter-
segmental furrow suddenly bends forwards to form the
outline of a " processus oralis," so that the median part of
the lower lip appears to be formed by the nuchal segment.

The lower lip is traversed by short longitudinal furrows
along its ventral and lateral margins.

The body is nearly cylindrical (PI. xliii., fig. 106) ; the
parapodia are prominent and widely separated ; the posterior
lip of the chaetophore is large, foliaceous, and pointed.

The dorsal cirrus in the earlier feet is small, being little
more than a cylindrical papilla, much shorter than the
anterior lip of the chaetophore (PI. xliv., fig. 110) ; it is not
till about the 20th segment that it attains the length of this
lip (PI. xliv., fig. Ill), and by about the 40th it is as long
as the posterior lip and even longer. It has now lost its
cylindrical form, has become flattened in the antero-
posterior direction, and is highly vascular, and projects
outwards almost horizontally (PI. xliv., fig. 112).

A few small chaetae, as usual in the family, enter the base
of the dorsal cirrus and are accompanied by a black aciculum.
There is no ventral cirrus, unless the rounded side of the
body is regarded as such ; it is separated from the ventral
region by a definite groove.

The chaetae, which are brown, are all capilliform (PI. xliii.,
fig. 108), with a very slight flange, but are of two sizes : those
in the supra-acicular bundle are much longer than the sub-
acicular ones. There are usually four black acicula in the
main part of the foot.

In the first and second feet I find the following numbers of
chaetae : — The supra-acicular chaetae are 10, the sub-acicular
8-10 ; in the twenty-first 7 and 14 respectively ; in the sixty-
sixth foot the numbers are 6 and 8 respectively.

The jaws are very dark brown in colour ; the " support "
is quite short, not as long as the proximal upper jaw-
plate ; each half is a right-angled triangle, the vertical
side of which is median, the hypothenuse external, and
frayed out, as it were, into a number of delicate short threads.

The right and left jaw plates are symmetrical, five on each
side. The proximal plate (I) on both sides is long and
narrow, bidentate, or rather has two large claw-like fangs at its

POLYCH.ETA. BENHAM. 237

anterior end, the posterior of which is only slightly smaller
than the other. There are no marginal deiiticulations. II.
has the ordinary form of a broad plate with five teeth. III.
is short, with three teeth, the proximal being small. IV. is
bidentate ; and V. has but a single tooth.

The fifth plate is so closely placed against the fourth that
on a first inspection they seemed part of a single plate.

The lower jaws are long and anteriorly broad ; they lie
wholly in front of the support of the upper jawlets, and each
is divisible lengthwise into two approximately equal regions ;
the outer region is brown, the inner white, being calcified
and marked by fine longitudinal lines.

Remarks. — This species differs from the only other species,
L. brasiliensis, Kinberg1 in the following features : in the
number of teeth on the jaw plates, in the dimensions of the
dorsal cirrus and posterior lip, both of which are narrower
than in the present species. Ehlers,2 who figures this species,
says that the worm is whitish-grey.

LOG. — South by south-west of Mt. Cann, Victoria, 55-70
fathoms.

1. Kin berg — Anmilata nova, 18fi4.

2. Ehlers— Florida Anneliclen, 1887, p. 107.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVIII.

Lcpidonotus hedlcyi, sp. nov.
Fig. 1. — An elytron (x 8). a. the anterior margin, e.

external margin.
Fig. 2. — A portion of its surface ( X 250), showing the round

pigment cells and empty cells ; these lie at a lower

level than the tubercles, two of which are shown.
Fig. 3. — Four tubercles from an elytron of different shapes

(x 250).
Fig. 4. — A parapodium (x 20), seen from the anterior face ;

gl. Gland at the base of the dorsal cirrus.
Fig. 5. — A notopodial chaeta (x 500). The pectinated frills

in this and next figure are merely indicated by

dotted lines.

Fig. 6. — A neuropodial chaeta (X 250).
Fig. 7. — A neuropodial chteta from another aspect ( • 250).

Lepidonotus willeyi, sp. nov.
Fig. 8. — An elytron (x 20), showing the limitation of the

fringe to the external margin; ant. the anterior

border.
Fig. 9. — Portion of the external margin of an elytron ( x 250)

showing some of the smaller tubercles.
Fig. 10. — Portion of the aritero -dorsal area ( x 250), with

simple tubercles.
Fig. 11. — Some of the larger tubercles (x 250). a. from the

external area ; b. from near the middle ; c. one of

the largest in the posterior area.
Fig. 12. — A parapodium (x 35).
Fig. 13. — A notopodial chaeta, with blunt apex (x 500).

The pectinated frills where they cross the surface

are omitted from this and the next.

Fig. 14. — One of the long notopodial chsetse, with a fila-
mentous apex (x 500).
Figs. 15 and 15A. — Two aspects of a neuropodial chaeta

(X 360).

Physalidonotus rugosus, sp. nov.
Fig. 16. — The prostomium (x 10), the hinder border of

which is overlapped by the first " pad " or elytra!

support.
Fig. 17. — An elytron (x2£), the characteristically elongated

areola is indicated by dotted line. Ant., anterior

margin.

Fig. 18. — A portion of the external area and margin of an

elytron (x 20).

Fig. UK — One of the supra-areolar tubercles (x 20).
Fig. 20. — A tubercle from the posterior area (x 35).
Fig. 21. — Another tubercle from the posterior area (x 35).
Fig. 22. — Base of a cirriferous parapodium from behind to

show the branchial papulae (enlarged).

B10L. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR, VOL. 111.

PLATE XXX VI 11.

B. BENHAM, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIX.

Physalidonotus rugosus, sp. nov.

Figs. 23-24. — A neuropodial cha3ta from two aspects (>; 90).

Fig. -5. — Two parapodia, seen from above (> 5), showing
the disposition of the branchial papulae, the shape
of the elytrophore, the large dorsal swelling on the
rirriferous foot, and the gland at the base of the
dorsal cirru>.

Physalidonotus laevis, ,sp. nov.

Fig. 2C>. — The prostomium from the side (/ 10).
Fig. '21. — The prostoniinm from above (> 10), the posterior
border is overhung by the first dorsal pad.

Fig. -8. — An elytron ( > 4). The lower margin of the figure

is anterior.

Fig. 29. — A portion of its external area (x 45).
Fig. 30. — A portion of its anterior area (> 45), showing the

soft conical tubercles near the margin.

Fig. 31. — A couple of tubercles from the supra-areolar area

( 45).
Fig. 32. — Two parapodia ( 5), showing the arrangement

of the papulae.

Physalidonotus liirriltix, ^p. nov.
Fig. 33.— An elytron (> 20).

Fig. 34. — The prostomium (/ 10), overhung by the first
dorsal pad.

Fig. 35. — Two parapodia from above (enlarged), showing
the papula.1.

Physalidonotus paucibranchiatus, ,sp. nov.

Fig. 10. — A neuropodial chseta ( ,- 90), showing the con-
striction below the bearded region, characteristic
of this species.

Fig. 37. — Two parapodia ('/ 10), showing the papulse.

Fig. 38. — A parapodium ( 20), from its posterior face.
This serves to illustrate the form characteristic for
the genus.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XXXIX.

\V. B. BENHAM, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL.

Physalidonotus paucibranchiatiis, sp. nov.
Fig. 39. — The prostomium from above (> 10).
Fig. 40. — The prostomium from the side (x 10).
Fig. 41. — An elytron (x 8). Ant. the anterior margin.

Fig. 42. — A portion of the surface near the external margin
(> 20), showing the outer end of the areola (on
the right), and the filamentous tubercles on the
antero-external area.

Harmothoe etheridgei, sp. nov.
Fig. 43. — A neuropodial chaeta (x 90).
Fig. 44. — A notopodial chseta (> 90).

Fig. 45. — One of the uppermost notopodial chaise (> 90).
Fig. 46. — The prostomium and anterior segments (x 10).
Fig. 47. — The fifth elytron (> 10). Ant. anterior margin.
Fig. 48. — Tubercles of various shapes ( > 45).
Fig. 49.— The tip of a notopodial chaeta (X 360).
Fig. 50. — Tip of a neuropodial chseta ( X 360).
Fig. 51. — A parap odium (x 20).

Halodom, sp. incert.

Fig. 52. — The fifth parapodium (> 35).
Fig. 53. — The fourteenth parapodium ( x 35).
Fig. 54. — The head, ventral view (enlarged).
Fig. 55. — The head, dorsal view (enlarged).

Nephthys macrura, fechmarda.
Fig. 57. — The head (x 8), from a camera drawing.

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR." VOL. III.

- B. BKNUAM, del

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL1.

Halodora, sp. incert.
Fig. 56. — The middle region of a jointed chseta ( X 300).

X/uitronereis australiensis, M'lntosh.

Fig. 58. — The head, dorsal view (enlarged).

Fig. 5!). — Head. doi>al view (more enlarged), with the
peristomial nap turned back to show the slit-like
entrance to the nuchal organ on each side.

Fig. 00. — Head, ventral view (enlarged).

Fig. 01. — Six segments (/ 4), with the parapodia of one
side ; the dorsal cirrus on the penultimate segment
has been cut across to show the characteristic flat-
tening in this species.

Fig. 02.— The 30th parapodium ( 20).
Fig. 03. — A sub-acicular chseta from the 30th parapodium
(X 250).

Fig. 04. — A sub-acicular ehteta from the 10th parapodium

( 250).

Fig. 05. — The upper series of jawlets of the right side, as
seen in situ ( > 20).

Fig. 00. — Isolated jawlets (> 35), <i. a group of jawlets of
the outer and inner series : b, one of the jawlets
of the inner series ; c, anterior jawlets of the inner
series ; d, a triangular piece which rests on the
ba.se of the outer and inner series.

Eunice bassensis, M'lntosh.
Fig. 07. — The head from the side (/ 8).

Fig. 08. — The anterior end ( 8) ; the tentacles of the right
side and the parapodia of the left have been omitted.

Fig. 0!). — A segment from the side (> 8) to show the rela-
tively small size of the gill at its maximum develop-
ment.

Fig. 70. — The twelfth parapodium (/ 20), from a well

preserved specimen. (Cf. fig. 78).
Fig. 71. — A cha'ta from the 40th parapodiuin ( 300).

Fig. 72. — The tip of an acicular cha-ta from the 40th foot
( . 250) ; it is bidentate, and the wings are present.

Fig. 73. — A tridentate acicular chseta from a posterior foot
(> 250). The wings are omitted.

Fig. 74. — A tridentate acicular clueta from the 53rd foot
(X 250), the wings are omitted.

BIOL. RESULTS '• KXDEAVOrR," VOL. III.

PLATE XLl

\Y. 15. BENHAM, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL-IT.

Eunice bassensis, M'Intosh.
Fig. 75. — The upper jawlets disarticulated ( < 20).

Fig. 76. — The " fangs " or basal members of the upper
series of jawlets (x 20).

Fig. 77. — The left lower jaw, upper surface ( x 20).

Fig. 78. — The twelfth parapodium from a much contracted
specimen, showing the stouter form of the dorsal
cirrus and the shortened gill filaments, as compared
with Fig. 70.

Eunice pycnobranchiata, M'Intosh.

Fig. 79. — The eleventh parapodium (x20) ; the gill shows
the characteristically thickened filaments ; the
chaetse are diagrammatically indicated.

Fig. 80. — Side view of the head ( x 4), to show the deep
incision between the lower and the lateral lips ;
the upper edge of the former is somewhat everted,
so as to be visible from above.

Lumbriconereis gulielmi, sp. nov.
Fig. 81. — The head, dorsal view (x 4).
Fig. 82. — The head, ventral view ( x 4).
Fig. 83.— The head, side view (x 4).
Fig. 84.— The 55th parapodium (>< 20).
Fig. 85.— The 125th parapodium (> 20).

Fig. 86. — The 29th parapodium ( > 20) ; blood vessels are
indicated in the anterior lip.

Fig. 87. — The 29th parapodium of another individual ( X 20),
in which the large posterior lip has been pressed
upwards by contact with the tube in which it had
been preserved. Chsetse omitted.

Fig. 88. — The upper jawlets (enlarged), drawn in situ from
above. The left " fang " is omitted,

BIOL. RESULTS " ENDKAVOUR," VOL. TT1.

PLATI: XL 1 1

W. B. BENHAM, de\.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLIII.

Lumbriconereis gulielmi, sp. nov.

pig 89 — A series of left parapodia from above ( > 7), from
the 10th, 25th, 45th, and a posterior segment, in
order to show the changes in form and development
of the lips and the arrangement of the chseta?.

Fig. 90. — One of the middle chsetse from the 125th para-
podium (>• 70).

pig 91 — .The lowermost chseta from the 29th foot ( 70).

Fig. 92. — An upper hook from the 125th parapodium ( 250).

Fig. 93.— One of the lower hooks from the 125th foot ( x 250).

pig 94 — The uppermost chseta from the 10th parapodium
(X 70).

Oenone haswelli, sp. nov.
Fig. 95. — The head from above (> 4).
pio- 96 — The head from above after the peristomial flap

has been slit up and turned aside to show the three

small tentacles which lie below it (> 4).
Fig. 97. — The head from below (> 4).
piL, 98 — The anterior end of another specimen in which

the prostomium is retracted below the peristomial

flap (X 4).

Fig. 99.— The 55th parapodium (> 20).
Fig. 100. — A sub-acicular chseta from a posterior parapodium

( • 250).
Fig. 101.- — An upper hook or acicular chseta from a posterior

foot with the notch separating the two teeth terminal

in position (X 360).
pig 102. — A lower acicular chaeta from the same foot ( 360).

The proximal tooth is here laterally situated ; the

wing is broken.

Lysarete australiensis, sp. nov.

Pig 103. — The head from above (> 2|). The three ten-
tacles lie backwardly, directed in a groove.

Fig. 104. — The median region of the first three segments and
part of the prostomium ( 5). The tentacles are
cut away to show the posterior pair of eyes, and
the excavation in the three segments in which the
tentacles lie.

Fig. 105.— The head from below (> 21).

Fig. J<>6. — A transverse section through the body (> 2).
The parapodium of the left side has been omitted.

Fig. 107. — The parapodia from segments 4, 16 and 37
(> 4) from above.

Fig. 108. — A supra-acicular chseta from the 10th parapo-
dium (. 5).

Fig. 109. — The lower jaw and upper series of jaxvlHs of the
right side as seen in situ ( 5).

BIOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XL1II.

]0,S

VV. B. BENHAM, del.

lOt;

*

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLIV.

Lysarete australiensis, sp. nov.
Fig. 110.— The 10th parapocliuni ( 13).
Fig. 111. — The 21st parapodium (x 13).

Fig. 112.— The 66th parapodium ( 13), the fully developed
condition ; the cha?ta? are cut short ; blood vessels
are indicated in the dorsal cirrus.

Oenone hasivelli, sp. nov.
Fig. 113. — The series of upper jawlets, disarticulated (x 17).

Hcalisetosus australiensis, sp. nov.

Fig. 114. — View of the imperfect head (enlarged), ph., the
partially everted pharynx.

Fig. 115. — Parapodium, posterior face ( > 20), ep., elytro-
phore overhanging the notopodium.

Fig. 116. — A neuropodial cha?ta, from the upper part of the
bundle ( x 250). The very delicate frills are indi-
cated in this and following figure by oblique linos.

Fig. 117. — A neuropodial clueta from the lower part of the
bundle (> 250). The notopodial chaeta are similar
to this.

H10L. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR/1 VOL. IIT.

PLATE XL IV.

14

11'

113

110

112

VV. B. BENHAM, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLV.

Thalanessa oculata, M'lntosh.

Fig. 118. — View of an elytron from about the middle of the
body, in situ (enlarged), showing the typical shape
and its relation to the parapodia and segments.
ep. elytrophore of this elytron, ep' elytrophores of
the preceding and of the succeeding segments, one
of the latter being covered by the elytron.

Fig. lit). — A parapodium from the mid-body (x 00). a,
ciliated pad ; b, cirriform process of the notopod.
The dotted structures are the characteristic mem-
branous lips on the neuropod ; the chaetae are dia-
grammatically represented in that no attempt is
made to give their shape.

Fi<i. 120. — Dorsal view of a normal, mid-body segment of
the left side, nrp., neuropod ; nip., notopod. The
filamentous lip process of the latter is bent back-
wards.

Fig. 121. — Dorsal view of the first parapod of the left side
(enlarged), showing the great development of the
membranous lip. p, a horny capsule, many of
which are attached to the cha?tse along the body.
(? egg capsule of mollusc).

Fig. 122. — Dorsal view of the fourth parapod, showing the
digitiform processes on the notopod : the two mem-
branous lips of the neuropod are bent backwards.

Fig. 123.— The fourth parapod of the right side (>< 00). a,
ciliated pad : b, group of digitiform processes on
the notopod. The dotted structures are the mem-
branous lips of the neuropod.

B1OL. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XLV.

119

VV. B. HEX HAM, del.

VI. Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great Austra-
lian Bight and other Localities.

PART III.

BY

W. M. BALE, F.R.M.S.,
LATE SENIOR INSPECTOR OF EXCISE, VICTORIA.

Plates XLVI.— XLVII.

HYDROIDA.- BALE. 241

REPORT ON THE HYDROIDA.
PART III.

I. — INTRODUCTION.

IN this third and concluding Report on the Hydroida col-
lected by the " Endeavour " are enumerated all the species
observed (except two or three forms represented only by
very imperfect specimens), with their localities, and, in the
case of those not already dealt with, their synonymy and
such other notes as it is thought might be of interest. Under
the names of species which have been described in Parts I
and II will be found references to the pages of those parts
where they are treated of, with, in some cases, further
remarks on specimens observed later.

Altogether sixty-four species or varieties are represented
in the collections, of which twenty-two species and four
varieties were considered to be new. All of these were
described in the two former Reports, except Sertularella
tasmanica, S. undulata, Sertularia pusilla, Nemertesia ciliata,
var. cruciata, Aglaophenia divaricata, var. cystifera, and
Cladocar pella multiseptata, which are the only new forms
described in the present Report. In two or three instances
the new material has enabled me to describe the gonangia
of other species of which the gonosome was previously
unknown.

The following is a list of the species observed :—
Order GYMNOBLASTEA.

Family HYDROCERATINID^.

Clathrozoon wilsoni, Spencer.

Order CALYPTOBLASTEA.

Family CAMPANULARIID^].
Campanularia pumila, Bale.

Family CAMPANULINID^.

Thyroscyphus marginatus, Bale.
Thyroscyphus simplex (Lamouroux).

Family HALECIID.E.

Halecium flexile, Allman.

242 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Family LAFOEID.E.

Perisiphonia exserta (Busk).

Cryptolaria arboriformis, Ritchie.

Cryptolaria angulata, Bale.

Hebella calcarata (L. Agassiz).

Hebella calcarata (L. Agassiz), var. contorta, Marktanner-

Turneretscher.
Lafoea gracillima (Alder).

Family SERTULARIID.E.

Sertularella gaudichaudi (Lamouroux).
Sertularella gayi (Lamouroux).
Sertularella tasmanica, sp. nov.
Sertularella undulata, sp. nov.
Sertularella indivisa, Bale.
Sertularella neglecta, Thompson.
Sertularella divaricata (Busk).
Sertularella adpressa, Ritchie.
Sertularella lata (Bale).
Thuiaria sinuosa, Bale.
Synthecium subventricosum, Bale.
Hypopyxis distans, Bale.
Selaginopsis dichotoma (Allman).
Diphasia subcarinata (Busk).
Sertularia minima, Thompson.
Sertularia pusilla, nom. nov.
Sertularia loculosa, Bale.
Sertularia operculata, Linne.
Sertularia elongata, Lamouroux.
Sertularia unguiculata, Busk.
Sertularia geminata, Bale.
Sertularia maplestonei, Bale.
Sertularia macrocarpa, Bale.

Family PLUMULARILD^.

Plumularia campanula, Busk.

Plumularia zygocladia, Bale.

Plumularia buski, Bale.

Plumularia procumbens, Spencer.

Plumularia sulcata, Lamarck.

Plumularia asymmetrica, Bale.

Nemertesia ciliata, Bale.

Nemertesia ciliata, Bale, var. cruciata, var. nov.

Kirchenpaueria producta, Bale.

Halicornopsis elegans (Lamarck).

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 243

Cladocarpella multiseptata, gen. et sp. nov.

Aglaophenia divaricata (Busk).

Aglaophenia divaricata (Busk), var. cystifera, var. nov.

Aglaophenia decumbens, Bale.

Aglaophenia tasmanica, Bale.

Aglaophenia billardi, Bale.

Aglaophenia dannevigi, Bale.

Aglaophenia carinifera, Bale.

Aglaophenia cupressina, Lamouroux.

Aglaophenia (Thecocarpus ?) armata, Bale.

Aglaophenia (Thecocarpus) megalocarpa, Bale.

Aglaophenia (Thecocarpus) tenuissima, Bale.

Aglaophenia (Thecocarpus) calycifera, Bale.

Halicornaria vegce, Jaderholm.

Halicornaria tubulifera, Bale.

Halicornaria birostrata, Bale.

Halicornaria urceolifera (Lamarck).

Halicornaria urceolifera (Lamarck), var. scandens, Bale.

Halicornaria furcata, Bale, var. intermedia, Bale.

Halicornaria superba, Bale.

The species represented were almost wholly collected in
the waters to the south of the Continent, from the Great
Australian Bight to the Eastern Slope (to the east of Bass
Strait and Tasmania), the chief exceptions being three or four
species which were collected near Port Curtis, Queensland.

II. — NOMENCLATURE.

As a matter of convenience the species are arranged under
the genera and families with which it has been customary to
associate them ; at the same time it is recognised that in
several cases (especially among the Sertulariidse), modifica-
tions of some of these genera will in all probability meet with
general acceptance ; but while the prevailing differences of
opinion obtain, full consideration of these points may well
be deferred. This will be further referred to under the
respective families. I have found StechowV concise tabular
view of the whole of the genera of the Hydroida very useful
for reference, though I do not concur as to the validity of
some of the genera included in it.

III. — LITERATURE.

I have done my best to obtain such recent literature as
might be expected to contain references to our Australian

1. Stechow — -Hydroidpolypen der japanischen Ostkiiste, II. Teil — Abh.
math-phys. Klasse K. Bayer Akad. Wissensch., III. Suppl.-Bd., 1913.

244 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Hydroida, but not always with success. Of the more im-
portant papers which I have been unable to obtain, most
refer to northern species ; in one or two cases, however,
notably in that of Professor D'A. W. Thompson's Report on
the Hydroida of the ' Vega ' Expedition, all my efforts
to secure copies have failed, and I mention the circumstance
in case any of the species which I have described as new may
prove identical with any therein described. A list of the
literature to which reference is made will be found at the
end of this Report.

IV. — DESCRIPTION OF THE GENERA AND SPECIES.
Order GYMNOBLASTEA.

Family HYDROCERATINID^.

Genus CLATHROZOON, Spencer.

CLATHROZOON WILSONI, Spencer.

Clathrozoon wilsoni, Spencer, Trans. Roy. Soc. Viet., ii.,
1891, pp. 121-129, pis. xvii.-xx. Id., Bale, Proc. Roy.
Soc. Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893, p. 96. Id., Ritchie, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 810.

Some very robust colonies were collected, attaining a
height of over a foot.

Locs. — South Australian coast.

Great Australian Bight, 80-100 fathoms.

Order CALYPTOBLASTEA.

Family CAMPANULARIID^.

Genus CAMPANULARIA, Lamarck.

CAMPANULARIA PUMILA, Bale.

Campanularia pumila, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 4, pi. i., figs. 6-8.

A Campanularia in the Lamarckian sense, but wanting the
gonosome.

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, parasitic on Synthecium sub-
ventricosum, Bale, 40-100 fathoms.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 245

Family CAMPANULINID^E.
Genus THYROSCYPHUS, Allman.

THYROSCYPHUS MARGINATUS, Bale.

Campanularia marginata, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 54, pi. i., fig. 2. Id., Bartlett, Geelong Nat.,
(2), iii., 1907, p. 62, fig. -

" Campanularia " marginata, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra
den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 289.

Thyroscyphus marginatus, Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc.Vict., (n.s.),
xxvii., 1914, p. 91.

The specimens, like all others hitherto observed, are with-
out the gonosome.

Loc.— Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
75 fathoms.

THYROSCYPHUS SIMPLEX (Lamouroux).

Laomedea simplex, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor. Flex.,
1816, p. 206. Id., Deslongch., Encyc. Meth., Zooph.,
1824, p. 482.

Campanularia simplex, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 58.

Campanularia tridentata, Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet.,
(n.s.), vi., 1893, p. 98, pi. iii., fig. 3.

Sertularella tridentata, Hartlaub, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
xvi., 1900, p. 46, fig. 21.

Thyroscyphus tridentatus, Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb., xiv.,
1901, p. 369, pi. xxi., fig. 14, pi. xxii., fig. 23. Id.,
Ritchie, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlvii., 1909, p. 74,
fig. Mb.

Thyroscyphus simplex, Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci., cxlviii.,
1909, p. 1065; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
ix., 1909, p. 312. Id., Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra
den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 292. Id., Briggs, Rec.
Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 288.

Parascyphus simplex, Ritchie, Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist.
Edinb., xx., 1911, p. 160, fig. 1.

This species, which was previously known only from

Australia and New Zealand, has been recorded by Ritchie

from the British coast and the South Atlantic. The present

specimens include the gonansia, hitherto unknown. These

, are borne on the lower part of the shoots, and, in my

246 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

specimens, vary from one to four. They are of an elongated
ovate form, smooth, apparently not compressed, and the
top is rounded, with a small circular aperture, which has
the rim thickened, but not forming an elevated collar. Their
length is about 1.4 mm., their diameter at the widest part,
which is not far from the summit, about .6 mm.

Locs. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75
fathoms.

Family
Genus HALECIUM, Oken.
HALECIUM FLEXILE, Allman.

Halecium flexile, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results " Challenger '''
Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II., 1888, p. 11,
pi. v., fig. 2, 2a. Id., Jaderholm, Arkiv. f. Zool. k.
svenska Vetenskapsakad., i., 1903, p. 265. Id.,
Thornely, Report on Pearl Fisheries of the Gulf of
Manaar, Suppl. Rep. viii., 1904, p. 112. Id., Hartlaub,
Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii., 1905, p. 611, figs. J3, K3.
Id., Jaderholm, Schwedischen Siidpolarexp., v., 1905,
p. 13. Id., Billard, C.R. Acad. Sci., cxlvii., 1908,
p. 1355 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910,
p. 3. Id., Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p.
811. Id., Stechow, Abh. math.-phys. Klasse der K.
Bayer Akad. der Wissensch., iii. Suppl. -Bd., 1913, p.
81, figs. 45-49. Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10,
1914, p. 286.

Halecium gracile, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, (2), iii.,
1888, p. 759, pi. xiv., figs. 1-3 ; Id., Bale, Proc. Roy.
Soc. Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893, p. 99. Id., Clarke, Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xxv., 1894, p. 74. Id.,
Jaderholm, Arkiv. f. Zool. k. svenska Vetenskapsakad.,
i., 1903, p. 266, pi. xii., figs. 2-3. Id., Billard, Actes
Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, Ixi., 1906, p. 70 ; Id., Billard,
Bull. Mus. d'Hist. Nat., 1906, p. 329; Id., Billard,
Exp. Antarct. fran9., 1906, p. 10 ; Id., Billard, Exp.
Sci. du " Travailleur " et du " Talisman ", viii., 1906,
p. 163. Id., Motz-Kossowska, Arch. Zool. exp. et gen.,
(5), vi., 1911, p. 335, figs, vii.-viii.

Halecium parvulum, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2),
iii., 1888, p. 760, pi. xiv., figs. 4-5. Id., Marktanner-
Turneretscher, Ann. K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890,
p. 218, pi. iii., fig. 22. Id., Farquhar, Trans. N.Z.
Inst., xxviii., 1896, p. 461.

HYDROIDA. BALE. 247

Halecium balei, Fraser, Bull. Lab. Nat. Hist. State Univ.
Iowa, vi., 1911, p. 46.

No. 16, Halecium sp., Inaba, Zool. Mag. Tokyo, 1890, figs.
41-45.

Not Halecium gracile, Verrill, Report on the Invertebrate
Animals of Vineyard Sound, 1874, p. 729. Id.,
Nutting, Bull, U. S. Fish. Comm., 1901, p. 358, fig. 54.

The specimens observed were small and monosiphonic,
agreeing with the form originally described by me as H.
gracile. In treating it as synonymous with the much larger
H. flexile of Allman, I follow Billard, who has examined the
type in the " Challenger " collection.

Locs. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

Family LAFOEID^.

The species here referred to the Lafoeidse belong to the
genera Perisiphonia, Cryptolaria, Hebella, and Lafoea. These
genera, with others nearly allied to them, are generally recog-
nised as members of the family ; Levinsen, however, giving it
a more comprehensive signification, would assign to it also
" the species referred to Synthecium, Hypopyxis, Staurotheca,
and the inoperculate species referred to Dictyocladium,
Selaginopsis, Sertularia and Sertularella."'1 Species belonging
to these groups are dealt with in this Report under the
Sertulariidae.

Genus PERISIPHONIA, Allman.
PERISIPHONIA EXSERTA (Busk).

Cryptolaria exserta, Busk, Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., vi., 1858,
p. 130, pi. xix., fig. 3-3b.

Perisiphonia filicula, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results "Challenger "
Exped.,Zool., xxiii., 1888, Hydroida, pt. II., p. 44, pi,
xxii., figs. 1-4.

Zygophylax (Perisiphonia) filicula, Clarke, Mem. Mus. Comp.

Zool. Harvard, xxxv., 1907, p. 16.
Perisiphonia exserta, Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16,

1911, p. 834, pi. Ixxxvii., fig. 3. Id., Stechow, Abh.

math.-phys. Klasse K. Bayer Akad. der Wissensch.,

iii. Suppl.-Bd., 1913, p. 117. Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr.

Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 290.

1. Levinsen — Systematic Studies on the Sertulariidae — Vidensk. Medd
fra den naturh. Foren, Ixiv., 1913, p. 286.

248 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Cryptolaria exserta was described by Busk in one of the
series of papers entitled " Zoophytology " which were pub-
lished in the " Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science " dur-
ing his co -editorship. J. Y. Johnson, whose name has been
commonly, but erroneously, appended to the species, had no
connection with it beyond sending the specimens from
Madeira to Mr. Busk.

Ritchie, after examining " Challenger '; specimens of
P. filicula, Allman, is satisfied of their identity with P. exserta,
but dissents from the suggestion of Pictet and Bedot that
P. pectinata, Allman, is not distinct from P. filicula. Ritchie
enumerates a number of discrepancies between the" Challen-
ger " specimens and Allman's description and figure, and
in each instance the present specimens confirm Ritchie's
account.

To the previous descriptions I may add, with regard to the
ramification, that the pinnae, which to the naked eye appear
opposite, do not originate at precisely the same level, but one
is higher than the other by the length of a hydro theca. Some-
times a secondary pinna springs from a primary one close to
its origin.

The gonosome has not been observed hitherto, unless, as
Ritchie thinks probable, Pictet and Bedot's P. pectinata is
really to be referred to the present species. Coppiniae were
present on one or two of our specimens, extending to over half
an inch in length. The cells are sharply polygonal, except
the short distal portion, which projects in the form of a small
rounded dome ; the aperture is small and circular, and one
side of the rim is produced into a conical horn. From among
the cells spring many crooked slender filaments, each support-
ing a few distant sarcothecae.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160 fathoms.

Thirty-five miles south east of Bruni Island, Tasmania,
150-230 fathoms.

Genus CRYPTOLARIA, Busk.

CRYPTOLARIA ARBORIFORMIS, Ritchie.

Cryptolaria arboriformis, Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16,
1911, p. 824, pi. Ixxxiv., fig. 1, pi. Ixxxvii., fig. 7. Id.,
Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 289.

Specimens of this hydroid were obtained which fully agreed
with Ritchie's account in regard to the weather-beaten aspect

HYDBOIDA. — BALE. 249

and the dark brown colour. These, however, were overrun
by a species of Lafoea, the stolons of which so completely
swathed the hydrosoma that no portion of the supplementary
tube system of the Cryptolaria was visible except at the
extremities of some of the smaller branches. I am indebted
to Mr. Briggs for portions of his specimens from Thouin or
Wineglass Bay, near Freycinet Peninsula, Tasmania, which
being free from the Lafoea, enable me to observe the normal
structure.

These specimens are pale in colour, the dark brown seen in
the " Endeavour " specimens residing mainly in the stolons
of the Lafoea. In both cases I found a few very young lateral
branches, which exhibited the structure before the supplemen-
tary tubes had enveloped them.

A branch at its origin consists of a single slender tube of a
length about equal to that of a hydrotheca. On the formation
of the first hydrotheca the branch abruptly doubles its width,
the hydrotheca being about equal to the axial tube in dia-
meter. The hydrotheca is directly in line with the proximal
part of the axial tube, which makes a sharp curve round its
base. By the time the second hydrotheca is formed fascicu-
lation has commenced, two delicate stolons being given off
from the base of the first hydrotheca, one on each side, and
running along the branch outward. Other tubes originate
from the later-formed hydrothecse, and these, together with
tubes which proceed from the stern along the branch, make up
the fascicle. In the " Endeavour " specimens I observed a
couple of very young branches, of two to three hydrothecse,
on which the Lafoea had not yet encroached ; these displayed
the two first supplementary tubes, but had not developed
further, and in none of these specimens could any other portion
be found available for observation without hindrance by the
Lafoea, which so completely invested the polypary that
almost every branch was swathed with it nearly or quite to
the extremity, even the latest-formed hydrotheca often
supporting a hydrotheca of the Lafoea. Even the gonangia
become completely covered by the parasite, which apparently
by its close investment, prevents the development of the
fascicle-tubes of the Cryptolaria to a great extent. The most
advanced La/oea-stolons are generally nearly straight, but on
the older portions, and where they have a wider area on which
to spread, as on the gonangia, they are most tortuous in their
ramifications.

To Ritchie's account of the hydrothecse I would only add
that in some specimens they are continued outward somewhat

250 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

further than he describes them, and as the produced portion
continues in a uniform curve it follows that the aperture is
directed outward instead of upward ; I have even seen in-
stances where a still further prolongation results in the
aperture looking somewhat downward. In these cases the
extension of the hydrotheca is due to the necessity of keeping
the aperture free when surrounded by a very dense fascicula-
tion.

The gonangia (which have not previously been observed)
are borne along the stem or the main branches, often in a
longitudinal series and sometimes on both sides. They are
adnate in their entire length, and may even overlap. Their
length much exceeds their width, average specimens reaching
about 2.2 mm., with a diameter of only about .3 mm. The
summit is arched over, and the sub-terminal orifice, which is
directed outward, is transversely elliptical. Occasionally the
arched top is continued in a uniform curve, so that the
aperture looks downward. Being adnate to the hydrocaulus
they follow its direction, so that if, for example, they meet
with a branch in the course of their growth they continue
along it, and are accordingly bent at nearly a right angle. In
some instances they are in an inverted position. The fascicle-
tubes run over them, and often envelop them completely,
except the aperture, and in the " Endeavour " specimens the
stolons of the Lafoea cover them with a tortuous network,
often of more than one layer.

Six or seven gonozooids were observed, in each case only
one in a gonangium. From the base of the capsule rises the
blastostyle, which bears the gonozooid on one side at a short
distance up, and is then continued in the form of a very
slender cord till it nears the orifice, where it gradually expands
into the conical plug usually found in that position. The
gonozooid is very small relatively to the size of the gonangium,
none of those seen attaining more than about .45 mm. in
length. The two or three which were in the best condition
for examination appeared to have four longitudinal radial
canals, and a four-lobed orifice.

I have not observed the large round openings said by
Ritchie to exist between the fascicle-tubes, but round openings
are common in the " Endeavour " specimens ; these, how-
ever, are superficial, and consist of the bases of Lafoea hydro-
thecse which have been broken off. It is just possible that
Ritchie's specimens may have been invested by Lafoea -stolons
from which the hydrothecse had been lost ; this would account
for the round openings as well as for the dark colour. No one

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 251

•observing such a specimen would imagine the brown stolons
to be other than an integral part of the Cryptolaria.

Locs. — Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
75 fathoms.

Twenty-one miles N. 62° E. of Babel Island, Bass Strait,
74 fathoms.

CRYPTOLARIA ANGULATA, Bale.

Cryptolaria angulata, Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour,"
ii., 4, 1914, p. 166, pi. xxxv., fig. 1.

Locs. — Great Australian Bight, 100 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 127° 20' E., 180 fathoms.

Genus HEBELLA, Allman.
HEBELLA CALCARATA (L. Agassiz).

Laodicea calcarata, L.- Agassiz, Contr. Nat. Hist. U.S., iv.,
1862, p. 350.

Lafoea calcarata, A. Agassiz, N. Amer. Acalephse, 1865,
p. 122, figs. 184-194. Id., Hargitt, Amer. Nat., xxxv.,
1901, p. 387, fig. 24.

Lafoea scandens, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii.,
1888, p. 758, pi. xiii., figs. 16-19. Id., Warren, Ann.
Natal Govt. Mus., i., 1908, p. 341, fig. 21.

Hebella scandens, Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann. K.K.
Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 214, pi. iii., fig. 16. Id.,
Farquhar, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1896, p. 460.
Id., Campenhausen, Abh. Senckenb. naturf.
Gesellsch. Frankfurt-a-M., 1897, p. 307? Id., Hart-
laub, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii., 1905, p. 587. Id.,
Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den naturh. Foren, 64,
1913, p. 285. Id., Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.),
xxvi., 1913, p. 117, pi. xii., fig. 10.

Lictorella scandens, Borradaile, Fauna & Geogr. Maldive &
Laccadive Archipel., ii., 1905, p. 840.

Hebella cylindrica (in part), Pictet, Rev. suisse Zool., i.,
1893, p. 41, pi. ii., fig. 36. Id., Versluys, Mem. Soc.
Zool. France, xii., 1899, p. 31.

Lafoea calcarata (in part), Billard, Bull. Mus. d'Hist. Nat.,
1904, p. 481 ; Id., Billard, Exp. Sci. du " Travailleur "
et du " Talisman," viii., 1906, p. 174.

252 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Hebella calcarata (in part), Billard, Arch. Zool. exp. et
gen., (4), vii., 1907, p. 339. Id., Ritchie, Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1910, p. 810. Id., Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 16, 1911, p. 816.

Hebella calcarata, Nutting, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., xix.,
1901, pp. 353, 378, figs. 56, 94. Id., Fraser, Bull.
Bureau of Fisheries, xxx., 1912, p. 371, fig. 34.

Not Lafoea cylindrica, von Lendenfeld, Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S. Wales, ix., 1884, p. 912, pi. xl., figs. 4-5.

In my paper in the " Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria "* for 1913 I have given reasons for concluding that
Pictet and subsequent observers were almost certainly wrong
in identifying H. scandens (Bale) with H. cylindrica (von
Lendenfeld), while suspending judgment with regard to its
identity with Hebella calcarata (Agassiz). Since then I have,
through the kindness of Dr. Fraser, received specimens of
H. calcarata, comparison of which with H. scandens shows
that the affinity between the two forms is even closer than
the published descriptions would seem to indicate. I cannot
resist the conclusion that (unless differences in the gonosome
should be discovered) they must be regarded as varieties of
a single species.

The hydrothecae are quite similar, and I found a single
mature gonotheca of H. calcarata, which did not differ per-
ceptibly from those of H. scandens. The distinctions prac-
tically narrow themselves down to the unbranched habit of
the former, while H. scandens branches freely, and to the
frequent arrangement of the hydro thecse of H. calcarata in
opposite pairs, while those of H. scandens are always single.
The typical H. calcarata usually occurs on opposite-celled
Sertularians, and its general rule of growth (subject, how-
ever, to many exceptions), is that the creeping stem runs
up the front of the hydrocaulus of the host, and gives off a
pair of opposite or nearly opposite hydrothecse just above
those of the latter. H. scandens is mostly found on Sertularella
divaricata, and, when it makes its nearest approach to
regularity, gives off a single hydrotheca above each of those
of the Sertularella. It would appear reasonable to assume
that the difference is simply an accommodation to the habit
of the host-species ; I have, however, met with one or two
cases where the host was an opposite-celled Sertularian while
the hydrothecse of the Hebella were in no case opposite.

On the other hand, I found on a specimen of Pasythea from
Bondi, New South Wales, a single colony which had the

1. Bale— Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvi., 1913, pp. 118-120.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 253

hydrothecae opposite, just as in the American forms, from
which they differed only in their somewhat smaller size.

In Marktanner-Turneretscher's specimens the hydrothecae
do not seem to be opposite or in pairs, although growing on
an opposite-celled Synthecium. Warren shows the hydro-
thecae in pairs, nearly opposite, on a subalternate-celled
Thuiaria.

From Fraser's account it seems doubtful whether the
description of H. calcarata as unbranched is justified.
Probably the unbranched condition is due to the fact that
the specimens examined were usually on hydroid hosts
which were themselves unbranched. In H. scandens branch-
ing occurs freely. On Sertularella it runs up the rachis, and
not only does it send off side branches to the successive
pinnae, but on a single pinna it very often divides into two,
one running up each side, and in many instances these are
united by short transverse ramules.

While most of my specimens have been found on Sertu-
larella divaricata, I have met with single colonies on Diphasia
subcarinata, Sertularia macrocarpa, Thyroscyphus tridentatus,
and, as already mentioned, a smaller form on Pasythea
quadridentata. Marktanner-Turneretscher found specimens
on Synthecium campylocarpum, and Ritchie on S. orthogonium
(the same species ?), and Sertularella adpressa. Borradaile's
examples were on Synthecium tubiger (=S. orthogonium ?} ;
Billard's on Thuiaria tubuliformis and Thyroscyphus vitiensis ;
Pictet's on Sertularia vegce and S. tubitheca ; and Warren's
on Thuiaria tubuliformis. American specimens are most
common on Sertularia cornicina and Pasythea quadridentata.

My specimens of H. scandens have the hydrothecae mostly
from .52 to .56mm. in length, with widths of from .16 to
.19mm. ; the American specimens of H. calcarata average
about .59mm. long and .19mm. wide, and the small form
from Bondi, New South Wales, is only about .44 mm. long
and .15mm. wide .

Loc. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms, on Thyroscyphus tridentatus.

HEBELLA CALCARATA (L. Agassiz),
var. CONTORTA, Marktanner-Turneretscher.

Hebella contorta, Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann. K.K.
Hofmus. WTien, v., 1890, p. 215, pi. iii., fig. 17a, b.
Id., Campenhausen, Abh. Senckenb. naturf. Ges.

254 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Frankfurt-a-M., 1897, p. 307. Id., Levinsen, Vidensk.
Medd. fra den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 285, pi. v.,
figs. 16, 17.

Hebella cylindrica (in part), Pictet, Rev. suisse Zool., i.,
1893, p. 41.

Hebella scandens (in part), Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet.,
(n.s.), xxvi., 1913, p. 117.

Not Lafoea cylindrica, von Lendenfeld, Proc. Linn. Soc'
N.S. Wales, ix., 1884, p. 912, pi. xl., figs. 4-5.

(See also, under H. calcarata, references to Billard and
Ritchie, who rank H. contorta as a synomyn of H.
calcarata).

There is room for a difference of opinion as to whether
H. contorta, which is distinguished from H. calcarata by the
smaller size and somewhat twisted form of the hydrothecse,
should be regarded as a distinct species. My specimens do
not fully agree with Marktanner-Turneretscher's account,
the hydrothecse being only about .37-.40 mm. in length as
against .46 mm., while the diameters are the same (about
.15mm.); they are also rather less twisted (and in some
cases not at all). I have found them only on Sertularia
unguiculata, and the habit is peculiar, in that the main
creeping stolon, which runs up the rachis of the Sertularia,
bears no hydrothecse, but gives origin only to lateral branches,
which run along the pinnse of the host, and from which
spring the hydrothecse. Generally each pinna has its branch,
for so far as the Hebella extends, and it is curious to observe
how the stolon directs its growth from each pinna to the
next ; after giving off a branch to one pinna it grows
diagonally across the broad rachis of the host straight to
the base of the next, where it again branches, and so on in a
succession of zig-zags till it terminates, or till it assumes a
less regular course. Occasionally it divides into a number of
small stolons, which anastomose freely, forming a network.
The branches which run along the pinnse of the host are not
usually central, but seem to prefer the side, and although
the hydrothecse of the Sertularia are in opposite pairs, I have
not in any case seen those of the Hebella paired. Sometimes
an alternate disposition can be discerned, successive hydro-
thecse springing slightly to right and left on the slender stolon.

Loc. — Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania, on
Sertularia unguiculata.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 255

Genus LAFOEA, Lamouroux.

LAFOEA GRACILLIMA (Alder).

Campanularia gracillima, Alder, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (2),
xviii., 1856, p. 361, pi. xiv., figs. 5, 6 ; Id., Alder, Trans.
Tynes. Nat. F. Club, iii., 1857, p. 129, pi. vi., figs. 5, 6.

Lafoea gracillima, G. 0. Sars, Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandl.,
1873, p. 115, pi. iv., figs. 19-21. Id., Marktanner-
Turneretscher, Ann. K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890,
p. 217, pi. iii., figs. 18, 19. Id., Bonnevie, Norweg. N.
Atl. Exped., Hydr., 1899, pp. 64, 65, pi. v., fig. 2a. Id.,
Nutting, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm., 1901, p. 356, fig. 49.
Id., Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb., xiv., 1901, p. 358, pi. xxi.,
figs. 1-3 ; Id., Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii.,
1905, p. 594, fig. P2. Id., Jaderholm, K. svenska Vet.-
Akad. Handl., xxviii., 1902, p. 9 ; Id., Jaderholm,
Schwed. Siidpolarexp., v., 1905, p. 21, pi. ix., figs. 2-3 ;
Id., Jaderholm, Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Peters.,
(8), Classe Phys.-Math., xviii., 1908, p. 13, pi. ii., fig. 15;
Id., Jaderholm, K. svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl.,
xiv., 1909, p. 74, pi. vii., figs. 6-8. Id., Clarke, Mem.
Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xxxv., 1907, p. 13. Id.,
Ritchie, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xiv., 1907, p. 531 ;
Id., Ritchie, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlvii., 1909, p.
76, fig. 2 ; Id., Ritchie, Rec. Ind. Mus., v., 1910, p. 8 ;
Id., Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 817.
Id., Billard, Exp. Sci. du " Travailleur " et du " Talis-
man ", viii., 1906, p. 176. Id., Broch, Fauna Arctica,
v., 1909, p. 156, figs. 17-18. Id., Fraser, Bull. Lab.
Nat. Hist. State Univ. Iowa, vi., 1911, p. 52. Id.,
Vanhoffen, Deutsche Siidpolarexp., xi., 1910, p. 312.
Id.. Kramp, Danmark-Exp. til Gr0nlands Nordostkyst,
v., 1911, p. 371.

Calicella fruticosa, Hincks, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), viii.,
1861, p. 293.

Lafoea fruticosa, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydroid Zooph., 1868,
p. 202 (in part), pi. xli., fig. 2, 2a (not 2b). Id., Bale,
Cat. Austr. Hyd. Zooph., 1884, p. 64, pi. ii., fig. 1 (after
Hincks). Id., Thompson, Hydr. Zooph. of the
" William Barents " Exped., 1884, p. 7, pi. i., figs. 17,
18. Id., Allman, Rep. Sci. Results "Challenger"
Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II., 1888, p. 34,
pi. xvi., fig. 2, 2a.

Lafoea capillaris, G. O. Sars, Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandl.,
1873, p. 115, pi. iv., figs. 22-24.

256 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Hincks, in his " British Hydroid Zoophytes,"1 treated
L. gracillima (though with some doubt) as a variety of L.
fruticosa (Sars), but observers in the northern seas, who are
familiar with both forms, are now practically unanimous in
rejecting the determination. Following Hincks I included
L. fruticosa in the " Catalogue " as an Australian species, but
L. gracillima' must now take its place. Allraan and Thompson
have also followed Hincks' nomenclature.

Hincks writes: — " I have examined the Lafoea from Bass's
Straits in Mr. Busk's collection, referred to by Alder (North.
& Durh. Cat.), and have little doubt that it is identical with
the present species." Alder had written:— "A Campanularia
from Bass's Straits, of which Mr. Busk has kindly sent me
a drawing, is very similar to this, if not identical." The
hydroid from Bass Strait, which Busk mentioned in the
" Voyage of the Rattlesnake," under the name of Campanu-
laria dumosa is presumably that referred to by Alder and
Hincks.

Family SERTULARIID^.

In the First Part of this Report I have dealt with the
Sertulariidse from the point of view which was usually adopted
prior to 1893, when systematists wrere agreed that the proper
basis for generic distinction was the mode in which the
hydrothecse are arranged in the colony. This unanimity was
disturbed in 1893, when Levinsen advanced the view that a
truly natural arrangement must depend on certain characters
of the individual hydrothecse, namely the opercular structure
and the correlated condition of the hydrotheca-margin. The
views propounded by Levinsen were at once adopted by
several observers (mostly those whose principal work lay
among the northern species), but were rejected by others ;
and in 1897 Schneider, in his paper on the hydroids of Rovigno,
strongly upheld the validity of the system founded on the
arrangement of the hydrothecse, or what Levinsen calls the
colonial or zoarial characters.

Ever since Levinsen put forward his views the classification
of the Sertulariid.se has been in a condition which can only be
described as chaotic. Many observers, while unprepared to
accept his conclusions without reserve, have nevertheless felt
obliged to recognise their validity to a greater or less extent,
dependent on individual opinion, and the result has been that
few are precisely in accord on all points, so that there are
almost as many systems of classification as there are observers.

1. Hincks— Hist, Brit. Hydroid Zooph., 18fi8, p. 202.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 257

In his last work — " Systematic Studies on the Sertulariidse '
(which only reached me after much of Part I. was in print),
Levinsen combats the objections which have been made to his
system, and recapitulates and further elaborates his views at
considerable length, and with such force and cogency as can
scarcely fail to impress any student of the Sertulariidse who
examines them. Levinsen relies entirely on the opercular
apparatus for his generic distinctions, disregarding altogether
the colonial characters ; so that he recognises, for instance, no
distinction between a Pasythea and a Sertularia, or between
a Sertularella and a Selaginopsis, if the opercula are alike in
each case.

Of course, it does not necessarily follow from the acceptance
of Levinsen's views regarding the importance of the oper-
culum that his genera must be adopted throughout. Ad-
mitting that the colonial characters are of secondary
significance, they may still be considered, and undoubtedly
will, by some observers, be considered sufficiently important
to furnish grounds for generic distinctions. This is evidently
the opinion of Dr. Stechow, who has, since the date of Levin-
sen's last paper, published a list of the genera of the
Hydroida,1 in which, while mainly adopting Levinsen's
divisions, he has included such genera as Pasythea, Selaginopsis,
and Dictyocladium, which Levinsen expressly declares to be
merely species of Sertularia, Thuiaria, and Sertularella. This
combination, or intermixture of two diverse systems would
logically lead to the further multiplication of genera, as will
be apparent if we consider, for example, the characters of
Pasythea. The hydrothecae of this genus are not always
paired, as Stechow describes them ; in P. quadridentata the
paired condition exists, in P. hexodon it does not. I pointed
out long ago that according to the colonial characters P.
quadridentata is allied to Sertularia, while P. hexodon was as
obviously akin to Thuiaria. The same conclusion may be
arrived at from the zooecial characters, and Levinsen ac-
cordingly classes the former species as a Sertularia, and the
latter as a Thuiaria. Now, if we admit, as Stechow does,
that the differences between the opercula in Sertularia,
Odontotheca, and Thuiaria are valid generic characters, then
we must, on the same principle, admit that P. hexodon should
be placed in a genus distinct from P. quadridentata, since the
difference between these two species is precisely the same
as that between Sertularia and Thuiaria. The same principle
applies to Dictyocladium and Selaginopsis ; obviously a
Selaginopsis with an operculum should be placed in a different

1. Stechow — Hydroidpolypen der japanischen Ostkiiste, II., 1913.

258 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

genus from a Selaginopsis without one ; here, however, as
Stechow accepts the presence of some form of operculum as a
primary character of the whole family, it must be assumed
that he excludes such species now assigned to Dictyocladium
and Selaginopsis as are inoperculate ; only he has then
provided in his system no place for these species, any more
than for the inoperculate species hitherto included in the
genera Sertularia and Sertularella.

What has doubtless contributed largely to the reluctance
of systematists to adopt Levinsen's views is the difficulty
often found in determining the nature of the operculum in
species with which we are only partially acquainted, and of
which we may often examine many specimens without being
able to detect any trace of such a structure, or, where such
traces are visible, to ascertain the true form.

For example I have mentioned elsewhere that in Thyros-
scyphus marginatus one sometimes finds empty hydrotheca?
with opercula sufficiently preserved to enable their character
to be clearly made out, while in other cases hydrothecse are
found containing the hydranths in good condition but
entirely devoid of opercula. Levinsen's contention that he
can discern from the form of the hydrotheca-margin what
that of the operculum has been, is no doubt correct in general,
but I have seen hydrothecse as to which I was quite unable
to satisfy myself from the form of the border whether they
belonged to Levinsen's genus Odontotheca or to Sertularia.

In regard to these two genera, I have great doubt as to
the sufficiency of the distinction between them. In both
cases the border of the hydrotheca has two lateral teeth,
between which are two sinuses, the adcauline the larger in
Odontotheca, the abcauline in Sertularia ; in each sinus is
fixed an opercular membrane. In Sertularia the abcauline
membrane is, in most species, provided with a free distal
valvular portion, which is wanting in Odontotheca. As,
however, it is stated that some species of Sertularia are
without the usual free valvular portion, while some species
of Odontotheca possess it, it seems very doubtful whether
the differences are sufficient to justify the creation of a new
genus. The same remark applies to the genus Hydrallmania,
as modified by Levinsen in accordance with the opercular
characters ; and I may add that even according to the
colonial characters I see no sufficient ground for this genus :
the hydrotheca are as truly biserial as in the rest of the
family, though both series are seated so near to the front as
to be very nearly (but not exactly) in one line.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 259

Considering, now, that notwithstanding differences of
opinion as to details, it is generally agreed that the opercular
characters must, to a greater or less extent, be utilised in
limiting the genera, it appears that there are only two courses
logically open to us. The first is to follow Levinsen in
abandoning entirely the colonial characters. Then Pasythea
quadridentata becomes a Sertularia, and P. hexodon a Thuiaria,
while the species ascribed to Selaginopsis and Didyodadium
must be divided between Sertularia, Sertularella, Thuiaria,
and a genus of Lafoeidae for the inoperculate forms. The
other course is to combine the colonial and the zooecial
characters, as Stechow has done, but in that case we cannot
follow him in retaining the old groups Pasythea, Selaginopsis,
and Dictyodadium, each as a single genus. P. hexodon must
be separated from P. quadridentata on exactly equal grounds
to those on which Thuiaria is separated from Sertularia.
Selaginopsis (with Didyodadium) must be split up into several
genera, according as the operculum resembles that of Sertu-
laria, Sertularella, Thuiaria, and possibly yet other types,
while in any case the inoperculate forms must be referred to
a separate genus. It is doubtless true that characters which
are of generic value in one group of species may be less
constant and of minor importance in another, but in the
particular case before us it is impossible to maintain that
where the opercular characters have a generic value in the
biserial forms, the identical characters should have less
importance in multiserial forms.

I do not look forward to any early unanimity on these
points, but Levinsen's arguments, and the numerous instances
•cited by him of transition-forms between the biserial and
the multiserial forms, furnish very strong support to his
views. Again, in such a form as Pasythea hexodon, how does
the arrangement of the hydrothecae in separate companies
•differ from the arrangement in many species of Thuiaria
•except that in the former the companies are separated by
longer intervals ? And in P. quadridentata we have in the
one species every gradation from the typical form to a variety
which differs in no respect from a true Sertularia.

Of course there are in some instances special characters,
unconnected either with the hydrothecal arrangement or the
opercular structure, which may be regarded as of generic
importance, and here again unanimity of opinion is not likely
to be soon arrived at. For example, the old genus Didyoda-
dium seems to me, as to Levinsen, to consist merely of a
few species united by the trivial character of their union into
-a network by anastoming stolons, a feature often found in

260 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

species of Sertularella and Thuiaria. Thecocladium is another
genus founded on the regular occurrence of a feature not at
all uncommon in other forms. Hypopyxis, as 1 have pointed
out in Part II, is to be referred to Levinsen's genus Thuiaria,
unless, which is doubtful, the pouch-like appendages should
prove to be, as Allman supposed, sarcothecse.

As the most convenient course, in the present unsettled
state of the classification, the family is here taken to include
the genera which it has been customary to assign to it, and
the genera themselves are taken for the most part in their
old signification. They comprise species of Sertularia, Sertu-
larella, Thuiaria, Selaginopsis (Dictyocladium), Hypopyxis ,
and Synthecium. The last-named genus must, according to
Levinsen, be removed to the Lafoeidse, in consequence of the
absence of an operculum, but Stechow regards the Synthecidse
as a distinct family. Sertularia elongata, and a number of
other species in which also the hydrotheca-margin has six or
more teeth but no operculum, are excluded by Levin&en from
the Sertulariidae, and are unprovided for in Stechow's classifi-
cation ; for these species I propose the new genus LEVINSENIA.
I follow Billard in placing Dictyocladium dichotomum, Allman,.
under Selaginopsis ; according to Levinsen's system it would
be referred to Sertularella. Several of the Sertularice would
come under Levinsen's genus Odontotheca, which I am
disinclined to accept. And I may here remark that even
if it be admitted that this genus is sufficiently distinct from
Sertularia, the name Odontotheca has no claim to acceptance.
The type is S. operculata, and L. Agassiz in 1862 proposed
the genus Amphisbetia for this very species ; the latter name
therefore has priority, and should be adopted if it is con-
sidered desirable to separate S. operculata and its immediate
allies from the other Sertularice.

Genus LEVINSENIA, gen. nov.

Hydrophyton branched or rarely simple, hydrothecse bi
serial, apertures with numerous teeth, operculum absent.

While it is still doubtful to what extent observers generally
will accept the principles of classification enunciated by
Levinsen, there is no doubt that the nature of the opercular
structures must henceforth be regarded as of the first
importance.

Regarding two of the species for which the genus Levinsenia
is proposed Levinsen remarks as follows : — *" An opercular
apparatus has not hitherto been found in Sert. elongata and

1. Levinsen — Vidensk. Medd. fra den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913. p. 265.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 261

S. huttoni, both of which have the hydrothecal margin with
6-7 teeth, and if they possess an operculum I am most
inclined to think that it consists of as many valves as there
are teeth. In either case these two species cannot be referred
to any of the hitherto described genera." It may also be
observed that in Stechow's recent summary of the genera
no place is found for S. elongata or its allies. It will
probably be conceded therefore that there is justification
for the establishment of a genus for such species as are
excluded from the Sertulariidse (as restricted) by the absence
of an operculum, while the conspicuous denticulation of the
hydrotheca-margin distinguishes them, if less decisively, from
the genus Synthecium. If such a genus be not admitted the
only alternative would seem to be the modification of the
latter genus to make it include these forms.

According to Stechow's arrangement the family Synthecidse
comprises three genera — Lytoscyphus, Synthecium and Hypo-
pyxis. I believe that the latter genus is erroneously asso-
ciated with the Synthecidse, as I have pointed out in discussing
H. distans.1 The genus now proposed will take its place
beside Synthecium, and, as will be shown further on, there
are not wanting signs of a connection between them more
intimate than would be supposed at first sight.

It must be recognised that some of the forms which I now
refer to Levinsenia have not been sufficiently examined to
make it certain that they never develop an operculum, but
some undoubtedly do not, and the others sufficiently resemble
them to warrant their association pending fuller examination.

Besides the two species mentioned by Levinsen, — S.
elongata and S. huttoni — I assign to Levinsenia S. pluridentata
(Kirchenpauer), S. insignis Thompson, S. acanthostoma Bale,
S. crenata Bale, along with the species described by Billard
as possibly a sexual form of S. elongata, and which may in
the meantime be described as S. billardi.z Of these S. elongata
is most widely known, and it has been examined by several
observers, who have not in any case noted the presence of
an operculum. I have a beautifully mounted specimen,
stained, and with the hydranths expanded as in life, and I
cannot detect any trace of an opercular structure. Billard
says nothing as to the presence or absence of an operculum
in the form described by him. S. acanthostoma has been
studied histologically by Warren, who says that there is
not a trace of operculum. I believe this i.« the only member

1. Bale — Biological Results "Endeavour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 107.

2. Billard— Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 22, fig. 8.

262 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

of the group which has been subjected to a similarly searching
examination. Of S. crenata I have seen only one or two
specimens, in which I found no opercula. Whether S.
insignis and S. pluridentata have an operculum has not been
determined.

S. elongata is dealt with elsewhere in this Report, and in
Part I, and as I have pointed out, it agrees precisely in habit
with a number of other species which by Levinsen would
be divided between the genera Sertularia and Odontotheca.
If the teeth ever number other than six (as implied by
Hutton and Coughtrey), it must I think be only an abnormal
condition, which I have never met with. They are sym-
metrical, in so far that there are three on each side of the
hydrotheca, yet the two sides are not absolutely alike, as
the distal portions of the hydrothecae are somewhat bent in
such a way as to make the apertures face toward one side
of the colony, so that, like most Sertularice, but unlike S.
acanthostoma, the polypary has a distinct front and back
aspect. This turning forward of the hydrothecse is very
pronounced in some specimens, but scarcely traceable in
others, and when it occurs it is confined to the hydrothecae
on one side of the pinna. The teeth vary a good deal in
length, and there is a rather wide extent of the border on
the adcauline side free from them, while no median tooth
is present.

In S. billardi, (which has the hydrothecae very different in
form from those of 8. elongata, and more like those of S.
macrocarpa and S. bidens), there are nine teeth. As in
•S. elongata, there is a gap between those nearest the adcauline
margin, and as the number is odd, it follows that either the
two sides are not symmetrical, or that there is a median
tooth on the abcauline margin and four on each side. The
latter appears from the figure to be the actual arrangement.

S. acanthostoma has no median tooth either on the adcauline
or the opposite border, but has eight on each side, which
correspond to those opposite them in all respects, so that
the denticulation is quite regular, like that of an Aglaophenia,
and the hydrothecae are in one plane, and both aspects of
the polypidom are alike.

S. pluridentata is described by Kirchenpauer without the
number of teeth being specified. So far as can be judged
from the figure there appears to be a median tooth both on
the adcauline and abcauline borders, with three others on
each side.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 263

S. insignis is said by Thompson to have " about six '
teeth.

S. huttoni is described as having " seven or eight " teeth.

S. crenata has ten teeth, more uniform in size than those
•of most of the preceding species. There is a median tooth
on both the adcauline and the abcauline borders, and four
on each side, the median teeth, however, are shorter than
the rest, and sometimes tend to become obsolete.

Four of the species in the foregoing list agree in having
a similar habit, not, I think, found elsewhere among the
members of the old genus Sertularia. The pinnse are in
pairs and opposite, and associated with this character is
the unusual feature that the hydrothecae on the rachis are
opposite, while those on the pinnse are subalternate. They
have the further character in common that the first hydro-
thecal internode on each pinna bears a single hydrgtheca
only, which is on the lower side. These species are S. insignis,
S. acanthostoma, S. huttoni, and 8. billardi. I think it very
probable, however, that S. insignis and S. huttoni, which are
respectively recorded from Australia and New Zealand, are
one and the same.

S. pluridentata is, in the form of the hydrothecae, very
nearly allied to S. acanthostoma, but the pinnse are irregular,
not opposite.

In S. crenata the pinnae are distinctly alternate. In the
type specimen the rachis is divided alternately into inter-
nodes which support a single pinna with its axillary hydro-
theca, or a pair of hydrothecae only ; these obviously represent
the ordinary Sertularian internode (as found in S. elongata),
divided into two by a secondary node. The hydro thecse on
the pinnae are subalternate, and, as in the oppositely-
branched species, the first hydrothecal internode on each
supports but one hydrotheca, on the lower side.

In the original specimen of S. crenata the teeth were all
well developed, except that the two median ones were some-
times much reduced. But I have a specimen from an un-
known locality, which I am doubtful whether to regard
as a variety of S. crenata or as a merely abnormal colony, in
which all the teeth are either much reduced, being indicated
mostly only by slight undulations of the border, or are
totally absent. In one or two hydrothecae there are four
of these undulations on each side, representing the eight
lateral teeth of the normal form, and the median teeth are
feebly indicated. In most cases, however, the latter are
wholly wanting, and the lateral sinuations are very slight

264 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

and irregular, while in others the sides are quite smooth,
though usually a little more elevated than the points where
the median teeth would ordinarily be situated ; there is
therefore nothing to distinguish the border of such a form
from that of a Synthecium. The hydrothecse in question are
not immature, but of normal size, and though probably to
be regarded simply as a pathological variation, they are
none the less significant as indicating the affinities of the
species.

Genus DIPHASIA, Agassiz.

DlPHASIA SUBCARINATA (Busk).

Diphasia subcarinata, Bale, Biological Results '' Endea-
fc vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 7 (synonymy).

This species, owing to its possession of an opercular valve
consisting of a single adcauline flap, seems to be quite
properly placed in the genus Diphasia, notwithstanding that
Levinsen makes the absence of teeth on the hydrotheca-
margin a characteristic of the genus (while admitting, how-
ever, that D. digitalis (Busk) has two feeble lateral teeth).
D. subcarinata has very distinct and well-developed teeth,
generally three in number, though in some of the " Endea-
vour " specimens one is sometimes obsolete.

The opercular membranes are very delicate, and many
specimens are without a trace of them, but I have some in
which they are retained, and it is a very peculiar feature
that in many cases there are two distinct opercula, quite
similar, but widely separated, one being situated about the
middle of the divergent distal half of the hydrotheca, and
the other just inside the aperture. The valve itself is simple,
and does not extend fully across the hydrothecal cavity, but
only about two-thirds of the distance. I have also seen more
than two opercula ; this, however, was in hydrothecae in
which a regeneration had occurred, and the two normal
valves had been retained, while two new ones had been
developed.

LOGS. — Great Australian Bight, 40-100 fathoms.

Off Devonport and Launceston, Tasmania.

Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30 fathoms.

Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

HYDROIDA.— BALE. 265«

Genus SYNTHECIUM, Allman.
SYNTHECIUM SUBVENTRICOSUM, Bale.

Synthecium subventricosum, Bale, Biological Results
"Endeavour/' ii., 1, 1914, p. 5, pi. i., figs. 3-5.

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, 40-100 fathoms, on large
Plumularians.

Genus HYPOPYXIS, Allman.
HYPOPYXIS DISTANS, Bale.

Hypopyxis distans, Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour,'"
ii., 4, 1914, p. 167, pi. xxxv., figs. 2-5.

Unless further research should prove the pouch-like
structures peculiar to this hydroid to be of greater importance
than at present appears, it seems to me that the retention of
the genus will not be justified. In that case the species will
fall naturally into the genus Thuiaria, as understood by
Levinsen. I have referred to the close correspondence
between H. distans and Sertularia tuba (which latter Levinsen
mentions among the Thuiarice), and I may add that the
chitinous prolongations below the hydrotheca3 (" stalk-
marks ") are quite similar in the two forms, though in my
figure of S. tuba, (being the superficial view only), they do not
appear.

I have examined many hydrotheca? of H. distans, in the
hope of finding some clue to the significance of the hydro-
thecal pouches, but have not succeeded. As to their origin,
it is clear from their appearance in optical sections that their
inner wall is composed of two layers of perisarc which are
united. It is as if an invagination of the perisarc had oc-
curred just above the base of the hydrotheca, directed
upward, and that the two adjacent walls of the invagination
had united, forming an erect perisarcal ridge, which is the
inner wall of the pouch ; or (which would have the same
optical effect), as if a pouch-shaped protrusion of the hydro-
thecal wall had been directed downward, overlapping that
part of the hydrotheca below it, and becoming closely united
therewith. Whichever has happened, the whole has been
ensheathed in a thin outer layer of perisarc, and the pouch
remains as an extremely contracted chamber completely
continuous with the general cavity of the hvdrotheca.

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 126°' 45^' E., 190-320
fathoms ; Long. 130° 40' E., 160 fathoms ; Long. 127° 20' E.;.
180 fathoms.

266 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Genus SELAGINOPSIS, Allman.
SELAGINOPSIS DICHOTOMA (Allman).

Dictyodadium dichotomum, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results
" Challenger " Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II.,
1888, p. 77, pi. xxxvi., fig. 2, 2a. Id., Levinsen,
Vidensk. Medd. fra den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 277.

Selaginopsis dichotoma, Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
xi., 1910, p. 16, fig. 5.

Hydrophyton monosiphonic, four or five inches in height,
in one plane, and forming a network by the anastomosing of
the numerous dichotomous divisions ; jointed usually at the
origin of the branches, rarely elsewhere.

Hydrothecse spirally arranged, each fifth one completing
the spiral, so that there are four longitudinal series ;
tubular, stout, curved outwards, adnate most of their length,
or with one-third part free, very often continued outwards by
five or six renewals for a distance equal to fully half their
original length ; border very delicate, with three deep
emarginations and a three-valved operculum.

Gonothecse large, ellipsoid, erect, springing from the inner
side of one of the branches just above a bifurcation, and
occupying the axil ; encircled by a very wide spiral wing,
the perisarc of which is double, with numerous internal radial
thickenings ; mouth a narrow tube, slightly expanded at the
end.

The description and figure of this interesting species in the
" Challenger " Report are incorrect in a number of particulars,
especially in regard to the form and arrangement of the
hydrothecse and gonothecse. Billard has already pointed out
some of these inaccuracies.

All the subdivisions of a colony are in one plane, as shown
.by Allman, and are united into a reticulum by frequent
anastomoses. The ramification is strictly dichotomous, the
two members of a bifurcation being about equal, and divergent
at a similar angle. A distinct constriction occurs at the origin
of one or both, and few other joints exist. The branches are
extended beyond the hydro thecate portion into twisted
tendrils, which terminate in attachment to the aperture of a
hydrotheca on another branch.

With regard to the arrangement of the hydrothecse, Billard
justly remarks that while they are, as Allman indicates, in
four rows, they are nearly equidistant, and not in groups of
four, as shown in Allrnan's figure. A series of five makes a

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 267

complete turn of the stem, the fifth being in line with the
first. There are some irregularities, and as the hydrothecse
are nearer to those next them than to those above and below,
the quadriserial arrangement is not conspicuous.

The hydrothecse are not of the slender, round-based, flask-
like form shown in the original figure, they are on the con-
trary rather stout, and when the free portion is short they
resemble those of a typical Thuiaria. They vary notably in
the length of the free portion ; in some fragments of the
•'Challenger" type, for which I have to thank Dr. Kirk-
patrick, it is very short ; in the " Endeavour " specimens it
is often fully one-third of the entire length. This takes no
account of the increase by regenerations, which in the
"Endeavour" specimens is very considerable, as it also is
in the " Challenger " specimen figured by Billard. Allman's
description of the hydrothecse as having a " small circular
even orifice " is inaccurate. The fact is that the delicacy and
collapsibility of the perisarc at the orifice, together with the
confused appearance caused by the remains of successive
renewals, makes it generally difficult to determine the original
form. Billard concludes that it is probably bilabiate. After
examining many hydrotheca?, I have been able to fully satisfy
myself in several cases that the border has three deep emargi-
nations, between which it forms triangular sharp points.
The aperture, as seen on looking directly into it, is somewhat
triangular, but with the angles more or less rounded off, and
one marginal point is at the top, and the other two at the
lower corners. In the lines marking successive renewals, the
points only are usually obvious, and the upper one often less
so than the others. In the best specimens the three-valved
operculum was very distinct. It will be apparent that the
form of the aperture and the operculum is practically the same
as in a typical Sertularella, such as S. divaricata, differing only
in the extreme delicacy of the perisarc and in the slightly
deeper emarginations.

The peduncles of the gonothecae do not spring from the
axils, as shown in Allman's figure. The gonotheca is erect and
central between the two branches at a bifurcation, but the
peduncle springs laterally from one of the branches, a little
above the axil ; it is noteworthy also that in all the portions
of colonies examined all the gonothecse spring from the same
side of the bifurcations.

The frill-like appendages surrounding the gonotheca are
very wide, and as Billard has noted, they are strengthened by
numerous radial internal thickenings. Surrounding the upper

268 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

part of the capsule they present a singular resemblance to the
old-fashioned ruff. A remarkable feature not hitherto noticed
is that instead of a series of annulations such as are generally
found in species of Sertularella, we have here a regular con-
tinuous spiral, making, when perfect, about seven or eight
complete turns round the gonotheca. The terminal part of
the topmost whorl rises quite abruptly at one side of the
tubular neck, which it almost equals in height ; it is here
nearly erect, but as it descends towards the middle part of the
gonotheca it spreads more outwards : towards the base it
becomes narrower and finally ceases. In a few cases, especi-
ally near the base of the gonotheca, the continuity of the
.spiral may become interrupted, and two or three complete
annulations may be found.

Besides D. dichotomum several other species have been
referred to the genus Dictyodadium. As for D. flabellum,
Nutting, and D. reticulatum, Kirchenpauer, Levinsen has
.already pointed out that they belong to the genus Sertularetta,
as defined by him, and it will be apparent from the foregoing
•description that D. dichotomum must keep them company.
But according to Hickson and Gravely the hydroid named by
them Dictyodadium fuscum (which Vanhoffen says is identical
with Selaginopsis affinis, Jaderholm), has no operculum, and
therefore cannot be associated with the three above men-
tioned. Whatever classification be adopted, I have at least
no hesitation in rejecting the genus Dictyodadium, which is
founded on no better ground than that of the colony forming
a flabellate structure, united into a network by the anasto-
moses of the branches.

Locs. — Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

Thirty-five miles south-east of Bruni Island, Tasmania,
150-230 fathoms.

Genus SERTULARIA, Linne.

Of the species here grouped provisionally under the old
genus Sertularia, S. minima and S. pusilla form, with their
allies S. minuta and S. muelleri, a distinct section characterised
by the possession of orifices in the hydrocaulus, generally
associated with tubular processes resembling minute sarco-
thecae. They are small unbranched forms, with the opercular
structure of Sertularia (Levinsen).

S. loculosa is a member of the group of which S. marginata
{Kirchenpauer), better known as S. inflata (Versluys), is the
most familiar representative. This also belongs to Levinsen 's
Sertularia.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 269

Two pinnate forms belonging to the same section are
S. unguiculata and S. geminata.

S. operculata is the type of Levinsen's proposed genus
Odontotheca, as of Agassiz' earlier Amphisbetia, and with it,
on account of the opercular characters, Levinsen has asso-
ciated S. macrocarpa and S. maplestonei. The two latter are
pinnate species, while S. operculata, with its allies S. bispinosa
and S. trispinosa, and perhaps one or two others, form a
sub-group distinguished from the other species by the peculiar
ramification.

S. elongata, in which the hydrothecse have six marginal
teeth and no operculum, belongs to the proposed new genus
Levinsenia.

SERTULARIA MINIMA, Thompson.

Sertularia minima, Thompson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5),
iii., 1879, p. 104, pi. xvii., fig. 3-3b. Id., Bale, Cat,
Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 89, pi. iv., figs. 9-10,
pi. xix., figs. 12-13 ; Id., Bale, Trans, and Proc. Roy.
Soc. Viet., xxiii., 1886, p. 109. Id., Allman, Jourri.
Linn. Soc., Zool., xix., 1885, p. 138, pi. xiii., figs. 3-4.
Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann. K. K. Hofmus.
Wien, v., 1890, p. 231. Id., Whitelegge in Etheridge,
Mem. Aust . Mus., ii., 1889, p. 41. Id., Farquhar,
Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1896, p. 462. Id., Hilgendorf,
Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxx., 1897, p. 209, pi. xx., fig. 1, la.
Id., Jaderholm, Schwed. Siidpolarexp., v., 1905, p.
24, pi. ix., figs. 4-5. Id., Thornely, Journ. Linn. Soc.,
Zool., xxxi., 1908, p. 83. Id., Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci.,
cxlviii., 1909, p. 194 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat.,
Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 17. Id., Jaderholm, Ark. for
Zool., vi., 1910, p. 3, pi. i., fig. 2. Id., Ritchie, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 845. Id. Mulder and
Trebilcock, Geelong Nat., (2), vi., 1914, p. 39,
pi. iv., figs. 2-3a, 5-6.

Synthecium gracilis, Coughtrey, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vii., 1874,
p. 286, pi. xx., figs. 26-31.

Sertularia pumila, Coughtrey, Trans. N.Z. Inst., viii., 1875,
p. 301 ; Id., Coughtrey, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (4),
xvii., 1876, p. 29.

Sertularia pumiloides, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,
pp. 21, 45, pi. xii., fig. 2.

Odontotheca minima, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den
naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 308.

270 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

? Sertularia crinoidea., Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xix.r
1885, p. 141, pi. xvi., figs. 1-2.

S. minima is the best-known representative of a smalt
group of species — comprising also 8. minuta, S. muelleri, and
8. pusilla — which agree in the simple habit, the bidentate
hydrothecae, and the squat high-shouldered compressed
gonothecse ; and which also agree, as pointed out by Mulder
and Trebilcock in a recent paper (cited above), in the presence
near the base of the internodes of small circular orifices,
generally associated with delicate tubular appendages pro-
jecting externally, and described as resembling rudimentary
sarcothecae.

In the type form the hydrorhiza has the transverse
markings along the edges, consisting of perisarcal thickenings,
which are familiar to observers as occurring in many small
Sertularians and Plumularians, but in some forms these are
wanting. In typical specimens from Port Phillip, Victoria,
I find very few of the orifices above referred to ; on some
shoots none were present, on others I found one only,
situated at or close to the base of the first internode. The
lower internodes are commonly rather broader at the base
than the rest, tending towards a rectangular form, and the
orifices are mostly just at the angle. The tubules are quite
rudimentary, consisting of an extremely narrow projecting
rim. A New Zealand specimen is very similar, but the
orifices are found here and there on other internodes than
the proximal ones ; the little receptacles are somewhat more
developed, and are tubular or slightly expanding.

The variety formerly described as 8. pumiloides is larger
in all its parts, both in the trophosome and the gonangia.
Its hydrorhiza may be a simple filiform tube, or, as in a
specimen from Queenscliff, Victoria, may have a series of
lateral contractions, so that it appears scalloped along both
margins. The little tubes are as in the last-mentioned form,
and rare except on the proximal internodes.

Another form, which we may call var. intermedia, links
the present species with S. minuta. Its internodes are
compact and square at the base, and the hydrothecae have
a decided constriction and oblique fold on the outer side, a
little above the base. These characters are very commonly
found in the proximal internodes of the type form ; here,
however, they are more pronounced and extend throughout.
The tubules are well-developed, slightly expanding, projecting
from the lower angles, and, as in S. minuta, they occur on
both sides and on all or nearlv all the internodes. The

V

hydrorhiza is typical.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 271

Fuller investigation will be necessary to determine the
true function of the apertures or receptacles described above,
also to ascertain whether they are sufficiently constant to
be of service in the discrimination of species or varieties.
In my specimens of S. muelleri they are fairly frequent, but
though the circular smooth-edged orifices are distinct enough
I failed to find any trace of tubes surrounding them ; indeed
they often have, in this species, the appearance of being
closed in by an excessively thin pellicle of perisarc. It is
just possible that they may correspond to the minute conical
protuberances found on the apophyses of many Plumularians,
the function of which is doubtful.

S. furcata, Trask, is evidently very closely allied to S.
minima, and judging from some of the published figures of
the former it seems possible that the two species may
ultimately have to be united.

Billard, who has examined the type of S. crinoidea, Allman,
is of opinion that it is not specifically distinct from S. minima.

LOG. — Nuyts Archipelago, Great Australian Bight, 10
fathoms.

SERTULARIA PUSILLA, nom. nov.
(Plate xlvi., figs. 3-6.)

Sertularia minima, Thompson, var. tubatheca, Mulder and
Trebilcock, Geelong Nat., (2), vi., 1914, p. 40,
pi. iv., fig. 1-ld.

Not Sertularia tubitheca, Allman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool.
Harvard, v., 1877, p. 24, pi. xvi., figs. 5-6.

Shoots about 6-8 mm. in height, unbranched, sometimes
divided into regular internodes, each bearing one pair of
hydrothecae, but often with nodes indistinct or quite wanting
on parts of the hydrocaulus or throughout.

Hydrothecae in pairs, opposite, tubular, regularly curved,
mostly in contact in front, separate behind, moderately
divergent ; aperture looking outward and upward, with two
pointed angular lateral lobes.

Minute tubular sarcothecae (?) on the lower portions of some
of the internodes.

Gonothecae one on a shoot, borne by the proximal inter-
node ; somewhat compressed, ovate or oblong, with the
shoulders rounded, and a distinct collar, very slightly
elevated, with minute internal denticles.

272 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

This minute species somewhat resembles S. tennis, but the
hydrothecse are less divergent and not conical, while the
gonothecse are of a similar type to those of 8. muelleri and
8. minima. In regard to the divisions of the internodes
there is much variation among the members of the same
colony ; in some shoots each pair of hydrothecse occupies
a distinct internode, in others some or all of the nodes are
obsolete, though the hydrocaulus at these points is con-
stricted exactly as when the nodes are distinct ; in other
cases again it is quite smooth and unconstricted.

I have no doubt that the species is identical with the
S. minima var. tubatheca of Mulder and Trebilcock, though
these observers appear to have seen specimens all of which
were divided into regular internodes of the first order. They
note the presence of the minute tubular processes, the
existence of which in S. minima and S. minuta they were the
first to point out. I find these appendages in my specimens,
but on some only of the internodes, and there is mostly only
a single one on an internode, which is situated immediately
below the base of one of the hydrothecse.

According to Mulder and Trebilcock the hydrorhiza may
have the linear marginal markings characteristic of S. minima
and many other species, or may be simply tubular.

I collected specimens at Williamstown, Victoria, many
years ago, and have seen no others except a fragment or two
among the " Endeavour " material. Gonothecse were present
on the Williamstown specimens.

jr,oc_ — Off Devonport and Launceston, Tasmania.

SERTULARIA LOCULOSA, Bale.

Sertularia loculosa, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884,
p. 91 (part), pi. iv., figs. 5-6, pi. xix., fig. 9 ; Id., Bale,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvi., 1913, p. 121, pi.
xii., figs. 7-8. Id., Warren, Ann. Natal Govt. Mus., i.,
1908, p. 306, fig. 8, pi. xlviii., fig. 37.

Sertularia turbinata, Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi.,
1910, p. 19 (in part).

? Sertularia turbinata, Ritchie, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1910, p. 821.

Not Sertularia loculosa, Busk, Voy. " Rattlesnake," i., 1852,

p. 393. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p.

91 (part), pi. ix., fig. 12. Id., Jaderholm, Ark. for

Zool., i., 1903, p. 285.
Not Dynamena turbinata, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor.

Flex., 1816, p. 180.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 273

A fragment or two of this species were found among debris
from some of the material which had been dried, and the
locality is doubtful.

It would come under the genus Sertularia, as restricted by
Levinsen.

SERTULARIA UNGUICULATA, Busk.

Sertularia unguiculata, Bale, Biological Results '* Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, pp. 11, 16 (synonymy).

According to Levinsen's classification this species would
remain in the genus Sertularia.

The teeth of the hydrothecae vary extremely in length.
They are usually longest in the small forms with widely
divergent hydrothecae, the outer tooth especially having the
characteristic claw-like form very pronounced. But in the
long slender variety mentioned in Part I. many of the hydro-
thecse on the proximal portions of the pinnae have the teeth so
much abbreviated that when viewed in front the border might,
without careful examination, be supposed entire ; at the same
time the more distal hydrothecae might at the first glance be
deemed to have the outer tooth only, the inner one being much
blunter and seen foreshortened. The closer examination of
this form strengthens my surmise that the Thuiaria hetero-
morpha of Allman may be only a variety of S. unguiculata
analogous to the above-mentioned.

The hydranths have about 20 tentacles.

Locs. — Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

Eastern Slope, Bass Strait, 80-300 fathoms.

SERTULARIA GEMINATA, Bale.

Sertularia geminata, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hyd. Zooph., 1884,
p. 78, pi. v., figs. 6-7, pi. xix., fig. 15 ; Id., Bale, Bio-
logical Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 10. Id.f
Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 22.
Id., Mulder and Trebilcock, Geelong Nat., (2), vi.,
1914, p. 6.

Desmoscyphus orifissus, Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool.,
xix., 1885, p. 143, pi. xvii., figs. 1-4.

Allman's habit-figure of D. orifissus represents S. geminata
very perfectly, but the magnified figure shows the hydro-
thecae much inflated at the base, on which account Allman
considered his specimens distinct. Billard, however, after
examining the " Challenger " types, reports that they do not
agree with the figure, and are not separable from S. geminata.

274 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The species appears to conform to the characters of the
genus Sertularia, as restricted by Levinsen.

Locs. — South coast of South Australia.
Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

SERTULARIA OPERCULATA, Linne.
« Sea-Hair," Ellis, Corall., 1755, p. 8, pi. iii., fig. 6.

Sertularia operculata, Linne, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 808. Id. ,
Ellis and Solander, Zooph., 1786, p. 39. Id., Esper,
Fortsetz. der Pflanz., 1794-1806, ii., pi. iv., figs. 1-2.
Id., Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., ii., 1816, p. 118. Id.,
Johnston, Brit. Zooph., 2nd ed., 1847, p. 77, pi. xiv.,
fig. 2-2a. Id., Busk, Voy. " Rattlesnake," i., 1852,
p. 392. Id., Hincks, Brit. Hydr. Zooph., 1868, p. 263,
pi. liv., figs. a-c. Id., Thompson, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., (5), iii., 1879, p. 106 (in part). Id., Bale, Cat.
Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 67, pi. vi., fig. i., pi.
xix., fig. 3. Id., Allman, Rep. Sci. Results " Chal-
lenger " Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II., 1888,
p 61, pi. xxx., fig. 1-la. Id., Marktanner-Turner-
etscher, Ann. K. K. Hofmus., Wien, v., 1890, p. 231.
Id., Pfeffer, Ergeb. deutscher Polarexp., Allg. Theil.,
ii., 1892, p. 116. Id., Farquhar, Trans. N.Z. Inst.,
xxviii., 1896, p. 462. Id., Jaderholm, Arkiv. for
Zool., i., 1903, p. 284. Id., Nutting, Amer. Hydr.,
Sert., 1904, p. 54, pi. ii., figs. 3-5. Id., Hartlaub,
Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii., 1905, p. 664, figs. Y4, Z4,
A5. Id., Bartlett, Geelong Nat., (2), iii., 1907,
p. 60, fig. — . Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
vi., 1907, p. 218 ; Id., Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci., cxlviii.,
1909, p. 1065 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
ix., 1909, p. 323 ; Id., Billard, Ann., Sci. Nat., Zool.,
(9), xi., 1910, p. 18. Id., Warren, Ann. Natal Govt.
Mus., i., 1908, p. 305. Id., Ritchie, Trans. Roy. Soc.
Edinb., xlvii., 1909, p. 82. Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr.
Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 295.

Sertularia usneoides, Pallas, Elench., 1766, p. 132.

Nigellastrum usneoides, Oken, Lehrb. der Naturg., 3 Teil,
Zool., i., 1815, p. 93.

Sertularia serra, Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., ii., 1816, p. 118.

Dynamena serra, Blainville, Man. d'Act., 1834, p. 484.

Dynamena brevicella, Lamouroux, Encyc. Meth., Zooph.,
1824, p. 288. Id., Quoy et Gaimard, 1824, p. 613.

HYDROIDA. BALE. 275

Sertularia brevicella, Milne-Edwards, Lamarck's Anim. sans
Vert., 2nd ed., 1836, p. 154.

Dynamena operculata, Lamouroux, Hist. Pol. Cor. Flex.,
1816, p. 176 ; Id., Lamouroux, Expos. Meth., 1821,
p. 12. Id., Blainville, Man. d'Act., 1834, p. 483, pi.
83, fig. 5, 5a. Id., Esper, Die Pflanz., 1788-1830, iii.,
p. 191. Id., Krauss, Cor. und Zooph. der Siidsee, 1837,
p. 27.

Amphisbetia operculata, L. Agassiz, Cont. Nat. Hist. U.S.,
iv., 1862, p. 355.

Dynamena fasciculata, Kirchenpauer, Verhandl. der K.
L.-C. d. Akad., xxxi., 1864, pp. 8, 12, fig. 7.

Odontotheca operculata, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den
naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 308.

? Dynamena pulchella, D'Orbigny, Voy. Amer. Merid., v., 5,
Zooph., 1839-1846, p. 26, pi. xi., figs. 9-11.

? Sertularia pulchella, Nutting, Amer. Hydr., Sert., 1904,
pi. ii., fig. 6 (not fig. 7) after D'Orbigny. Id., Hart-
laub, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii., 1905, p. 667, figs.
B5, C5 after D'Orbigny.

? Sertularia crinis, Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xix.,
1885, p. 139, pi. xiv., figs. 1, 2.

The specimens belong to the bidentate form, which I cannot
but regard as typical, for although Johnston and Hincks
concur in describing the species as possessing normally one
long tooth on the hydrotheca-margin, with a minute denticle
on each side of it, observers generally mention only the biden-
tate form, and I have myself seen no other.

Excepting the closely allied 8. bispinosa and S. trispinosa,
and one or two doubtful forms, I know of no other species of
Sertularia quite like the present in habit. Though branching
profusely, there is no distinction of stem and branches ; all
the divisions are alike, the ramification is strictly dichoto-
mous, and the two members of each bifurcation are about
equal, and are in divergent planes. The gonangia are rather
narrow in proportion to their length, and I have never seen
them compressed and widened upwards like those of S.
bispinosa.

Sertularia usneoides, Pallas, has long been recognised as
identical with 8. operculata, while 8. serra, Lamarck, and
Dynamena brevicella, Lamouroux, are included among the
synonyms on the authority of Billard, who has examined the
types. Kirchenpauer's Dynamena fasciculata also is obviously
no other than the present species.

276 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Dynamena pulchclla, D'Orbigny, has usually been considered
another synonym, but Nutting, who regarded it as identical
with S. furcata, Trask, treats it as distinct. The identity of
D. pulchella and S. furcata cannot now, I think, be maintained ;
the former is, as Fraser has pointed out, much and irregu-
larly branched, and attains a length of a quarter of a metre,
while its hydrothecae differ from those of S. operculata only in
having the two teeth about equal. S. furcata, on the other
hand, is shown by the accounts of Clark, Torrey, Fraser, and
Stechow to be a dwarf unbranched form of the Desmoscyphus-
type. There is no doubt that D. pulchella is identical with
8. operculata, or at least very closely allied to it ; as for 8.
furcata, I cannot see any definite distinction between it and
S. minima.

Billard regards S. crinis, Allman, as identical with S.
operculata, having found on examination of Allman's types
that the form of the hydrothecse and the gonothecse
is the same as in the latter species ; and he remarks that
it suffices to see Allman's figures to recognise the identity
of the two. This, however, can only apply to the minute
structure, the habit of S. crinis being very different from
that of S. operculata. In the latter, as already mentioned,
there is no distinction between stem and branches, all
the ramifications of the colony being alike. In S. crinis,
according to Allman's figure, there is a main stem four or five
inches in height, with several principal branches, from which
arise numerous tufted dichotomously divided branchlets.
On the stem and main branches the hydrothecse are from
about five to fifteen times as distant from each other as are
those on the small branchlets. Dr. Kirkpatrick, who has
kindly examined the type for me, states that there is a
distinct main stem from origin to apex, consisting of long
smooth internodes apparently without or with only one pair
of hydrothecse. These peculiarities seem sufficient to estab-
lish the claim of S. crinis to rank, if not as a separate species,
at least as a distinct variety of S operculata, the latter view
being taken by Dr. Kirkpatrick.

Locs. — Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

Off Devonport, Tasmania.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

SERTULARIA MAPLESTONEI, Bale.

JSertularia maplestonei, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 16 (synonymy).

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 277

Odontotheca maplestonei, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den
naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 308.

Loc. — Hunter Group, Bass Strait, 15 fathoms.

SERTULARIA MACROCARPA, Bale.

Sertularia macrocarpa, Bale, Biological Results ' Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 14 (synonymy).

Odontotheca macrocarpa, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den
naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 308.

Loc. — Bass Strait.

SERTULARIA ELONGATA, Lamouroux.

Sertularia elongata, Lamouroux, Hist. Pol. Cor. Flex., 1816,
p. 189, pi. v., fig. 3-3c. Id., Deslongschamps, Encycl.
Meth., Zooph., 1824, p. 681. Id., Krauss, Cor. und
Zooph. der Siidsee, 1837, p. 29. Id., Busk, Voy.
" Rattlesnake," i., 1852, p. 388. Id., Thompson, Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), iii., 1879, p. 107, pi. xviii., fig.
2-2c. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p.
75, pi. vi., figs. 7-8, pi. xix., fig. 7 ; Id., Bale, Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii., 1888, p. 770; Id., Bale,
Biological Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, pp. 8-10.
Id., Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xix., 1885, p. 140,
pi. xv., figs. 1-6. Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher,
Ann. K.K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 230. Id.,
Farquhar, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1896, p. 461. Id.,
Hilgendorf, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxx., 1897, p. 208, pi.
xix., fig. 3-3b. Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
vi., 1907, p. 217, fig. 2 ; Id., Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci.,
clxviii., 1909, p. 1065; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat.,
Zool., (9), ix., 1909, p. 323 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci.
Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 22, fig. 9 (not 8). Id.,
Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 845. Id.,
Mulder and Trebilcock, Geelong Nat. Viet., (2), vi.,
1914, p. 8, pi. i., figs. 7-10.

Sertularia scandens, Lamouroux, Hist. Pol. Cor. Flex.,

1816, p. 189.
Sertularia lycopodium, Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., 1816,

p. 117.

Sertularia millcfolium, Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., 1816,
p. 116.

Dynamene abietinoides, Gray in Dieffenbach, Travels in New
Zealand, ii., 1843, p. 294.

278 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Sertularia abietinoides, Hutton, Trans. N.Z. Inst., v., 1872,
p. 257. Id., Coughtrey, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vii., 1874,
p. 285, pi. xx., figs. 16, 18-20 ; Id., Coughtrey, Trans.
N.Z. Inst., viii., 1875, p. 300. Id., Pfeffer, Erg. d.
deutscher Polarexp., ii., 1892, p. 116.

Most specimens of S. elongata can be definitely assigned to
either the large or the small variety, though intermediate
forms occur. The two varieties were by Lamouroux named
respectively 8. elongata and 8. scandens, and by Lamarck
8. lycopodium and 8. millefolium. I have referred to this
species in Part I1, and it has been so often described that
little need be said of it here. No operculum has been
detected, consequently in the system of classification pro-
posed by Levinsen it is excluded from the genus. The
hydranths have about 16-18 tentacles.

Billard, in his Revision of part of the British Museum
Hydroids, (Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, page 22), has
described some colonies which he found among clusters of
Sertularia elongata from Australia in the Bowerbank Collection,
and which, owing to this association, he has hesitated to
describe as a new species, though they differ from 8. elongata
in the opposite ramification, in the opposite position of the
cauline hydrothecse, in the number of the marginal teeth, as
well as the form of the hydrothecse, in the presence of an
unpaired hydrotheca on the proximal part of each pinna,
and finally in the totally different form of the gonangia
Billard thinks it just possible that this may be a curious case
of sexual dimorphism.

I do not think this theory tenable, for several reasons. In
the first place, of course, is the fact of the complete unlikeness
of the two species in every detail. This of itself should, I
think, be considered conclusive against any evidence short
of tracing the two to the same hydro rhiza. Then it must be
remembered that 8. elongata is an extremely common species,
the most abundant indeed on the southern Australian coast,
and it is scarcely credible that one of its sexual forms should
have hitherto escaped observation except in this single
instance, especially as the difference in the ramification
would be apparent to the naked eye.

Another important consideration is that this is not an
entirely isolated form, but is a representative of a group of
species, all of which agree in their most characteristic
features. Billard refers to one of these — 8. huttoni, Mark-
tanner-Turneretscher — and to this may be added 8. acantho-
stoma, Bale, and 8. insignis, Thompson.

1. Bale— Biological Results "Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 9.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 271)

Further reference to these and other related forms will be
found under the description of the proposed genus Levinsenia,
all the species of which have six or more teeth on the
hydrotheca-margin, and, so far as is known, no operculum.

Loc. — Nuyts Archipelago, Great Australian Bight, 10
fathoms.

Genus THUIARIA, Fleming.
THUIARIA SINTJOSA, Bale.

Thuiaria sinuosa, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii.,
1888, p. 772, pi. xviii., figs. 9, 10 ; Id., Bale, Biological
Results "Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 12. Id., Ritchie,
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 844, pi. Ixxxv.,
fig. 4. Id., Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den naturh.
Foren, 64, 1913, p. 297. Id., Mulder and Trebilcock,
Geelong Nat., (2), vi., 1914, p. 9. Id., Briggs, Rec.
Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 294, pi. xxv., fig. 1.

Though obviously belonging to this species the specimens
differ from the type in having the curvature of the hydro-
thecse very slight or, more commonly, entirely wanting.
The apertures are ill-defined, in consequence of the extreme
delicacy of the perisarc towards the margin.

LOGS. — Great Australian Bight, Long. 127° E., 100 fathoms..
Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45 fathoms.

Genus SERTULARELLA, Gray.

Though Levinsen's views regarding the genus Serlularella
are to some extent combated by Nutting and other observers,
who demur to admitting multiserial species (Dictyocladium)f
and admit some which Levinsen would exclude, there appears
to be practical unanimity regarding those forms which have
the characteristic three- or four-valved operculum and a
biserial and alternate arrangement of the hydrothecse ; even
when their division into long internodes supporting numerous
hydrothecae would bring them strictly within the limits of
the genus Thuiaria, as formerly understood. Such species,
included in the present collection, are Thuiaria lata and
Sertularella adpressa, which are certainly not, at any stage
of their growth, divided into single-celled internodes, the
feature which I have urged in Part I. should be regarded as
characteristic of the genus, from the point of view of the
colonial characters. Accordingly I now rank these forms in
the genus Sertularella, and this I consider tantamount to
admitting that all biserial forms with the characteristic

280 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

opercular structure should be so placed ; for although the
alternate arrangement of the hydrothecse is insisted on by
some, it can scarcely be maintained that a species possessing
the other characters should be excluded simply because the
hydrothecse are not alternate.

The species in this collection may be accordingly divided
into two main groups : the typical Sertularellce, in which each
internode supports one hydrotheca, and the species above-
named, with numerous hydrothecse on an internode ; S.
divaricata, in some of its forms, is distinctly intermediate. If
Levinsen's grouping be strictly followed Dictyodadium dicho-
tomum will represent a third section.

SERTULARELLA GAUDICHAUDI (Lamouroux).

Sertularia gaudichaudi, Lamouroux, Quoy et Gaimard, p.
615, pi. xc., figs. 4, 5.

? Sertularia picta, Meyen, Nov. Act. Leop.-Car. Acad., xvi.,
Suppl. i., 1834, p. 201, pi. xxxiv., figs. 1-3. Id., Hart-
laub., Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 77, pi.
v., fig. 14, pi. vi., figs. 17, 18, 20.

Sertularella polyzonias, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 104, pi. iii., fig. 1, pi. xix., fig. 25; Id., Bale,
Proc.Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii., 1888, p. 763. Id.,
Warren, Ann. Natal Govt. Mus., i., 1908, p. 291, fig.
5 A, B, pi. Ixvii., figs. 18-20. Id., Stechow, Zool.
Jahrb., xxxii., 1912, p. 358.

Sertularia laxa, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results " Challenger "
Exped., Zool., xxiii., 1888, Hydro ida, pt. II., p. 55,
pi. xxvi., fig. 2, 2a. Id., Pictet et Bedot, Res. camp,
scient. Prince de Monaco, fasc. xviii., 1900, p. 22.

Sertularella mediterranea, Hartlaub, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
xvi., 1900, pp. 86, 47, fig. 22, pi. v., figs. 10, 11, 15, 16.

Sertularia polyzonias (in part), Vanhoffen, Deutsche Siid-
polar-Exp. 1901-1903, xi., Zool. iii., 1911, p. 322,
fig. 39.

Serlularella gaudichaudi, Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
ix., 1909, p. 317, fig. 5 ; Id., Billard, Ami. Sci. Nat.,
Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 11 ; Id., Billard, Arch. de. Zool.
exp. et gen., 51, 1912, p. 464.

?? Not Sertularella polyzonias (Linne).

The relations between Sertularella mediterranea, Hartlaub
(which Billard finds to be identical with Sertularia
gaudichaudi, Lamouroux) and S. polyzonias are greatly in

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 281

doubt. Stechow, Warren, and Vanhoffen regard them as
belonging to one species, but Billard considers S. mediterranea
as sufficiently distinguished by the presence of internal teeth
in the hydrotheca. This, however, is not in accordance with
the definitions of Hartlaub, who says that S. polyzonias also
possesses these appendages, though they are not so strongly
developed as in S. mediterranea, and may be entirely wanting.
He mentions further that he has seen specimens which he
is in doubt whether to place under S. mediterranea or S.
polyzonias. All this may be regarded as favouring the view
of those observers who consider the two species identical ;
but on the other hand it seems equally reasonable to suppose
that Hartlaub was wrong in assigning to S. polyzonias any of
the specimens with internal teeth, and that Billard's view
is the correct one. Stechow's reason for believing the species
the same was that he had found specimens with internal
teeth — therefore to be referred to S. mediterranea — but with
an external marsupium on the gonotheca, the latter con-
dition being characteristic of S. polyzonias. This, however,
is quite in accordance with Hartlaub's statement that 8.
polyzonias may have internal teeth, which both Stechow and
Billard omit to notice.

The position then seems to be that Hartlaub makes the
presence or absence of the marsupium the prime specific
character, while Billard regards the internal teeth as of more
importance.

Dr. Ritchie, who has kindly sent me British specimens of
8. polyzonias, informs me that he has examined colonies of
that species from a number of widely separated localities,
and has in no case found internal teeth present.

All the Australian specimens which I have so far observed
possess these teeth, and therefore conform to Billard's
description of S. gaudichaudi (S. mediterranea) ; I therefore
refer them to that species, leaving for future settlement the
question of its identity or otherwise with S. polyzonias.

I only saw one fragment among the " Endeavour " material,
and am doubtful as to its locality ; it agreed, however, with
Port Phillip specimens which I formerly described as S.
polyzonias. The shoots are simple or with few and irregular
branches, given off below the hydrothecae, just as in S.
polyzonias1 ; the hydrothecse are adnate for about half their
length. In certain minor particulars they differ from
Billard's description ; thus the hydrothecae are in one plane

1. In the specimen of S. polyzonias sent to me from Scotland by Dr.
Ritchie, about half the branches spring from the interior of hydrothecae.

282 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

(but this agrees with S. mediterranea), the base of the branches
is only slightly twisted, or not at all, and the annulation of
the gonotheca extends over a greater part of its length.
According to Billard the typical S. gaudichaudi and S.
mediterranea have the outer tooth of the hydrotheca longer
than the others, so that the aperture appears oblique ; this
character is present in our specimens to such a slight extent
as to be scarcely noticeable, and in many hydrothecse it is
not discernible at all. All these characters are of known
inconstancy, and the differences would not justify a specific
separation. The gonothecse may have either three or four
pointed teeth on the summit, and this in the same 'shoot.1
The type form, according to Billard, has four, while the form
described by Allman as S. laxa is said to have three. It is
on Billard's authority that the latter is referred to S.
gaudichaudi.

It is noticeable that in this species, although there are
four marginal teeth, the internal ones number only three,
and the same condition obtains in S. microgona and S.
angulosa, as well as in the species next to be described.
Hartlaub, it is true, describes S. mediterranea as having
four internal teeth, but as he does not draw any distinction
in regard to this character between that species and the
internally toothed forms which he refers to S. polyzonias,
it seems permissible to suspect that this is an oversight.
The Bass Strait specimen with internal teeth, which he
refers to S. polyzonias, is probably the same as the present
form. All my specimens are distinctly smaller throughout
than British examples of S. polyzonias.

The distinction between S. polyzonias and S. gaudichaudi,
if finally upheld, will invalidate the record of the former
as a member of the Australian fauna. Its inclusion in
the '" Catalogue of the Australian Hydro id Zoophytes " was
solely on the evidence of specimens with internal teeth
(though this feature was not observed till later), and I am
not aware of any other record of the occurrence of S. poly-
zonias in Australia, except Hartlaub's, referred to above. Up
to the present, therefore, the existence of the typical S.
polyzonias has not been established, and it is quite probable
that many others of the locality -records which have con-
tributed to procure for it the character of ubiquity may
have also referred to forms such as that here classed as S.
gaudichaudi.

1. In a single shoot of S. polyzonias I find gonangia with three, four,
and five teeth.

HYDROIDA. — -BALE. 283

SERTULARELLA TASMANICA, sp. nov.
(Plate xlvi., fig. 2.)

Hydrocaulus about one inch in height (or more ?), stem
fascicled towards the base, branches irregularly pinnate,
springing from below the hydrothecse ; stem and branches
divided by oblique twisted joints into long internodes, each
bearing a hydrotheca close to the summit ; proximal inter-
nodes of the branches very long, smooth or slightly undu-
lated at their origin.

Hydrotheca in a single plane, large, divergent, urceolate,
adnate for more than half their length ; border slightly
expanding, with four marginal teeth ; three strong internal
vertical teeth, two below the two upper emarginations of
the border and the third below the abcauline marginal tooth.

Gonosome — ?

This species has the general habit of S. polyzonias and
S. gaudicliaudi, with the latter of which I was at first inclined
to place it. It is distinguished by the fasciculation of the
stem, which, however, did not extend far above the base.
The fascicle is formed, as Hartlaub points out in the case
of allied species, by the development of supplementary tubes
which originate at various points on the stem and grow
downward. The hydrothecse are larger than those of S.
gaudicJiaudi, their usual length being, between extreme
points, about .815mm., and they also differ from those of
that species in having a much larger proportion — nearly
two-thirds — of their length adnate. The border is of the
same form as that of S. polyzonias, and transverse to the
hydrotheca ; only rarely is there discernible a slight tendency
to the obliquity which, according to Billard, is a feature of
S. gaudichaudi. The internal vertical processes are large
and prominent. The portion of the internode below the
hydrotheca is very variable in length, about .450 mm. being
common ; the first internode of a branch, however, is much
longer, sometimes attaining as much as 1.8mm. between
its origin and the base of the first hydrotheca. These inter-
nodes may have a few faint undulations close to their origin,
but are more commonly quite smooth.

Loc. — Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

SERTULARELLA GAYI (Lamouroux).

.Sertularia gayi, Lamouroux, Exp. Meth., 1821, p. 12, pi.
66, figs. 8-9. Id., Deslongchamps, Encyc. Meth.,
Zooph., 1824, p. 682. Id., Milne -Edwards, Lamarck's
Anim. sans Vert., 2nd ed., ii., 1836, p. 152.

284 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Sertularella gayi, Hincks, Brit. Hydr. Zooph., 1868, pp.
237, 238, fig. 29, pi. 46, fig. 2. Id., Verrill, Amer.
Jour. Sci. and Arts, (3), v., 1873, pp. 9, 14. Id.,
Allman, Trans. Zool. Soc., viii., 1874, pp. 471, 474,
pi. Ixvi., fig. 3, 3a (var. robusta) ; Id., Allman, Mem.
Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, v., 1877, p. 22, pi. xv.,
figs. 3-5 (var. robusta). Id., Sars, Bidr. til Kunds. om
Norg. Hydr., 1874, p. 109. Id., Kirchenpauer, Abh.
Nat. Ver. Hamb., viii., 1884, p. 41. Id., Hartlaub, Abh.
Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 61. Id., Nutting,
American Hydroids, pt. II., Sertularida?, 1904,
p. 78, pi. xiv., figs. 1-7. Id., Billard, Exp. Sci. du
" Travailleur " et du " Talisman," Hydroides, viii.,
1906, p. 184, fig. 9, p. 185 (var. robusta and var.
elongata). Id., Jaderholm, Kungl. svenska Vetenskap-
sakad. Handl., 45, 1909, p. 100, pi. xi., fig. 13.

Sertularia ericoides var., Pallas, Elench., 1766, p. 127.

Sertularia polyzonias var. ft, Johnston, Brit. Zooph., 2nd
ed., 1847, p. 61, pi. x., fig. 2.

Sertularella annulata, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results ;' Chal-
lenger " Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II., 1888,
p. 52, pi. xxiv., fig. 2, 2a. Id., Hartlaub, Abh. Nat.
Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 54.

Sertularella Gayi (Lamouroux), var. Allmani, Billard, Ann.
Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 10, fig. 3.

The hydrothecse are large and nearly smooth, with very
inconspicuous teeth ; the gonothecae with the annulations
irregular, often almost wanting, and usually with three short
teeth on the summit.

Loc. — Eastern slope, Bass Strait, 80-300 fathoms.

SERTULARELLA UNDULATA, sp. nov.
(Plate xlvi., fig. 1.)

Hydrocaulus unbranched, about ^ inch in height, divided
by oblique twisted joints into internodes of very variable
length, each supporting a hydrotheca at the summit and
having its lower portion strongly undulated.

Hydrothecse short, stout, free for half their length or
more, proximal half smooth, distal half with a strong annular
ridge or shoulder, above which the hydrotheca is somewhat
narrower, and a second slighter annulation close to the wide
aperture, border square, with four small teeth, between
which are shallow emarginations ; no internal teeth.

Gonosome. — ?

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 285

A small colony of this species was found growing on one
of the specimens of S. tasmanica. The longest shoots con-
sisted of seven or eight internodes. The hydrothecee are
seated high on the internodes, the tops of which reach only
to about their middle. The first internode is about as long
as the hydrotheca ; the more distal ones may attain more
than twice their length. Below the hydrothecse, and for a
distance equal to about the length of the latter, the inter-
nodes are narrowed downwards ; the rest of their length
is slender and of about uniform thickness, and for the most
part strongly undulated ; the undulations often extending
up nearly as far as the hydrotheca.

The hydrothecse have no distinct annulations below the
shoulder, which is a somewhat prominent annular ridge, and
above which the hydrotheca is rather abruptly contracted,
but to a slight extent only ; between the shoulder and the
aperture is another annulation, which is of about the same
diameter as the expanded border. The width of the aperture
from point to point is very little less than that of the hydro-
theca at its thickest portion, a rather exceptional condition
among the quadridentate species. The emarginations of
the border do not usually run in a uniform curve from point
to point, but are somewhat flattened (as seen in profile), and
the teeth are more or less nipple-shaped.

One of the shoots is continued into a stolon, and on this
are borne a new shoot and also two isolated single hydrothecae.

Loc. — Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

SERTTJLARELLA INDIVISA, Bale.

Sertularella indivisa, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,
p. 24, pi. xii., fig. 7 ; Id., Bale, Cat, Austr. Hydr.
Zooph., 1884, p. 105, pi. iii., fig. 5, pi. xix., fig. 27 ;
Id., Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii., 1888,
pp. 764, 765. Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann.
K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 224. Id., Billard,
Bull. Mus. d'Hist. nat., 1905, p. 334.

Sertularella solidula, Bale, Journ. Micr. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,
p. 24, pi. xii., fig. 8 ; Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr.
Zooph., 1884, p. 106, pi. iii., fig. 6, pi. xix., fig. 28 ; Id.f
Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), iii., 1888, pp. 764,
765. Id., Whitelegge in Etheridge, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
ii., 1889, p. 41. Id., Hartlaub, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
xvi., 1900, pp. 71, 41, 56, 76, 125, pi. iv., figs. 3, 13, 14,
27, pi. vi., fig. 13 ; Id., Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb., xiv.,
1901, p. 371. Id., Stechow, Abh. math.-phys.

286 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Klasse K. Bayer Akad. Wissensch., iii. Suppl.-Bd.,
1913, p. 136, figs. 108-110; (Sertularella, No. 10,
Inaba, Zool. Mag. Tokyo, 1890, figs. 26-28).

Sertularella variabilis, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales,
(2), iii., 1888, p. 764, pi. xv., figs. 5-9. Id., Hartlaub,
Abh. Nat. Ver. Harab., xvi., 1890, p. 66.

.Sertularella Sieboldi, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
viii., 1884, p. 49, pi. xvi., fig. 5, 5a. Id., Hartlaub,
Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 69, pi. iv., fig. 12.

Sertularella Mulleri, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
viii., 1884, p. 49, pi. xvi., fig. 7-7b. Id., Hartlaub,
Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 70, pi. ii., figs.
43-45, 59.

Not S. indivisa, Stechow, Abh. math.-phys. Klasse K.
Bayer Akad. Wissensch., iii. Suppl.-Bd., 1913, p. 134,
figs. 106, 107 ; (Sertularella No. 9, Inaba, Zool. Mag.
Tokyo, 1890, figs. 22-25).

Hartlaub has united 8. indivisa, S. solidula, and S. varia-
bilis under the name of S. solidula, and in view of the extreme
range of variation found among these forms, I cannot but
•concur in his judgment. The species, however, must be
named S. indivisa instead of 8. solidula^ the former name
having priority.

Hartlaub also considers it probable that the S. sieboldi and
S. muelleri of Kirchenpauer belong to the same species. It
would be impossible to identify them from Kirchenpauer's
-account, but Hartlaub's descriptions and figures seem to
me to support his opinion.

S. exigua, Thompson, is also ranked by Hartlaub as a
synonym, on the strength of specimens marked S. exigua in
the Kirchenpauer collection. 8. exigua, however, has four-
toothed hydrothecse, consequently Kirchenpauer's specimen
must be incorrectly referred to that species.

Inaba's Species 9, which Stechow refers to S. indivisa, is
also a four-toothed form, and, therefore, its reference to
S. indivisa is inadmissible.

The " Endeavour " specimens agree pretty closely with the
typical S. indivisa, but are very thin and delicate. Most of
them were growing on S. adpressa, Ritchie.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.

Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30 fathoms.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75
fathoms.

Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 287

SERTULARELLA DIVARICATA, (Busk).

Sertularella divaricata, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 20, pi. ii., figs. 1-9 (synonymy).
Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 291/

Locs. — Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

Eight miles east of Sandon Bluff, Queensland, 35-40 fathoms.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

Great Australian Bight.

Hunter Group, Bass Strait.

SERTULARELLA NEGLECTA, Thompson.

Sertularella neglecta, Thompson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5),
iii., 1879, p. 100, pi. xvi., fig. 1. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr.
Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 110, pi. iii., fig. 3, pi. xix., figs.
22, 23. Id., Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
viii., 1884, p. 48. Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher,
Ann. K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 224. Id.,
Hartlaub, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, pp. 69,
16, 20, 26, 56, 112, pi. ii., figs. 25, 53.

Sertularella Sonderi, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
viii., 1884, p. — , pi. xvi., fig. 4.

? Sertularella trimucronata, Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool..
xix., 1885, p. 135, pi. x., figs. 1,2. Id., Hartlaub, Abh,
Nat. Ver. Hamb., xvi., 1900, p. 48, fig. 24 ; Id.,
Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., iii., 1905, p. 626,
fig. Q3-

I have added S. trimucronata, Allman, to the synonyms, as
I cannot find in Allman's account anything to differentiate it
from the present species.

Locs. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

Off Murray mouth, South Australia, 20 fathoms.

Eleven miles 74° W. of Cape Martin, South Australia, 21
fathoms.

SERTULARELLA LATA, Bale.

Thuiaria lata, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881, pp.
26, 45, pi. xiii., fig. 2 ; Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr.
Zooph., 1884, p. 120, pi. vii., fig. 4 ; Id., Bale, Proc.
Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893, p. 103, pi. iv., fig. 1 ;
Id., Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914,
p. 12. Id., Kirkpatrick, Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soc.,
(n.s.), vi., 1890, p. 604.

288 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Sertularella lata, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd. fra den naturh.
Foren, 64, 1913, p. 312.

Not Sertularella lata, Billard, Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen.,
(4), vii., 1907, p. 346, fig. 4.

I have referred to this species in Part I under its original
name of Thuiaria lata, but for the reasons already stated I
now class it under the genus Sertularella.

With regard to its specific affinities much confusion exists.
A number of hydroids have been referred to the species by
different observers, some of which may possibly be rightly
placed, while others have the gonangia so unlike those of
S. lata in every particular that it is difficult to understand
why they should have been associated with it. Apparently
there are two species1 (at least) closely resembling each
other in the trophosome, but differing widely in the form of
the gonangia. No fertile specimens of S. lata have been
observed except a single one from Port Phillip, Victoria,
collected by the late Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson.

The following list includes the forms which have been
regarded by other observers as specifically identical with
S. lata : —

Sertularia tridentata, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor. Flex.,
1816, p. 187.

Thuiaria diaphana, Busk, Allman, Jo urn. Linn. Soc., Zool.,
xix., 1885, p. 145, pi. xviii., figs. 1-3.

Thuiaria hyalina, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results " Challenger "
Exped., Zool., xxiii., Hydroida, pt. II., 1888, p. 69,
pi. xxxiii., fig. 2-2a.

Sertularella lata, Nutting, Amer. Hydr., II., Sertulariadse,
1904, p. 85, pi. xviii., fig. 10 ; Id., Nutting, Bull. U.S.
Fish. Comm., 1905, p. 948.

Sertularella Torreyi, Nutting, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1905,
p. 949, pi. iv., fig. 4, pi. xi., figs. 2-3.

Sertularella lata, Billard, Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen., (4),
vii., 1907, p. 346, fig. 4.

Sertularella speciosa, Congdon, Proc. Amer. Acad. of Arts
and Sci., xlii., 1907, p. 476, figs. 24-28.

1 . Another species having similar hydrothecae is Thecocladium ftabflhnn,
Allman. Billard' s figure of this species (Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p.
12) really more resembles S. lata than does his figure of " Sertularella lata."
(Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen., (4), vii., 1907, p. 346), and would indeed serve
admirably for S. lata except for the peculiarity of the pinnae springing from
hydrothecae.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 289

Sertularella tridentata, Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
ix., 1909, p. 312 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool.,
(9), xi., 1910, p. 14.

Sertularella tridentata, Stechow, Abh. math.-phys. Klasse
K. Bayer Akad. Wissensch., hi. Suppl.-Bd., 1913, p.
137, figs. 111-113; (A7o. 17 Thuiaria sp., Inaba, Zool.
Mag. Tokyo, 1890, figs. 46-48).

Of the foregoing, Sertularella tridentata, Lamouroux, is said by
Billard, who has examined the type specimens, to be identical
with the form described by him in 1907 as S. lata, hence he
has since considered the latter a synonym of S. tridentata.
Lamouroux' specimens, not including the gonangia, may be
doubtful, but if really identical with Billard's species, they
are not the true S. lata.

Nutting says that the specimens assigned by him to S. lata
are the same as Allman's Thuiaria hyalina, types of which he
has examined ; the absence, however, in both cases of the
gonangia renders the identification doubtful. It should be
noted that Allman describes the hydranth of T. hyalina as
only partially retractile, the upper portion, including the
tentacular crown, being incapable of withdrawal into the
hydrotheca, even when most fully retracted. In S. lata, on
the contrary, the hydranths are found fully withdrawn into
the hydrotheca, and occupying little more than the lower
half of its cavity.

Inaba's species, which Stechow has referred to S. tridentata,
is also without the gonangia. The figures resemble 8. lata,
but the aperture of the hydrotheca does not approximate
so closely to the vertical position. It cannot be identified
with 8. lata with any certainty.

There remains Billard's 8. lata or S. tridentata, with
T. diaphana, Busk, S. Torreyi, Nutting, and S. speciosa,
Congdon, and it is probable that these forms constitute a
single species, the gonangia, as well as the hydrothecse, being
of the same type throughout. Billard's figure of the tropho-
some differs from S. lata in the hydrothecse being more bent
outward and having the apertures looking more upward.
The most distinctive feature of this form, however, as of the
others here associated with it, is the character of the gonangia.
These are cylindrical in the upper half and gradually tapering
below, not contracted at the summit, but even, according to
Allman and Congdon, somewhat flaring. Surrounding the
upper half are a number of longitudinal plications, between
which the wall of the gonangium is convexly curved outwards.
There is no trace of bilateral symmetry, and the form bears

290 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

a striking resemblance to that of the gonangium of Orthopyxis
wilsoni, Bale.1 Nutting also refers to this similarity to the
gonangia of some of the Campanularians.

From this type the gonangia of S. lata differ in every
character. In the first place the bilateral development is
conspicuous, the gonangia having distinct dorsal and ventral
aspects, the latter of which is directed inward. From a
little above the middle the gonangium tapers gradually to
the peduncle ; it is also narrowed upwards, but in a less
degree, and the narrowing at this part is mostly on the
dorsal side, which is continued upward considerably higher
than the ventral, and at the summit rounded over to the
oblique concave termination, which is thus contracted at
the dorsal border, but little or not at all in front. There
is nothing in any way resembling the plicated condition
found in the other species, but on the other hand there are
regular transverse undulations (generally more pronounced
than I have figured them), which are strongest at the dorsum,
and become shallower towards the venter, where they are
often not traceable. The gonangia are not erect on the
pinnae, but lie along them, with the venter almost appressed
to them.

The pinnse are usually long, attaining about three-quarters
of an inch, and narrow at the point of origin. The distal
internodes often bear only three hydrothecse, but very rarely
less. The hydrothecae have four shallow emarginations ; the
intermediate points are usually distinct at the sides, but less
pronounced above and below. The aperture is nearly vertical
in typical specimens, in others somewhat less so. The
terminal hydrotheca in each internode has the aperture
directed slightly more upward than the others.

Locs. — Off St. Francis Island, Great Australian Bight, 30
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, 80-120 fathoms and 130-190
fathoms.

SERTULARELLA ADPRESSA, Ritchie.

Sertulardla adpressa, Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16,
1911, p. 837, pi. Ixxxv., fig. 5, pi. Ixxxviii., figs. 1,2, 9.
Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 291, pi.
xxv., fig. 2.

This species has been fully described by Ritchie, and the
present specimens, for the most part, answer perfectly to the

1. Bale — Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvii., pi. xii., fig. 5.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 1_>(.)1

description. The gonothecse, however, are narrower than
those figured ; here and there one is seen which in lateral
view agrees with the figure, but this is exceptional ; while
the frontal aspect is far narrower, its width being usually
just about the same as that of the pinna with its hydrothecae,
and the same width is maintained throughout, except just
at the base.

The hydrothecae are somewhat similar to those of S.
divaricata, but are of narrower proportions, more regularly
curved, and with the aperture smaller. In most cases
regeneration has occurred repeatedly, and the later peristomes
are generally decidedly smaller than the primary one, as
well as slighter in texture.

There are no nodes, or very few, in the pinna? ; the hydro-
thec83 being in long uninterrupted series, such as were
formerly considered characteristic of the genus Thuiaria.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.
Shoalhaven Bight, New South Wales, 15-45 fathoms.

Family PLUMULARIID^.

This is by far the most important family represented in
the collections, whether regarded in relation to the variety
of the forms observed, or to the beauty and luxuriance of
many of the species, or to the abundance of the colonies.
Several species, both among the Statoplea and the Eleuther-
oplea, attain over a foot in height, and three or four reach
two feet, possibly more. Out of thirty species the genera
Nemertesia, Kirchenpaueria, and Halicornopsis are repre-
sented by one each ; the rest, with one exception, are divided
among the genera Plumularia, Aglaophenia (with Thecocarpus)
and Halicornaria. The exception is a small form closely
allied to Cladocarpus, for which a new genus is proposed
under the name Cladocarpella.

Genus PLUMULARIA, Lamarck.

The genus Plumularia, as T have been used to regard it,
would include a number of forms which, by Allman and
others, were considered to be types of distinct genera. Such
are Antennella, Acanthella, Heteroplon, and Halopteris. I
have already referred to Antennella, which is a convenient
division, but subject to the disadvantage that in studying a
newly discovered specimen one cannot be certain whether
it is a true Antennella or merely an unbranched form of some
pinnate species.

292 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Acanthella, like Acanthocladium among the Statoplea, is
•distinguished only by having its upper hydrocladia abortive,
and terminating in, or replaced by, pointed spines.

Heteroplon is a synonym for those species of Plumularia
in which the anterior mesial sarcothecse are rigid instead of
freely moveable, a condition which, as I pointed out long
ago, is as common as the contrary. It may, of course, be
held that this character is sufficient to found a genus upon
(though the difference between the fixed and the moveable
sarcotheca depends merely on the thickness of the basal part,
•and every intergradation occurs) ; no one, however, has
adopted the genus since Allman, and it is only mentioned
here since it appears in Stechow's recent list of the genera.
Even Allman, when proposing the genus, at the same time
described as a Plumularia (P. laxa) the common P. campanula,
which has similar sarcothecse to H. pluma. If Allman's
figure of the latter species in front view1 be compared with
my front view of P. campanula? it will be seen that the
anterior sarcothecse are as similar as if copied from the same
individual. Allman also describes as P. armata a species
which, according to Billard, has sarcothecse of the same
type, though differently represented in Allman's figure.

Of course the admission of the rigid sarcotheca as a good
generic character would involve, for those who admit the
genus Antennella, the creation of a new genus for those
unbranched forms having moveable anterior sarcothecse (the
type form, A. secundaria, having them fixed), and similarly
the genus Monotheca of Nutting would have to be subdivided,
since of about eight forms known to me five have the anterior
.sarcothecae moveable, while three have them in the form of
.stout rigid processes of the internode.

Halopteris is another type with fixed sarcothecse, but its
-chief peculiarity was supposed to be the possession by the
lateral sarcothecse of a long tubular stem, adnate to the
hydro theca. In 1887 I suggested that this was probably
only a peduncle, or process from the internode, differing only
in its greater length from those found in P. catharina, P.
campanula, and many other species. Nutting has confirmed
this surmise in regard to Allman's species, and I have
specimens of a nearly allied form — P. balei, Bartlett — which
seems exactly similar to H. carinata so far as the lateral
sarcothecae are concerned, and in this the structures in
question are also undoubtedly peduncles. Antennella balei,

1. Allman — Rep. Sci. Results "Challenger" Exped., Zool., vii.,
Hydroida, pt. I., 1883, pi. viii., fig. 2.

3. Bale— Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), III., 1888, pi. xx., fig. 2.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 293

Billard, is another form with the same characteristic. I
fully agree with Billard that these genera (except perhaps
Antennella) are entirely superfluous.

The presence of an intrathecal ridge in Plumularia and its
immediate allies is, though not nearly so frequent as in the
Statoplea, by no means so exceptional as some observers
have suggested, and it occurs on both the adcauline and the
abcauline sides of the hydro theca.1 An abcauline ridge, of
the same type as that of Lytocarpus philippinus, is found in
P. diaphragmata and P. jedani, Billard, and the same form
occurs in P. balei, Bartlett, as well as in Kirchenpaueria
mirabilis and K. producta, which Billard includes in Plumu-
laria. In all these cases the ridge is a distinct shelf extending
across a large portion of the hydrothecal cavity. In the
peculiar group which includes P. asymmetrica and P. alata
we find these two species possessing an abcauline ridge less
developed than that of the group last mentioned. In P.
habereri var. mediolineata, Billard, occurs the first slight
rudiment of the ridge which in the allied P. asymmetrica
attains a fuller development. Among the species in which
the ridge is adcauline is P. filicaulis ; in one form it is rudi-
mentary, in another it extends nearly half through the
hydrotheca, and it may be noted that though on the adcauline
side, it is not in that portion of the hydrotheca which is in
contact with the internode, but in the free portion. P.
lucerna, Mulder and Trebilcock, is said to have a similar
ridge ; I doubt, however, whether this species is distinct
from P. filicaulis. In P. goldsteini the adcauline ridge is
rudimentary. In the section Monotheca I have found only
the adcauline ridge, which springs from a point close to the
termination of the hydrocladium. In P. obliqua it is rudi-
mentary ; in the form which I have called var. robusta it is
somewhat more developed. Again, in P. compressa it is
very narrow, while in the closely allied P. australis it extends
half through the hydrotheca, and in P. spinulosa it is still
wider.

As a guide to the affinities of the species I cannot attach
any importance to the presence of the intrathecal ridge, since
we often find it present in one species while another, evidently
very nearly allied, may have no trace of it. Such instances
are P. asymmetrica, Bale, and P. hertwigi, Stechow, among
the species with bilobed hydrothecse ; and P. balei, Bartlett,

1. I use the terms " adcauline " and " abcauline " instead of " posterior"
and " anterior," as there are instances, both in the Statoplea and the
Eleutheroplea, where the adcauline ridge cannot with propriety be
-described as posterior.

294 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

and Halopteris carinata, Allman, in the Haloptcris group.
For similar reasons, but little significance can be attached to
the polysiphonic or monosiphonic condition of the hydro -
caulus. The presence of " intermediate interne des " in the
hydrocladia is not even of specific importance in such species
as P. campanula, where these internodes may be distinctly
defined in parts of the polypidom, while in other portions the
nodes dividing them from the hydrothecal internodes may be
obsolete. But the presence of intermediate internodes in
P. setacea and its allies, and their absence in such species as
P. badia, are more constant characters.

On the whole, I am disposed to think that the best primary
sectional division of the genus (setting aside Antennella and
Monotheca) would be into two groups, one containing those
forms in which hydrotheca3 are borne on the rachis as well as
on the pinnae, the other for all the species in which no hydro -
thecse are borne on the rachis. This group, in which the genus
reaches its highest development, includes the minor groups
represented respectively by the well-known P. setacea, P. badia
and the aberrant P. asymmetrica,. The other main group, of
which P. catharina and P. campanula are typical, I would
distinguish by the sectional name THECOCAULUS. It is the
more primitive type, being the next stage of development
from the unbranched Antennella. I may here refer to a
question of terminology, namely the use of the term " hydro-
cladium." Billard includes in the genus Antennella " les
especes de Plumulariida3 reduites aux hydroclades, se
detachant de 1'hydrorhize, ou meme de la base d'un hydro -
clade primaire," while Jaderholm says that in Antennella
there are no hydrocladia, but only hydro theca-bearing stems.
Billard's expression might be held to imply that Antennella, is
a degenerated form of Plumularia, while Jaderholm evidently
regards it as a primitive form which has not developed
branches. Of course it might be urged that any part of the
polypary which bears hydrotheca3 is a hydrocladium, but this
would imply that in a pinnate specimen of P. campanula, for
example, the pinnse, the branches, and even the polysiphonic
stem, were all hydrocladia, obviously a reductio ad absurdum.
I think, therefore, that in this species the simple shoots,
(P. indivisa) should be described as stems, while the lateral
branches, whether scattered or regularly pinnate, are
hydrocladia, which in their turn may bear secondary hydro-
cladia. According to Billard the true Antennella is a species
which does not exist in the pinnate form, and I think that
in the majority of species at least, it is a primitive, not a
degenerated form. Nevertheless I am acquainted with three

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 295-

Plumularians in which such degeneracy seems probable.
These are Plumularia filicaulis, Halicornaria humilis, and
another dwarf species of Halicornaria, belonging to the
ascidioides-group. In all these instances a colony consists of
a number of simple shoots, bearing hydrothecse, with here
and there a pinnate shoot. As in these species the rachis
bears no hydrothecse the simple shoots cannot, of course, be
regarded as stems, but as hydrocladia springing directly from
the hydrorhiza, and the species must be looked upon as
degenerated forms, of which the Halicornarice at least, which
are both parasitic species, show abundant evidence in their
irregular and depauperated aspect.

Of the few species of Plumularia represented in this collec-
tion P. campanula, P. buski, and P. zygocladia belong to the
section Thecocaulus, and they agree also in possessing the
character assigned by Allman to Heteroplon. P. sulcata is
also a Thecocaulus, but is quite peculiar in its ramification, as
well as in other particulars. P. procumbens belongs to what
I have regarded as the typical Plumularice, and agrees with
the setacea-group in having intermediate internodes on the
hydrocladia.

P. asymmetrica belongs to a group in which there are no
cauline hydrothecse, but which differs considerably from the
setacea-type, especially in having the margin of the hydro-
theca bilobed. Its allies are P. herlwigi, Stechow, P. habereri,
Stechow, and P. alata, Bale.

PLUMULARIA CAMPANULA, Busk.

Plumularia campanula, Busk, Voy. ' Rattlesnake," i.,
1852, p. 401. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 124, pi. x., fig. 5; Id., Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S. Wales, (2), iii., 1888, p. 776, pi. xx., figs. 1-6 ; Id.,.
Bale, Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., xxiii., 1887,,
p. 94 ; Id., Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893,
p. 113 ; Id., Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvi.,
1913, p. 133. Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann.
K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v. 1890, p. 255. Id., Farquhar,
Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1896, p. 466. Id., Billard,
C.R. Acad. Sci., cxlvii., 1908, p. 759.

Plumularia indivisa, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,.
pp. 39, 46, pi. xv., fig 1.

Plumularia laxa, Allman, Rep. Sci. Results " Challenger "
Exped., Zool., vii., Hydroida, pt. I., 1883, p. 19, pi. i.,.
figs. 5-6.

296 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Plumularia torresia, Von Lendenfeld, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, ix., 1884, p. 477, pi. xiii., figs. 13, 14, pi. xiv.,
fig. 16.

Plumularia rubra, Von Lendenfeld, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, ix., 1884, p. 476, pi. xiii., figs. 11, 12, pi. xiv.,
fig. 15.

Locs. — Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.
Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75
fathoms.

PLUMULARIA BUSKII, Bale.

Plumularia buskii, Bale, Biological Results, "Endeavour,"
ii., 1, 1914, p. 28 (synonymy). Id., Billard, Les
Hydr. de 1'Exped. du Siboga, I., Plumularidae, 1913,
p. 21, fig. xi., pi. i., fig. 15. Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy.
Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p. 304.

Plumularia nuttingi, Billard, Arch. Zool. exp. et gen., (5),
viii., 1911, p. Ixvi., fig. 8.

Locs. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

Sanders Bank, Kangaroo Island, 28 fathoms.
South Australian coast.

Off St. Francis Island, South Australia, 30 fathoms.
Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

PLUMULARIA ZYGOCLADIA, Bale.

Plumularia zygocladia, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 171, pi. xxxvi., fig. 2.

Loc. — Thirty-eight miles north-east of North Reef Light-
house, Capricorn Group, off Port Curtis, Queensland, 74
fathoms.

PLUMULARIA SULCATA, Lamarck.

Plumularia sulcata, Bale, Biological Results "Endeavour,"
ii., 4, 1914, p. 172, pi. xxxv., figs. 6-7 (synonymy).
Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915,
p. 306, pi. xi., fig. 1."

Locs. — lifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
75 fathoms.

Bass Strait, 40 fathoms.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 297

PLUMULABIA ASYMMETRICA, Bale.

Plumularia asymmetrica, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 29, pi. iv., figs. 2-3.

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, 130-190 fathoms, and 80-120
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 126° 45£' E., 190-320
fathoms.

PLUMULARIA PROCUMBENS, Spencer.

Plumularia procumbens, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 29 (synonymy). Id., Briggs,
Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p. 305, pi. x.,
fig. 1.

Besides specimens of the usual form, several were obtained
which were more lax in habit, with sparser ramification, and
the ultimate branchlets apparently more nearly pinnate in
arrangement. The branches are not confined to one plane,
but rather straggling, and there is nothing to indicate a
procumbent habit.

Spencer mentions that the primary stem, which occupies
the centre of the fascicle, is unjointed, having, as he surmises,
lost its jointing after being enveloped by the supplementary
tubes. In branches consisting of about a dozen tubes I
find the jointing of the primary one generally distinct, but
in a few instances it is obscure or wanting. The primary
tube is exactly the same in structure as the small monosiphonic
branchlets, any one of which may form the nucleus of a
polysiphonic branch.

My former description of the ultimate branchlets as
springing from all sides of the larger branches is not strictly
accurate. Though really diverging in several directions they
are, in their origin, confined to the two sides, where they are
given off in pairs (a pair on each side alternately). As the
two branchlets constituting a pair diverge widely from each
other, they are in two planes on each side of the branch.
This at least is the typical arrangement, but there is much
irregularity, thus two pairs may follow on the same side, a
single branchlet may be produced instead of a pair, or one
may be abortive, while the amount of divergence also varies.
The branchlets do not spring directly from the branch, but
from the apophyses of the hydrocladia. These are stout and
bracket-like, as in P. badia and P. cornuta, and when they
give origin to a pair of branchlets one of the latter springs

29S " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

from each side, so that the hydrocladium is situated between
the two branchlets. I have not seen in any other species
exactly the same form of ramification.

Locs. — Fifty miles south of St. Francis Island, South
Australia, 30 fathoms.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, 80-120 fathoms, and 40-100
fathoms.

Genus NEMERTESIA, Lamouroux.

With Nutting, I regret that the old-established name
Antennularia should be abandoned in favor of Nemertesia ;
some observers, however, have always adhered to the latter
name, which was published by Lamouroux in 1812, and
must, therefore, take priority of Antennularia, which dates
from 1816.

The only species observed — N. ciliata — differs widely in
habit from its congeners ; the expanded hydrosoma, with
its branches in one plane, and its numerous little pinnately-
arranged branchlets with their scarcely-visible hydrocladia,
giving it more the aspect of a Plumularia.

The species described by Billard as Sibogella erecta1 is also
provided with a multitude of little branchlets, but they
differ from those of N. ciliata in being in several planes
instead of pinnately arranged, and further in being given
off from the primary tube, while those of N. ciliata spring
from the supplementary tubes.

NEMERTESIA CILIATA, Bale.

Nemertesia ciliata, Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour,"
ii., 4, 1914, p. 170, pi. xxxvi., fig. 1. Id., Briggs, Proc.
Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p. 307, pi. x., fig. 3.

Hydrophyton reaching about a foot in height and four or
five inches in width, compressed, profusely branched, poly-
sip honic, branches originating from the supplementary tubes ;
branchlets very numerous, mostly monosiphonic, biserial,
from opposite to alternate, approximate, divided into distinct
internodes of varying lengths, each of which, except the
proximal one or two, supports from one to six or eight whorls
of hydrocladia. Hydrocladia usually somewhat irregular on
the proximal portions of the branches, on the other portions

1. Billard — Les Hydr. de 1'Exped. du Siboga, I., Plumularidse, 1913,
p. 61.

HYDROIDA. BALE. 299

arranged in regular whorls of three or four, those in each
whorl alternating in position with those above and below ;
divided into hydrothecate long internodes and intermediate
short ones bearing sarcothecse only.

Hydrothecse very small, cup-shaped, shallow, adnate up
to the margin, which is smooth.

Sarcotheca? large, wineglass-shaped, bithalamic, canalicu-
late, moveable ; one in front of each hydrotheca, two laterals
above it, one on each intermediate internode, and two in the
axil of each hydrocladium, usually one on the proximal inter-
node of each branch and one or two on the apophysis. A
conical open prominence on the apophysis of each hydro-
cladium.

Gonothecae borne at the bases of the hydrocladia, cam-
panulate, very thin and delicate.

Colour — Light brown.

The above description amends and supplements that in
Part II in some minor points.

From such forms as N. ramosa the species is strongly
differentiated by its habit, the pinnate arrangement of the
branchlets being very characteristic. A main trunk with
all its ramifications occupies a single plane, but where the
stem divides into two or three such trunks near the base
these may be each in a separate plane. The ultimate
branchlets, which fringe each side of the larger branches at
very short intervals, may reach an inch or more in length
without further subdividing ; when small they are monosi-
phonic, and most of them remain so, others become enveloped
in the proximal portions by supplementary tubes derived
from the parent branch, and so develop into polysiphonic
branches giving origin to fresh branchlets.

A new branchlet commences with a stout apophysis given
off by one of the supplementary tubes, then follows a short
internode, or occasionally two, without hydrocladia. The
first few hydrocladia are generally more or less irregular,
those which represent the first whorl, or even the first four
or five whorls, being placed unevenly instead of at a uniform
height, and only gradually is the normal arrangement
attained. The most usual condition is for all the whorls of
a single branch to consist of either three or four hydrocladia,
but while, as already mentioned, they may be in fours up to
a certain point of a branch and in threes beyond it, I have
seen no instance of whorls of three being succeeded distally
by whorls of four.

300 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

The hydrothecae are among the smallest known in the
order ; those of Plumularia procumbens and P. badia are the
only ones which I have observed of so small a size.

The sarcothecse have the border very slightly sinuated or
cut down on one side, or they may be described as having
the aperture somewhat oblique, the sinuation being so wide
and shallow as to be scarcely distinguishable. The term
" canaliculate," therefore, is scarcely applicable, but is used
for want of a better, and to indicate the affinity between such
sarcothecse and those with a deep lateral sinus, to which the
term more strictly applies. The lateral sinuation is more or
less distinctly traceable in all species of Plumularia and
Nemertesia observed by me.

The gonothecse are small and excessively thin, so that few
of them retain their original form. Those which were best
preserved resembled the hydrothecse of an Obelia, being
widest at or close to the aperture, which is even, and not
oblique. They are quite open, and do not appear to have
possessed an operculum. Their length is only from 370 to
440 fi. N . janini, Lamouroux, possesses a small gonotheca
of very similar form.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.

Thirty-five miles south-east of Bruni Island, Tasmania,
150-230 fathoms.

NEMERTESIA CILIATA, Bale, var. CRUCIATA, var. nov.

Similar to the type, except that the hydrocladia are mostly
in pairs, each pair alternating in position with those above
and below.

Excepting 011 the proximal portions of the branches the
arrangement of the hydrocladia in alternate pairs is very
general, though occasionally a branch bears them in sets
of three, in which case there is often more or less irregularity
among them. The branches seem to begin, more frequently
than in the type, with two or three internodes devoid of
hydrocladia, and, as in the type, the first few hydrocladia
on a branch are irregular in position. A frequent arrange-
ment is for two hydrocladia, nearly opposite, to begin the
series, followed by three, all at different heights, the rest
being in alternate pairs ; many other variations, however,
occur. No gonangia were seen.

The arrangement of the hydrocladia which characterizes
the present variety is found also in Antennularia cymodocea

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 301

Busk,1 Heteropyxis tetrasticha, (Lowenia tetrasticha, Meneg-
hini)2, and N. decussata, Kirchenpauer.3 Of these A.
cymodocea is distinguished from our species (and probably
from all others) by the very peculiar structure of the hydro-
cladia, which, according to Kirkpatrick,4 "are short, and
composed of five or six joints, each bearing a cupped sarco-
theca, and on the last joint a hydrotheca, adnate and dove-
tailed into the joint ; a second hydrotheca is only exceptionally
present." Kirkpatrick also mentions that the calycle is .1
mm. in length, which is about double that of N. ciliata.
Further, A. cymodocea is said by Busk to be an unbranched
species.

N. tetrasticJia cannot be confused with N. ciliata, as its
hydrocladia consist of hydrothecate internodes solely, and
only one mesial sarcotheca occurs between every two hydro-
thecse.

N. decussata has more affinity with the hydroid before us,
its habit, however, is very different. It has thick polysiphonic
stems from half an inch to an inch long, which divide quite
irregularly one or more times into smaller polysiphonic
branches, and these are continued, sometimes bifurcating, into
long monosiphonic branchlets which may attain two or three
inches in length without again subdividing. It is stated that
each pair of hydrocladia occupies a separate internode of the
branch, contrary to the condition in N. ciliata. According to
Kirchenpauer's figures the hydrotheca3 are larger than in most
species, while in N. ciliata they are almost the minimum size
for the family. The gonangia of N. ciliata contrast strongly
with those of Kirchenpauer's species, which are of the lageni-
form type found in Plumularia setacea.

Locs. — Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

Twenty-five miles north-east of Babel Island, Bass Strait,
70-100 fathoms.

Genus KIRCHENPAUERIA, Jickeli.

In Part I., under Kirchenpaueria producta, I have already
discussed the validity of this genus. There are three ways of
regarding it. First, it may be recognised as a distinct genus,
to be known as Kirchenpaueria, unless the name Diplocheilus
should prove to have priority — a question still unsettled.

1. Busk— Report British Association for 1850, (1851), pt. 2, p. 119.

2. Meneghini — Memor. dell' Instit. Venet., 1845, p. 183, pi. xiv., fig. 2.

3. Kirchenpauer- — Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamburg, vi., 1876, pp. 52, 54, pis.
ii., iii., and vii., fig. 24-24c.

4. Kirkpatrick— Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soc. (n.s.), vi., 1890, p. 610.

302 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Second, the species may all be included under Plumularia,
which is the view adopted by Billard. Third, the species may
be divided, those with an intrathecal ridge being placed under
Diplocheilus, the others under Kirchenpaueria. This is the
arrangement adopted by Stechow, in his general summary of
the genera.

For the last division I can see no justification. As I have
pointed out in a preceding page, the intrathecal ridge is a
feature not at all uncommon in the genus Plumularia, and in
several instances it precisely resembles that of K. producta and
K. mirabilis. It is obviously of no greater physiological
significance in those species than in Plumularia, Lytocarpus,
Aglaophenia, Halicornaria, or Sertularia, from which genera
no observer proposes to exclude a species on account of the
presence or absence of an intrathecal ridge ; and I cannot
imagine any reason for applying a different rule to Kirchen-
paueria alone among the hydroid genera.

For Billard's position there is, I think, more to be said »
nevertheless, although the arrangement of the sarcothecse in
Plumularia is far less constant than in the Statoplea, the
presence of at least one supracalycine pair is so nearly universal
as to afford some justification for the separation of the species
wanting that character, especially as those species are peculiar
also in the possession of naked median sarcostyles. It is true
that among the many Plumularice described by Billard in his
" Report on the Siboga Expedition " there is one — P.
ventruosa — which is without lateral sarcothecse, while it is not
stated whether any median sarcostyle is present ; possibly
this also should be referred to the present genus.

While the relationship between Plumularia and Kirchen-
paueria is obvious, there is evident also a close affinity between
the latter genus and Halicornopsis, indeed it is by the great
difference in the general facies, dependent nevertheless on
minor details, rather than by important structural characters,
that the two genera are distinguished.

KIRCHENPAUERIA PRODUCTA, Bale.

Kirchenpaueria producta, Bale, Biological Results
" Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 59 (synonymy).

In the list of synonyms I have included a reference to
Inaba's figure of " Plumularia producta " in the Tokyo
Zoological Magazine for 1890 ; this must be deleted. As
Stechow has pointed out in his revision of Inaba's species, the
specimens examined by that observer belonged really to
K. mirabilis (Diplocheilus mirabilis, Allman). This is

HYDROIDA.— BALE. 303

apparent from the figures of the gonothecse given by Inaba
in a later paper, and reproduced by Stechow. My descrip-
tion of the gonothecse of K. mirabilis was not published till
1893, after Inaba's later paper was written, and although I
had described those of K. producta in 1888, Inaba evidently
had not seen my paper of that year when he described the
supposed P. producta.
Loc. — Bass Strait.

Genus HALICORNOPSIS, Bale.
HALICORNOPSIS ELEGANS (Lamarck).

Halicornopsis elegans, Bale, Bio logical Results tL Endeavour,"
ii., 1, 1914, p. 56 (synonymy). Id., Briggs, Ree.
Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 296 ; Id., Briggs, Proc.
Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p. 309.

Locs. — Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

Off South Cape, Tasmania, 75 fathoms.

South coast of Australia.

East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 65-70 fathoms.

Circular Head, Tasmania, 15 fathoms.

Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30 fathoms.

Ten miles north of Circular Head, Tasmania.

Off St. Francis Island, South Australia, 30 fathoms.

Twelve to fifteen miles S. 40° E. of Eddystone Lighthouse,
60-62 fathoms.

Fifteen miles south of St. Francis Island, 30 fathoms.

Thirty -five miles south-east of Bruni Island, Tasmania, 150-
230 fathoms.

Eastern Slope, Bass Strait, 80-300 fathoms.
Great Australian Bight, 100 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 126° 45J' E., 190-320
fathoms.

Genus CLADOCARPELLA, gen. nov.

Hydrosoma as in Cladocarpus, but with some of the inter-
nodes of the hydrocladia (other than the proximal ones) giving
off secondary ramules, the internodes of which consist of
closed ventricose receptacles, with one or two lateral sarco-
thecae.

This genus is proposed for the reception of a species nearly
related to Cladocarpus (?) bathyzonatus, Ritchie, and is
characterized by the secondary ramules which spring from the

304 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

hydrocladia. Assuming that these are phylactocarps, they
differ from those of Cladocarpus in not being limited to the
proximal internode, and also in several being borne on the
same hydrocladium. They originate on that part of the
internode which is between the node and the base of the
hydro theca, and they may occur on two or three internodes in
succession ; I have not seen any on the proximal internodes.
Only three were observed, but there were scars marking the
positions where others had fallen. Each of the three con-
sisted of one very short internode, unarmed, succeeded by two
longer ones, clavate in form, consisting of a small closed
receptacle, ventricose on one side, beyond which projected
one or two lateral sarcothecse. The aspect of the ends of
these ramules was such as to indicate that their growth might
have been continued.

It is impossible to be certain as to the exact relationship
of these ramules to the gonosome, as no gonangia were present,
nor any signs to indicate where they might have been detached.
The internodes, with their lateral sarcothecse projecting from
one or both sides, are suggestive of atrophied hydrotheca3,
but apart from their small size (about one-third the length of a
hydrotheca), and their wholly different form, the little
ventricose receptacles consist of the internodes themselves,
and are not divided off from them as hydrothecse would be.
In view of the incomplete aspect of the ramules it seems just
pos ible that the gonangia may have been borne terminally
upon them.

CLADOCARPELLA MULTISEPTATA, sp. nov.
(Plate xlvii., figs. 1-5.)

Hydrocaulus about two inches in height, stem very slender,
slightly fascicled at base, divided by long oblique nodes into
internodes of very variable length ; hydrocladia at unequal
distances, biserial, alternate, both series borne on the front
of the stem and directed forward ; internodes long, nodes
oblique.

Hydrothecse very long, slender, gradually expanding from
the middle to the aperture ; hydropore in the base of the cell,
next to the abcauline side, subtended by a small curved flap
of perisarc ; aperture at right angles, with a blunt anterior
tooth, narrowed in the middle, the rest of the border with
very minute irregular crenations, and adnate to the lateral
sarcothecse. Hydro thecal internode with about 9-14 septal
ridges, transverse or nearly so, except the proximal one,
which is very oblique.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 205

Mesial sarcotheca a little below the hydrotheca, short,
conical in lateral view, oblong in front view ; terminal
aperture a transverse slit crossing the end of the sarcotheca
and slightly enlarged at the angles, inferior aperture rather
large, with sub-tubular border ; cauline and lateral sarco-
thecae similar to the mesial, the cauline numerous, arranged
in a single series along the whole front of the stem.

Gonangial (?) secondary ramules given off from some of
the internodes of the hydrocladia, consisting of a short
proximal internode and two (or more ?) longer ones, the
latter ventricose, with one or two lateral sarcothecse.

This species is closely allied to Cladocarpus (?) bathyzonatus,
Ritchie, and I have had some doubt as to the propriety of
separating it. It is so extremely slender and so readily
tangled that it is not easy to isolate complete colonies, and
I did not succeed in getting any perfect to the base. One
only had on the lower portion a single supplementary tube,
the rest, so far as they extended, were monosiphonic. The
greatest disparity exists between the distances of the nodes,
which are conspicuous and very oblique ; measuring by the
number of sarcothecse, which are at nearly uniform distances
along the stem, we find internodes bearing any number from
one up to twelve or thirteen, and there are similar variations
in the number of sarcothecse which intervene between two
hydrocladia. Some of the shorter internodes support sarco-
thecse only. These irregularities are most marked in the
lower portions of the stems ; on the distal portions a com-
paratively regular sequence may prevail, the internodes there
supporting usually a hydrocladium and nine to twelve
sarcothecse.

The two series of hydrocladia are both directed so strongly
towards the front that, placed on a slide, they fall to one
side, and their arrangement appears uniserial unless closely
examined, when it is seen that they spring alternately from
right and left of the median row of sarcothecse.

The hydrothecal internodes are about .80 mm. long (the
hydro thecse themselves being about .60 mm.), and the hydro-
thecse are like those of C. (?) bathyzonatus except that their
proportionate length is greater, their abcauline wall not so
narrowed in at the central part, and the anterior tooth
different in form. The little perisarcal flap opposite the
hyclropore is as described by Ritchie. The sarcothecae also
agree with those of Ritchie's species, except that I did not
observe so much diversity in the terminal orifices. In the
lateral view a sarcotheca appears pointed, in the front view

306 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

it has a broad blunt termination ; at each angle of this, and
visible in the lateral view, is a very small elliptic orifice, and
these orifices are united by a transverse slit crossing the
end of the sarcothecse. All the sarcothecse are of similar
form, and in the laterals especially the terminal apertures
are commonly so minute as to be indistinguishable under a
low power. The lateral orifices are circular and distinct.
These two species are among the few Statopleans in which
the anterior sarcothecse are not quite in contact with the
hydrotheca. Many of the most recently formed hydrothecse,
though otherwise complete, are without a trace of the septal
ridges in the internodes, which develop gradually, becoming,
in the older portions, completely annular.

C. (?) bathyzonatus, as described by Ritchie, seems a much
more compact form. The distance between two hydrocladia
(on the same side) is said to be about one mm., in C. multi-
septata it is about 7 mm. In C. (?) bathyzonatus there are
one, or more usually two, sarcothecae between two hydro-
cladia ; in the present species there are about 9-12. These
figures refer in both cases to the distal parts of the colonies ;
the lower part of the cladate tube of Ritchie's species is said
to be destitute of hydrocladia, the corresponding portion of
C. multiseptata is also bare, but only because it has been
deduded. C (?) bathyzonatus seems to be more distinctly
polysiphonic in habit, and its hydrocladia apparently have
not the markedly secund disposition found in the species
before us.

Loc. — Thirty-eight miles north-east of North Reef, Capri-
corn Group, off Port Curtis, Queensland, 74 fathoms.

Genus AGLAOPHENIA, Lamouroux.

Of the species referred in this Report to the genus Aglao-
phenia, A. divaricata and A. decumbens are evidently nearly
related, so far as can be ascertained in the absence of the
gonosome of the latter, which will probably prove to be,
like that of A. divaricata, furnished with separate narrow
ribs, armed with two series of sarcothecse, and unprovided
with hydro thecae ; A. billardi, A. tasmanica, and A. dannevigi
belong to what may be termed the crucialis group, possessing
large closed corbulse, without hydrothecse ; A. cupressina has
affinities with the same group, but stands alone in some
respects ; A. megaloca,rpa, A. armata, A. calycifera, and A.
tenuissima have the corbulse closed, but with hydrothecse
on the leaflets, and therefore belong to the genus Thecocarpus
of some authors (but not of Nutting) ; and A. carinifera
probably belongs to the same group.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 307

The only species of which the generic position may be a
matter of doubt are those of the last group. In Nutting's
classification the corbula-bearing species are divided into
two genera — Aglaophenia, comprising those forms in which the
corbula is closed, composed of broad leaflets, and unprovided
with hydrothecae ; and Thecocarpus, in which the corbula
is open, composed of narrow rod- or sabre-shaped ribs, with
a hydrotheca at the base of each rib. The species at present
under consideration form an intermediate group, having the
closed broad-leaved corbula characteristic of the restricted
genus Aglaophenia, but bearing hydrothecae as in Thecocarpus.
In 1907, however, Billard described a species, T. giardi,1
with similar corbula?, and referred it to Thecocarpus, remarking
that previously only species were known in which the ribs
were free and the corbula open.2

According to Billard, then, the presence or absence of the
hydrothecse at the bases of the ribs is the sole criterion for
dividing the species, and even this is not constant, as the
same observer has described species in which the hydrothecae
are present in the female corbulae only ; while in the form
which I have described under the name of A. carinata, and
which Billard finds identical with Plumularia brachiata,
Lamarck, the receptacles at the bases of the leaflets, which
Billard considers hydrothecse, but which seem to me to be
sarcothecae, are often replaced by two or several undoubted
sarcothecae, the structure, so far as those particular leaflets
are concerned, being then the same as in the crucialis group.

Stechow admits the genus Thecocarpus in the same sense
as Nutting, dividing the corbula-bearing species into three
groups — (1) species with open corbulae and a hydrotheca at
the base of each rib = Thecocarpus, Nutting ; (2) species with
open corbulae and no hydro thecae=yl. whiteleggei, and other
species constituting the divaricata group ; (3) species with
closed corbulae and no hydro thecae^^gr/ao/j^ema. This
grouping, however, is obviously incomplete, no provision
being made for the fourth subdivision, namely, for the species
with closed corbulae but with hydrothecae, such as those
before us.

Evidently if the genus Thecocarpus is to be accepted at all
it must be in the sense in which Billard adopted it, and
Nutting's diagnosis should be modified accordingly.

1. Billard — -Arch, cte Zool. exp. ct gen., (4), vi., Notes et Revue, p.
Ixxix.

2. Thin was an oversight, as I had in 1881 described .-(. heterocarpa
(now known to be identical with Plumularia brci'irostris, Busk), in which
the corbula is similar to that of A. pltnna, but with a well-developed
hydrotheca on each leaflet.

308 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Nutting has noticed that among the corbula-bearing species,
when the proximal part of the gonocladium bears one hydro-
theca only, that one is generally normal, but that where
there are several hydrothecse in that position they are usually
more or less modified ; also that in Aglaophenia the former
type prevails, in Thecocarpus the latter. I find that the
same rule applies generally (though not universally) to the
Australian species. In A. megalocarpa, A. armata, and A.
tenuissima there are below the corbula several hydrothecse,
which are modified to a greater or less extent ; in A. caly-
cifera the hydrothecse themselves are little if at all altered,
but the internodes supporting them differ from the normal
hydrothecal internodes in being longer, and in the absence of
septal ridges. In A. brevirostris, on the other hand, there is
only a single hydrotheca, not distinctly modified, so that the
condition is the same as in Aglaophenia proper ; it is note-
worthy, however, that in this species there are generally one
or two modified hydrothecse on the distal part of the gono-
cladium, which projects beyond the corbula.

In the crucialis group there are no hydrotheca? at all on the
gonocladium, the proximal internodes supporting only a row
of large sarcothecse, like the proximal part of a branch, and
the same condition is found in A. phyllocarpa and A. brachiata.
None of the numerous American species comprised in
Nutting's monograph exhibit this character, which appears
to be confined to typical Aglaophenice, unless A. brachiata is
3,n exception.

Species which are known to belong to the divaricata group
are A. divaricata (Busk), A. acanthocarpa, Allman, A. laxa,
Allman, A. plumosa, Bale, and A. whitdeggei, Bale. The
same type prevails throughout all these species. The
corbula-ribs are narrow, armed on each side with sarcothecse,
which are longer than those usually found in the other
groups, the lowest two sarcothecse on the distal side are
without corresponding ones on the other side, and of these
two sarcothecse the first one is usually bifid or double, a
feature which Allman accounts for by supposing it to repre-
sent the lateral pair of the suppressed hydrotheca. Of the
species mentioned I have only observed the gonosome in
A. divaricata (including A. mccoyi), A. laxa, and A. plumosa,
but Allman's figure of A. acanthocarpa and Stechow's of A.
whiteleggei show the same structure, and though Hilgendorf's
figure of A. laxa does not exhibit similar regularity, I find it
in the specimen which I have examined. The hiatus caused
by the absence of the two lowest sarcothecse on the proximal
.side corresponds to the gap which in the crucialis group and

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 309

other species is caused by the abrupt narrowing-in of the
leaflets at the base, so that openings are left along the sides
of the corbula. In the crucialis group and in Thecocarpus
these openings are guarded by the lateral spurs, which project
across them, and which support in the former a series of
sarcothecae, in the latter a hydrotheca.

It is observed by Nutting that the closed corbula is often
erroneously described as having the distal edges only of the
leaflets bordered by sarcothecae, and he finds that in all cases
where he has dissected the corbulae the proximal edges also,
though overlapped by the distal edges of the contiguous
leaves, support a series of sarcothecae, which project into the
corbula. My experience (mainly of Australian species) is the
contrary of this. I have not found the condition above
described in any species, except very partially in .4. calycifera.
The general rule is that when the leaves are united the distal
edge of one leaf overlaps the proximal edge of the next, and
is fringed with sarcothecae ; frequently the overlapping
portion is expanded into a free wing (often very large), which
then bears the marginal sarcothecae, and if the free extension
rises above the corbula, so as to have both edges free, then
both edges bear sarcothecae. Similarly, if the leaflets become
separate throughout, as in certain (presumably male) corbulae
of A. parvula, or separated at intervals only, wherever the
edges are free sarcothecae may be developed. On the other
hand there are species — e.g., A. megalocarpa — which have the
margins of the component leaves united smoothly, without
any sarcothecae whatever, while a row of sarcothecae may run
up the- middle of the leaf instead, and a secondary leaf or
<:rest may also spring from the same part. In some forms
many sarcothecae may be scattered irregularly over the
surface.

The presence of a supernumerary leaf has often been noted,
but in some species more than one such leaf may be present,
and they may occur at the distal as well as the proximal
extremity of the corbula. In the closed corbulae of A.
parvula the first leaflet on one side gives origin to a secondary
free leaflet which runs along the side of the corbula parallel
with the rachis. The corbulae in general appear more prone
to abnormal developments than the trophosomes, and
irregularities of growth are, in some species, very common ;
for example, I have seen in more than one species a secondary
corbula given off laterally from the middle of the primary one.

AGLAOPHENIA DIVARICATA (Busk).

Plumularia divaricata, Busk, Voy. " Rattlesnake," i., 1852,
p. 398.

310 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Aglaophenia divaricate, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver.
Hamb., v., 1872, p. 26. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr.
Zooph., 1884, p. 162, pi. xv., fig. 8, pi. xvii., fig. 7 ; Id.,
Bale, Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., xxiii., 1887,
pp. 97, 110; Id., Bale, Biological Results "Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 49. Id., Marktanner-Turner-
etscher, Ann. K. K. Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 267.
Id., Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci., cxlviii., 1909, p. 368 ;
Id,, Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi., 1910, p. 54.
Id., Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16, 1911, p. 866.
Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915,.
p. 315.

Plumularia ramosa, Busk, Voy. " Rattlesnake," i., 1852,
p. 398.

Aglaophenia ramosa, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
v., 1872, p. 38, pis. i., ii., fig. 17. Id., Hincks, Pop.
Sci. Review, xiii., 1874, p. 235. Id., Bale, Cat. Austr.
Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 164, pi. xviii., figs. 15, 16.

Lytocarpus ramosus, Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xix.,

1885, p. 154, pi. xxv., figs. 1-3.
? Aglaophenia brevicaulis, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver.

Hamb., v., 1872, p. 41, pi. i., fig. 20, pi. v., fig. 19.
Not Aglaophenia ramosa, Allman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool.

Harv., v., 1877, p. 39, pi. xxiii., figs. 1-4.

Hydrophyton slender, polysiphonic, attaining four or five
inches in height, much branched, branches widely divergent
on all sides, more rarely in one plane, springing from the
supplementary tubes. Hydrocladia alternate, one on each
internode, both series directed towards the front, and rising
at an angle of about 40-45 degrees ; nodes slightly oblique.

Hydrothecse cup-shaped, set at an angle of 40-45 degrees ;
a narrow intrathecal ridge about the middle of the adcauline
side, with a slight fold from it partly surrounding the hydro-
theca ; hydropore very large ; border with four teeth on
each side, and a long incurved one in front, back adnate.
Hydrothecal internode with a strong curved septal ridge in
the middle.

Mesial sarcotheca variable in length, projecting at a wide
angle, adnate to the hydrotheca as far as the margin and
mainly rising from it, free part tapering in lateral view,
tapering or not in front view, with distinct terminal and
inferior apertures, and an orifice opening into the hydrotheca,
Lateral sarcotheca? more or less conical, adnate up to the
hydrotheca-margin, with a short free part directed forward ;

HYDROIDA. — BALE.

those at the ends of the pinnae generally much enlarged,
lateral and terminal apertures distinct. Cauline sarcothecae
larger than the laterals, two on the rachis at the base of each
hydrocladium.

Goiiangial pinna replacing a hydrocladium, the first inter-
node bearing a hydrotheca. Corbula open, with about 15-20
strongly arched pinnules on each side, each springing from
a separate internode of the rachis and furnished with two
lateral series of long slightly curved opposite tubular sarco-
thecae ; the two proximal ones on the distal side of each
pinnule without corresponding ones on the other side, and
the first one often bifid ; nodes between the pairs of sarco-
thecge usually indistinct or wanting ; two sarcotheca> on the
rachis at the base of each pinnule.

Colour. — Dark brown to black.

My suggestion of 1887 that A. divaricata and A. ramosa
would probably prove identical is confirmed by Billard's
examination of the type of A. ramosa, which he finds to agree
exactly with the description of A. divaricata. Busk in
separating them seems to have been mainly influenced by
differences in the habit of his specimens, but much variation
exists in this, as in other characters. Generally the ramifica-
tion is quite irregular, but specimens occur with all the
branches distinctly in one plane.

Small specimens, up to about half an inch, may be mono-
siphonic ; the first supplementary tube is stouter than the
primary one, which it partially envelops, and from it spring
the branches, their first nine or ten internodes supporting no
hydrocladia, but each bearing in front a large sarcotheca.
The very dark colour which characterises the typical form
is due to the remains of the soft parts, and is readily removed
by liquor potassae.

A very characteristic feature is the large size of the aperture
between the hydrotheca and the internode, which extends
from the base of the hydrotheca to the intrathecal ridge, and
from side to side of the hydrotheca. Owing to the size of this
aperture the intrathecal ridge, which borders it, is situated
further from the base than usual, and when, as is commonly
the case, the lateral sarcothecae are long, their bases become
coterminous with the ridge, hence, as Ritchie points out, the
septal ridge which subtends the bases of the lateral sarcothecae,
and that which is opposite to the intrathecal ridge, are one
and the same. The prolongation of the lateral ;-arcotheca>
back to the intrathecal ridge is, however, not invariable ; in

312 'ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

many cases there is a distinct interval between them. The
intrathecal ridge is generally very narrow.

The mesial sarcotheca may be nearly straight, or slightly
arched, and stands off at a wide angle from the hydrotheca,
which it somewhat exceeds in length. The increase in size
of the lateral sarcothecae on the last internode or two of a
ihydrocladium is more marked than I have seen it in any
other species, and it is not rare to find those on a terminal
internode almost equalling in diameter the hydrotheca itself,
while the next hydrocladium may be normal throughout.

The corbulae are similar to those of A. acanthocarpa, Allman,
but the bifid condition of the first unpaired sarcotheca on
-each pinnule is by no means invariable. These corbulae
resemble those of A. plumosa, Bale (a species not otherwise
closely related to the present), but the pinnules in A. plumosa
.are less arched, the corbula being somewhat compressed.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms.

Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia, 75 fathoms.

Sanders Bank, Kangaroo Island, South Australia, 28
fathoms.

Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30 fathoms.
Hunter Group, Bass Strait.

AGLAOPHENIA DIVARICATA (Busk), var. MCCOYI, Bale.

Aglaophenia McCoyi, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,
pp. 36, 46, pi. xiv., fig. 2.

Aglaophenia divaricata, Bale, (in part), Cat. Austr. Hydr.
Zooph., 1884, p. 162, pi. xv., fig. 7, pi. xviii., fig. 6.

Hydrophyton smaller than in the type ; hydrothecae with a
wide intrathecal ridge, the anterior tooth furnished with a
delicate erect crest ; mesial sarcotheca with the distal portion
erect and widened at the summit in a crescentic form.

Corbulae as in the type.

In the " Catalogue " I united A. mccoyi with A. divaricata,
as I found that certain specimens of the latter appeared to be
transition forms. The specimens in question, however,
though approximating to A. mccoyi in the broad mesial
sarcothecae, undoubtedly belonged to A. divaricata, and I
have not so far met with other intermediate forms. There
seems, therefore, sufficient ground to treat A. mccoyi as at
least a distinct variety.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 313

In other respects than those enumerated above the variety
agrees with A. divaricata. It is a dwarf form, the largest
specimen which I have met with measuring one and a half
inches, but it is usually only about half that height. These
small forms have generally not more than one accessory
tube in the stem. The most characteristic feature is the
form of the mesial sarcotheca, which follows the curve of the
hydrotheca nearly to the margin and then curves upwards.
The intrathecal ridge is a distinct partition extending half
through the hydrotheca in an oblique direction, parallel with
the border.

I can find no difference whatever in the corbulae.

This variety does not occur among the " Endeavour "
specimens.

AGLAOPHENIA DIVARICATA (Busk),
var. ACANTHOCARPA, Allman ?

? Aglaophenia acanthocarpa, Allman, Journ. Linn. Soc.,
Zool., xii., 1876, p. 274, pi. xxi, figs. 1-4.

Aglaophenia divaricata, var., Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 164.

Distinguished from the type by the presence of an oblique
septal ridge in the internode, starting from the base of the
lateral sarcothecse, and by the smaller and more sharply
triangular teeth of the hydrotheca-border.

The life-size figure given by Allman of A . acanthocarpa does
not agree well with any specimen of this group which I have
observed, still it recalls Busk's description of A. ramosa,
which he says has the branches ''' rising in great numbers
almost immediately from the mass of radical fibres." In
other respects my specimen (from Port Jackson, New South
Wales), agrees very fairly with Allman's account. As
already mentioned, many specimens of A. divaricata occur in
which the bases of the lateral sarcothecse do not, as in typical
forms, coincide with the base of the intrathecal ridge ; the
same condition prevails in the present form, but there is a
strong septal ridge, in addition to the median one which alone
exists in the type. The intrathecal ridge is an extremely
narrow shelf, and gives origin to a fold in the hydrotheca-wall,
very much as in the type.

In these specimens the lateral sarcotheca3 towards the ends
of the hydrocladia are not nearly so much enlarged as is
usually the case with the typical A. divaricata.

314 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Billard formerly suggested the identity of A. acanthocarpa
with A. divaricata, and the present variety seems to bridge
the difference which appeared to exist between them. I do
not, however, concur in the reference of A. laxa, Allman, to
the same species, nor do I think that Thecocarpus laxus of
Billard's " Siboga " Report is the same as A. laxa. Hilgen-
dorf ! has described the corbula of a species which he considers
to be A. laxa, and specimens of this species, which Mr. Briggs
has kindly sent to me, come decidedly nearer to Allman's
account than does Thecocarpus laxus. The corbula is of the
same type exactly as that of A. divaricata and A. acanthocarpa,
and bears no hydrothecse. Where the specimens differ from
Allman's account is in the septal ridges of the hydrothecal
internodes, the one which Allman says is opposite the base of
the hydrotheca being absent, while the front one is oblique ;
in short the condition is just as figured for A. acanthocarpa.
In both A. laxa and A. acanthocarpa, as in A. divaricata, the
intrathecal ridge, with its corresponding septal ridge, is set at
or near the middle of the internode, instead of near the base
of the hydrotheca, as in T. laxus and most other species. In
T. laxus the third tooth on each side of the hydrotheca is
widely everted, which is contrary to the condition in A. laxa.
The latter has smaller and narrower hydro thecae than A.
acanthocarpa, and the front is somewhat incurved between
the anterior tooth and the mesial sarcotheca, which does not
extend to the aperture. In var. acanthocarpa, as in other
forms of A. divaricata, the hydropore extends quite from side
to side of the hydrotheca, so that in a lateral view the proximal
half of its cavity appears completely continuous with that of
the internode ; this is not so noticeable in A. laxa, though
here also the hydropore is very large, which accounts for the
forward position of the intrathecal ridge. The latter is a mere
fold in the hydrotheca-wall, the shelf-like portion on the
adcauline side being even more rudimentary than in any of
the varieties of A. divaricata. The anterior tooth of the
hydrotheca has frequently an erect crest.

I have met with var. acanthocarpa (?) only in material
from Port Jackson, New South Wales.

AGLAOPHENIA DIVARICATA (Busk],
var. CYSTIFERA, var. nov.

Distinguished from the type by the great enlargement of
the upper of the two cauliiie sarcothecse which are borne by
the hydrocladiate internodes of the rachis.

1. Hilgendorf— Trans. N.Z. Instit,, xliii., 1911, p. 541, figs. 1-3.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 5

This form, in its minute structure, does not differ greatly
from the type, except in the peculiarity above mentioned.
The upper sarcotheca is much enlarged, and forms an egg-
shaped receptacle projecting laterally outwards ; the series of
median sarcothecse which are borne on the proximal part of a
branch (before the hydrocladia begin) are also very large.

I have seen a specimen with the top of the stem produced
into a tendril-like stolon.

Loc. — South Australia.

AGLAOPHENIA DECTJMBENS, Bale.

Aglaophenia decumbens, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 48, pi. iv., fig. 4, pi. vi., fig. 6.
Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 300 ; Id.,
Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p. 315.

The height of specimens observed after the description was
written is about a foot. The stem is very slender (only about
half a millimetre), and nearly equal throughout most of
its length. Only the lowest three inches were bare, the rest of
the stem bearing numerous irregular branches about one half
to one inch apart. Secondary and occasionally tertiary
branches were observed.

The gonosome was not present, either in the " Endeavour "
specimens or in those since recorded by Briggs from near
Cape Pillar, Tasmania. There is a decided affinity between
the species and A. divaricata; it may therefore be anticipated
that the corbulse will prove to be of the open type found in
that species.

In Briggs' specimens, from two Tasmanian localities, the
anterior teeth of the hydrothecse are without the outward
bend which I have figured ; this feature therefore is probably
•exceptional.

Loc. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 60 fathoms (not Bass Strait,
•as stated in the original description).

AGLAOPHENIA MACROCARPA, Bale.

Aglaophenia macrocarpa, Bale, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales,
(2), iii., 1888, p. 791, pi. xxi., figs. 3, 4 ; Id., Bale,
Biological Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, pp. 32,
36, 38-41, pi. iii., fig. 1, pi. vi., fig. 1, pi. i., figs. 1-2.

Aglaophenia crucialis, Ritchie, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 16,
1911, p. 864, pi. Ixxxvi., fig. 1.

316 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

? Aglaophenia crucialis, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor. Flex.,
1816, p. 169.

A. macrocarpa, which is not represented in the " Endea-
vour " collections, has been mentioned in Part I. for the
purpose of discussing its relationship with the other members
of the crucialis-gToup — A. dannevigi, A. billardi, A. tasmanica,
and A. crucialis. I have since received some further material
including, from Mr. Briggs, fragments of specimens considered
to be A. crucialis, and others of A. macrocarpa, with drawings
of the latter and notes on the Museum specimens ; and from
Dr. Ritchie, mounted specimens of the " Thetis " form figured
by him as A. crucialis.

A specimen from Maroubra Bay, forwarded by Mr. Briggs,
is a typical A. macrocarpa, agreeing with my former examples
in all essentials ; the gonosome is not present. I have
figured in Part I. portion of a specimen in the Australian
Museum, and Mr. Briggs has favoured me with drawings of
another and much more perfect specimen, which is of precisely
similar habit, the stem and branches being thick, and the
latter curving upwards and even inwards towards the ends,
while standing well out in front from the stem, towards which
they face. Other specimens differ a good deal in habit, the
hydrocaulus being more slender and the branches straighter ;
such a form is that figured by Ritchie, which, however, as
Mr. Briggs informs me, has the branches facing back towards
the stem or parent branch from which they spring, just as
in the typical A. macrocarpa. The hydro thecae differ from
that form only in being slightly larger and in possessing the
intrathecal tooth, which is sometimes strongly developed ;
its absolute inconstancy, however, in A. billardi and A.
tasmanica shows it to be a negligeable character in distinguish-
ing the species. The lateral lobes of the border are well
developed, and in some cases they tend towards an angular
form instead of being smoothly rounded as usual.

The affinity between A. macrocarpa and A. tasmanica is
very close, and this is especially evident now that the male
corbulae of the two are known to be of similar type, (unlike
those of A. billardi). Which of these forms (if either) is to be
referred to A. crucialis is doubtful, since we are not informed
which of them it resembles in habit, nor what is the character
of its corbulae.

AGLAOPHENIA BILLARDI, Bale.

Aglaophenia billardi, Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour,"
ii., 1, 1914, p. 33, pi. iii., fig. 3, pi. vi., fig. 3.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 317

Trifling differences in the habit of this species and A.
tasmanica, referred to in the original descriptions, do not
prove sufficiently constant to be of much value in determining
the species. The most reliable distinction, so far as the
trophosomeis concerned, is in the longer and narrower hydro-
thecse of A. billardi. It is now known that the male corbulse
differ in the two species (see A. tasmanica).

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, 40-100 fathoms, 130-190
fathoms, and 80-120 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA TASMANICA, Bale.

Aglaophenia tasmanica, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 37, pi. iii., fig. 2, pi. vi., fig. 2.
Id., Briggs, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 300, pi.
xxvi ; Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii.,
1915, p. 316.

In some of the specimens a good deal of variation exists in
regard to the length cf the mesial sarcothecse, which are
sometimes not longer, proportionately to the hydrothecse,
than those of A. billardi. In specimens collected near Cape
Pillar, Tasmania, Mr. Briggs has found the male corbulse, of
which he has obligingly forwarded me examples. Considering
that A. tasmanica and A. billardi are such extremely close
allies, and that their female corbulse do not differ in any
important particular, it would naturally be expected that a
corresponding likeness would be found between the male
corbulse ; such, however, is not the case. Those of A.
billardi are cylindrical, closed throughout, and of equal
diameter from end to end, while in A. tasmanica they are, as
Mr. Briggs has pointed out, narrowed towards the end in
consequence of the leaflets becoming gradually shortened,,
and also separate, just as in A. dannevigi and A. macrocarpa.

In the female corbulse the lateral spurs, which spring out-
ward and forward from the distal edges of the corbula -leaves
attain a large size, and in some cases I have noticed that
their distal portions, which are incurved towards the rachis,
coming into contact with the proximal parts of the next
spurs, attach themselves to them, so as to form a series of
joined arches along each side of the gonocladium.

The male corbulse have the last four or five leaflets on each
side separate, broadly truncated, and progressively shorter
and shorter, till the final pair are reduced close down to the
lateral spurs, which are not shortened, but extend forward
beyond the termination of the corbula-rachis.

318 'ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 20 fathoms.

North-east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 100-170 fathoms.

East of Babel Island, Bass Strait, about 70 fathoms.

Twenty-one miles N. 65° E. of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 73
fathoms.

Off Babel Island, Bass Strait, 60 fathoms.

Twenty -five miles north-east of Babel Island, 70-100
fathoms.

Off Green Cape, 470 fathoms.

Eastern Slope, Bass Strait, 80-300 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA DANNEVIGI, Bale.

Aglaophenia dannevigi, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 41, pi. iii., fig. 4, pi. vi., fig. 4.

Locs. — Fifty miles south of Cape Wiles, South Australia,
75 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, 130-300 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA CARINIFERA, Bale.

Aglaophenia carinifera, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 181, pi. xxxviii., figs. 1-2.

In the absence of the gonosome the reference of this species
to the genus Aglaophenia, as restricted, is of course pro-
visional. I have mentioned its resemblance to A. brachiata
{Lamarck), which I regard as a typical Aglaophenia, while
Billard considers it a Thecocarpus ; the similarity, however,
depends mainly on the presence of an anterior keel on the
hydrotheca, a character found in several groups. In the
form of the hydrotheca-margin it resembles the crucialis-
group, and if the figure of the front view is compared with
those of the members of that section it will be seen that little
difference exists. The structure of the stem-fascicle also
agrees with that of those species, not with that of A. brachiata,

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, 130-190 fathoms ; 80-120
fathoms ; and 100 fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 126° 45£' E., 190-320
fathoms.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 319

AGLAOPHENIA CUPRESSINA, Lamouroux.
(Plate xlvii., figs. 6-8.)

Aglaophenia cupressina, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor.
Flex., 1816, p. 169 ; Id., Lamouroux, Encyc. Meth.,
ii., 1824, p. 16 ; Id., Lamouroux in Quoy and Gaimard,
1824, p. 612, pi. 91, figs. 1-3. Id., Kirchenpauer, Abh.
Nat. Ver. Hamb., v., 1872, p. 27, pi. i., fig. 12. Id.,
Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), v., 1907, p. 331,
fig. 5 ; Id., Billard, C. R. Acad. Sci., clxvii., 1908, p.
940 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), ix., 1909,
p. 330 ; Id., Billard, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), xi.,
1910, p. 56 ; Id., Billard, Les Hydr. de 1'Exped. du
Siboga, I., Plumularidae, 1913, p. 107, fig. xcvi., pi.
vi. Id., Stechow, Zool. Jahrb., xxxii., 1912, p. 372.

Plumularia bipinnata, Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., 1816,
p. 126.

Plumularia MacGillivrayi, Busk, Voy. " Rattlesnake," i.,
1852, p. 400.

Aglaophenia MacGillivrayi, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver.
Hamb., v., 1872, pp. 27, 35. Id., Allman, Rep. Sci.
Results ;' Challenger " Exped., Zool., vii., Hydroida,
part I., 1883, p. 34, pis. x, xx, figs. 4-6. Id., Bale, Cat.
Austr. Hydr. Zooph., 1884, p. 170, pi. xviii., figs. 12-
14. Id., Marktanner-Turneretscher, Ann. K. K.
Hofmus. Wien, v., 1890, p. 268. Id., Kirkpatrick,
Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soc., n.s., vi., 1890, p. 604 ; Id.,
Kirkpatrick, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), v., 1890, p. 12.
Id., Campenhausen, Abh. Senckenberg. naturf. Ges.
Frankfurt-a-M., xxiii., 1897, p. 315. Id., Weltner,
Hydr. von Amb. u. Thursday Id., in Semon Zool.
Forsch. in Austr. u. dem Malays. Arch., 1900, p. 587.

Aglaophenia spicata, Kirchenpauer, Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamb.,
v., 1872, p. 27, pi. L, fig. 11, pi. iv., fig. 11.

? Aglaophenia bellis, Thornely in Willey's Zool. Results,
pt. iv., 1900, p. 456.

Anisocalyx (Aglaophenia) cupressina, Costa, Fauna del
Regno di Napoli, Zoofiti, 1838, p. 19.

(Not Aglaophenia spicata, Lamouroux, Hist. Polyp. Cor.
Flex., 1816, p. 166).

Hydrophyton polysiphonic, about fifteen inches in height,
stem and main branches thick, fringed with very numerous
small pinnately-disposed opposite branchlets, in one plane,
and facing one way, forming angles with the stem and large

320 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

branches of about 50° ; each branch springing from an
internode of the primary jointed stem, and replacing a
hydrocladium. Hydrocladia short, alternate, one on each
internode, both series directed towards the front and rising
at an angle of about 50° ; nodes transverse or very slightly
oblique, often indistinct.

Hydrothecse at an angle of about 30°, deep, very narrow
between the median and lateral sarcothecse ; a slight fold
or ridge directed obliquely forward near the base, and an
extremely fine curved line starting from the top of the lateral
sarcotheca and running to the base of the hydrotheca ; border
generally with the rudiment of an anterior tooth, sides with
minute irregular crenations or sinuations, usually with one
slightly larger tooth on each side near the front, back entire,
adnate. Hydrothecal internode with very strong divergent
septal ridges opposite the intrathecal fold and the base of the
lateral sarcothecae, often united by a longitudinal ridge at
the back of the internode.

Mesial sarcotheca about as long as the hydrotheca, very
thick, adnate up to the margin, divided into two loculi by
an oblique nearly complete septum ; aperture terminal, with
a blunt rounded lobe on each side. Lateral sarcothecse wide,
reaching the border of the hydrotheca or slightly beyond it,
terminal and lateral apertures united. Cauline sarcothecse
rather small, two at the base of each hydrocladium.

Gonangial pinna replacing a hydrocladium, the first inter-
node bearing a hydrotheca. Corbula consisting of about
seven or eight pairs of leaflets, springing from separate inter-
nodes of the rachis as narrow pinnules, but expanding above
into wider leaflets, which unite to form a closed corbula ;
distal edge of each leaflet with a prominent series of closely-
ranked sarcothecse, the rows curved strongly forward ; a
short broad lateral process projecting from the distal edge
of each leaflet just above its origin, bearing about three
sarcothecse, and overlapping the small openings between the
bases of the leaflets, the latter marked with linear perisarcal
thickenings.

This remarkable species, so distinct and characteristic alike
in its habit and in its minute structure, is in certain points
related to the crucialis-group. As in that group its branches
and corbulse take the place of hydrocladia, and there is the
same tendency to the paired condition, less however in the
corbulse than in the branches. The branchlets usually take
the place of two successive hydrocladia, so that they are as
nearly as possible opposite. The sides of the hydrotheca-
border are also very similar to those of A. billardi and A.

HYDKOIDA. BALE. 321

tasmanica, though less regular. The very short closely-
ranked hydrocladia are very distinctive, no less than the
peculiar form of the hydrothecae and the median sarcothecse,
some of the descriptions of which have been by no means
correct. This, as Allman pointed out, is the case with Kirchen-
pauer's statement that the mesial sarcotheca exceeded in
width the hydrotheca itself. Allman's account of the
hydrotheca-margin as being quite smooth is also erroneous,
according to Billard, who has examined the original " Chal-
lenger " specimens. The oblique line which crosses the
hydrotheca near the base, is the ordinary intrathecal fold
found in a similar position in most species of Aglaophenia,
but the longitudinal line is not, I think, found elsewhere. It
runs from the top of the lateral sarcotheca to the base of the
hydrotheca, and in a strict profile view it keeps parallel with
the abcauline side of the hydrotheca, crossing the intrathecal
fold. It is an extremely fine line, so delicate that it may
easily be overlooked, except at its origin above the lateral
sarcotheca, where it is slightly thicker ; and in many of the
hydrothecse I failed to distinguish it.

There are commonly only two septal ridges in the internode,
though in a few cases I have seen a third, which was almost
coincident with the proximal node. In one of the rough
sketches made by Mr. Busk an internode is seen with appar-
ently four ridges ; this results from the specimen being seen
obliquely, so that the ridges on both sides of the internode are
visible at once. The dorsal ridge, which unites the two trans-
verse ones, is a very distinct feature in a back view of the
hydrocladium when strongly marked ; in some specimens,
however, it is weak and obscure.

The lateral sarcothecse are much like those of A. billardi,
etc., except that they are considerably stouter in proportion
to their length. The septum dividing the mesial sarcotheca
has in side view, as Billard remarks, a sigmoid form ; it has
a narrow opening on the side next the hydrotheca. The
terminal aperture, with its lateral lobes, is evidently formed,,
as in many other species, by two apertures cutting into each
other.

The gonangial structures are really less exceptional in
character than the trophosome, the series of large dish-shaped
receptacles along the upper side of the corbula, shown in the
" Challenger " Report, having no real existence. There are
none of the large expanded free portions of the corbula-leaves,
such as are found in most of the species described in these
Reports ; the distal edges, with their closely-ranged sarco-
thecae, only projecting slightly outwards. The series of

322 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

sarcothecae, after running obliquely up the sides of the
corbula, when they reach the upper side curve strongly
forward towards the distal end, those from the opposite sides
meeting at a small angle. The narrowing of the leaflets, at
their basal portion, leaves a series of openings, much smaller,
however, than in some of the other species, and the lateral
spurs which protect these openings are short and somewhat
flabellate, usually with a sarcotheca about the middle of the
front margin, and one, less advanced, at each side of it. The
linear thickenings of the perisarc, which are shown in Allman's
figure, are commonly very irregular, and often much less
conspicuous and even wanting in part. The sex could not be
determined, and it is possible that some difference may exist
between the male and female corbulae ; in species where such
differences are known, however, they depend on the open
condition of the male corbulae, or the more profuse develop-
ment of the secondary appendages of the female ; and
differences of these sorts have apparently not been noticed
so far in connection with the present species. According to
Billard the gonocladium, on its proximal portion, supports
one or two hydrothecse, slightly or not modified ; in my
specimens I found a single one.

Loc. — Reef at North-west Island, off Port Curtis, Queens-
land.

AGLAOPHENIA (THECOCARPUS) ARMATA, Bale.

Aglaophenia armata, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 175, pi. xxxviii., figs. 3-4. Id.,
Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p.
314, pi. x., fig. 2.

On account of the indefinite character of the small recep-
tacles on the corbula-leaves, I have expressed some doubt as
to their hydrothecal nature. Corroborative evidence, how-
ever, that the species is properly placed is the presence on the
proximal part of the gonocladium of several modified hydro-
thecse, this being, according to Nutting, a character found in
Thecocarpus, but not in typical species of Aglaophenia.

Locs. — Thirty-eight miles north-east of North Reef Light-
house, Capricorn Group, off Port Curtis, Queensland, 74
fathoms.

Thirteen miles north-east of North Reef, 70-74 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA (THECOCARPUS) TENUISSIMA, Bale.

Aglaophenia tenuissima, Bale, Biological Results "Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 179, pi. xxxvii., figs. 1-2. Id.,
Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915, p.
317, pi. xi., fig. 2.

HYDROIDA. BALE. 323

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 126° 45J' E.', 190-320
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160 fathoms.
Great Australian Bight, Long. 127° 20' E., 180 fathoms.
Eastern Slope, Bass Strait, 80-300 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA (THECOCARPUS) CALYCIFERA, Bale.

Aglaophenia calycifera, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 178, pi. xxxvii., figs. 3-4.

The nodes of the hydrocladia are described as "transverse" ;
a more correct description, in the great majority of cases,
would be " slightly oblique."

Locs.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 126° 45^' E., 190-320
fathoms.

Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160 fathoms.

AGLAOPHENIA (THECOCARPUS) MEGALOCARPA, Bale.

Aglaophenia megalocarpa, Bale, Biological Results " En-
deavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 45, pi. iv., fig. 1, pi. vi., fig. 5.

The peculiar positions of the hydropore and the intra-
thecal ridge, along with the form of the lateral sarcothecse,
to which I have referred as so exceptional, are exactly
paralleled in some of the forms which Billard, in his " Report
on the Siboga Plumulariidse," has ranked as varieties of
Thecocarpus myriophyllum. From all those forms the hydro -
thecse of A. megalocarpa differ in the denticulation of the
border, and in the crest on the median tooth.

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, 80-120 fathoms.

Genus HALICORNARIA, Busk.

Of the species of Halicornaria comprised in the collection
H . superba and H. furcata var. intermedia belong to the ascidi-
cndes-group, distinguished by the position of the abcauline
intrathecal ridge ; H. urceolifera and var. scandens belong to
the longirostris-group, in which the intrathecal ridge is
wanting ; H. vegce and H. tubulifera form a group, new to
the Australian region, having no intrathecal ridge, and dis-
tinguished by the peculiar and characteristic ramification,
which moreover is polysiphonic ; and H. birostrata is distinct
from all the others in the position of the intrathecal ridge,
in the forked anterior sarcothecse, and in other particulars.

324 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

All attempts to find a constant distinction between Hali-
cornaria and the allied genera, dependent on the trophosome
alone, have been failures. The monosiphonic habit is not
constant, and it is found in some Aglaophenice. I formerly
relied on the presence of sarcothecse behind the axils of the
hydrocladia, but I have recently found the same character in
.several species of Aglaophenia and Thecocarpus.

One character only is common to every Halicornaria which
I have examined, and to no other genus, the presence namely
of little perisarcal points on the margins of the hydropore, or
on one margin only.

HALICORNARIA BIROSTRATA, Bale.

Halicornaria birostrata, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour, ii., 1, 1914, p. 49, pi. iv., fig. 5, pi. vii., fig. 6.

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, 40-100 fathoms.

HALICORNARIA VEG^, Jaderholm.

Halicornaria vegce, Bale, Biological Results " Endeavour,"
ii., 4, 1914, p. 185, pi. xxxvi., figs. 4-5 (synonymy).

Loc.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160
fathoms.

HALICORNARIA TUBULIFERA, Bale.

Halicornaria tubulifera, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 187, pi. xxxvi., fig. 3.

Loc.— Great Australian Bight, Long. 130° 40' E., 160
fathoms.

HALICORNARIA SUPERBA, Bale.

Aglaophenia superba, Bale, Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet., ii., 1881,
pp. 31, 45, pi. xiii., fig. 4-4b.

Halicornaria superba, Bale, Cat. Austr. Hydr. Zooph.,
1884, p. 175, pi. xiii., fig. 1, pi. xvi., fig. 4 ; Id., Bale,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893, p. 107 ; Id.,
Bale, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvi., 1913, p. 145.
Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlviii., 1915,
p. 312.

A single specimen was observed, about nine inches in
height, with two or three branches near the summit.

Locs. — Forty miles west of Kingston, South Australia, 30
fathoms.

Twenty miles east of King Island, Bass Strait.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 325

HALICORNARIA FURCATA, Bale, var. INTERMEDIA, Bale.

Halicornaria intermedia, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 53, pi. v., fig. 2, pi. vii., figs. 3-4.
(Not Halicornaria intermedia, Billard, Les. Hydr. de
FExped. du Siboga, I., Plumularidse, 1913, p. 65, pi.
iv., fig. 37).

Halicornaria furcata, Bale, var. intermedia, Bale, Biological
Results "Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, Addendum, p. 1.
Id., Brings, Rec. Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914, p. 298, pi.
xxv., fig. 3 ; Id., Briggs, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales,
xlviii., 1915, p. 310.

As mentioned in a supplementary slip inserted in Part I.,
it became necessary to cancel the specific name intermedia
owing to Billard's having used the same name while my
Report was awaiting publication ; and in preference to
proposing another specific name I ranked the form pro-
visionally as a variety of H. furcata, pending further know-
ledge of the affinities of that species.

Among the later material received were a number of
colonies, most of which agreed fully with the original
description ; but in one or two instances a variation occurred,
in which each internode of the rachis bore a single hydro-
cladium only.

The variety is habitually associated with Aglaophenia
tasmanica, and both hydroids are, up to the present, only
recorded from the Tasmanian region. Each was obtained in
eight dredgings, in seven of which they were growing
together. In the collection from Cape Pillar, Tasmania,
reported on by Mr. Briggs, as well as in a number of colonies
from near Freycinet Peninsula, Tasmania, they were similarly
associated, and Mr. Briggs considers that the Halicornaria
always occurs as an epizoon on A. tasmanica.

Locs. — Oyster Bay, Tasmania, 20 fathoms.

North-east of Babel Island, Bass Strait, 100-170 fathoms.

East of Babel Island, about 70 fathoms.

Twenty -one miles N. 65° E. of Babel Island, 73 fathoms.

Off Babel Island, 60 fathoms.

Twenty-five miles north-east of Babel Island, 70-100
fathoms.

Off Green Cape, 470 fathoms.

Thirty-six miles S. 58° W. of Cape Wickham Lighthouse,
72 fathoms.

326 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

HALICORNARIA URCEOLIFERA (Lamarck}.

Halicornaria urceolifera, Bale, Biological Results " Endea-
vour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 183, pi. xxxvii., figs. 5-6
(synonymy).

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, 80-120 fathoms.

HALICORNARIA URCEOLIFERA (Lamarck],
var. SCANDENS, Bale.

Halicornaria urceolifera (Lamarck), var. scandens, Bale,
Biological Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914, p. 51,
pi. v., fig. 4, pi. vii., fig. 5 ; Id., Bale, Biological
Results " Endeavour," ii., 4, 1914, p. 184.

Loc. — Great Australian Bight, 40-100 fathoms.

LITERATURE CITED.1

Agassiz, L. — Contributions to the Natural History of the
United States, iv., 1862.

Agassiz, A. — North American Acalephse. — Illust. Cat. Mus.
Comp. Zool. Harvard, No. ii., 1865 (sometimes called
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, i., 1865.

Alder, J. — A notice of some new genera and species of

British Hyclroid Zoophytes. — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,

(2), xviii., 1856.

—A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of Northumberland

and Durham. — Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, Hi.,

1857.
Allman, G. J. — Report on the Hydroida collected during

the Expeditions of H.M.S. " Porcupine." —Trans. Zool.

Soc., viii., 1874.

—Diagnoses of New Genera and Species of

Hydroida. — Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xii., 1876.

—Report on the Hydroida collected during the
exploration of the Gulf Stream by L. F. de Pourtales.—
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, v., 1877.

—Report on the Hydroida, I., The Plumularidae.—
Rep. Sci. Results " Challenger " Exped., Zool., vii., 1883.

—Description of Australian, Cape, and other
Hydroida, mostly new, from the collection of Miss
H. Gatty. — Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., xix., 1885.

1. The dates, as far as possible, are those of publication of the separate
part or number, not necessarily of the completed volume.

HYDROIDA. BALE. 327

Allman, G. J. — Report on the Hydroida, II. — Rep. Sci.
Results " Challenger " Exped., Zool., xxiii., 1888.

Bale, W. M. — On the Hydroida of South-eastern Australia,
with descriptions of supposed new species, and notes
on the genus Aglaophenia. — Journ. Micro. Soc. Viet.,
ii., 1881.

—Catalogue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes,
1884.

—The Genera of the Plumulariidse, with observa-
tions on various Australian Hydroids. — Trans, and
Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., xxiii., 1886.

—On some new and rare Hydroida in the Australian
Museum collection. — Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2),
in., 1888.

—Further Notes on Australian Hydroids, with
descriptions of some new species. — Proc. Roy. Soc.
Viet., (n.s.), vi., 1893.

—Further Notes on Australian Hydroids, pt. II. —
Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.}, xxvi., 1913.

—Further Notes on Australian Hydroids, pt. III.—
Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., (n.s.), xxvii., 1914.

—Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great
Australian Bight and other Localities, pt. I.- — Bio-
logical Results " Endeavour," ii., 1, 1914.

—Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great

Australian Bight and other Localities, pt. II.—
Biological Results " Endeavour," ii., 4, 1914.
Bartlett, G. C. — Notes on Hydroid Zoophytes. — Geelong

Naturalist, (2), Hi., 1907.

Billard, A. — Hydroi'des recoltes par M. Ch. Gravier dans le
golfe de Tadjourah. — Bull. Mus. d'hist. nat. Paris,
xi., 1904.

—Hydroi'des recoltes par M. Seurat, aux iles Gambier.
—Bull. Mus. d'hist. nat. Paris, xi., 1905.

—Note sur les Hydro'ides du " Travailleur " et du
" Talisman." -Bull. Mus. d'hist. nat. Paris, — , 1906.

Mission des Pecheries de la cote occidentale

d'Afrique, iii., Hydroi'des. — Actes Soc. linn. Bordeaux,
Ixi., 1906.

. — Expeditions scientifiques du " Travailleur " et

du " Talisman," viii., Hydroides, 1906.

— Expedition antarctique fran^aise (1903-1905), Hy-

dro'ides 1906.

328 '' ENDEAVOim " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Billard, A. — Deux especes nouvelles d'Hydroi'des de Mada-
gascar.— Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen., (4), vi., Notes et
Revue, 1907.

Billard, A. — Hydro'ides de Madagascar et du Sud-Est de
FAfrique.— Arch, de Zool. exp. et gen., (4), vii., 1907.

Hydroiides de la collection Lamarck du Museum

de Paris.— Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9), v., 1907 (Part I.) ;
vi., 1907, (Part II.}.

— Sur les Plumulariidae de la collection du " Chal-
lenger " : Sur les Haleciidse, Campanulariidse, et Ser-
tulariidse de la collection du " Challenger." — Comptes
rendus Acad. des Sciences, cxlvii., 1908.

—Sur les Hydroiides de la collection Lamouroux :
Sur quelques Sertulariida3 de la collection du British
Museum : Sur quelques Plumulariida3 de la collection
du British Museum. — Comptes rendus Acad. des
Sciences, cxlviii., 1909.

Revision des Especes types d'Hydroi'des de la

collection Lamouroux. — Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., (9),
ix., 1909.

-Revision d'une partie de la collection des Hy-
dro'ides du British Museum. — Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool.,
(9), xi., 1910.

Note preliminaire sur les especes nouvelles de

Plumulariidae de FExpedition du " Siboga." — Arch,
de Zool. exp. et gen., (5), viii., 1911.

— — Hydro'ides de Roscoff. — Arch, de Zool. exp. et

gen., li., 1912.

-Les Hydroides de 1'Expedition du "Siboga." —

•/

I., Plumulariidae, 1913.

Blainville, H. M. D. — Manuel d'Actinologie ou de Zoophy-
tologie, 1834.

Bonnevie, K. — The Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition,
1876-1878.— Hydroida, 1899.

Borradaile, L. A.— The Hydroids. — The Fauna and Geo-
graphy of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes,
ii., 1905.

Briggs, E. A. — Hydrozoa from one hundred fathoms,

seven miles east of Cape Pillar, Tasmania. — Records

Austr. Mus., x., 10, 1914.

—Notes on Tasmanian Hydrozoa. — Proc. Roy.

Soc. N.S. Wales, Ixviii., 1915.
Broch, H. — Die Hydroiden der arktischen Meere. — Fauna

arctica, v., 1909.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 329

Busk, G. — A list of Sertularian Zoophytes and Polyzoa
from Port Natal, Algoa Bay, and Table Bay, in South
Africa. — Kept. Brit. Assoc. (Edinb. 1850), 1851.

An account of the Polyzoa and Sertularian

Zoophytes collected in the voyage of the " Rattle-
snake " on the coast of Australia and the Louisiade
Archipelago. — J. MacGillivray's Narrative of the Voyage
of H.M.S. " Rattlesnake/' commanded by the late
Captain 0. Stanley, during the years 1846-1850, i.,
App. iv., 1852.

— Zoophyte logy. — Quart. Journ. Micro. Science, vi.,

1858.

Calkins, G. N. — Some Hydroids from Puget Sound. —
Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxviii., 1899.

Campenhausen, B. von. — Beitrage zur Systematik der
Hydroiden. - - Hydroiden von Ternate. - - Abhandl.
Senckenb. naturf. Gesellsch. Frankfurt-a-M., xxiii.,
1897.

Clark, S. F. — Reports on the Dredging Operations off the
west coast of Central America to the Galapagos, to
the west coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of California,
in charge of Alex. Agassiz, carried on by the U.S. Fish
Commission Steamer " Albatross " during 1891. — The
Hydroids. — Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xxv.,
1894.

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expe-
dition to the Eastern Tropical Pacific, in charge of
Alex. Agassiz, by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer
" Albatross " from October 1904 to March 1905.— The
Hydroids.— Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xxxv.,
1907.

Cong don, E. D. — The Hydroids of Bermuda. — Proc. Amer.
Acad. Arts and Sciences, xlii., 1907.

Costa, 0. G. — Fauna del Regno di Napoli, Zoofiti, 1838.

Coughtrey, M. — Notes on the New Zealand Hydroidese. —
Trans. N. Zealand Inst., vii., 1874.

Critical Notes on the New Zealand Hydroida. —

Trans. N. Zealand Inst., viii., 1875.

Critical Notes on the New Zealand Hydroida. —

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (4), xvii., 1876.

Deslongchamps, E. — See Lamouroux.^

D'Orbigny, A. — Zoophytes. — Voyage dans 1'Amerique
meridionale, v., 1839.

330 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Ellis, John. — An Essay towards a Natural History of the
Corallines and other Marine Productions of the like
kind, commonly found on the coasts of Great Britain
and Ireland, 1755.

Ellis, J., and So lander, D. — The Natural History of many
curious and uncommon Zoophytes, 1786.

Esper, E. J. C. — Die Pflanzenthiere in Abbildungen nach
der Natur mit Farben erleuchtet, 1788-1830.

— Fortsetzungen der Pflanzenthiere, 1794-1806.

Etheridge, R., Junr. — Zoology of Lord Howe Island.—
Mem. Austr. Mus., ii., 1889.

Farquhar, H. — List of New Zealand Hydroida. — Trans. N.

Zealand Inst., xxviii., 1896.
Fraser, C. McL. — The Hydroids of the West Coast of

North America, with special reference to those of the

Vancouver Island region. — Bull. Lab. Nat. Hist. State

Univ. Iowa, Iowa, vi., 1911.

—Some Hydroids of Beaufort, North Carolina.—
Bull. Bureau of Fisheries Washington, xxx., 1912.

Gray, J. E., Additional Radiated Animals and Annelides.—
E. Dieff enbach' s Travels in New Zealand, ii., 1843.

Hargitt, C. W. — Synopsis of North American Inverte-
brates.— The Hydromedusae, I. and II. — Amer. Nat.,
xxxv., 1901.

Hartlaub, C. — Revision der Sertularella-Arten. — Abh. Nat.
Ver. Hamburg., xvi., 1900.

— Hydro iden aus der Stillen Ocean. — Zool. Jahrb.,
xiv., 1901.

—Die Hydroiden der magalhaensischen Region und
chilenischen Kiiste. — Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi., Hi., 1905.
—Hydroiden. — Resultats du Voyage du S. Y.

" Belgica " en 1897-1899, Zoologie, 1904.

Hickson, S. J., and Gravely, F. H. — Hydroid Zoophytes.—
National Antarctic Expedition, Nat. Hist., Hi., 1907.

Hilgendorf, F. W. — On the Hydroids of the Neighbourhood
of Dunedin. — Trans. N. Zealand Inst., xxx., 1897.

- On some Calyptoblast Hydroids from the Kermadec
Islands. — Trans. N. Zealand Inst., xliii., 1911.
Hincks, Rev. T.— A Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South
Devon and South Cornwall. — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
(3), viii., 1861.

—A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes,

1SGS.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 331

Hincks, Rev. T. — Plumularians. — Popular Science Review,
xiii., 1874.

Hutton, F. W. — On the New Zealand Sertularians. — Trans.
N. Zealand Inst., v., 1872.

Inaba, M. — Hydroidea obtained in Misaki, Miura, Soshu. —
Zool. Mag. Tokyo, 1890-1892.

—Hydroidea of the West Coast of Kishu.— Zool.
Mag. Tokyo, 1892.

— Hydroids obtained in Shima. — Zool. Mag. Tokyo,

1892.

- • — Additions to the Hydroids of Misaki. — Zool.
Mag. Tokyo, 1892.

Jaderholm, E. — Ueber aussereuropaische Hydroiden des
biologischen Museums der Universitat Upsala. — K.
Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., xxi., 1896.

—Die Hydroiden der schwedischen zoologischen
Polarexpedition 1900. — K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl.
xxviii., 1902.

— Neue oder wenig bekannte ostasiatische Hy-
droiden.— K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., xxviii., 1902.

—Aussereuropaische Hydroiden im schwedischen
Reichsmuseum. — Arkiv. for Zoologi, K. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. i., 1903.

—Hydroiden ans antarktischen und subantark-
tischen Meeren. - - W issenschaftliche Ergebnisse der
schwedischen sudpolar-Expedition 1901-1903, v., 1905.

—Die Hydroiden des sibirischen Eismeeres, gesam-
melt von der russischen Polarexpedition 1900-1903.—
Mem. de I'Acad. imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg,
8e. serie, Classe Phys.-Math., xviii., 1908.

—Northern and Arctic Invertebrates in the Collec-
tion of the Swedish State Museum. — IV., Hydroiden.—
K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. xlv., 1909.

-Ueber die Hydroiden welche Dr. C. Skottsberg in
den Jahren 1907-1909 gesammelt. — Arkiv. for Zoologi,
K. Svenska Vet.-Akad., vi., 1910.

Jickeli, C. F. — Der Bau der Hydroidpolypen, II. — -Morph.
Jahrb. viii., 1883.

Johnston, Geo. — A History of the British Zoophytes.—
2nd ed., 1847.

332 •' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Kirchenpauer, G. H. — Neue Sertulariden aus verscheidenen

Hamburgischen Sammlungen, nebst allgemeinen

Bemerkungen iiber Lamouroux's Gattung Dynamena. —

-VerJiandl. K. Leopold. -Carol, deutschen Akad.

Naturf., xxxi., 1864.

• Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularidae, einz-

elne Gruppen derselben und ihre Fruchtbehalter. I.,
Aglaophenia. — Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamburg., v., 1872.

—Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularidae, ein-
zelne Gruppen derselben und ihre Fruchtbehalter, II.,
Plumularia und Nemertesia. — Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamburg,
vi., 1876.

— Nordische Gattungen und Arten von Sertu-

lariden.— Abh. Nat. Ver. Hamburg, viii., 1884.

Kirkpatrick, R. — Reports on the Zoological Collections
made in Torres Straits by Professor A. C. Haddon
1888-1889, Hydroida and Polyzoa. — Sci. Proc. E.
Dublin Soc., vi., (n.s.), 1890.

—Report upon the Hydrozoa and Polyzoa collected
by P. W. Bassett-Smith, Esq., Surgeon, R.N., during
the survey of the Tizard and Macclesfield Banks, in the
China Sea, by H.M.S. "Rambler," Commander W.
U. Moore.— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), v., 1890.

Kramp, P. L. — Report on the Hydroids collected by the
Danmark Expedition at North-east Greenland. —
Danmark Ekspeditionen til Grfinlands Nordostkyst 1906-
1908, v., 1911.

Krauss, C. F. F. — Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Corallineen und
Zoophyten der Siidsee nebst Abbildungen der neuen
Arten, 1837.

Lamarck. — Histoire naturelle des Animaux sans Vertebres.
-ii., Polypes, 1816 ; 2nd ed., 1836.

Lamouroux, J. V. F- — Extrait d'un Memoire sur la Classi-
fication des Polypes coralligenes non entierement
pierreux. — Nouv. Bull. Sci. Soc. philomatique, Hi., 1812.

—Histoire des Polypiers coralligenes flexibles vul-
gairement nomines Zoophytes, 1816.

—Exposition methodique des genres de 1'ordre des
Polypiers, avec leur description et celle des principales
especes, figurees dans 84 planches, les 63 premieres
appartenant a 1'histoire naturelle des Zoophytes d'Ellis
et Solander, 1821.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 333

Lamouroux, J. V. F. — Description des Polypiers flexibles
dans Freycinet, Voyage autour du raonde, execute sur
les Corvettes de S. M. l'"Uranie " et la " Physicienne,"
pendant les annees 1817-1820. Zoologie par Quoy et
Gaimard, 1824.

— , - — Bory de St. Vincent, et E. Deslongchamps.—
Histoire naturelle des Zoophytes ou Animaux ray-
onnes, faisant suite a I'histoire naturelle des Vers de
Bruguiere.— Encyc. Method., ii., 1824.

Lendenfeld, von, R. — The Australian Hydromedusae.—
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, ix., 1884.

Levinsen, G. M. R. — Systematic Studies on the Sertu-
lariidae. — Vidensk. Meddel. fra den naturh. Foren. i
Kbhvn. Ixiv., 1913.

Linne, C. — Systema Naturae, Edit. 10, 1758.
Marktanner-Turneretscher, G. — Die Hydroiden des K. K.

naturhistorischen Hofmuseums. - - Annalen K. K.

naturhistorischen Hofmuseums Wien, v., 1890.

Meneghini, G. — Osservazioni sull'ordine delle Sertulariee
delle classe dei Polipi. — Mem. Imp. Regio Institute
Veneto di Scienze, Lettere, ed Arti, ii., 1845.

Meyen, F. J. F. — Beitrage zur Zoologie gesammelt auf einer
Reise um die Erde, V., Ueber das Leuchten des Meeres
und Beschreibung einiger Polypen und anderer niederer
Tiere. — Nov. Act. Acad. Leopold. -Carol, xvi., Suppl. i,
1834.

Milne-Edwards, H. — Lamarck, Histoire naturelle des Ani-
maux sans Vertebres, 2nd ed., ii., 1836.

Motz-Kossowska, S. — Contribution a la connaissance des
Hydraires de la Mediterranee occidentale, II., Hy-
draires calyptoblastiques. — Arch. Zool. exp. et gen.,
(5), vi., 1911.

Mulder, J. F., and Trebilcock, R. E. — Victorian Hydroida,
with description of new species, pts. III. and IV. —
Geelong Naturalist, (2), vi., 1914.

Nutting, C. C. — American Hydroids, Part I, the Plumu-
laridse. — U.S. National Museum Special Bulletin, 1900.

-The Hydroids of the Woods Hole Region.— U.S.
Fish Commission Bull, for 1899, 1901.

— American Hydroids, Part II, the Sertularidse. —
U.S. National Museum Special Bulletin, 1904.

Hydroids of the Hawaiian Islands, collected by

the steamer " Albatross " in 1902.— U.S. Fish Com-
mission Bull, for 1903, 1905.

•334 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Oken. — Lehrbuch der Naturgeschichte. Dritter Teil ; —
Zoologie, i., 1815.

Pallas. — Elenchus Zoophytorum, 1766.

Pfeffer, G. — Die niedere Thierwelt des antarktischen Ufer-
gebietes. — Ergebnisse der deutschen Polar-Expedi-
tionen. Allg. Theil, ii., 1892.

Pictet, C. — Etude sur les Hydraires de la Baie d'Amboine. —

Revue suisse de Zoologie, i., 1893.

Pictet, C. et Bedot, M. — Hydraires provenant des cam-
pagnes de FHirondelle 1886-1888. — Resultats des Cam-
pagnes scientifiques accomplies sur son yacht par Albert
ler., Prince Souverain de Monaco, Fasc. xviii., 1900.

Ritchie, J. — The Hydroids of the Scottish National Ant-
arctic Expedition. — Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlv., 1907.

—Supplementary Report on the Hydroids of the
Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. — Trans. Roy.
Soc. Edin., xlvii., 1909.

—Hydroids from Christmas Island, Indian Ocean,
collected by C. W. Andrews, D.Sc., F.R.S., F.Z.S., in
1908.— Proc. Zool. Soc., 1910.

-The Hydroids of the Indian Museum, No. I. —
Records of the Indian Museum, v., 1910.

—Contribution to our knowledge of the Hydroid
Fauna of the West of Scotland, being an account of
Collections made by Sir John Murray, K.C.B., on
S.Y. " Medusa." -Annals Scot. Nat. Hist., xx., 1911.

—Scientific Results of the Trawling Expedition of
H.M.C.S. " Thetis " off the coast of New South Wales
in February and March, 1898. Part 16, Hydrozoa
(Hydroid Zoophytes and Stylasterina). — Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 16, 1911.

—On the invalidity of the Hydroid genus Diplop-

teron, Allman. — Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinb., xix., 1913.

Sars, G. 0. — Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider-
-Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandl. — 1874.

Schneider, K. C. — Hydropolypen von Rovigno, nebst
Uebersicht iiber das System der Hydropolypen im
Allgemeinen. — Zool. Jahrb., x., 1897.

Spencer, W. B. — A new family of Hydroidea, together with
a description of the structure of a new species of
Plumularia. — Trans. Roy. Soc. Viet., ii., 1891.

HYDROIDA. — BALE. 335

Stechow, E. — Hydroidpolypen der japanischen Ostkiiste,
I. Teil, Athecata und Plumularidae. — Abh. math.-phys.
Klasse K. Bayer Akad. der Wissensch., i. Suppl.-Bd.,
1909.

— Hydroiden der Miinehener Zoologischen Staat-
sammlung. — Zool. Jahrb., xxxii., 1912.

Hydroidpolypen der japanischen Ostkiiste, II. Teil,
Campanularidse, Halecidae, Lafoeida% Campanulinidae,
und Sertularidse, nebst Erganzungen zu den Athecata
und Plumularidae. — Abh. math.-phys. Klasse K. Bayer
Akad. der Wissensch., Hi. Suppl.-Bd., 1913.

Thompson, D'A. W. — On some new and rare Hydroid
Zoophytes (Sertulariidse and ThuiariicUe) from Aus-
tralia and New Zealand. — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5),
Hi., 1879.

-The Hydroid Zoophytes of the " Willem Barents"
Expedition. — Bijdr. bot de Dierkunde, 1884.

Thornely, L. R. — The Hydroid Zoophytes collected by Dr.
Willey in the Southern Seas. — Zoological Results based
on material from New Britain, New Guinea, Loyalty
Islands, and elsewhere, collected during the years 1895,
1896, and 1897, by Arthur Willey, D. Sc. Lond., Hon.
M.A. Cantab., Part IV., 1900.

—Report to the Government of Ceylon on the
Pearl Oyster Fisheries of the Gulf of Mannar : Suppl.
Report viii., On the Hydroida, 1904.

—Reports on the Marine Biology of the Sudanese Red
Sea. — X., Hydroida collected by Mr. C. Crossland from
October, 1904, to May, 1905.— Journ. Linn. Soc.,
Zool., xxxi., 1908.

Torrey, H. B. — The Hydroida of the Pacific Coast of North
America. — Univ. of California Pull., i., 1902.

-The Hydroids of the San Diego Region. — Univ.
of California Publ., ii., 1904.

Torrey, H. B. and Martin, Ann. — Sexual Dimorphism in
Aglaophenia. — Univ. of California Publ., in., 1906.

Vanhofl'en, E. — Die Hydroiden der deutschen Siidpolar-
E xpedition 1 90 1 - 1 903. — Deutsche Sudpolar- Expedition
15)01-1903, xi., Zoologie in., 1910.

Verrill, A. E. — Report upon the Invertebrate Animals of
Vineyard Sound and the adjacent Waters, with an
account of the physical characters of the region. —
U.S. Fish Comm. liep. I. (1871-1872), 1873.

0 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC' RESULTS.

Verrill, A. E. — Brief Contributions to Zoology, from the
Museum of Yale College. No. 23-24. Results of recent
dredging Expeditions on the Coast of New England.
— Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts, (3), v., 1873.

Versluys, J., Junr. — Hydraires calyptoblastes recueillis dans
la Mer des Antilles pendant 1'une des croisieres accom-
plies par le Comte R. de Dalmas sur son yacht Chazalie.
-Mem. Soc. Zool. France, xii., 1899.

Warren, E. — On a collection of Hydro ids, mostly from the
Natal Coast. — Ann. Natal Govt. Mus., ?'., 1908.

Weltner, W. — Hydroiden von Amboina und Thursday
Island. — 8emon, Zoologische For-schunysrrisen in Aus-
tralien und dem Malayischen Archipel , 19CK).

NOTE.

Since the foregoing pages were in print I have received
from Messrs. Mulder and Trebilcock their paper on "• Victorian
Hydroida, Part V.," from the " Geelong Naturalist," in which
reference is made to some of the species mentioned in the
present paper. One of the new forms described — Sertularella
annulaventricosa — is almost certainly the same as S. undidaia
(ante, p. 284). Plumularia setoceaformis, n. sp. is evidently
founded on a small specimen of P. procumbens, Spencer. A
figure is given of " Hebella scandans," growing on Serfularia
unguiculata as described herein (see H. calcarata, var. contorta).
It is mentioned that hydrothecse are borne on the primary
stolon where it crosses the nodes of the Serlvlaria, a feature
which I have not seen in my specimens.

I have also received from Dr. Eraser his paper on " Some
Hydroids of the Vancouver Island Region, and Notes on
some Alaskan Hydroids." Halecium -flexile, Allman, and
//. parvulum, Bale, which, following Billard, I have united,
arc recorded by the writer as distinct species.

ERRATA.

Part I. (Vol. ii., Pt. 1), page 16, sixth line from bottom, for
"p. 45!)" read "p. 463."

Part I. (Vol. ii., Pt. 1), pace 53, line 25 from top, for " fis. 4 "
read "rigs. 3-4."

Part II. (Vol. ii., Pt. 4), page 172, line 21, for " Proc. Roy. Soc.
Kdin." read " Proc. R. Phvs. Soc. Kdin."

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLVI.

Fig. 1. — Sertularella undulata, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. — Sertularella tasmanica, sp. nov.
Fig. 3. — Sertularia pusilla, nom. nov.

•*- ^o " * " ' ' ' ' "

Fig. 5.-

Fig. 6.-

Figs. 1-6x40.

BIOL. RESULTS " ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XL VI.

W. M. BALE, del.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL VII.

Fig. 1. — Cladocarpella multiseptata, sp. nov.

Fig. 2.-

Fig. 3.-

Fig. 4.-

Fig. 5.-

Fig. 6. — Aglaophenia cupressina, Lamouroux.

Fig. 7.-

Fig. 8.-

Figs. 1-6x80.

BTOL. RESULTS "ENDEAVOUR," VOL. III.

PLATE XLVIT

6

W. M. BALE, del.

7

VII. -The Continental Shelf of the East Coast of Australia

BY

THE LATE H. C. DANNEVIG,
COMMONWEALTH DIRECTOR OF FISHERIES.

CONTINENTAL SHELF. — DANNEVIO. 339

VLl.—THE CONTINENTAL SHELF OF THE EAST

COAST.

FKOM the soundings on the charts of the East Coast it will be
seen that a submerged step or shelf of moderate depth is
interposed between the mainland and the great ocean abyss
of 2,000 to 3,000 fathoms or more, which almost completely
surrounds the Continent like an enormous valley of great
width and depth. It is generally recognised that this shelf
has its origin partly through volcanic faults or breaks, and
partly through elevation and depression in relation to sea
level. Other and more mechanical agencies are constantly
tending to modify the character of this shelf ; erosion from
the coast and river deposits is providing fresh building
material with a tendency to elevate the shelf, while the currents
and waves endeavour to remove all loose and flotsam
matter. It is evident therefore that apart from an " original "
formation of ancient date, there are constant changes taking
place for which the action of waves and ocean currents are
mainly responsible.

Between the southern portion of the Coral Reef and the
Queensland Mainland is a comparatively wide area of shallow
water. 15 to 30 fathoms being the usual depth. The bottom
consists almost uniformly of coral sand and is perfectly smooth
and free from obstruction. Coral reefs form the margin
towards the ocean deep, and they are the principal producers
of the material from which this portion of the continental
shelf is constituted.1 It is at Sandy Cape, however
(Lat. 25° S.), that the more typical shelf commences and
continues southwards along the coast. For the first three
hundred and sixty miles (or south to Smoky Cape in Lat.
31° S.) the shelf presents peculiarities which gradually
disappear further south.

These peculiarities are that the shallow portion of the
shelf contimies seawards for a considerable distance so that,
for instance, at Double Island, the depth is only 50 fathoms.
At this depth the shelf may here be said to terminate, as the
more or less rocky and always steep edge slopes off very
quickly towards great depths. Northwards from Cape
Moreton the shallow portion of the ledge is mainly covered
with coral sand, which southwards gives way to a somewhat
coarse yellow sand, occasionally interspersed with gravelly
beds M'here the currents are strong, as off Point Danger.

1. Medley, C.. ami Taylor, 'I'. (.!.— Rep. Aifilr. Astoc. Adv. Sci.. xi.,
'1907), 1909, pp. 397-413.

340 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

From 60 to 100 fathoms, apart from being narrow and rocky,
the shelf is frequently so steep as to form part of the general
slope do AVII wards to abyssal depths.

Southwards from Smoky Cape the relative proportion
between the inner and the outer areas become reversed. At
the Cape itself the shelf is narrow and divides into two equal
belts ; the shallow area of less than 50 fathoms and a deeper
stratum with an average depth of 70 fathoms. From here
southward-; this outer stratum becomes gradually wider at
the expense of the inshore or secondary ledge and a maximum
width of which i* found in the Newcastle Bight, where the
inshore ledge is seven to eight miles wide, while the outer
extends for another twenty -one miles before breaking off
into the deep. Simultaneous with the appearance of the
outside ledge at Smoky Cape the depth of the tk break off '
increases quickly to about 100 fathoms and remains so for
the remainder of the coast south to Gabo Island.

An interesting, and, as will be shown, very important
feature of the outside ledee is the nature of the bottom, which
in most parts, consists of fine sand mixed with mud. Rocks
are very rarely met with and are practically confined to the
outer margin : but the inshore narrow strip of less than 50
fathoms is in most parts rough and so also is the area between
the two ledcres where in some parts there appears an almost
vertical rocky wall fully one hundred and twenty feet high
and running parallel to the coast.

These conditions continue southwards for nearly four
hundred miles to near Twofold Bay, the only interruption
being opposite projecting headlands, where the influence of
confined currents prevent the accumulation of deposits and
leave the " foundation ' —the rocks and boulders — practi-
cally bare. The nature of the shelf near Twofold Bay and
southwards to Gabo Island differs in a marked degree from
the conditions just described, for here the " slope " is even
and continuous seawards to approximately 100 fathoms, and
while the area inside the 50 fathoms is perfectly smooth and
covered with sand and mud, the outer portion is rough and
near the edge has the semblance of a stone quarry. On one
occasion when for the purpose of some investigations the
'' Endeavour " was anchored eleven miles to the east from
Green Cape considerable difficulty was experienced in recover-
ing the kedge anchor used ; the wire cable employed was
caught under several ledges in such a manner that it became
necessary to steam in a circle to free it. and the anchor, when
recovered, was twisted almost beyond recognition.

CONTINENTAL SHELF. — DANNEVIG. 341

Southwards from Gabo Island the shelf widens out con-
siderably, and consists entirely of the outer or deeper strata,
which, between 50 and 300 fathoms, is miles wide. The
edge gradually bends westwards parallel with the coast until
opposite the mouth of the Snowy R.iver, where at a distance
of about thirty miles from land it turns abruptly to the south.
On approaching the bend the shallow area (of les.s than 50
fathoms) has gradually extended at the expense of the outer
ledge, and while the former continues westward through
Bass Strait and connects Victoria and Tasmania, the latter
extends as a relatively narrow belt along the eastern slope
past Flinders Island and along the east coast of Tasmania.

The bottom conditions south and west from Gabo Island
are similar to what has been described on the east coast ;
the shallow section is either rough or covered with coarse
sand, while the deeper ledge is covered with fine deposits.
The outer edge, however, is occasionally rocky and the
contour rather irregular. South from Cape Everard in par-
ticular has been located a deep indentation presenting abrupt
and sharp margins. This also is the case to the east from
the Sisters Islands and at a place further south, where pro-
nounced irregularities have been located and where rocks
protrude.

The survey work of the " Endeavour," as will be seen, has
furnished a considerable amount of additional data in refer-
ence to the Continental Shelf of the East Coast, and while it
remains for the expert geologist to explain, if possible, the
peculiar conditions mentioned, it may here be of interest to
summarise the seemingly most important features.

The tendency to subdivision into an inner and outer
section can hardly be accidental, but will probably be found
to be due to one or all of the three following causes — currents,
wave action, and elevation or depression of the Continent.
The work of the " Endeavour " has furnished a considerable
amount of data since the shelf was last discussed, and it is
of interest in the light of the additional information to review
the situation. After discussing two cross sections of the shelf,
one oft' Sydney and the other off Ulladulla, or about one
hundred miles further south, Mr. C. Hedley1 came to the
conclusion that the shelf is being produced by eroded matter
from the coast being carried seawards and tipped over the
outer edge by the current ; he concludes that as in the two
cases examined by him the outer edge must be soft and more
or less elevated above a solid foundation. The case, how-

1. Hedley, C. — The Submarine Slope of New South Wales — Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.8. Wales., xxxv., IfllO, pp. 12-17, pis. i. & ii.

342 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

ever, does not now appear as simple as that, for the edge of
the shelf is frequently found to be remarkably hard with
sharp and high rocks protruding. It is obvious that erosion
must take place particularly within the tidal range where the
greatest number of waves are at work, but erosion due partly
to friction must also occur down to whatever depth the wave
action may extend. It is common knowledge amongst
fishermen that the nature of the bottom may alter frequently
and quickly in depths of 30 and 40 fathoms as the result of
severe gales ; and in our own experience it has happened
that at a depth of 40 fathoms an area became unworkable
after a severe storm through the previously covered-up rocks
being temporarily exposed. Scottish crab fishermen will
frequently find a considerable proportion of their pots actually
smashed after a gale when fishing at a depth of 20 to 30
fathoms in the open sea, so there is no doubt as to the
efficiency of the waves at that depth. How far this action
may be traceable is hard to say, but as along the outer ledge
the fine deposits are in depths of 55 to 80 fathoms it may be
assumed the influence of the waves seldom reaches these
depths, if at all. The inner or shallow ledge down to perhaps
40 fathoms may be considered an excavation produced by
erosion and twisted by the sweeping currents produced
locally and temporarily by each succeeding gale. The surface
of this portion of the shelf is frequently hard, the bare and
ragged rocks being exposed, but at times extensive areas of
coarse sand are met with ; fine (and therefore more portable)
sediment is generally removed by the more constant currents
along the coast. The nature of these currents will shortly
be referred to ; at present it is sufficient to observe that from
the eastward a fairly strong stream strikes the Australian
coast about the latitude of Sandy Cape in Queensland. A
principal arm is diverted southwards along the coast, and is
instrumental not only in removing the fine deposits from
inshore, including river erosions, but has also an important
effect upon the formation and maintenance of the " outer
ledge." This, it will be remembered, is covered with fine silt,
mud and clay, in varying admixtures, and the stream flowing
parallel to the coast carries with it those sediments from a
northern origin to a southern destination. The south-flowing
current acts like a soft broom along the ^helf ; it is weak
enough along its inner margin to permit sediment deposition
in more than 60 fathoms, yet strong enough along the edge
of the bank to prevent excessive accumulation in that part.
Examination of this current has shown that it extends to a
depth of several hundred fathoms and is frequently accentu-
ated along the curvation of the edge, where for the first time

CONTINENTAL SHELF.— DANXEVIG. 343

it comes into contact with the submerged shoulder of the
continent. Very little shore deposit is in consequence allowed
to settle there, except, perhaps, in crevices and where eddies
are formed and all prominent points remain exposed.

From the Admiralty Charts it will be seen that the fine 60 to
80 fathoms deposit is practically absent until south from Smoky
Cape. In fact it is only southwards from Port Stephens that
these beds become prominent and constant. This locality is,
however, two hundred to three hundred miles south from
the mouth of such voluminous rivers as the Tweed, Richmond
and Clarence, each of which conveys enormous quantities of
fine silt into the ocean. Examination of the shelf opposite
these rivers shows that near land there is a bed of fine sand
which no doubt owes its origin to the rivers, but outside of
this is a broad stratum of gravelly bottom which cannot be
assumed to have traversed across the intermediate fine s«,nd.
This bed cannot in consequence be looked upon as in course
of formation (building up), but is maintained by the current
in a bare and exposed condition. While the heavy river sand
settles within a few miles of the land, the lighter silt
is carried southwards at an average rate of about fifty miles
a day. In this light it is easy to understand why practically
no silt is met with along the northern portion of the coast
as far as Sandy Cape, for the current, which afterwards
becomes changed with eroded debris from the rivers and the
coast generally, is as yet ' virgin," and bare on its first
contact with the continent. The Brisbane River brings down
quantities of fine sediment, but this is practically all deposited
in Moreton Bay, which acts as a huge settling tank to that
river. From Port Stephens southwards we meet with fine
deposits on the outer ledge in increasing quantities until
south from Gabo Island, where the final and largest eddy is
formed ; the accumulation of silt is proportionately very
great and extends for nearly thirty miles from land.

That the inshore ledge out to approximately 40 fathoms is
the direct result of wave and current action appears certain,
and the process must be constantly going on. This, however,
does not account for the existence of the outer and deeper
ledge, where at present no erosion takes place, but building
up may even be traced (as settlement of fine deposits — mud,
sand, etc.). It is evident also that the whole shelf is mainly
moulded on the rocky foundation, the uncvenness of which
frequently protrudes, particularly along the outer edge, and
may be traced to a depth of seven hundred fathoms.

The origin of the outer portion of the ledge cannot be
directly attributed to the action of wave or current except

344 " ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

in conjunction with still another factor. In many parts, but
particularly southwards from Port Jackson, the two ledges
are .separated by a fairly abrupt and rocky wall, and the
impression is conveyed that the outer ledge is similar to the
inner, excepting for the greater depth (and corresponding
difference of deposit). It may be conceived, therefore, that
the whole of the south-eastern portion of the Continent has
sunk to the extent of presenting the inner ledge as a relatively
new feature, while previously the other was shallow enough
to be under the influence of the eroding factors, or, in other
words, the present deep water ledge formerly constituted the
shallow area, and the dry land extended seawards to the
present line of demarcation between the two ledges. At
present there are indications of slight elevation of the eastern
portion of the Continent, but there is also evidence that
formerly the south-east portion was much higher than at
present. A geologist, Mr. Griffith Taylor, once informed me
that in the interior of Australia he had discovered extinct
river beds flowing westward as continuations of the existing
rivers of the western slope. After descending the mountains
these streams have now all been diverted in a southerly
direction and ultimately discharge into the Murray, whilst
formerly they evidently reached Lake Eyre and the South
Australian Gulf. A k' tilting " or depression of the south-
east corner would explain all this.

VIII.— BASS STRAIT.

BY

THE LATE H. C. DANNEVIG,

COMMONWEALTH DIRECTOR OF FISHERIES.

BASS STRAIT.— DANNEVIG. .'H7

VIII.— BASS STRAIT.

THE depression of the Continent, of Avhich evidence has here
been suggested, extends southwards, and accounts for the
existence of Bass Strait. That Tasmania at one period was
connected with the Australian coast appears now to be fully
acknowledged, for the evidence in support thereof has
gradually become so overwhelming as to leave no room for
doubt.

Serious consideration of this matter was probably in the
first instance prompted by the difficulty of explaining the
presence of the Aborigines in Tasmania from the circumstance
that these people were exceedingly primitive, and not
possessed of any apparent knowledge of boat construction.

In 1890 Mr. A. H. Lucas, before the Australasian Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science, drew attention to the
fact that in Victoria there is considerable dissimilarity between
the fauna north and south of the dividing range ; while in
1892 Prof. W. Baldwin Spencer recognised not only the im-
portance and validity of this demarcation, but also pointed
out that between the southern Victorian fauna and that of
Tasmania there is in many instances a very striking
similarity.1

Geological evidence, pointing in this direction, has from
time to time been furnished by various writers. Dr. A. W.
Howitt, amongst others, dealt fully with the matter in 1898,
and demonstrated that southern Victoria has suffered a
depression of at least two hundred and seventy feet within
recent geological times, and similar conclusions have been
arrived at in regard to the north coast of Tasmania. The
depression indicated was suggested to be slightly greater
than the present depth of Bass Strait, and the sea must,
under these conditions, have been excluded from the present
Bass Strait area. Howitt also published a contour map
showing the 50 fathom line and the 100 fathom line as
suggested by the present Admiralty Chart, and he indicated
the approximate appearance of Southern Victoria with
Tasmania connected. In this plan he indicated a line
running from Wilson Promontory across the eastern islands
to the north-east corner of Tasmania as the shallowest
continuous section (not more than 32 fathoms), and in further
discussion he also suggests that the indentation between Cape
Otway and King Island represents the locality where rivers
would have formerly discharged into the ocean. My own

1. The author did not add the bibliographical references to this, perhaps
after all. incomplete draft. The references to the literature of this subject
placed at the end have been supplied by Mr. C. Medley— EDITOR.

34S ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

investigations confirm this conclusion, and as will afterwards
be shown there is considerable evidence yet of the submerged
river beds.

It is of interest, however, to first consider some other
theories advanced ; the latest is by Dr. F. Noetling (11)10),
who has endeavoured to prove that in the central area between
Victoria and Tasmania there existed a very extensive inland
lake, which he considered was perfectly cut off from the
ocean by extensive barriers to the east and west. On
assumption of the gradually increasing water area, Dr.
Noetling constructed a series of diagrams showing the relation
between land and water in the Strait for every successive 5
fathom line from '20 to 50 fathoms ; but as this painstaking
work is based upon the Admiralty Chart, which, in many
instances, is too erratic for such detailed investigation, it is
not surprising that errors in detail have crept in. These are
mostly unimportant except in two principal points, viz. : (1)
that the maximum depth is wrong, and (2) that the doctor has
been led to connect a north-eastern extension from King
Island with Phillip Island and Western Port in Victoria, thus
establishing a western barrier across the strait in addition
to the eastern from Wilson Promontory. A freshwater lake
of great expanse is thereby created in the centre of Bass
Strait area, and for this there is no justification in the light
of the more recent surveys made by the " Endeavour," which
strongly point to a water passage along the Victorian side
westward into the ocean. Some years ago I commenced to
construct diagrams from the Bass Strait charts, but experience
obtained in the " Endeavour " soon made it apparent that
the chart soundings cannot, in many instances, be relied upon.
It is generally found that our soundings, and particularly
those under 35 fathoms, show a greater depth than indicated
in the charts ; also it is found that the undulations indicated
do not always exist. In explanation thereof it should be
remembered that the compilation of the chart soundings has
been a gradual process since the Strait was discovered, and
with the different methods employed at the various periods
some irregularities are sure to creep in. It is probable also
that some slight changes in the distribution, of the bottoms
may have taken place, so it is inadvisable to follow the details
of the Admiralty Chart too minutely. Di-.igramsi . .
are oased upon exact soundings taken by the " Endeavour.'
The figures have not yet been reduced to low water mark, but
as the maximum error would only be a few feet it is sufficient

1. The diagrams referred to are not forthcoming. It i.- possible Mr.
Dnnnevig had them with him at the time the vessel was lo.st. — EDITOR.

BASS STRAIT. — DANNEVIO. 349

for the present purpose to take the records as they stand.
The sections which are foreshortened surest that (1) in the
central area the bottom is very level and the slopes gentle,
an:l (2) that irregularities are most pronounced in places where
the waters are confined and tides strongest. Such localities
are to the north, west and south from King Island, where the
flood and ebb tides rush past at two to four knots per hour.
This great force is itself sufficient to carry away and displace
all portable material, such as silt and fine sand within moderate
depths, and the bottom is undulating and rough in those
parts. The heavy Southern Ocean rollers coming in from the
west contribute also considerably to this disturbance.

Another rough area is the Banks Strait, where on account
of the narrowness of the waters the Hood and ebb tides run
from four to five knots, and when opposing any sea cause a
great commotion that prevents any silting of anything but
the heaviest materials, including coarse sand.

On account of the close relationship between the nature of
the bottom and the tides, it is obvious that independent
currents will have a similar influence, proportionate to their
strength and continuity, and it has been necessary to study
the general water circulation within the Strait and immediate
surroundings in order to obtain an explanation to the present
distribution of the various deposits — the occurrence of
channels, basins and banks.

The flood tides enter Bass Strait from four points, viz.,
north and south past King Island, through Banks Strait, and
between the island groups situated between Flinders Island
and Wilson Promontory. The ebb pours out again through
the same channels. Bass Strait is consequently tha meeting
place of many waters apart from what rivers discharge into
it, and the water circulation is somewhat complex. For the
purpose of simplicity we may first consider the flood tides as
entering in the west and east. The former assume a north-
easterly direction on passing King Island, and the northern
branch pushes on past Cape Otway towards Port Phillip and
Western Port, where small arms enter various inlets. The
main body is swayed to the east and south-east towards the
centre of the Strait and is joined by the southern branch
entering between King Island and the Three Hummocks.

The flood from the east assumes a south-west course : a
small arm follows the Victorian coast westward in the direction
of Port Phillip, but the main body strikes for the north coast
of Tasmania, where it is joined by the waters coining through
Banks Strait.

350 "ENDEAVOUR" SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

It will be seen that the general meeting ground between
these two main tide waves is about the middle of the Strait,
approximately between Low Head in Tasmania and Cape
Schanck in Victoria. It should here be observed that while
the western flood inclines towards Victoria and enters the
northern section of the common meeting ground, the eastern
stream approaches the southern portion of the same neutral
ground, only from the opposite direction. Wherever these
streams reach this centre their waters are gradually forced
into a rotary movement, the direction being from we-;t
through north and east, or against the sun.

When later on the tide has ebbed sufficiently back through
the channels by which it entered, the li mound " of water in
the central area will simply flatten out ; no rotary movement
in the reverse direction has so far been observed in connection
with the ebb.

While the tidal streams come and go from east and west,
there are other causes which independently affect the water
circulation. The normal current within the eastern approaches
to Bass Strait flows from north-east to south-west and south.
It provides the waters which by the eastern flood tide was
pushed into the nearest section of the Strait, and in return
picks up the ebb tide and presses it southwards along the
east coast of Tasmania. In its southward passage the east
coast current may be said to sway to and fro at the mouth
of the Strait and without making any effort to penetrate the
Straits to any appreciable extent.

To the west from the Strait, however, the conditions are
different. Here a current from the Southern Ocean presses
against the southern coast of Victoria and King Island, and
although its greater volume is diverted to south-east and
south long before reaching land sufficient force remains to
establish a general " drift " through the Strait from west to
east. This current is in the open ocean accentuated by the
dominating westerly winds, and as this wind direction prevails
in the Strait to the extent of about 16,000 miles per annum
(Melbourne Observatory) its influence will make itself felt
also upon the local waters. Another factor of some conse-
quence is the powerful wave action associated with the
prevailing winds which materially assist in distributing the
deposits.

Ihe circumstances here related have left their mark upon
the physiography of the Straits in many respects.

Nature of the Bottom, Elevations and Depressions of the
Bottom. — As previously stated, the shelf to the west from

BASS STRAIT. DANNEVIG. 351

King Island and adjacent regions is rocky on account of the
strong currents and heavy seas, and the accumulation of
anything but coarse sand is prevented in the passage to the
south from King Island, where in most places the rocks are
laid bare. Eastwards from this entrance we find finer sand
(and shell) thrown forward like a ridge or bar, which in a
semicircle extends from King Island to Tasmania. A small
eddy is formed in the corner between Circular Head and the
Three Hummocks, where in consequence fine sand and mud
are met with, but the area is not great.

To the north from King Island the main body of water
enters the Strait in a north-easterly direction, and here also
do we find a central channel with rough bottom, where coarse
sand gradually replaces the outside rocky conditions. At
the north end of the island the flow of the waters is accentu-
ated and cut into the western edge of the bank, throwing the
sand eastward so that an extensive bank or shoal is met with
to the north-east and east from the island and extending far
into the Strait. The bottom here consists of moderately fine
sand and shell.

The channel mentioned continues first in the direction of
Port Phillip, with a gradually decreasing depth from 60 to
48 fathoms ; it then sweeps to the east past Western Port, and
following for some distance the contour of Victoria it ulti-
mately terminates in a central basin to the north from
Tasmania, where the depth ranges from 45 to 53 fathoms.
The surveys of the " Endeavour " suggest that the shallowest
portion at present of this channel is 44 or 45 fathoms (to the
south from Western Port). While, as explained, the strong
water currents will have a tendency to remove deposits
within their tracks, so will the more quiescent conditions
invite accumulation ; this, however, will also be proportionate
to the nature of the materials and distance from source of
supply. In the western section we find the relatively shallow
" tail " bank to the east and north-east from King Island, and
also, as mentioned, between the latter place and the Three
Hummocks. These accumulations being adjoining, the supply
froin the west consists mainly of the heaviest material, and
the nature of the sand becomes finer towards the centre of
the Strait, where the depth is also the greatest.

The central area of Bass Strait is now left for consideration.
The channel entering from the west along the Victorian coast
has already been referred to, and may readily be traversed
from the diagram. As far as can be ascertained the shallowest
portion of that channel is 44 to 45 fathoms, to the south from

352 ' ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Phillip Island, and the deepest 53 fathoms, sounded in many
places by the "Endeavour," particularly northwards from
the mouth of the Tamar River. From diagram .... it is
apparent this southern basin area was very wide and flat,
reminding one of low-lying marsh land of great extent, while
the channel towards the Victorian border had much steeper
grades laterally.

When also taking into consideration that subsequent to the
t; flood " a much greater amount of erosion has taken place
in the northern and western area than in the central area, it
may be assumed that the more confined river valley silted
up to a much greater extent than the southern basin, and
this will to a large extent account for the present disparity
in levels. But another factor may also be taken into account,
viz., as it is assumed that the general " dipping " of the
Continent has been in a south-east direction with a pivot or
hinge somewhere to the north-west, it follows that by such
a mode of depression the southern or Tasmanian section
would sink more than the northern or Victorian area. The
distance in a ,-outh-east direction from the north-western
shallowest bend of the channel to the deeper central area is
approximately one hundred and twenty miles, so that the
angle of depression in order to equalise the whole difference
would only amount to approximately 5' of arc, or at the rate
of 1 in 15,200.

There is certainly no support for Dr. Xoetling's suggestion
that a barrier approximately one hundred and fifty feet above
the level of the central basin extended between King Island
and Western Port, and consequently there is no evidence of
his lake.

On the contrary, we find that a number of rivers from North
Tasmania would converge towards a centre (as indicated by
Noetling), but instead of forming a gigantic lake they would
join with a magnificent river running to the north, north-west,
and west along the present coast of Victoria, and ultimately
enter the ocean somewhere to the east of Cape Otway. Into
this river, which might suitably be named the Tamar Major,
would also flow tributaries from the now extinct eastern and
western slopes of the Bass Strait basin, so the approximate
catchment area, extending from central Tasmania, in the
south and the Victorian Dividing Range (or further) in the
north, would cover more than 50.0OO square miles, producing
150,000 millions of cubic feet of water for a rainfall of only
one inch.

BASS STRAIT. DANNEVIG.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Spencer, W. Baldwin—

The Fauna and Zoological Relationships of Tasmania.—
Rep. Austr. Assoc. Adv. Sci., iv., (1892), 1893, pp. 82-124.

Lucas, A. H. S.—

On Some Facts in the Geographical Distribution of Land
and Freshwater Vertebrates in Victoria. — Proc. Roy. Soc.
Viet., ix., n. ser., 1897, pp. 34-53.

Howitt, A. W.-

On the Origin of the Aborigines of Tasmania and
Australia. — Rep. Austr. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vii., 1898, pp.
723-758, pi. xxxiii.

Hedley, C.-

The Effect of the Bassian Isthmus upon the existing
Marine Fauna ; A Study in Ancient Geography. — Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxviii., (1903), 1!HJ4, pp.' 876-883.

Noetling, F.~

The Antiquity of Man in Tasmania. — Proc. Roy. Soc.
Tasm. (1910), 1911, pp. 231-261, pis. i & ii.

Tillyard, R. J.-

Study of the Odonata of Tasmania in relation to the
Bassian Isthmus. — Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxviii.
(1913), 1914, pp. 765-778.

CONTENTS.

PART I. — PUBLISHED OTH JANUARY, 1915.

Page Plates

I. — Report on the Foraminifera and Ostracoda, obtained by
the F.I.S. " Endeavour " from the East Coast of
Tasmania, and off Cape Wiles, South Australia, by
Frederick Chapman . . . . . . . . . . 3. T-III

PART II.— PUBLISHED 30™ JANUARY, 1915.

II. — Report on the Algae dredged by the F.I.S. " Endeavour "

in Oyster Bay, Tasmania, by A. H. S. Lucas . . 55

III. — -Report on the Alcyonarians obtained by the F.I.S.
" Endeavour " on the Eastern and Southern Coasts
of Australia, Part I., by E. A. Briggs 61. IV.-XII.

PART III.— PUBLISHED 21sx APRIL, 1915.

IV. — -Report on some Fishes obtained by the F.I.S. " Endea-
vour " on the Coasts of Queensland, New South Wales,
Victoria, Tasmania, South and South-Western Aus-
tralia, Part III., by Allan R. McCuIloch . . . . 97. XIII.-

XXXVII.

PART IV.— PUBLISHED 24ra AUGUST, 1915.

V. — -Report on the Polychseta obtained by the F.I.S. " En-
deavour " on the Coasts of New South Wales, Vic-
toria, Tasmania, and South Australia, Part I., by

William H. Benham 173.

XXXVIII.-XLV.

PART V.— PUBLISHED 30bh SEPTEMBER, 1915.

VI. — Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great Austra-
lian Bight and other Localities. Part III., by W. M.

Bale 241.

XLVI.-XLVII.

358 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PART VI. — PUBLISHED ITiH SEPTEMBER, 1915.
VII. — The Continental Shelf of the East Coast of Australia, Page

by H. C. Dannevig 339

VIII.— Bass Strait, by H. C. Dannevig 347

PART VII.— PUBLISHED 1915.

Index, Title Page and Contents . . . . . . . . 357

OBITUARY NOTICES.— PUBLISHED 4rn JUNE, 1915.

H. C. Dannevig, by N. Lockycr . . . . . . . . iii.

G. W. C. Pirn, by R. Etheridge, Junr vii.

C. T. Harrisson, by C. Hedley x.

LIST OF THE CONTRIBUTORS.

With References and Catalogue Numbers.

Bale, W. M.- 59.371 (26.5 : 94.1-2).

Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great Australian Bight and
other Localities. Part III.

Zool. Res. End., in., 5, 1915.

Benham, William B.- 59.517 (94.2, 4-6).

Report on the Polychaeta obtained by the F.I.S. " Endeavour " on
the Coasts of New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, and South

Australia. Part I.

Zool. Res. End., in., 4, 1915.

Briggs, E. A.- 59.362(94.2-5).

Report on the Alcyonarians obtained by the F.I.S. " Endeavour " on
the Eastern and Southern Coasts of Australia. Part I.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 2, 1915.

Chapman, Frederick- 59.312. 59.533 (94.2,6^

Report on the Foraminifera and Ostracoda obtained by the F.I.S.
" Endeavour " from the East Coast of Tasmania, and off Cape
Wiles, South Australia.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 1, 1915.

Dannevig, H. C.- 550 (94.3-5).

The Continental Shelf of the East Coast of Australia.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., fi, 1915.

Dannevig, H. C.- 19 (26.5 : 94.5-6).

Bass Strait.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 6, 1915.

Etheridge, Robert, Junr.— 091. Pirn.

George William Charles Pirn.

Zool. He*. End., Hi., 1915.

360 ' ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

Hedley, Charles— 091. Harrissoiu

Charles Turnbull Harrisson.-

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 1915.

Lockyer, N.— 091. Dannevig.

Harakl Christian Dannevig.

Zool. RRS. End., Hi., 1915.

Lucas, A. H. S.- 589.3 (94.6).

Report on the Algae dredged by the F.I.S. " Endeavour " in Oyster
Bay, Tasmania.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 2, 1915.

McCulloch, Allan R.— 59.7 (94.0).

Report on some Fishes obtained by the F.T.S. " Endeavour " on the
Coasts of Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania,
South and South-Western Australia. Part III.

Zool. Res. End., Hi., 8, 1915.

CORRECTIONS.

Vol. ii., Pt. ], page 10, sixth line from bottom, for " p. 459 " read " p. 403."
Vol. ii., Pt. 1, page 53, line 25 from top, for " fig. 4 " read " figs. 3-4."

Vol. ii., Pt. 4, page 172, line 21, for " Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin." read " Proc.
R. Phys. Soc. Edin."

Vol. iii., Pts. 1-6, front cover for "Biological Results" read "Zoological
Results."

INDEX.

PAGE

abietinoides, DYNAMBNA . . 277

abietinoides, SERTULARIA . . 278

abyssorum, CYTHEROPTERON 47
abyssorum var. wilesensis,

CYTHEROPTERON . . 47

ACABARIA gracillima . . 67

sp. . . . . . . 67

ACANTHIDIUM quadrispino-

sum . . . . 100

sp 100

acanthocarpa AGLAOPHENIA 313

ACANTHROPEGAS lancifer . . 106

sp 106

achanthocarpa (var.) divari-

cata, AGLAOPHENIA . . 313

aculeata, BULIMINA . . . . 18

aculeata, UVIGERINA . . 25

acutimargo, SPIROLOCTJLINA 6

adpressa, SERTULARELLA . . 290

adriatica, EUNICE . . . . 212

cequilateralis, GLOBIGERINA 26

a/finis, ARGILLCECEA . . 36

a/finis, CARANGUS . . . . 130

affinis CARANX . . . . 130

agardhii, SCABERIA . . . . 56

agglutinans, MILIOLINA . . 7

agglutinans, TEXTULARIA . . 15

AGLAIA meridionalis . . 34

obtusata . . . . 34

sp 34

(AGLAOPHENIA) ANISOCALYX

cupressina . . . . 319
AGLAOPHENIA bellis . . 319
billardi .. .. 316
brevicaulis . . . . 310
carinifera . . . . 318
crucialis . . . . 315
cupressina . . . . 319
dannevigi . . . . 318
decumbens . . . . 315
divaricate . . 309, 312
divaricata var. acan-
thocarpa . . . . 313
divaricata var. cysti-
fera .. ..314

PAGE

AGLAOPHENIA, divaricata

var. mccoyi , . 312

MacGillivrayi . . 319

macrocarpa . . . . 315
McCoyi .. ..312

megalocarpa . . . . 323

ramosa . . . . 310

sp 306

spicata . . . . 319

superba . . . . 324

tasmanica . . . . 317

tenuissima . . . . 322
(THECOCARPUS) ar-

mata .. . . 322
(THECOCARPUS) caly-

cifera .. '. . 323
(THECOCARPUS) tenu-
issima . . . . 322

ALCYONIUM (ERYTHROPO-

DIUM) membranaceum 63

sp 63

ALECTIS indica . . . . 140

sp 140

ALEPES kalla . . . . 139

Allmani (var.) Gayi, SERTU-

LARELLA . . . . 284

alternans, PLEUROSTOMELLA 19
altissimus, CARANX . . . . 134
AMIA aroubiensis . . . . 118
compressa . . . . 118
ellioti .. .. 119
fasciata . . 115, 117
fasciata subsp. arou-
biensis . . . . 118
fasciata subsp. com-
pressa . . . . 118
fasciata subsp. fas-
ciata . . . . 116
fasciata subsp. no-

vemfasciata . . 117
fasciata subsp. ste-

vensi . . . . 118

n igripes . . . . 119
novemfasciata 117, 118

quadrifasciata . . 120
robusta . . 117, 118

INDEX.

363

PAGE

AMIA, septemstriata .. 119

sp. . . . . 115

ammonoides, ANOMALIN A . . 31

AMPHILAPHIS plumacea . . 80

sp 80

AMPHIROA stelligera . . 57

AMPHISBETIA opercnlata . . 275

AMPHISILE cristata . . . . 105

scutata . . . . 105
nmpullacea (var.) asperiil-i,

UVIGERINA . . . . 25

ami/gdaloides, BAIRDIA . . 38

angular is, CLAVULINA . . 17

angulata, BAIRDIA . . . . 38
angulata (var) bicornis MILTO-

LINA . . . . . . 7

angulata, CRYPTOLARIA . . 251

angulata, MILIOLINA . . 7

angulosa, UVIGERINA . . 25

angusta, POLYMORPHINA . . 25

ANICELLA, sp . . . . 67
ANISOCALYX (AGLAOPHENIA)

cupressina . . . . 319

annulata, SERTULARELLA . . 284

ANOMALINA ammonoides . . 31

coronata . . . . 31

grosser ugosa . . . . 31

polymorpha . . . . 31

sp 31

antardica CYMODOCEA . . 55

ANTIGONIA rkomboidea .. Ill

rubiriuidti . . . . 113

sp Ill

apiculata (var.) elegantissimi

BULIMINA . . . . 18

APISTOPS calounilrn . . 160

sp 159

APISTITS caloundra . . . . 159

carinatus . . . . 160

macrolepidotus .. 160

marmoratus . . . . 161

sp 160

APOGON arnfurce .. .. 119

cooki . . . . . . 117

ellioti .. .. 119

fasciatus . . 116, 118

kiensis . . . . 120

monogramma . . 120

quadrifasciatus . . 120

septemstriatus .. 119

APRION, sp. . . . , . . 143

PAGE

APRION, virescens . . . . 143

arafurce, APOGON .. .. 119

araucana, DISCORBINA . . 28

arborea, TELESTO . . . . 90

arbor if nr mis, CRYPTOLARIA. . 248

arenarius, PLATYCEPHALUS 164

ARGILLCECIA a/finis . . 36

gracilior . . . . 36

sp 36

argt/reus, LEPIDOPUS . . 152
armata, AGLAOPHENIA

(THECOCARPUS) . . 322

armatus, CH^TODON . . 143

a r matus, ENOPLOSUS . . 143

nroubiensis, AMIA .. .. 118
aroubiensis (subsp.) fasciata

AMIA .. .. 118

ARTHROPHYCUS, sp. . . 55

articulata, CRISTELLARIA . . 24
asperula var. amputtacea,

UVIGERINA . . 25

a-iymmetrica, PLUMITLARIA . . 297

attenuata, PONTOCYPRIS . . 34

auricula, PULVINULINA .. 31

aurochs, CARANX . . . . 136

aurochs, CITULA . . . . 136

australasice, PRIMNOELLA . . 85

australasica, PTILONIA . . 57

austrah, SARCOPHYLLUM . . 93

australiensis, EUPOMPE . . 202

australiensis, LYSARETE . . 235

australiensis, SCALISETOSUS 200
australiensis, STATJROCE-

PHALUS . . . . 209

australiensis, STAURONEREIS 209

australis, MOPSEA . . . . 72

australis, PLUMARELLA . . 83

australis, SARCOPHYLLUM . . 93
australis var. tasmanica,

LOXOCONCHA . . 44

B

BAIRDIA amygdaloides . . 38

angulata . . . . 38

fusca . . . . . . 38

sp

villosa . . . . 39

woodwardiana . . 39

balei, HALECIUM . . . . 247

364

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PAGE

bassensis, EUNICE .. .. 219

BASS STRAIT . . . . 347

bellis, AGLAOFHENIA . . 3 ID
(BENTHODESMUS) LEPIDOPUS

elongates . . . . 153

BENTHODESMUS, sp. .. l.:>2

bertfieloti, DISCORBINA . . 28

BERYX decadactylus . . Ill

sp. ... ~ .. .. Ill

splendens . . . . Ill

beyrichi, BOLIVINA . . . . 19

biconcava, DISCORBINA . . 28

bicornis var. anr/itlata,

MILIOLINA . . . . 7

bicuspidata, LOBOSPIRA . . 56

BIFARINA limbata . . . . 19

porrecta . . . . 19

sp. .. 19

bil itt cata, LATIUS . . . . 14G

billardi, AGLAOPHENIA .. 316

BlLOCULINA bfililii. . . . . 5

depressa . . . . 5

depressa var. mitrr-

hyna . . . . 5

elotiffata . . . . 6

irregular is . . . . 6

lucernitln . . . . 6

sarsi . . . . . . 6

sp. . . . . . . 5

bipimtata, PLUMULARIA . . 319

birostrata, HALICOBNABIA . . 324

BOLIVINA beyrichi . . . . 19

nobilis . . . . 19

obsoleta .. .. 20

porrecta . . . . 19

pwictata . . . . 20

pygmcea . . . . 20

robvsta . . . . 20

sp 19

textilarioides . . 20

boops, CARANX . . . . 138

BRACHYSIPHON corbuliformis 14

sp. . . . . . . 14

bradii, BILOCULINA . . . . 5

brevicaitdata, TRYGON . . 102

brevicaiidatus, DASYATIS . . 102

brevicaudatus, DASYBATUS.. 102

brevicaulis, AGLAOPHENIA . . 310

brevicetta, DYNAMENA . . 274

brevicella, SERTULARIA . . 275

bucculentus, CARRANGUS . . 126

bi(cc>ileiit>is, CARANX
buchinna, BULIMINA
BULIMINA aculeata

buchiana

elegantissima

elegantissima var.
seminuda . .

elegantissima var.
apiculata . .

itiflata

sp.

bitlloides, GLOBIGERINA
bulloides, SPHJEROIDINA
Iniskii, PLUMULARIA
BYTHOCYPRIS elongata

velifera
BYTHOCYTHERE retiolntn

sp.

ccemleopinnatus CARANX ,
calcarata var. contorta,

HEBELLA . .
calcarata, HEBELLA

calcarata, LAFOEA . .
calcarata, LAODICEA
calcycifera, AGLAOPHENIA
(THECOCARPUS)
CALICELLA fruticosa
CALIGORGIA flabellum

sp.
CALLOGORGIA fiabella

flabellum

verticillata

CALLOPHYLLIS coccinea
caloundra, APISTOPS
caloinidra, APISTUS . .
campanula, PLUMULARIA
CAMPANULARIA gracillima

margin ata

pvmila

simplex

sp.

tridentata

canaliculata, CYTHERB
canaliculata, SPIROLICULIA .
canariense, HAPLOPHRAG-

MIUM
canariensis, PULVINULINA .

PAGE

. 126
18
18
18
18

18

18
19
18
26
27

. 296
37
49
49

.37,49

136

253

, 251

251
251

323
. 255

. 85, 86
86
87
87
87

. 56

. 160

, 159

. 295

. 255

. 245

, 244

245

, 244

245

39

6

15

32

INDEX.

3(55

cancellata, CYTHERE
CANTHERINES mosaicns

sp.

capillaris, LAFOEA
CARANG gervaisi
CARANGOIDES ferdan
CARANGUS affinis . .

bucculentus

ignobilis
carinata var. expansa, COR-

NUSPIRA

carinata, SCORPJENA
carinata, SPIROPLECTA
carinata, TEXTULARIA
carinatus, APISTUS
carinifera, AGLAOPHENIA . .
CARANX altissimus . .

affinis

aurochs

hoops

bucculentus

cceruleopinnatus

cheverti

chrysophrys

cirrhosus

compressus . .

declivis

ferdau

gallus

georgianus

humerosus

ig >i obi I is

kalla

leptolepis

lesson ii

malabaricus

mala 7>i

mandibulariti

nigripinnis

nob Hi s

radiatus

rottleri

CASSIDULINA nurrhyna

subglobosa

caudata, PSEUDOCYTHERE . .
caudatus, LEPIDOPUS
celata, PLANISPIRINA
celata, SIGMOILINA
celata, SPIROLOCULINA

PAGE

40

170
170
255
138
125
130
126
126

12

1(50

16

16

1(50

318

134

130

136

138

126

136

129

136

134

132

125

125

140

126

137

126

139

129

12(5

136

131

140

131

127

132

139

125

20

20

21

50

152

11

10

10

CENTRISCUS cristatus

sculatit*

sp. . .
CENTROPHORUS harrissoni.

scalpratiLs

CENTROPHORUS, sp.
ceylonicn, HESIUNIC
CH^ETOUON annul /t*
CHAUNAX fimbriatus

pcnicillatus . .

r VIM-:

105
105

105

99
97
97
177
143
165
167
165
129
69
206
206
136
136
141
141
147

cheverti, CARANX
chinensis, PTERIA
CHLOEIA, *•;;.
CHLOEIS inermis
chrysophrys, CARANX
chrysophrys, CITULA
chrysotwnia, LUTIANTS
chrysotcenia, MESOPRION
ciliaris, LATRIS . . 146,
ciliata. var. crucicila NEMER-

TESIA . . . . 300

ciliata, NEMERTESIA . . 298
circular is (var.) dorsata,

SPIROLOCULINA . . 7

circulates, MlLlOLlNA . . 8

cirrhosus, CARANX . . . . 134

CITULA aurochs . . . . 136

chrysophrys . . . . 136

CLADOCARPELLA multiseptata 304

ftp 303

clathrata, ROTALIA . . . . 32

CLATHROZOON, sp. . . . . 244

vilsoni . . . . 244

clavigcru, MORPSELLA . . 64

CLAVULINTA angularis .. 17

cylindrica . . . . 17

parisiensis . . . . 17

sp 17

te.rtttl/irioidea . . 17

coccinea, CALLOPHYLLIS . . 56

coccoidi-x. ( 'YTIHOROPTERON . . 47

Coi'ii .M lomciitoxum. . .. 55

connnitnix, POLVMOUPIIINA . . 25

AMIA .. .. 118
(subsji.) fasciata

AMU .. .. 118
compressiuscula (var.) pajiil-

IOS(I III ITALIA . . 33

(omprcssiifi, CAIIANX .. 132

concava, TEXTII.\I;I\ .. 15

366

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PACi K

concentrica, PULVINULINA . . 32
conoorta, CYLHESE . . . . 50
CONTINENTAL SHELF OF THE
EAST COAST OF AUS-
TRALIA . . . . 339
contorta (var.) calcarata,

HEBELLA . . . . 253

contorta, HEBELLA . . . . 253

contorta, QUINQUELOCULINA 8

contorta, MILIOLINA . . 8

contortus, SCLEROCHILUS . . 50

cooki, APOGON . . . . 117

CORALLINA cuvieri . . . . 57

pilifera, . . . . 57
corbuliformis, BRACHYSI-

PHON . . . . 14

cordyla, MEGALASPIS . . 139
CORNUSPIRA carinnta var.

expansa . . . . 12

crassisepta . . . . 12

involvens . . . . 12

sp 12

coronata, ANOMALINA . . 31

corrugata, RATELLINA . . 28

costata, MARGINULINA . . 23

costatum, PLOCAMIUM . . 5(5

crassa, PTTLVINULINA . . 32

crassisepta, CORNUSPIRA . . 12

cricoides, SERTULARELLA . . 284

crinis, SERTULARIA . . 275

crinoidea, SERTULARIA . . 270

crispa, POLYSTOMELLA . . 33

crispnta, CYTHERE . . . . 40

cristata, AMPHISILE. . .. 105

cristatus, CENTRISCUS . . 105

CRISTELLARIA articulata . . 24

cultratn .. .. 24

orbicular is . . . . 24

protosphaera . . . . 24

rotulata . . . . 24

schloenbachi . . . . 24

sp. 24

tricarinella . . . . 24

crucialis, AGLAOPHENIA . . 315
cruciata (var.) ciliata NEMER-

TESIA . . . . 300

CRYPOLARIA angulata . . 251

arboriformis . . . . 248

exserta . . . . 247

sp 248

cryptifera, CYTHERURA . . 4fi

PAGE

CTENOCELLA pectinata . . 88

sp 88

culler, TRUNCATULINA . . 29

cultrata, CRISTELLARIA . . 24

cupressina, AGLAOPHENIA . . 319
cupressina, ANISOCALYX

(AGLAOPHEXIA) . . 319

cuvieri, CORALLINA . . . . 57

cuvierina, MILIOLINA . . 8

CYLHESE conoorta. . . . . 50

cylindrica, CLAVULINA . . 17
cylindrica, HEBELLA 251, 254

cylindrica, LAFOEA . . . . 254

cylindrica, MARSIPELLA .. 13

CYMODOCEA antarctica . . 55
cystifera (var.) divaricata,

AGLAOPHENIA . . 314

CYSTOPHORA grevillei . . 56

uvifera . . . . 56

CYTHERE canaliculata . . 39

cancellata . . . . 40

crispnta . . . . 40

cytheropteroidea . . 40

detlivis . . . . 43

diet/ton . . . . 41

foveolata . . . . 4]

impluta . . . . 41

hpralioides . . . . 42

parallelogramma . . 42

pectunculata . . . . 42

quadriaculeata . . 43

scabrocuneata . . 43

sp 39

sweeti . . . . 43

CYTHERIDEIS decora . . 37

cytkeropteroides, CYTHERE . . 40

CYTHEROPTERON abyssorum 47

abyssorvm var. wiles

ensis . . . . 47

coccoides . . . . 47

dannevigi . . . . 47

fimbriatum . . . . 48

sp. . . . . 47

CYTHERURA cryptifera . . 46

sp. . . . . 46

tenuicosta . . . . 46

D

DACTYLOPUS dacti/lopus . . 149

sp 149

INDEX.

307

PAGE

dannevigi, AGLAOPHENIA . . 318

dannevigi, CYTHEROPTERON 47

DASVATIS brevicaudatus . . 102

fluviorum . . . . 10.3

sp 102

DASYBATUS brevicaudatus . . 102

davidiana, XESTOLEBERIS . . 45

decadactylus, BERYX . . Ill

DECAPTERUS leptosomus . . 123

russdlii . . . . 139

sp 139

dedivis, CARANX . . . . 1 25

dedivis, CYTHERE . . . . 43

dedivis, EUCYTHERE . . 43

dedivis, TRACHURUS 123, 125

decora, CYTHERIDEIS . . 37

decora, MACROCYPRIS . . 37

decumbens, AGLAOPHENIA . . 315
(DENTALINA) NODOSARIA

pyrula . . . . 23

dentaliniformis, REOPHAX .. 14
denticulo-granulata, SPIRIT. -

LINA . . . . 27

diaphana, THUIARIA . . 288

dichotomn, Isis . . . . 70

dichotoma, MOPSEA . . 70, 72

dichotoma, SELAGINOPSIS . . 266

dichotomum, DICTYCLADIUM 266

DICTYCLADIUM dichotomum 266

dicyton, CYTHERE .. .. 41

DIPHASIA, sp. . . . . 264

subcarinata . . . . 264

DISCORBINA araucana . . 28

bertheloti .. .. 28

biconcava . . . . 28

orbicularis . . . . 29

rosacea . . . . 29

rugosa . . . . 29

sp 28

turbo 29

vilardeboana . . . . 29

distans, HYPOPYXIS . . 265
divaricata var. acanthocarpa,

AGLAOPHENIA .. 313
divaricata, AGLAOPHENIA 309, 312
divaricata var. cystifera,

AGLAOPHENIA .. 314
divaricata var. mccoyi,

AGLAOPHENIA .. 312

divaricata, PLUMULARIA . . 309

divaricata, SERTULARELLA . . 287

PAGE

depressa, BILOCULINA . . 5

depressa, HETEROSTEGINA 33
depressa var. murrhyna,

BILOCULINA . . 5

DESMOSCYPHUS orifissus . . 273
dorsata var. circular is,

SPIROLOCULINA . . 7

dnbia, GLOBIGERINA . . 26

dutertrei, GLOBIGERINA . . 26

DYNAMENA brevicella . . 274

fasciculata . . . . 275

operculata . . . . 275

pulchella . . . . 275

serra . . . . . , 274

turbinata . . . . 273

DYNAMEXE abietinoides 277

E

EAST COAST OF AUSTRALIA, :
CONTINENTAL SHELF OF

THE 339

ehlersi, HESIONE . . . . 177

EHRENBERGNIA serrata . . 21

sp 21

ELECTRONA rissoi . . . . 104

sp 104

elegans, GODEFFROYIA . . 92

elegans. HALICORNOPSIS . . 303

elegans, MOPSEA . . . . 74

elegans, PULVINULINA . . 32
elegantissima var. apiculata

BULIMINA .. 18

elegantissima, BULIMINA . . 18
elegantissima, POLYMOR-

PHINA . . . . 25

elegantissima var. semiinide

BULIMINA . . . . 18

ellioti, AMIA . . . . . . 119

ellioti, APOGON .. .. 119

elongata, BILOCULINA . . 6
dongata, BYTHOCYPRIS . . 37
elongata (var.) gayi, SERTU-
LARELLA . . . . 284

elongata, HYPERAMMINA . . 13

elongata, SERTULARIA . . 277

elongatiis, LEPIDOPUS . . 153
elongatus, LEPIDOPUS

(BENTHODESMUS). . 153

encrinula, Isis . . . . 71

368

ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

encrinulti, MOPSEA .
ENOPLOSUS armatus
serotinus

i

71
143
143
143

ir/t ite . . . . . . 143

(ERYTHROPODIUM) ALCYONII M

membranaceum . . 63

erythropterus, LUTIANUS . . 141

cri/throptei-iis, LUTJANUS . . 141

esperi, XIPHOCELLA . . 87
etheridgei, HARMOTHOE

(EUNOA) .. ..197

EUCYTHERE, declivis . . 43

sp 43

EUNICE adriatica . . . . 212

basse.nsis . . . . 219

pycnobranchiata . . 213

siciliensis . . . . 212

sp 212

tasnia . . . . 212
valida .. ..212
(EUNOA) HARMOTHOE

etheridgei . . . . 197

EUPOMPE australiensis . . 202

sp 202

e.rii/iia, PLANISPIBINA .. 11

ex.igua, PULVITSTULINA . . 32
expansa (var.) carinata,

CORNUSPIRA . . 12

exserta, CRYPTOLARIA . . 247

exserta, PERISIPHONIA . . 247

fasciata, AMIA .. 115, 117
fasciata subsp. arui'liirnsix

AMIA .. .. 118
fasciata subs]', compressa

AMIA .. .. 118
fasciata (subsp.) fatrinia,

AMIA . . . . 16
fasciata subsp. novemfasciatu

AMIA . . . . 117

fasciata subsp. stevensi, AMIA 118

fasciatus, APOGOTS .. 116, 118

I'lxi'iritUS, MULLUS .. .. 116

fasciculata, DYNAMENA . . 275

;< Kiln, CAI; \XGOIDES .. 125

ferdau, CARANX . . . . 125

(iabclla, CALLOGORGIA . . 87

PAGE

fiiicoldes, PLUMARELLA . . 82

/i/inila, PERISIPHONIA . . 247
filicula, ZYGOPHYLAX

(PERISIPHOXIA) . . 247

fimbriatum, CYTHEROPTERON 47

fimbriatus, CHAUNAX . . 165

firmament tim, TETRAODON 168

firmamentum, TETRODON . . 168

FISSURINA schlichti . . 22

flabdlum, CALIGORGIA . . 85, 86

fiabcllicm, CALLIGORGIA . . 87

flabellum, MOPSEA . . . . 73

flabellum, PRIMNOA. . .. 86

flnviorum, DASYATIS . . 103

flexile, HALECIUM . . . . 246

folium, TEXTULARIA . . 15

forsteri, LATRIDOPSIS . . 146

forsteri, LATRIS . . . . 146

foveolata, CYTHERE . . 41

fruticosa, CALICELLA . . 255

fruticosa, LAFOEA . . . . 255

fulviflamma, LUTIANUS . . 141
furcata var. intermedia,

HALICORNARIA .. 325

furcifera, REXEA . . . . 150

fusca, BAIRDIA . . . . 38

fusiformis, REOPHAX . . 15

G

\is, CARANX . . . . 140
yui<Jicftaii<1i, SERTULARELLA 280
gaudichaudi, SERTULARIA . . 280
Gayi var. Allmani, SERTU-
LARELLA . . . . 284
gayi var. elongata, SERTU-
LARELLA . . . . 284
gai/i var. robusta, SERTU-
LARELLA . . . . 284
gayi, SERTULARELLA . . 283
gayi, SERTULARIA . . . . 283
geminata, SERTULARIA . . 273
GEMPYLUS sola-ndri. . . . 150
georgianus, CARANX . . 126
gervaisi, CARANG . . . . 138
gillbanksii, TETRODEN . . 168
(GLANDULINA) RODOSARIA

Icevigata . . . . 22

rotundata . . . . 23

GLANDULINA, sp. . . , . 22

INDEX.

GLOBIGERIXA cequilateralis . .
bu I hides
dubia
dutertrei
inftata
rubra

triloba
GODEFFROYIA elegans

sp.

GORGOXELLA, pectinata
GORGOXIA pectinata

trichostemma

verticillarias
gracile, HALECIUM
gracilior, ARGILLCECIA
gracilis, LARGEXA
gracilis, MACROCYPRIS
gracilis, SYNTHECIUM
gracillima, ACABARIA
gracillima, CAMPAXULARIA . .

gracillima, LAFOEA
gracillima, PSILACABARIA . .
gramen, SPIROPLECTA
grande, SARCOPHYLLUM
grandisqnamas, PRIMNOELLA
grandis, SARCOPTILUS
grandis, SERIOLA
grata var. reticosa, SPIRO-

LOCULINA . .
grevillei, CYSTOPHORA
grosserugosa, ANOMALINA . .
GUADRYINA pupoides

rugosa

sp.
guleilmi, LUMBRICONEREIS

H

HABELLA scandens
HALECIUM balei

flexile

gracile

parvulum

sp.
HALICORXARIA birostrata . .

furcata var. intermedia

intermedia

sp

superba
tubulifera

PAGE

26
26
26
26
27
•2,1

3, 2<i

•21
0-2
92
88
88
91
8<i

246
36
21
37

209
67

255

255
07
16
93
86
93

121

7

56
31
16
16
16
227

HALICORNARIA, ur ce.nl iji-rn. .
n var. Kcnn-

251
247
24(i
246
246
246
324
325
325
323
324
324

veyic . .
HALICORNOPSIS </';/•(, ;v

sp .......

HAPLOPHRAGMTCTM c<r.inri-

PAGE

326

326
324
303

303

ense

sp.

HARMOTHOE (EUNOA) etln-r-
iil'jei . . . .

HARMOTHOE, sp. .. ..
harrissoni, CENTROPHORUS . .
hasivelli, OENOXE . . . .
HEBELLA calcnrata . . ..

calcarittit var. con-
torta .. . .

contorttt . . . .

cylindrica . . 251

scandens . . . .

sp. . . . . . .

hedleyi, LEPIDONOTUS . .
HELICOLENUS percoides . .
(HELICOLENUS) SCORP^ENA
percoides . . . .

sj>. . . . . . .

hendecacanthus, QUINQUA-
RIDS . . . .

HESIONE, ceylonica ..

ehltrxi . . . .

pacifica . . . .

sp .......

splendida . . . .

HETEROSTEGINA depressa . .

sp. .. ..

hippuris, Isis . . . .

HOLODORA, sp. .. ..
hiimeroxK*, (.'ARANX . .

httmili*, 'I'uiM ATULINA ..
hi/alina, TIIUIARIA . . . .
HYALINOECIA, sp. . . . .

tubicola . . . .
HYPERAMMINA elongata . .

ramosa . . . .

sp
HYPOPYXI.S distans

sp

ignobilis, CARANGUS

15
15

1!>7
197
99
230
251

253
253
, 254
254
251
181
158

159
158

144

177

177

177

177

177

33

33

68

207

137

29

288

225

225

13

13

3, 13
2ti5
265

126

370

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PAGE

PAGE

ignobilis, CARANX . .

126

lacunata, LARGENA

21

impluta, CYTHERE

41

loevigata, LARGENA . .

21

incequalis, SPIRILLINA

28

Icevigata, NODOSARIA (GLAN-

incisipinnis, NEOSEBASTES

155

DULINA)

22

inconstant, OPHTHALMIDIUM

11

laevis, PHYSALIDONOTUS . .

193

inermis, CHLOEIS

206

LA FOE A calcarata

251

indicn, ALECTIS

140

capillaris

255

indivisa, PLUMULARIA

295

cylindrica

254

indivisa, RHIZAMMINA

14

fruticosa

255

indivisa, SERTULARELLA

285

gracillima

255

inflata, BULIMINA

19

scandens

251

inflata, GLOBIGERINA

27

sp.

255

inornata, LATRIS

146

LAGE^A orbignyana

22

insignis, MILIOLINA
intermedia (var.) furcata

8

quadricostulata
lagenoides, LARGENA

22

22

HALICORNARIA

325

lalandi, SERIOLA

121

intermedia, HALICORNARIA. .

325

lancifer, ACANTHROPEGAS . .

106

intermedia, XESTOLEBERIS

45

lancifer, PARAPEGASUS

106

interrupta, UVIGERINA

26

lancifer, PEGASUS

106

involvens, CORNUSPIRA

12

LAODICEA calcarata

251

irregularis, BILOCULINA

6

LAOMEDEA simplex

245

Isis dichotomn

70

LARGENA gracilis

21

enerinula

71

lacunata

21

hippuris

68

Icevigata

21

sp.

68

lagenoides

22

schlichti

22

sp

21

J

squamosa

22

striata

22

JEANNERETTIA lobata

57

sulcata

22

johnii, LUTIANUS

142

lata, SERTULARELLA 287,

288

JORDANIDIA solandri

150

lata, THUIARIA

287

sp. ..

150

LATRIDOPSIS forsteri

146

sp.

146

LATRIS bilineata

146

K

ciliaris . . 146,

147

forsteri

146

kalla, ALEPES

139

inornata

146

kalla, CARANX

139

ramsayi

146

Iciensis, APOGON

120

Inxa, PLUMULARIA . .

295

KlRCHENPAUERIApror/Wfto. .

302

laxa, SERTULARIA

280

sp.

301

legumcn, TECHNITELLA

13

KOPHOBELEMNON schmeltzu

91

LEPIDONOTUS hedleyi

181

sp. . .

91

sp.

181

KRITHE producta

44

willeyi

183

sp.

44

LEPIDOPUS argyreus

152

(BENTHODESMUS)

elongatus . .

153

L

cav da t us

152

elongates

153

labiatvs, NOTOPYGOS

205

sp.

152

INDEX.

371

PAGE

lepralioides, CYTHERE

42

leptolepis, CARANX

129

leptosomus, DECAPTERUS . .

123

lessonii, CARANX

126

LEVINSENIA, sp.

260

LICTORELLA scandens

251

limbata, BIFARINA

19

limbata, SPIRILLINA

28

linneana, MILIOLINA

8

lobata, JEANNERETTIA

57

lobata, POLLEXFENIA

57

lobatula, TRUNCATULINA

29

LOBOSPIRA bicuspidata

56

loculosa, SERTULARIA

272

LOXOCONCHA australis var.

tasmanica . .

44

sp.

44

variolata

44

lucernula, BILOCULINA

6

LUMBRICONEREIS gulielmi . .

227

sp.

227

sphaerocephala

227

LUTTANUS chrysotcenia

141

erythropterus

141

fulviflamma

141

johnii. .

142

russelli

142

sp

141

LUTJANUS erythropterus

141

lycopodium, SERTULARIA . .

277

LYSARETE australiensis

235

sp

235

LYTOCARPUS ramosus

310

M

macella, POLYSTOMELLA

33

MacGillivrayi, AGLAOPHENIA

319

MacGillivrayi, PLUMULARIA

319

macrocarpa, AGLAOPHENIA . .

315

•macrocarpa SERTULARIA

277

MACROCYPRIS decora

37

gracilis

37

sp

37

MACROCYSTIS pyrifera

56

macrolepidotus, APISTUS . .

160

macrophthalmus, SCOMBER. .

150

macrura, NEPHTHYS

203

MACRURONUS novce-zelandice

110

sp

110

malabaricus, CARANX . .
malam, CARANX .. ..
malam, SELAR .. ..
mandibularis, CARANX . .
mandibularis, ULUA . .

maplfMonei, ODONTOTHECA
maplestonei, SERTULARIA . .
mnrginata, CAMPANULARIA. .
marginatus, THYROSCYPHUS
MARGINULINA costata . .

sp. . . . . . .

marmorata, PENTAROGE . .
marmoratus, APISTUS . .
MARSIPELLA cylindrica . .

sp .......

McCoyi, AGLAOPHENIA ..
mccoyi (var.) divnricut'i

AGLAOPHENIA ..
mediterranea, SERTULARELLA
MEGALASPIS cordyln . .

sp .......

megalocarpa, AGLAOPHENIA
MELIT^EA textiformis . .

MELITELLA textiformis . .
MELITHJEA textiformis . .
MELITODES, sp. . . . .

membranaceum, ALCYONIUM

(ERYTHROPODIUM)

meridionalis, AGLAIA . .

MESOPRION chrysotcenia ..

METAGONIOLITHON stelli-

gemm . . . .

micropus, THYRSITES . .
MILIOLINA agglutinans . .

angulata . . . .

bicornis var. angulata

con tor ta . . . .

citvieriann . . . .

insignia . . . .

linneaiifi . . . .

polygona . . . .

sp. . . . .

subrotunda . . . .

tricarinata . . . .

trigonula . . . .

undosa . . . .

venusta . . . .

millefoliiim, SERTULARIA
minima, ODONTOTHKCA
minima, SERTULARIA

PAGE

136

131

131

140

140

277

276

245

245

23

23

161

161

13

13

312

312

280

139

139

323

65

65

65

67

63

34

141

57
150

1

7

7

8

8

8

8

9

1

9

9

9

9

10

10

-17

269

269

372

" ENDEAVOUR "

SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

minhit'i var. tubat/ieca,

SERTULAKIA
MFXOUS, up. . .

versicolor . .
MOXACAXTHUS m-jsaicus
ni'iiini/rtiiiinta, APOGOX
M(ii'sic-\ a n.ft rails ..

dichotoma . .

i Irr/ans . .

( iii-riii nl'i . .

flfibellum . .

plinnacea . .

sp

verticillata .

u-liitelegaei .

MOPSELLA dnviijrra

sp. . . .

mosaic us, CAXTHERIXES ..
moscticux, MOXACAXTHUS ..
mucroiiata, NODOSARIA . .
Miillrri, SEFITCLARELLA ..
MULLUS fasciat/is .. ..

multisrptiitd, CLADOCARPELL
murrhyna (var.) depressa,

BlLOCULIXA . .

MYCTOPHUM rissoi .

N

nana, XESTOLEBERIS
nataiis, PARAPEGASUS
11111/111.1, PEGASUS . .
neglerta, SERTULARELLA
NEMERTESIA ciliata
NEMERTESIA ciliata var.
cruciata

sp

N EOSEB ASTES in cisipin n is
nigropunctatus
panda.

*!>

thetidis

NEPHTHYS macrura. .

sp.

trissophyllus

virigini
NEREIS tubicola

NlGELLASTRUM USIieoidfS .

PAGE

271
162
162
170
120
72

70, 72

74

71

73

7f>

77

70

71

75

M

64

65

170

170

23

286

116

A 304

104

46
110
110

287
298

300
298
155
157
154
153
154
203
203
203
203
225
274

PAGE

nigripes, AMIA .. .. 119
nigripinnis, CARANX .. 131

nigropunctatus, NEOSEBASTES 157
nob His, BOLTVINA . . . . 1J>
tiobilis, CARANX . . . . 127
NODOSARIA (DEXTALINA)

pi/rula . . . . 23

(GL.ANDTJLINA) Icevigata 22
(C)LANDULINA) rotu.nd.ata 23
mucronata . . . . 23
perversa . . . . 23

pro.rima . . . . 23

xcalaris var. separans 23

«p 22

NOXIONINA pompilioides . . 33

sp 33

umbilicatula . . . . 33
NORTHIA tubicola . . . . 225
notans, PEGASUS . . . . 106
NOTOCIRRUS sphaerocephata 227
NOTOPYGOS lab iat us . . 205

sp 205

novce-zelaudice. MACRURONUS 110
novoe-zelcmdioe, TRACHURUS 123
novemfasciata, AMIA 117,118

novemfasciata (subsp.) fasciata

AMIA .. .. 117

nurrhyna, CASSIDULINA . . 20
n/ussdorfensis, SPIROPLECTA 16
nutting i, PLUMULARIA . . 296

obhntja, POLYMORPHINA . . 25

obsoleta, BOLIVINA . . . . 20

obtusatn, AGLAIA . . . . 34

ociilnta, THALANESSA . . 201

ODONTOTHECA maplestonei 277

minima . . . . 269

operculata . . . . 275

OENONE haswelli . . . . 230

sp 230

ONUPHIS, tubicola . . . . 225

operculata, AMPHISBETIA . . 275

operculata, DYNAMENA . . 275

operculata, ODOXTOTHECA 275

operculata, SERTULARIA . . 274

OPHTHALMIDIUM inconstans 11

sp 3, 1 1

orbicularis, CRISTELLARIA . . 24

INDEX.

373

orbicularis, DISCORBINA
orbignyana, LARGEXA
ORBULINA, sp.
universa
orifissus, DESMOSCYPHUS

PAGE
29

22

27

27

273

pacifica, HESIONE .. .. 177

ptit>d/i, NEOSEBASTES . . 154

pandus, SEBASTES . . . . 154
papillosa var. compressiuscula,

ROTALIA . . . . 33

parallelogram/ma, CYTHERE 42

PARAPEGASUS lancijer . . 106

natans . . . . 110

sp 107

PARASCYPHUS simplex . . 245
parisicnsis, CLAVULINA .. 17
parvulum HALECIUM . . 24(1
patagonica, PULVINULINA . . 32
PATELLIXA corrugata . . 28
sp. .. . . 3, 28
paucibranchiatus, PHYSALI-
DONOTUS . . . . 190

pectinata, CTENOCELLA . . 88

pectinntn, GORGONELLA . . 88

pectinata, GORGONIA . . 88

prctinata, SciRPEARiA . . 89

pcctunculata, CYTHERE . . 42

PEGASUS lancijer . . . . 100

natans . . . . 110

notans . . . . 100

pe.nicillatus, CHAUNAX .. 107

PENTACEROS, sp. .. .. 144

PENTAROGE marmorata .. 161

sp. . . . . . . 161

percoides, HELICOLENUS . . 158
percoides, SCORP^ENA

(HELTCOLENUS) .. 159

percoides, SEBASTES . . 158

PERISIPHOKIA exserta . . 247

fili en l/i .. . . 247

sp 247

(PERISIPHONIA) ZYGOPHYLAX

filicula . . . . 247

perversa, NODOSARIA . . 23

PHYSALIDONOTUS laevis . . 193

paucibranchiatus .. 190

rugosus . . . . 189

PAGE

PHYSALIDONOTUS, ,«/>.

Inrritus

pict/t, SERTULARIA . .
pilifent, CORALLINA
PLANISPIRINA celata

exigua

sp.
PLATYCEPHALUS

1

platycirrus, xu^i^v/r,
PLEUROSTOMELLA alter natix
PLOCAMIUN coxtntinn
plumacea, AMPHILA mis
plum/tcea, MOPSEA
PLUMARELLA air'

filicoides

sp.

thefts
PLUMULARIA axym»trtric<t

bipin until

buskii

cam pa » H I/i

divaricata

intUvisa

laxa, . .

MacGillivr/iiji

intttiiigi

procumbens . .

ramosa

rubra

sp.

sulcata

torresia

zygocladia

POLLEXFENIA lobatd

polygona, MTLIOLINA
polygona, QUINQUELOCUI INA
polymorpha, ANOMALINA . .
POLYMORPHINA aligned

communis

elegantissitiin

oblonga

sp. ..
POLYNOE platycirrus

sp.

POLYSTOMELLA crix/HI

macella

sp.

polyzonias, SERTULARELLA
polyzonias, SERTULARIA 280,
pompilioides, NOMONINA . .

195

280

57

11

11

11

104

104

179

19

56

80

70

83

82

81

81

297

319

296

295

309

295

295

319

290

297

310

296

291

296

290

290

57

9

9

31

25

25

25

25

25

179

179

33

33

33

280

284

33

374

" ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PONTOCYPRIS attenuata . .

sp .......

snbreniformis . .

trigonella . . . .
porrecta, BIFARINA . . . .
porrecta, BOLIVINA . . . .
PRIACANTHUS, sp. . . ..

velabundus . . . .

PRIMNOA flabellum . . . .
PRIMNOELLA australasice . .

grand isquamis . .

sp .......

procera, PULVINULINA . .
procvmbcns, PLUMULARIA . .
productn, KIRCHENPAUERIA
produrtrt, KRITHE . . . .

protospliaera, CRISTELLARIA
proxima, NODOSARTA . .

PSEUDOCYTHERE caudata . .

,s7) .......

PSILACABARIA gracillima . .

sp. . . . .

PTERIA ckinensis . . . .
PTILONIA australasica . .
pulc.he.llu, DYNAMENA . .
pulcheUa, SERTULARIA . .
PULLENIA, sp. . . . .

sphceroides . . . .
PULVINULINA auricula ..

canariensis . . . .

concentrica . . . .

cra-tsa . . . .

clegans . . . .

e.rigua . . . .

patagonica . . . .

procera . . . .

repanda . . . .

sp .......

truncatulinoides . .
pumila, CAMPANULARIA . .
pumil'i, SERTULARIA ..

pumiloides, SERTTTLARIA . .
pun eta ta, BOLIVINA . .

pupoides, GIRADRYINA . .
pusilla, SERTULARIA . .

pycndbranchiata, EUNICE . .
pygnKca, BOLIVINA . .

III/I/UK* a. TRUNCATULINA ..
pyg-mcea, UVIGERINA . .

pyriftra, MACROCYSTIS . .

PAGE

34
34
35

35

19

19

114

114

8(5

85

86

83

32

297

302

44

24

23

50

50

67

07

69

57

275

275

27

27

31

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

3, 31

32

244

269

269

20

16

271

213

20

30

26

56

PAGE

pyrula, NODOSARIA (DENTA-

LINA) .. .. 23

Q

QUADRARIUS, Sp. . . 144

quadriaculata, CYTHERE . . 43

quadricostulata, LAROENA . . 22

quadrifasciata, AMIA . . 120

quadrifasciatus, APOGON . . 120

q/iadrilatera, TEXTULARIA . . 20
quadrispinoaum, ACANTHI-

DIUM . . . . 100

QUINQUARIUS hendecacanthus 144

sp 144

QUINQUELOCULIXA contorta 8

poli/gona . . . . 9

undosa 9

radiatus, CARANX . . . . 132

ramosa, AGLAOPHENIA . . 310

ramosa, HYPERAMMINA . . 13

ramosa, PLUMULARIA . . 310

ramosus, LYTOCARPUS .. 310

ramsayi, LATRIS . . . . 146

raoulii, SARGASSUM . . 55

raphanus, TECHNITELLA . . 13

regularis, STACHYODES . . 79

REOPHAX dentaliniformis . . 14

f us if or mis . . . . 15

scorpinsus . . . . 15

sp. . . . . . . 14

repanda, PULVINULINA . . 32

repens, MOPSEA . . . . 77

reticosa (var.) grata, SPIRO-

LOCULINA . . . . 7

reticulata, TRUNCATULINA . . 30

retiolata, BYTHOCYTHERE . . 49

REXEA furcifera .. .. 150

sp 150

RHABDOGONIUM, sp. . . 3

RHIZAMMINA indivisa . . 14

sp 14

rhomboidea, ANTIGONIA .. Ill

rissoi, ELECTRONA . . . . 104

rissoi, MYCTOPHUM • • 104

rissoi, SCOPELUS . . . . 104

INDEX.

375

PAGE

robusta, AMIA .. 117,118

robusta, BOLIVINA . . . . 20
robusta (var.) gayi, SERTU-

LAEELLA . . . . 284

rosacea, DISCORBINA . . 29

Rotalia CLATHRATA . . . . 32
ROTALIA papillosa var. com-

pressiuscula . . 33

soldanii . . • . 33

sp 32

rottleri, CARANX . . . . 139

rottleri, SCOMBER . . . . 139

rotulata, CRISTELLARIA . . 24
rotundata, NODOSARIA (GLAN-

DULINA) . . . . 23

rubicundn, ANTIGONIA .. 113

rubra, GLOBIGERINA . . 27

rubra, PLUMULARIA . . 296

rugosa, DISCORBINA . . 29

rugosa, GUADRYINA . . 16

rugosus, PHYSALIDONOTUS 189

russellii, DECAPTERUS . . 139

russelli, LUTIANUS . . . . 142

sagittula, SPIROPLECTA . . 16

SARCOFHYLLTTM australe . . 93

austral is . . . . 93

grande . . . . 93

'«;> 93

SARCOPTILUS grandis . . 93

SARGASSTTM raoitlii . . 55

undulatum . . . . 55

verruculosum . . 55

sarsi, BTLOCTJLIXA . . . . 6

SCABERIA fif/ardhii . . . . 56

scabrocuneata, CYTHERE . . 43

scalaris var. separans,

NODOSARIA . . 23

SCALISETOSUS aiixtnilirnsis 200

sp 200

scalprutus, CENTROPHORUS 97
scandens, HABELLA.. 251,254

scandens, LAFOEA . . . . 251

scandens, LICTORELLA . . 251

scandens, SERTULARIA . . 277
scandens (var.) urceolifera

HALICORNARIA . . 326

schlicltti, FISSUEINA . . 22

schlichti, LARGENA . .
schloenbachi, CRISTELLARIA
schlumbergeri, SIGMOTLINA
schmeltzii, KOPHOBELEMNON
schmeltzii, SCLEROBELEMNON
schreibersiana, VIRGULINA . .
SCIRPEARIA pectinata

sp.
SCLEROBELEMNON schmeltzii

SCLEROCHILUS COntOftlls

sp. ..
SCOMBER macropJithalmus . .

rottleri

SCOPELUS rissoi
SCORP^ENA carinnta

PAGE

22
24

11
91
91
19

89

88
91
50
50
lf,0
139
104
160

(HELICOLENUS) percoidis

scorpiums, REOPHAX
scutatn, AMPHISILE
scutatus, CENTRISCUS
SEBASTES, pandus . .

percoides

thetidis

SEBASTODES thetidis
SELAGINOPSIS dichotomo . .

sp.

SELAR malrnn
semimide (var.) eleganitissima

BULIMINA
separans (var.) scalaris,

NODOSARIA
septemstriata, AMIA . .
septemstriatus, APOGON
SERIOLA grandis

lalandi

simplex

sp.

serotintts, ENOPLOSUS
serra, DYNAMEXA
serra, SERTULARIA
serrata, EHRENBERGNI A
SERTTTLARELLA (idprcs.«ti . .

annvlata

cricoides

divaricata

gaudichaudi . .

CAYI var. AlXMANl.
anyi var. iloiignl"
gayi var.
indivisa

15

105
105
154
158
154
154
266
266
131

18

23
119
119
121
121
123
121
143
274
274

21
200
284
2H4
287
280
283
284

2S4
285

376

ENDEAVOUR " SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

.SERTULARELLA, lata

mediterranea

Mutteri

neglecta

polt/zonias

Sieboldi

solidula

Sonderi

sp.

speciosa

tasmanica

Torreyi

tridentata

trimucronata

undulata

variabilis . .
SERTULARTA abietinoides

brevicella

280

cnmfi
crinoidea
elongata
gaudichaudi . .
gayi . .
geminata
laxa . .
loculosn . •

lycopodium . .
macrocarpa . .
maplestonei . .

millefolium . .
minima

•minima var. tubatheca

operculata

picta . .

polyzonias

pulchella

pumila

pumiloides

pusilla

scandens

serra . .

sp. . .

tridentata

tubitheca

turbinata

unguinilata . .
usneoides

siciliensis, EUNICE . .
flieboldi, SERTULARELLA
SIGALION, sp.
sigmoidea, SIGMOILINA

PAGE

r, 288
280
286
•287
280
286
285
287
279
288
283

245

287

284

286

278

275

275

270

277

280

283

273

280

272

277

277

276

277

269

271

274

280

284

275

269

269

271

277

274

268

288

271

272

273

274

O JO

286
202

11

SIGMOILINA celata . .
schlumbergeri
sigmoidea

simplex, CAMPANULARIA . .
simplex, LAOMEDEA
simplex, PARASCYPHUS
simplex, SERIOLA
simplex, THYROSCYPHUS . .
sinuosa, THUIARIA . .
solandri, GEMPYLUS
solandri, JORDANIDIA
solandri, THYRSITES
soldanii, ROTALIA . .
solidula, SERTULARELLA . .
Sonderi, SERTULARELLA . .
speciosa, SERTULARELLA . .
sphaerocephala, LUMBRICO-

NEREIS

sphaerocephalla, NOTOCIRRUS
sphceroides, PULLENIA
SPH^EROIDINA bulloides

sp.
SPHEROIDES, sp.

tuber culijer us
spicata, AGLAOPHENIA
spinulosa, VERNEUILINA . .
SPIRILLINA denticulo-granu-

lata. .
incpqualis
limbata
sp. ..
vivipara

SPIROLOCULINA acutimargo
canaliculata
celata

dorsata var. circularis
grata var. reticosa .
sp.

SPIROPLECTA nussdorfensis .
carinata
gramen
sagittula
sp. . .

splenden*, BERYX . .
splendida, HESIONE
squamosa, LARGENA
STACHYODES regulari*
sp.
studeri

PAGE

10
11
11

3,10
245
245
245
123
245
279
150
150
. 150
, 33
, 285
. 287
. 288

227
227
27
27
27
168
168
319
15

27
28
28

3,27
28
6
6
10
7
7
6
16
16
16
16
16
111
177
22
79
79
79

INDEX.

377

PAGE

.STAUROCEPHALUS austrnli-

ensis .. . . 209

STAURONEREIS australiensis 209

sp 209

stelligera, AMPHIROA . . 57
stelligerum, METAGONTOLI-

THON . . . . 57
stevensi (subsp.) fasciatti,

AMIA .. .. 118

STRAIT, BASS . . . . 347

striata, LARGENA . . . . 22

stvderi, STACHYODES . . 79

subcarinata, DIPHASIA . . 264

subglobosa, CASSIDULINA . . 21

subreniformis, PONTOCYPRIS 35

subrotunda, MILIOLINA . . 9
subventricosum, SYNTHE-

CIUM . . . . 265

sulcnta, LARGENA . . . . 22

sulcata, PLUMULARIA . . 296

svperba, AGLAOPHENIA . . 324

superba, HALICORNARIA . . 324

sweeti, CYTHERE . . . . 43

SYNTHECIUM gracilis . . 269

sp 265

subventricosnm . . 265

.tcenia, EUNICE . . . . 212

tasmanica AGLAOPHENIA . . 317
tasmnnica (var.) australis

LOXOCONCHA . . 44

tasmanica, SERTULARELLA.. 283

TECHNITELLA legumen . . 13

raphanus . . . . 13

sp. . . . . . . 13

TELESTO arborea . . . . 90

sp 90

trichostemma . . 91

tenera, TRUNCATTJLINA . . 30

tenuicosta, CYTHERURA . . 46

tenuimargo, TRUNCATULINA 30

tenuissima, AGLAOPHENIA . . 322
tenuissima, AGLAOPHENIA

(THECOCARPUS) . . 322

TETRAODON firmamentvm . . 168

sp 168

TETRODON firmamentum . . 168

gillbanksii . . . . 108

textiformis, MELITJEA . . 65

textiformis, MELITELLA . . 65

textiformis, MELITH/EA
textiformis, MOPSELLA
textilarioideft, BOLIVIXA
TEXTULARIA agglutinans
carinata . .

folium . .

quadrilatera . .

sp. . . . .

trochus . .

textitlarioidea, C'LAVULINA
THALANESSA oculnta

sp

PAGE

65
(i."i
20
15
16
15
15
20
15
15
17
201
201

(THECOCARPUS) AGLAOPHENIA

armata . . . . 322

calycifera . . . . 323

tenuissima . . . . 322

thetidis, NEOSEBASTES . . 154

thetidis, SEBASTES . . . . 154

thetidis, SEBASTODES .. 154

thetis, PLUMARELLA . . 81

THUIARIA diaphana . . 288

hyalina .. . . 288

lata 287

sinitosa . . . . 279

sp 279

THYROSCYPHUS marginatus 245

simplex . . . . 245

sp. 245

tridentatus . . . . 245

THYRSITES micropus . . 150

solandri . . . . 150

tomcntosum, CODIUM . . 55

torresia, PLUMULARIA . . 296

Torreyi, SERTULARELLA . . 288

TRACHURUS dedivis 123, 125

novoe-zelandice . . 123

sp 123

trachuriis . . . . 123

tricarinata, MILIOLINA . . 9

tricarinella, CRISTELLARIA . . 24

trichostemma, GORGONIA . . 91

trichostemma. TELESTO . . 91

tridentata, CAMPNULARIA . . 245

tridentnta, SERTULARELLA . . 245

tridentata, SERTULARIA . . 288

tridrntaitts, THYROSCYPHUS 245

trigoncUa. PONTOCYPRIS . . 35

trigonnla, MILIOLINA .. 9

trilobn, GLOBIGERIN \ 27

trimvcronnta, SERTULARELLA 287

378

ENDEAVOUR SCIENTIFIC RESULTS.

PAGE

trissophyllus, NEPHTHYS . . 203

trochus, TEXTULARIA . . 15

TRUNCATULIXA culler . . 29

fiumilis . . . . 29

lobatula . . .. 29

pyrjmcea . . . . 30

reticulata . . . . 30

sp 29

tenera. . . . . . 30

tenuimargo . . . . 30

ungeriana . . . . 30

variabilis . . . . 30

wuellerstorfi . . . . 30

truncat/ilinoides, PULVINU-

LINA . . . . 32

TRYGON brevicaudata . . 102
tubatheca (var.) minima,

SERTULARIA . . 271

tuberculifcrus, SPHEROIDES. . 168

tubithecn, SERTULARIA . . 271

tubicola, HYALINOECIA . . 225

tubicola, NEREIS . . . . 225

tubicola, NORTHIA . . . . 225

tubicola, ONUPHIS . . . . 225

tubulifern, HALICORNARIA . . 324

turbinata, DYNAMENA . . 273

turbinata, SERTULARIA . . 272

turbo, DISCROBINA . . . . 29

turritus, PHYSALIDONOTUS. . 195

U

ULUA, mandibularis . . 140

sp 140

umbilicatula, NONIONINA . . 33

undosa, MILIOLINA . . . . 9

undosa, QUIXQUELOCULINA 9

SERTULARELLA . . 284

, SARGASSUM . . 55

unr/eriann, TRUNCATULINA.. 30

iiiir/inciilald. SERTULARIA . . 273

universa, ORBFLINA . . 27

itrceolifera, HALICORNARIA 326
urceolifera var. scandens,

HALICORNARIA . . 326

vsneoides, NICELLASTRUM 274

iixnroidrs. SERTULARIA . . 274

uvifera, CYSTOPHOKA .. 56
UVIGERINA aculeate/ . . 25
nngulosa . . . . 25
asperula var. ampul-
lace a, 25

UVIGERINA interrupta
pyrjmcea
sp

PAGE
26
26
25

valida, EUNICE .. .. 212

variabilis, SERTULARELLA . . 286

variabilis, TRUNCATULINA . . 30

variegata, XESTOLEBERIS . . 46

variolata, LOXOCONCHA . . 44

vegce, HALICORNARIA . . 324

velabundus, PRIACANTHUS . . 114

velifera, BYTHOCYPRIS . . 49

velifera, BYTHOCYTHERE . . 49

venusta, MILIOLINA . . 10

VERNEUILINA, sp. . . . . 15

spinulosa . . . . 15

verrucidosum, SARGASSUM . . 55

versicolor, MINOUS . . . . 162

verticillaris, GORGONIA . . 86

verticillata, CALLIGORGIA . . 87

verticillata, MOPSEA . . 71

vilardeboana. DISCORBINA . . 29

villosa, BAIRDIA . . . . 39

virescens, APRION . . . . 143

VIRGULINA schreibersiana . . 19

sp 19

virigini, NEPHTHYS. . .. 203

vivipara, SPIRILLANA . . 28

vulgaris, MILIOLINA . . 10

W

white, ENOPLOSUS .. .. 143

whiteleggei, MOPSEA . . 75

willeyi, LEPIDONOTUS .. 183

wilsoni. CLATHROZOON . . 244

woodwardiana, BAIRDIA . . 39

mielhrstorfi, TRUNCATULINA 30

XESTOLEBERIS daridiana . . 45

intermedia . . . . 45

nail a . . . . . . 46

sp. . . . . . . 45

variegata . . . . 46

XIPHOCELLA esperi . . 87

zygocladia, PLUMULARIA . . 296-
ZYGOPHYLAX (PERISIPHONIA)

filicula .. ..247

• . .

.-•